JP7136305B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some which are provided with a plurality of kinds of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and which aim to improve the interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained.

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a specific area where the game ball shot by the shooting means can reach, and a game ball reaching the specific area. A first ball entering means provided at a position where a ball can enter, a second ball entering means, and a first privilege given based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entering means. second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means; a first position where the game ball that has reached the area can enter the first ball-entering means and is difficult to enter the second ball-entering means; and a variable means that is variable to at least a second position at which the ball can be entered into the second ball-entering means, and a variable means that is variable to the first position based on the establishment of a first condition, variable control means for varying the position to the second position based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, wherein the variable means is composed of one variable member, and a predetermined A game ball that has reached the specific area in the game state of (1) is configured to be controllable so that it is difficult to enter either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the first The position is a position where the game ball that has reached it can flow down in the first direction to guide the game ball in the direction of the first ball entering means. It is a position where the game ball can be guided in the direction of the second ball entering means by flowing down in a second direction different from the first direction, and the variable member has a first surface and the first surface and a second surface different from the first position, wherein the first position is at least part of a path through which the first surface can guide the game ball in the direction of the first ball entering means and is a position where it is difficult for the game ball to contact the second surface, and the second position is such that the second surface causes the game ball to pass in the direction of the second ball entering means It is a position that constitutes at least part of a guidable path and is a position that makes it difficult for the game ball to contact the first surface .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there is a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a specific area where the game ball shot by the shooting means can reach, and a game ball that reaches the specific area can enter. a first ball-entering means, a second ball-entering means, and a first award granting a first privilege based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball-entering means. means, a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and a game that reaches the specific area. A first position where a ball can enter the first ball-entering means and is difficult to enter the second ball-entering means; a second position at which the ball-entering means is allowed to enter a ball; and a variable means capable of changing at least the ball-entering means; is variable control means for changing to the second position based on the establishment of a different second condition, the variable means is composed of one variable member, and in a predetermined game state, the The game ball reaching the specific area is configured to be controllable so that it is difficult to enter either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the first position is reached. It is a position where the game ball can be guided in the direction of the first ball entering means by causing the game ball to flow down in the first direction, and the second position is different from the first direction for the game ball that has reached. It is a position where the game ball can be guided in the direction of the second ball entering means by flowing down in the second direction, and the variable member has a first surface and a second surface different from the first surface. and the first position is a position where the first surface constitutes at least a part of a path capable of guiding a game ball in the direction of the first ball entering means It is a position where it is difficult for the game ball to contact the second surface, and the second position is the path where the second surface can guide the game ball in the direction of the second ball entering means. It is a position that constitutes at least a part and is a position where it is difficult for the game ball to contact the first surface .

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display area of the three-pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing. (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the continuous transformation production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the transformation is successful in the continuous transformation effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the transformation is successful in the continuous transformation effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the first embodiment. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when transformation fails in the continuous transformation effect displayed by the third symbol display device in FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the transition effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the change over time of the effect mode of the development effect. It is a diagram. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the effect mode when a variable display in which a continuous transformation effect is set is executed in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) schematically shows the contents of the variation pattern table for big hits (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and (d) is the specified contents of the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table. It is a figure shown typically. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. 2A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. . (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the transformation effect selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the development effect mode selection table in the first embodiment. It is a diagram. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing transformation setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing transformation effect start determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a flowchart by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the during-validity process performed. 7 is a flow chart showing processing during a success notification mode executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 7 is a flow chart showing processing during a failure notification mode that is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the process during transition production|presentation performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing number command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. 4 is a flowchart showing transformation effect-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 7 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment; 4(a) and 4(b) are diagrams schematically showing temporal changes in presentation modes when variable display is executed in which a continuous transformation presentation with a maximum number of transformations of 4 is set in the second embodiment; is. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the second embodiment; be. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a transformation effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice ramp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is the voice ramp control in the second embodiment. FIG. 10C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the development mode selection table set in the ROM of the device, (c) is the definition of the period selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment; It is the figure which showed the content typically. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation update process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a valid period process 2 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing during a display period performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment, (b) is a transformation propriety determination table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. 14 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing transformation setting processing 3 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a development mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the sound lamp in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a transformation propriety determination table set in the ROM of the control device, and FIG. d) is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a non-pressing tendency table in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a block diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing valid period processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing transformation setting processing 4 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of a search effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth embodiment. (a) is the effect in the fifth embodiment when a variable display in which a continuous transformation effect is set is executed while a player determined to have a low participation frequency in the continuous transformation effect is playing a game. FIG. 11B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the change over time of the mode, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of temporal changes in the effect mode when a variable display in which a continuous transformation effect is set is executed; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment, (b) is the effective period number set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment It is the figure which showed the specification content of the table typically. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a transformation effect start determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment, (b) is a flowchart in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing valid period processing 5 executed by the MPU; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing transformation setting processing 5 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing processing during the notification mode executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the process 5 during transition production|presentation performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a pressing tendency update process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the time-dependent change of the production|presentation aspect of transition production|presentation in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a front perspective view showing a case where the left specific winning hole in the sixth embodiment is in a state where a ball can be entered, and (b) is a right specific winning hole in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view showing a state in which the ball can be rolled; (a) is a top view of each movable member in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a top view of each movable member in a state where a movable member 650Rb is arranged at a projecting position in the sixth embodiment. and (c) is a top view of each movable member in a state where the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the projecting position in the sixth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment, (b) is the main control in the sixth embodiment It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the device. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the modification of 6th Embodiment. (a) is a top view of a moving member in a modified example of the sixth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the moving member in a modified example of the sixth embodiment, and (c) is a sixth embodiment. It is a side view of the moving member in the modification of a form, (d) is a front perspective view of the moving member 650b in the modification of 6th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the flowing direction of the game ball in a state in which the moving member and the left specific winning hole are close to each other in the modification of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a diagram showing the flowing direction of the game ball in a state in which the moving member and the right specific winning opening are close to each other. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. (a) is a front view of the variable probability winning device of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the variable probability winning device along the line XCIV-XCIV of FIG. 94(a). (a) is a diagram showing the flowing direction of the game ball when the opening pattern of the right V is determined in the seventh embodiment and the player hits to the left, and (b) and (c) are It is the figure which showed the flow-down direction of the game ball when the release pattern of the right V is determined in 7th Embodiment, and a player hits to the right. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the selection production|presentation performed by the 1st round of a jackpot in 7th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the movable position of each movable member when the opening pattern of the right V is set in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time in movable positions of respective movable members when an open pattern is set; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment, (b) is the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of, (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing winning processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing abnormality processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing close command processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows probability variable winning command processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a front perspective view of the movable member in the eighth embodiment, (b) is a front view of the movable member in the eighth embodiment, and (c) is the movable member in the eighth embodiment. It is a side view at the time of seeing from the front view left side. (a) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the movable member in the eighth embodiment is arranged at an intermediate position, and (b) is a state in which the movable member in the eighth embodiment is arranged at a projecting position; It is the front perspective view which showed the state. (a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the movable position when the movable member according to the eighth embodiment is moved according to the movable pattern A; is a diagram showing the change over time of the movable position when it is moved by . It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st winning classification selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the configuration of a rotating member in a modified example of the eighth embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing the flow path of a game ball hit to the right in the ninth embodiment for each movable position of the electric accessory. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment, (b) is a second winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of, (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 9 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a ninth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 9 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessary product operation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 9 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a front view of a detour accessory in the tenth embodiment; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during a big hit displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. (a) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the opening/closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment is closed, and (b) is a state in which the opening/closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment is opened. It is the front perspective view which showed the state in the middle of being set. (a) is a sectional view showing a state in which the opening/closing door of the right variable winning device in the eleventh embodiment is completely opened; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing a completely closed state; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the change over time of the state of the right specific winning opening when an opening pattern capable of winning a V prize is set in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing changes over time in the state of the right specific winning hole when an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize is set in the embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing in more detail the state of the opening/closing door during one open period when an open pattern capable of winning a V prize is set in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device at the start of one round of big wins in which an open pattern capable of winning a V prize is set. It is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of a probability variable winning device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed the time-dependent change of the movable member in the jackpot game in the modification of 7th Embodiment, and the state of each flow-path distribution valve. It is a front view of a modification of the game board in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of each movable member in a second modified example of the sixth embodiment; (a) is a top view of each movable member when a drive motor is driven in the forward direction in a second modification of the sixth embodiment; (b) is a second modification of the sixth embodiment; FIG. 10 is a top view of each movable member when the driving motor is driven in the negative direction in the modification of FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 12th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the direction of movement of the game ball when it is in a projecting overlapping state in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is movable first after it is in a projecting overlapping state in the twelfth embodiment FIG. 11C is a view showing the direction in which the game ball advances when the member is moved to the retracted position, and FIG. It is a diagram showing the traveling direction of the game ball in the case of. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the right-handed navigation effect executed during the jackpot interval period in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is during the jackpot round period in the twelfth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the accumulation|storage production|presentation performed when it becomes a hit of a normal design and it will be in a protrusion duplication state. It is the figure which showed the time-dependent change of the production|presentation aspect during execution of the jackpot game in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a sound ramp control device in a twelfth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing main processing 12 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 12 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the process 12 during a jackpot performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 12 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure opening command processing 12 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 12th embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing 12 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing state command processing 12 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view of a game board in a modified example of the twelfth embodiment; (a) is a diagram showing the flowing direction of the game ball during the jackpot round period in the modification of the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is during the normal symbol winning period in the modification of the twelfth embodiment. is a diagram showing the flowing direction of the game ball. (a) is a diagram showing the flowing direction of the game ball when only the electric accessory is arranged at the projecting position in the second modification of the twelfth embodiment; In the second modified example of the embodiment, it is a diagram showing the flowing direction of the game ball when it is in the projecting overlapping state.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) to be described later is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. manipulated.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages, a "sand beach stage" and a "deep sea stage." ing. Various effects such as variable effects and ready-to-reach effects that are performed when a ball enters the first ball hole 64 (starting winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the themes given to each stage. It is The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during high-speed variation. ”→“Beach stage”→…. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "sand beach stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super ready-to-win effect mode during the normal ready-to-win when the normal ready-to-win effect is started and the normal ready-to-win is to be developed into the super ready-to-win. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is being displayed, the content of the effect at the time of super ready-to-win is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. A ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower portion of the lower tray 50 when viewed from the front and is operated when the balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a first A ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general prize winning port 63, the first ball receiving port 64, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and screwed from the front side of the game board 13 by wood screws. etc. is fixed. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, and when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. pattern) will be drawn. In the lottery for the special pattern performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special pattern is a jackpot is determined, and when it is determined that the special pattern is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot. is also determined. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls are won). ), and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot type of the special pattern, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the special game state is finished, as an added value after the jackpot is finished, a game in accordance with these jackpot types is provided. (game value) is given to the player.

Also, when the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (eg, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has passed, A special symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed in the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and is also shown by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is performed and the variable display according to the lottery. is started. The specific prize winning opening 65 a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first ball entry opening 64 . Therefore, during the special game state, since the player hits the ball to win the specific winning hole 65a, many balls enter the first ball entering hole 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of held balls for the first ball entrance 64 becomes maximum (4 times).

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67, the success or failure determination of whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed. When the normal pattern is won, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. become easy. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. It is displayed and also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. be started.

As described above, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided as the jackpot types of special symbols.

When "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R jackpot). Further, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol variable probability) as an added value after the jackpot ends. This high-probability state of special symbols continues until the next big hit of special symbols. On the other hand, after the "jackpot B" is completed, the winning probability of the normal symbols is increased as an added value until the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times.

Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, the so-called special symbol probability state (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot ). On the other hand, if it is not a "special symbol high probability state", it is called a "special symbol low probability state", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of a special symbol, that is, the probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, the ``time saving state of normal symbols'' (during time saving of normal symbols) refers to a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and the ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64. - 特許庁On the other hand, when it is not ``time saving state of normal pattern'', it is called ``normal state of normal pattern'', which means that the probability of winning the normal pattern is normal (the probability is lower than during time saving).

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is common regardless of the type of jackpot, and depending on the type of jackpot, after the jackpot ends "High probability state of special symbols". Or it is changing whether it will be a "short-time state of normal patterns". On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the "time-saving state of normal symbols" is changed may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. In addition, as a time-saving state of normal symbols, the time for opening the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is lengthened, or the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened for one normal symbol is increased. Also good.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the special symbol performed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or the variation of the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. , the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicates the big win type (big win A, big win B) in the case of a big win. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) using this as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. be done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The third pattern (the first special pattern or the second special pattern) is composed of 10 types of special patterns imitating the numerals "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over.

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display.

Also, in the main display area Dm, a third symbol is stop-displayed on the activated line L1. When the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of big winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

In the pachinko machine 10, main symbols composed of odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "probability variation symbols". There is a possibility that the combination of the same probability variable symbols will be stopped and displayed when a "jackpot A", which is a 16R probability variable jackpot, occurs. Also, the main symbols composed of even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to the "normal symbols". When a "jackpot B", which is a 16R normal jackpot, occurs, the same combination of normal symbols is always stop-displayed. In addition, the same combination of normal symbols is stop-displayed even in some of the cases where the "jackpot A" is achieved. As a result, even when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to expect that a big hit A has been achieved.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above.

A small display area Dm4 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm4 is configured to allow the variable display of the third pattern to be displayed in a simple manner. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm4, for example, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character takes an action or an effect to prompt the user to press the frame button 22 is executed in the main display region Dm. is the case. During execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide a more comprehensible effect. Further, by simply displaying the variable display of the third pattern in the small display area Dm4 during execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to know that the variable display of the third pattern is continuing. can be understood.

As shown in FIG. 4A, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this secondary display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed. As described above, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls is set to 4, so a maximum of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is varied in correspondence with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of held balls may be displayed numerically.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, a continuous transformation effect, which is one type of display effect in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. The continuous transformation effect is a display effect that may be executed when a ready-to-win state occurs during variable display of the third symbol. Here, the ready-to-win state refers to a state in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed with main symbols consisting of the same number, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is being variably displayed. To improve a player's sense of expectation for a big win since a medium pattern row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a ready-to-win state so that the player can recognize that there is a possibility that three identical patterns are arranged. can be done.

The continuous transformation effect is a effect that is executed after the ready-to-win state occurs in order to further improve the player's expectation for the big win. A character 811 (see FIG. 5A) transforms 0 to n times (where n is a natural number equal to or greater than 1) in response to the passage of time or the player's operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 (the mode is changed). It is a production. In this continuous transformation effect, basically, the greater the number of transformations of the character 811, the higher the degree of expectation for a big win.

It should be noted that the maximum number of times of transformation in one continuous transformation effect (the effect type of the continuous transformation effect) is determined in advance before starting the continuous transformation effect. More specifically, any number of times from 1 to 5 is determined by lottery using a transformation effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 15(a)), which will be described later. This continuous transformation production is terminated when the predetermined upper limit number of transformations is successful, or when the production time set for each production type of the continuous transformation production is reached before reaching the upper limit number of times. be. In addition, in the first embodiment, the maximum number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect is determined by lottery using the transformation effect selection table 222b. In other words, although the configuration is such that the maximum number of transformations is determined according to the production type of the continuous transformation production, it is not limited to this, and any configuration that can determine the maximum number of transformations before the continuous transformation production is started. Just do it. Specifically, for example, the upper limit number of continuous transformation effects may be set according to the number of variations after the last big win is completed. In the case of a configuration in which the upper limit number of times increases as the number of fluctuations increases, the player can feel the merit of continuously failing in the lottery of the special symbols, so that the lottery of the special symbols can be performed many times in succession. Even if a state (so-called addiction) occurs, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from declining. In addition, in the case where the upper limit number of times increases as the number of fluctuations decreases, when a big win is won at short intervals (a so-called continuous state), merits other than winning a prize ball can be felt. Therefore, the player can be more entertained. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that the upper limit number of times increases in a specific range (for example, the range of the number of fluctuations of 100 to 200), the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the specific range can be improved.

FIG. 5(a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the transformation development mode indicating that the continuous transformation performance is started (develops into the continuous transformation performance) is displayed. be. As shown in FIG. 5(a), when the transformation development mode is displayed, a boy character 811 is displayed in the lower center of the main display area Dm, and above the character 811, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area is displayed. HR1 is displayed. In this display area HR1, there are displayed the characters "Continuous Transformation Chance" and the characters "The higher the number of transformations, the higher the expectation!". It should be noted that the “continuous transformation chance” is a production name indicating a continuous transformation production. These characters displayed in the display area HR1 make it possible for the player to easily understand that the continuous transformation chance (continuous transformation effect) will start. This transformation development mode continues to be displayed for 1 second, and when 1 second elapses, the continuous transformation performance is started.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), when the transformation development mode is displayed, a small display area Dm4 is formed in the upper right portion of the main display area Dm for simply displaying the variable display of the third symbol. be done. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display is being continued. This simple display of the third pattern continues during the continuous transformation effect and the subsequent effect time of the development effect.

In the continuous transformation effect that is set after the display time of the transformation development mode has elapsed, an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 1) is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5(b), a display area HR2 having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape is displayed to the left of the character 811 in the main display area Dm, and the frame button 22 is modeled inside the display area HR2. The pressed image (PUSH button PB) is displayed. Further, below the PUSH button PB in the display area HR2, a hatched scroll bar SB is displayed, the length of which becomes shorter as time elapses. This scroll bar SB indicates the remaining time of the operation valid period during which the operation on the frame button 22 is valid. In this embodiment, the operation valid period is set to 5 seconds, so the length of the scroll bar SB becomes 0 after 5 seconds from the start of the operation valid period. By displaying this scroll bar SB, the player can easily recognize the remaining time of the valid operation period.

In the present embodiment, the remaining time until the end of the valid period of operation is displayed (indicated) by the length of the scroll bar SB, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the remaining number of seconds may be displayed as a number and counted down as time elapses, so that the player can recognize the remaining operation effective period. In addition, for example, by changing the coloring of the PUSH button PB which imitates the frame button 22 according to the remaining operation effective period, the remaining time may be suggested to the player. Specifically, for example, when the remaining time is 4 seconds or more, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed in blue, and when the remaining time is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed. When the remaining time is 2 seconds or longer and less than 3 seconds, the color of the PUSH button PB is displayed in yellow. The color may be displayed in orange, and when the remaining time is less than 1 second, the color of the PUSH button PB may be displayed in red. Also, it is not necessary to indicate to the player the remaining time until the operation effective period ends. Since display control can be simplified by omitting the indication indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition to the display area HR2, on the right side of the character 811 when viewed from the front, there is displayed a balloon-shaped display area HR3 with the words "PUSH to transform!" The display contents of these display areas HR2 and HR3 make the player aware that there is a possibility that the character 811 will transform (the mode of the character 811 will change) by pressing the frame button 22. can be done.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display area HR3, there is formed a display area HR4 having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape for indicating the total number of times the character 811 has transformed in the current continuous transformation effect. In this display area HR4, for example, as shown in FIG. This letter is updated according to the number of successful transformations. Specifically, when the character 811 has been successfully transformed once, the text is updated to "transformation x 1", and when the transformation is successful twice, the text is updated to be "transformation x 2". Similarly, when the number of transformations reaches 3, the characters are updated to "transformation x 3", and when the number of transformations reaches 4, the characters are updated to "transformation x 4", and the characters are transformed. When the number of times reaches 5, the text is updated to "transformation x 5 times". By checking the characters displayed in the display area HR4, the player can easily understand the number of transformations in the current continuous transformation effect.

FIG. 6(a) is a view showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the player presses the frame button 22 within the set operation validity period and the character 811 succeeds in transforming. be. As shown in FIG. 6A, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the valid operation period, the appearance of the PUSH button PB is changed in the display area HR2, and the valid operation period ends. . Also, the appearance of the character 811 is changed to, for example, the appearance of an adventurer holding a sword and a shield. Also, in the display area HR4, the character indicating the number of transformations is updated by adding 1 to it. FIG. 6A illustrates a case of updating to "transformation×1". This mode of informing that the transformation has been successful (success reporting mode) lasts for one second, and after the success reporting mode ends, the valid period of operation is set again. After that, the operation effective period and the success notification mode are repeated until the number of times of transformation reaches the upper limit or the performance period elapses.

On the other hand, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a case where the player does not press the frame button 22 within the set valid period and the transformation is successful. As shown in FIG. 6B, even if the frame button 22 is not pressed, the maximum number of transformations has not been reached and the effect time remains for a predetermined period or more (remaining variation time is is equal to or longer than the lower limit time), the success notification mode is executed with the expiration of the operation valid period as a trigger. Although the details will be described later, the predetermined lower limit time is defined in the transformation effect selection table 222b in association with the effect type (maximum number of transformations) of the continuous transformation effect.

When the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effective period, and when the frame button 22 is not pressed until the operation effective period elapses, the maximum number of transformations has not been reached and the remaining variation time has not yet reached. If it is longer than or equal to the predetermined lower limit time, the success notification mode is executed. However, in the present embodiment, when all the transformations are executed with the expiration of the operation valid period as a trigger, the length of the production period elapses before the maximum number of transformations (success notification mode) is executed. The production period is set so that it will be the same. In other words, the operation valid period is set so that the sum total of the operation valid period for the upper limit number of times (and the effect period for the success notification mode for the upper limit number of times) is longer than the effect period for the continuous transformation effect.

By configuring in this way, in each operation effective period set in one continuous transformation effect, if the frame button 22 is pressed and the character 811 is not transformed before the operation effective period elapses, the effect type It becomes impossible to execute the maximum number of transformations set for each. Also, the shorter the period from the start of the valid operation period to the pressing of the frame button 22, the earlier the start timing of the valid operation period to be set after that, so that the number of executable transformations can be increased. , can be increased within the range of the upper limit. Therefore, it is possible to force the player who wishes to perform the upper limit number of transformations (perform as many transformations as possible) to actively press the frame button 22 during each operation valid period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the continuous transformation effect. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation performance (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation level is originally high (the upper limit number of transformations is large). In this case, the performance period of the continuous transformation performance will end after a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, there is a case where the number of transformations ends with a small number of transformations due to the lapse of the performance period despite the continuous transformation performance with a large upper limit number of times (that is, the expectation of a big win is high). can be generated. As a result, even when the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big win can be enhanced.

FIG. 7(a) is a diagram showing an example of a case of transforming into a mode different from that of an adventurer in the success notification mode. The example of FIG. 7A illustrates a case where the character 811 transforms into a mode imitating a gunfighter when the number of transformations is the third. In the first embodiment, a plurality of modes are prepared according to the number of transformations, such as the mode imitating the gunman and the mode imitating the adventurer described above.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the manner in which the transformation is successful is fixed according to the number of transformations, but it is not limited to this. For example, the mode of the character 811 may be determined by lottery or the like each time the success notification mode is performed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the variations of the continuous transformation performance, so that the player's interest in the continuous transformation performance can be improved. In addition, when determining the mode of the success notification mode by lottery or the like, the mode that can be determined only in the case of the variable display of the special symbol jackpot or the case of the variable display of the special symbol jackpot will be easily determined. It is also possible to provide a mode, a mode that makes it easier to determine in the case of variable display that results in the deviation of the special symbol, or the like. By configuring in this way, not only the number of times of transformation but also the display mode of the character 811 when the transformation is successful can be focused on, and the game can be played during the continuous transformation effect.

FIG. 7(b) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when a mode (failure notification mode) for notifying that the transformation has failed is displayed in the continuous transformation effect. As shown in FIG. 7(b), when the transformation fails, the PUSH button PB in the display area HR2 is displayed split in half, and the character 811 is displayed with a disappointed expression. In addition, a display area HR5 is displayed on the upper right side of the character 811, in which the characters "End..." are displayed. These displays allow the player to recognize that the continuous transformation effect has ended (the number of transformations has been determined).

In addition, in the first embodiment, after the continuous transformation effect is completed, the process shifts to the development effect for informing whether or not the game is a big win. A plurality of types of development performance are provided, and one type of development performance is selected and executed according to the remaining variation time and whether or not the lottery for this special symbol is appropriate. Details of this development effect will be described with reference to FIGS.

First, FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing a display mode of a transition effect indicating transition from a continuous transformation effect to a development effect. As shown in FIG. 8A, when the transition effect is executed, an image of a character 811 and a monster 812 glaring at each other is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an image " A display area HR6 with characters "VS" is displayed. Also, the characters "Defeat the enemy!" are displayed in the display area HR1. With these display contents, the player can easily recognize that the character 811 defeats the enemy (that is, the monster 812) to win a big win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8(a), when the transition effect is executed, the display area HR7 is displayed below the monster 812. As shown in FIG. In this display area, one or a plurality of star marks indicating the degree of expectation of the development effect to be executed after the end of the transition effect is displayed. FIG. 8A illustrates a case where two stars are displayed. The number of asterisks is the same as the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect. Although omitted from the drawing, the mode of the monster 812 is also changed in conjunction with the number of stars (that is, in conjunction with the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect). That is, the larger the number of stars, the weaker the monster 812 is displayed (that is, the character 811 appears to be more likely to win). That is, the character 811 is displayed with an appearance that looks like it is easy for the character 811 to win. By configuring in this manner, the player can have the impression that the result of the continuous transformation effect (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) and the subsequent development effect are linked. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more easily understand that the number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) suggests the degree of expectation for a big win.

It should be noted that the length of the display period of this transition effect and the above-described failure notification mode (see FIG. 7B) is varied according to the remaining variation time at the time when the failure notification mode is executed. This is because the production period of each development production is fixed (any of 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds). This is because the period required until the effective period of operation of . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining variation time is determined at the timing when the operation valid period ends (that is, the timing at which the failure notification mode starts), and the development effect of the longest effect period that can be executed in the remaining variation time is selected. do. Then, the failure notification mode and the transition effect are executed using the difference period between the remaining variable time and the effect period of the selected development effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the variation of the performance time of the development performance, so that it is possible to reduce the volume of various data for displaying the development performance. In addition, by dynamically varying the display period of the failure notification mode and the transition effect according to the remaining variable time, there is no discrepancy between the remaining variable time at the start of the development effect and the effect time of the development effect. You can prevent it from happening. That is, if the remaining variation time becomes longer, the variation of the third symbol does not stop even though the development effect is completed, or conversely, if the effect period of the development effect becomes longer, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the development performance is not finished when the variation of the third symbol is finished. Therefore, it is possible to match the end timing of the development effect with the end timing of the variable display of the third pattern, so that the display effect without discomfort can be provided. It should be noted that no matter how many seconds the effect time of the transition effect is set, the mode shown in FIG. It is configured so as not to cause a large change in mode. That is, the image exemplified in FIG. 8A is displayed as a still image, or the character 811 and the character 812 only move their shoulders up and down periodically in accordance with their own breathing. take no special action). As a result, the display mode at the time of switching to the development performance can be made the same regardless of the execution period of the transition performance, so that when the transition performance is switched to the development performance, the player feels a sense of incongruity in appearance. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8(b), a description will be given of changes over time in the presentation mode of the development presentation. Here, in the first embodiment, 12 types of development effects, namely winning development effects A to F and losing development effects A to F, are provided. The hit/loss development effect A is a display effect whose effect period is 30 seconds, and the win/loss development effect B is a display effect whose effect period is 33 seconds. Likewise, the hit and miss development effects C to F are configured as display effects with effect periods of 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds, and 45 seconds, respectively. At the end of the last operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect, the development effect with the longest effect period within a range not exceeding the remaining variable time is selected.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), in the first embodiment, data of a display effect (base effect) that serves as a basis for executing the development effect is prepared. The original display effect (base effect) has a display period of 45 seconds. It is configured to be able to execute the development production of the period. In other words, the development effect is not prepared for each effect period, but the data of the development effect for each display period is generated using the data of one base effect. By configuring in this way, the data for executing the development effect can be reduced, so that the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), for the first three seconds of the base effect, the character 811 is zoomed. Then, for the next three seconds, an effect is executed in which the character 811 attacks the monster 812 . Next, a display mode in which the enemy monster 812 is zoomed is displayed for 3 seconds, and then a display mode in which the monster 812 attacks the character 811 is displayed for 3 seconds. After that, a display mode in which the face of the character 811 and the face of the monster 812 are zoomed is displayed for three seconds, and then the character 811 and the monster 812 fight fiercely against each other, and the victory or defeat of the battle. An effect informing (result) is displayed for 30 seconds. In this way, the base effect is roughly divided into five 3-second display modes and one 30-second display mode. By starting the display effect from the delimiter position of any one of these display modes, the development effect can be displayed without a sense of incongruity.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8(b), when the hit/lose development effect A is executed, by displaying the display mode for 30 seconds after 15 seconds have elapsed in the base effect, A development performance with a performance period of 30 seconds is executed. Similarly, when the hit/lose development effect B is executed, the display mode is displayed for 33 seconds after 12 seconds have passed in the base effect, and when the hit/lose development effect C is executed, the base effect is displayed. The display mode is displayed for 36 seconds after 9 seconds have elapsed in the presentation. In addition, when the hit/lose development effect D is executed, the display mode is displayed for 39 seconds after the lapse of 6 seconds in the base effect, and when the hit/lose development effect E is executed, the base effect is displayed. The display mode for 42 seconds after the lapse of 3 seconds in is displayed. On the other hand, when executing the hit/lose development effect F, the development effect for 45 seconds is executed by displaying the base effect from the beginning to the end.

As for the base effect, a plurality of display effects are prepared in addition to the mode of battling with the monster 812 described above. Based on which display effect the development effect is to be executed is determined by a lottery. In addition, for each original display effect, a mode for a big win and a mode for a win are prepared respectively.

Further, in the first embodiment, the base effect can be diverted even after execution of the continuous transformation effect. That is, after the ready-to-win state occurs, it is possible to notify whether or not a big win will be achieved by executing the base effect directly or via another advance notice effect without going through the continuous transformation effect. . As a result, it is possible to increase the versatility of the base effect, so it is possible to reduce the data necessary for executing the effect. In addition, even when the base performance is executed without going through the continuous transformation performance, the performance can be executed from the beginning or in the middle of the base performance according to the fluctuation time of the variable display to be executed. As a result, an effect using the base effect can be executed even for variable displays with different variable times.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the base effects for displaying the development effects are prepared, and the base effects are set with the number of the development effects that are good for separating the effects. Each delimiter is set so that the remaining performance time matches the performance time of each development performance. As a result, it is possible to provide a natural-looking display effect over the effect time of each development effect. In addition, by constructing a development performance with a plurality of different performance times from one original performance mode so that it can be executed, compared to the case where separate performance data is prepared for each type of development performance (performance time). , it is possible to reduce the data required to display each development effect. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, in the first embodiment, based on the base effect, a plurality of development effects with different effect times can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a display effect with a completely different display mode is executed according to the effect time of the development effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the development effects, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 9(a) and 9(b), the change over time of the display mode when the continuous transformation effect is set as the display effect will be specifically described. In FIGS. 9(a) and 9(b), description will be given by taking as an example a case in which a continuous transformation effect with an upper limit number of times of transformation being set to 3 times is set. First, FIG. 9(a) is a diagram showing time-measured changes in the effect mode when the player never presses the frame button 22 during execution of the continuous transformation effect.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the continuous transformation effect is set during the execution period of the variable effect (super reach) with a variable time of 60 seconds. In the variable display in which the continuous transformation effect is set, the variable display of the third pattern is executed in the main display area Dm for 10 seconds from the start of the variation (see FIG. 4(b)). Then, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the variation, the ready-to-win state occurs, and the transformation development mode (see FIG. 5(a)) that suggests to the player that it will develop into a continuous transformation effect lasts for 1 second. Is displayed.

After the display period of the transformation development effect has passed, an operation effective period corresponding to the first transformation is set. When the player does not press the frame button 22, this operation effective period lasts for 5 seconds (until 16 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation). Triggered by the expiration of the operation valid period, the first success notification mode is displayed. This success notification mode continues for 1 second, and when 1 second has elapsed (17 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the success notification mode ends, and the operation effective period corresponding to the second transformation is set. be. If the frame button 22 is not pressed, the valid period of the second operation also continues for 5 seconds (over 17 to 22 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Then, after the one-second success notification mode is set, the effective period of the third operation is set. If the frame button 22 is not operated, the effective period of the third operation also lasts for 5 seconds (23 seconds to 28 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Then, at the timing of 28 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (remaining fluctuation time is 32 seconds) when the operation effective period ends, the remaining fluctuation time is short (the remaining fluctuation time is less than 38 seconds, which is set as the lower limit). ), and even if the upper limit number of transformations has not been reached, the failure notification mode for one second is set. That is, although the upper limit number of times of transformation is set to 3 times, the continuous transformation effect ends when the number of times of transformation is 2 times.

It should be noted that the conditions for determining whether or not there is sufficient rendering time left to set the success notification mode are defined by a transformation rendering selection table 222b (see FIG. 15(a)), which will be described later. Specifically, according to the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (that is, according to the effect type of the continuous transformation effect), the lower limit (threshold) of the remaining fluctuation time for which the success notification mode can be set is defined. there is When the valid operation period ends while the remaining variable time exceeds the lower limit value, a success notification mode is set on the condition that the upper limit number of times of transformation is not reached. On the other hand, when the operation effective period ends after the remaining variation time becomes less than the lower limit value, the failure notification mode is set regardless of whether the upper limit number of transformations has been reached.

Next, referring to FIG. 9(b), a continuous transformation effect is set in which the upper limit number of times of transformation is 3, and the effect state over time when the player actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period. Describe the change.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), when it is detected that the player presses the frame button 22 after 1 second has passed (12 seconds after the start of the change) in the operation valid period corresponding to the first transformation, The effective period of operation is terminated, and the first successful notification mode is displayed. When one second, which is the display period of the success notification mode, elapses, an operation effective period corresponding to the second transformation is set (at 13 seconds from the start of fluctuation). In this second valid period of operation, when 1 second has passed (at 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation), if it is detected that the frame button 22 is pressed again, the valid period of operation is similarly terminated and the second operation is performed. is displayed. Then, when one second, which is the display period of the success notification mode, elapses (at 15 seconds from the start of fluctuation), the effective period of the third operation is set. When the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the valid period of the third operation (17 seconds after the start of variation), the remaining variation time is sufficient (43 seconds). Since it remains, the mode of notifying success of the third time is displayed. After that, when the display period of the third successful notification mode has elapsed, the valid period of the fourth operation is set. In this fourth operation valid period, when 2 seconds have passed (at 20 seconds from the start of the variation), if pressing of the frame button 22 is detected again, the upper limit number of transformations for this continuous transformation effect has already been reached. Since it has already been executed, the failure notification mode is set.

The display period of the failure notification mode (and the transition performance after the failure notification mode) is determined based on the difference between the remaining variable time of 40 seconds and the performance time of the development performance executed after the transition performance. As described above, as the type of development effect, the type with the longest effect time within a range not exceeding the remaining variable time is selected. When the remaining variation time is 40 seconds, considering the failure notification mode and the shortest display period of 2 seconds for the transition effect, the maximum 38 seconds can be used for the development effect. However, as described above, only 6 types of presentation time of 30 seconds, 33 seconds, 36 seconds, 39 seconds, 42 seconds and 45 seconds are prepared for the development presentation. Therefore, the development effect (development effect C) of 36 seconds whose effect period is shorter than 38 seconds is set as the current development effect. Then, 4 seconds, which is the difference between 40 seconds, which is the remaining variation time, and 36 seconds, which is the effect period of the development effect C, is set as the display period of the failure notification mode and the transition effect. Specifically, 4 seconds is equally divided, and 2 seconds are each set as the display period of the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect.

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the difference between the remaining variable time and the production time of the development production is absorbed by the display period of the failure notification mode and the production period of the transition production, variations in the production time of the development production are provided. Even if there is a small amount of time, the timing of stopping the fluctuation and the end timing of the development performance can be matched with each other. As a result, it is possible to reduce the variation of the performance time of the development performance, so that it is possible to reduce the volume of various data for displaying the development performance. In addition, by dynamically varying the display period of the failure notification mode and the transition effect according to the remaining variable time, there is no discrepancy between the remaining variable time at the start of the development effect and the effect time of the development effect. You can prevent it from happening. That is, if the remaining variation time becomes longer, the variation of the third symbol does not stop even though the development effect is completed, or conversely, if the effect period of the development effect becomes longer, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the development performance is not finished when the variation of the third symbol is finished. Therefore, it is possible to match the end timing of the development effect with the end timing of the variable display of the third pattern, so that the display effect without discomfort can be provided.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), when it is time to start the failure notification mode when the remaining variation time is 40 seconds, the failure notification mode and transition effect are displayed for 2 seconds each. . After the end of the transition effect, the development effect C with the effect time of 36 seconds is executed. As a result, the timing at which the variation of the third symbol is stopped (the timing at which 60 seconds have passed since the start of variation) can be exactly matched with the end timing of the development effect.

As described above, the player positively presses the frame button 22 during the valid operation period, thereby shortening the valid operation period and displaying more success notification modes. That is, in the continuous transformation performance, it becomes easy to perform transformation up to the set upper limit number of transformations, so the degree of expectation of the transformation can be more accurately predicted from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can be made to press the frame button 22 positively, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be enhanced. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation performance (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation level is originally high (the upper limit number of transformations is large). In this case, the performance period of the continuous transformation performance will end after a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, there is a case where the number of transformations ends with a small number of transformations due to the lapse of the performance period despite the continuous transformation performance with a large upper limit number of times (that is, the expectation of a big win is high). can be generated. As a result, even when the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big win can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, by varying the display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect, it is possible to absorb the gap between the remaining variable time and the effect time of the development effect. , but not limited to these. For example, the effect period of the failure notification mode may be fixed and only the display time of the transition effect may be variable, or conversely, only the effect period of the failure notification mode may be variable. Further, the failure notification mode and the display period of the transition effect may be fixed, and the part of the effect period of the development effect (for example, the period in which the third symbol is displayed as a fixed display) may be variable.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery performed with the ball passing through the normal ball entrance 67 is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately lit. display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (“○” symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an actuated state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball can easily enter the first ball inlet 64 is achieved. The number of times the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times at maximum, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64, the maximum number of balls that pass through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, but may be three times or less, or five times or more ( For example, it may be set to 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular special prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first pattern display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 10). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 11(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the above fixed value data. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first winning random number counter C1, which will be described later, is stored. Although the details will be described later together with the description of the first winning random number counter C1, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning is one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table 202a. , it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 11(b)) is a data table that stores the determination value for determining the jackpot type, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 11(b)). In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot B (see 202b2 in FIG. 11(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 11(c)). In addition, in the high-probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are defined as determination values for winning normal symbols (see 202c2 in FIG. 11(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is displayed. It is determined whether it is a hit or not.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 13, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in synchronization with the timing of passing through any normal entrance (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 30).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the special symbol reserved ball in the RAM 203 is updated. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a first winning random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is If the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table matches, it is determined as the big win of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each game state are set in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, when the special symbol is in a probability variable state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 9" in the special symbol lottery. 9", it is determined to be a jackpot. Among the 400 possible values of ``0 to 399'' of the first winning random number counter C1, there are 10 judging values of ``0 to 9'' to be a big hit. The probability of becoming is 1/40 (10/400). In addition, when the special symbol is in a low probability state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "200", and if "200", it is determined to be a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of ``0 to 399'' of the first winning random number counter C1, the decision value for a big hit is only ``200'', so that the special symbol is in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of winning a jackpot is 1/400.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the random number value for the jackpot stored in the first winning random number table for the low probability time and the random number value for the jackpot stored in the first random number table for the high probability time. In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), the random number value for the big win is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the special symbol is reserved in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a deviation from the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode will be the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 11(b), in this first winning type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number is "0 to 49" is "jackpot A" (FIG. 11 (b) 202b1). Also, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" (see 202b2 in FIG. 11(c)). Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and rear" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. Stored in area 203a.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low-probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. table for is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12), which stores a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1, is stored in the main controller 110 as described above. It is provided in the ROM 202 .

Details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will now be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 12(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a large winning variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 12(b)) and a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 12(c) ) and a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 12(d)) are set at least.

First, with reference to FIG. 12(b), the big winning variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 12(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table that defines the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbols is a large winning. As the variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the big hit variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "51 to 179" is associated with various super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern, and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Selection is made from the big hit variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 12(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss in the low probability state of the special symbol. . If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79" in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is set to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is out. Set (front-to-back out-of-reach reach, front-to-back out-of-reach reach).

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, either a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long failure (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for the outlier reach, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" Normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range, "150 to 197" out of range Super reach (60 seconds), but "198" is set to a different special reach (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 12(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table 202d3. This loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the probability variation state of the special symbol. In this deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from that in the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , and in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach reach (front-rear out-of-reach reach, non-front-rear out-of-reach reach) is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 13, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 11(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the win is a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for when the probability of normal patterns is low (period in which normal patterns are normal), and when the probability of winning normal patterns is high than that of low probability (normal patterns) It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As described above with reference to FIG. 11(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 28" (FIG. 11(c) ) at 202c1). These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the first ball entrance 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. , the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of normal symbols is high, there are 200 random numbers for the jackpot of normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 204" (see 202c2 in FIG. 11(c)). These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display is performed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "o" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal pattern is high, the time of the variable display is extremely shortened from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of the normal pattern is low, and furthermore, the first entrance 64 is opened. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the first ball entrance 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 30).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 29) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

10, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a variable probability flag. 203e and a counter 203f during time saving.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), each of which has a first per random number counter C1. , the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area (moved), determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1-C3 is obtained according to the starting winning, the jackpot lottery of the original special symbols is immediately performed. Separately, from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3, various information obtained when the original lottery is conducted is predicted (estimated). In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) Prediction is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the prefetching is completed, a prize winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the success/failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a.

Like the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (first reservation area to second reservation area). 4 areas) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed to pack the data into a reserved area with an area number that is one smaller. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero. are added (see S404 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 23).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 23 and S405 in FIG. 25). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the holding ball of the variable display held by the main controller 110 You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d maximizes the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. (See S604 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 26).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S603 in FIG. 27: No).

The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability variation flag 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The variable probability flag 203e is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON at the end of the special symbol jackpot A (see S1014 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, if the lottery for special symbols results in a big win, the setting is set to OFF when setting the start of the big win (see S213 in FIG. 23).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if the state is ON, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per random number table for high probability, while the probability variation flag 203e is in the state. is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first winning random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 24).

The time-saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns, and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the time-saving medium counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203f during time saving is set to zero, and the lottery of special symbols is performed in the main controller 110, and the value is set to 100 at the end of the big win B every time the big win B is reached. (See S1013 in FIG. 31). In addition, regardless of the type of big win, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the big win.

When the lottery for the normal design is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203f and the state of the probability variation flag 203e are referred to, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, or the state of the probability variation flag 203e is on. If so, it is determined that it is during the time reduction of the normal pattern. In this case, based on the second winning random number table for high probability, a lottery for normal symbols is performed (see S509 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the state of the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is normally determined as the normal state of the design, and based on the second per random number table for low probability, A lottery for normal symbols is performed (see S510 in FIG. 26).

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving to the front side and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a is connected. Send a signal.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. First, FIG. 14A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 14(a), the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern table 222a, a transformation effect selection table 222b, and a development effect mode selection table 222c.

The variation pattern table 222a is used to specify the detailed display mode of the variation effect based on the rough display mode (variation time) of the variation effect selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 202d in the main controller 110. be done. More specifically, when a variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by main controller 110 is received, one variation pattern (variation The detailed display mode of the production is extracted (identified) (see S5003 in FIG. 42). Of the variation patterns defined in this variation pattern table 222a, for variation patterns corresponding to super reach with a variation time of at least 60 seconds, it is determined whether or not to execute the above-described continuous transformation effect (see FIGS. 5 to 7). It also contains information to show

The transformation effect selection table 222b is a data table referred to for determining the effect mode of the continuous transformation effect when a variation pattern accompanied by the continuous transformation effect is selected from the variation pattern table 222a. Details of the transformation effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 15(a).

FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the transformation effect selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 15(a), the transformation effect selection table 222b defines the effect mode of the continuous transformation effect for each variation pattern type (appropriate or not) and the value of the effect counter 223n provided in the RAM 223. there is As shown in FIG. 15(a), five types of consecutive transformation effects A to E are set as the effect mode of the continuous transformation effect.

The continuous transformation effect A is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of times of transformation (success notification mode) is 1, and the lower limit of the residual variation time during which transformation is possible is not set. Therefore, when the continuous transformation effect A is executed, regardless of whether or not the player presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, the failure notification mode is displayed after the success notification mode is displayed once. Is displayed. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 15(a), the continuous transformation effect A may be selected only in the case of winning super reach and when the value of the effect counter 223n is "0". . That is, if the maximum number of times of transformation is one, it is determined that the variation display in which the continuous transformation effect A is set will result in a big win. As described above, in the continuous transformation production, basically, the higher the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed), the higher the expectation of the jackpot, but in the case of continuous transformation production A (when the maximum number of times is 1) Only, it is configured that the jackpot is decided exceptionally. This makes it possible to provide an unexpected performance.

Continuous transformation production B is a continuous transformation production in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is two times, and in the winning super reach, when the value of the production counter 223n is in the range of “1 to 19”. selected. On the other hand, in the case of the loss super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "0 to 44". Since the production counter 223n is a loop counter that is updated within the range of "0 to 99", the continuous transformation production B is 19% (19/100) of the hit super reach when the continuous transformation production is determined. On the other hand, it is determined at a rate of 45% (45/100) in the case of the outlier super reach where the continuous transformation production is determined. For this reason, the probability that the continuous transformation effect B is determined is higher for the losing super reach (lower expectations for a big win).

Further, in the continuous transformation effect B, the lower limit of the remaining variation time during which transformation is possible is set to 41 seconds. Here, the first operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect starts when the remaining variation time is 49 seconds (when 11 seconds have passed since the start of variation, see FIGS. 9A and 9B). Therefore, if the period from when the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect is set until the second operation valid period ends is kept within 8 seconds (49 seconds - 41 seconds), the success notification mode The number of times of display will stop once. That is, if the effective period of operation set for the first and second operations is not interrupted by pressing the frame button 22, the lower limit value of the remaining variation time during which transformation is possible during the effective period of the second operation is set. will fall below. As a result, unless the effective period of operation is terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22, the number of times of transformation becomes 1 because the continuous transformation effect A is set, or the continuous transformation effect B is set. It becomes impossible for the player to distinguish whether the number of transformations has become one. As described above, the continuous transformation effect A is an effect in which a big win is guaranteed, while the continuous transformation effect B is an effect with a low expectation of a big win. Therefore, by distinguishing whether it is the continuous transformation performance A or the continuous transformation performance B, the degree of expectation of the big win can be accurately known, so that the frame button is positively directed to the player during the operation effective period. 22 can be pressed.

Continuous transformation production C is a continuous transformation production in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is 3 times, and in the winning super reach, when the value of the production counter 223n is in the range of "20 to 44". selected. On the other hand, in the case of the loss super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "45 to 89". Therefore, the continuous transformation effect C is determined at a ratio of 25% (25/100) in the case of winning super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined, while 45 in the case of losing super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. % (45/100). For this reason, the probability that the continuous transformation effect C is determined is higher in the losing super reach (lower the expectation of a big win). In addition, compared to the continuous transformation performance B, the ratio of determination in the case of winning super reach is high, so the continuous transformation performance C has a higher expectation for a big win than the continuous transformation performance B. - 特許庁

Further, in the continuous transformation effect C, the lower limit of the residual variation time during which transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds. Therefore, if the period from the setting of the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the third operation valid period is kept within 11 seconds (49 seconds - 38 seconds), the success notification mode The number of times of display stops twice. This is because if each operation valid period expires without pressing the frame button 22, the second operation valid period ends just after 11 seconds have passed (the first operation valid period is 5 seconds + 1 1 second success notification mode + 5 seconds valid period of second operation). As a result, unless the effective period of operation is terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22, the continuous transformation performance C or the continuous transformation performances D and E having a higher expectation of a big hit than the continuous transformation performance C described later. It becomes impossible for the player to distinguish whether there is. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to accurately predict the degree of expectation of the current variable display from the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed).

Continuous transformation production D is a continuous transformation production in which the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations (success notification mode) is four times, and in the winning super reach, when the value of the production counter 223n is in the range of "45 to 79". selected. On the other hand, in the case of the loss super reach, it is selected when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "90-98". Therefore, the continuous transformation effect D is determined at a rate of 35% (35/100) in the case of winning super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined, while 9 in the case of losing super reach in which the continuous transformation effect is determined. % (9/100). For this reason, the ratio of determination of the continuous transformation effect D is higher in the winning super reach (higher expectations for a big win). In addition, compared to the continuous transformation performances B and C, the percentage determined in the case of winning super reach is high, and the percentage determined in the case of losing super reach is low. Compared to C, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher.

Further, in the continuous transformation performance D, the lower limit value of the residual variation time during which transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds, which is the same as in the continuous transformation performance C.例文帳に追加Therefore, if the period from the setting of the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the third operation valid period is kept within 11 seconds (49 seconds - 38 seconds), the success notification mode The number of times of display stops twice. Also, even if the period until the effective period of the third operation ends is suppressed within 11 seconds, if the period until the effective period of the fourth operation ends exceeds 11 seconds, the success notification mode The display count of will stop 3 times. As a result, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to distinguish between the continuous transformation effects C to E unless the valid operation period is terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22 . Therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to accurately predict the degree of expectation of the current variable display from the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed).

The continuous transformation effect E is a continuous transformation effect in which the maximum (upper limit) number of times of transformation (success notification mode) is 5 times, and in the hit super reach, when the value of the effect counter 223n is in the range of "80 to 99". selected. On the other hand, in the case of losing super reach, it is selected only when the value of the effect counter 223n is "99". Therefore, the continuous transformation performance E is determined at a rate of 20% (20/100) in the case of winning super reach when the continuous transformation performance is determined, while 1 in the case of losing super reach when the continuous transformation performance is determined. % (1/100). Therefore, in the case of winning super reach, the rate at which the continuous transformation effect E is determined is higher (higher expectations for a big win). In addition, since the ratio determined in the case of losing super reach is extremely low as compared with the continuous transformation performances B to D, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than in the continuous transformation performances B to D.

This continuous transformation effect E is a type in which the transformation can be executed the most times among the effect types of the continuous transformation effect. In the continuous transformation effect E, when the transformation is successful five times, the failure notification mode is not displayed after that, and the direct transition effect (Fig. 8 (a) reference) is started.

Further, in the continuous transformation performance E, the lower limit value of the remaining variation time during which transformation is possible is set to 38 seconds, which is the same as in the continuous transformation performances C and D. Therefore, if the period from the setting of the first operation valid period of the continuous transformation effect to the end of the third operation valid period is kept within 11 seconds (49 seconds - 38 seconds), the success notification mode The number of times of display stops twice. Also, even if the period until the effective period of the third operation ends is suppressed within 11 seconds, if the period until the effective period of the fourth operation ends exceeds 11 seconds, the success notification mode The display count of will stop 3 times. Furthermore, even if the end timing of the effective period of operation up to the fourth time can be suppressed within 11 seconds, if the timing of the end of the effective period of operation for the fifth time exceeds 11 seconds, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed will be 4. It will stop spinning. As a result, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the player to distinguish between the continuous transformation effects C to E unless the valid operation period is terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22 . Therefore, the frame button 22 can be positively pressed by the player who wants to accurately predict the degree of expectation of the current variable display from the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed).

As described above, the continuous transformation effect of the present embodiment is provided with five types of effect types. Each effect type has a different upper limit number of transformations, and the number of times the character 811 has transformed (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) can suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. Further, regarding the continuous transformation performances B to E, unless the player positively presses the frame button 22 during the operation effective period to end the operation effective period, the transformation cannot be displayed for the upper limit number of times. It is configured. As a result, the player who desires to know the degree of expectation of the continuous transformation presentation can positively press the frame button 22 during the operation effective period, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game. can be improved.

In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation performance (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation level is originally high (the upper limit number of transformations is large). In this case, the performance period of the continuous transformation performance will end after a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, there is a case where the number of transformations ends with a small number of transformations due to the lapse of the performance period despite the continuous transformation performance with a large upper limit number of times (that is, the expectation of a big win is high). can be generated. Therefore, even if the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations, it is possible to raise expectations for the big win.

Returning to FIG. 14(a), the description continues. The development mode selection table 222c is a data table that defines the development mode of the development mode. This development effect mode selection table 222c is referred to when the last operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect ends, and is used to determine the mode of development effect based on the remaining variable time. Details of the development mode selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 15(b).

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the development mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 15(b), this development mode selection table 222c contains the remaining variation time (remaining variation time T) and the type of current variation display (missing super reach, hit super reach). ), the type of development effect to be selected is defined.

Specifically, if the remaining variation time T is in the range of 32 seconds≦T<35 seconds at the end of the last operation effective period, the development effect with the effect time of 30 seconds is selected. That is, if the variable display of this time is "win super reach", the win development effect A with effect time of 30 seconds is selected, and if it is "loss super reach", the loss development effect A with effect time of 30 seconds is selected.

Also, if the remaining variation time T is in the range of 35 seconds ≤ T < 38 seconds, and if the current variation display is hit super reach, the win development effect B with the effect time of 33 seconds is selected, and it is lost super reach. If there is, a deviating development performance B with a performance time of 33 seconds is selected. If the remaining variation time T is in the range of 38 seconds ≤ T < 41 seconds, and if the current variation display is winning super reach, the winning development effect C with the effect time of 36 seconds is selected, and if it is losing super reach. , the deviating development effect C with the effect time of 36 seconds is selected.

Similarly, if the remaining variation time T is in the range of 41 seconds ≤ T < 44 seconds, and if the current variation display is hit super reach, the win development effect D with the effect time of 39 seconds is selected, and the lose super reach. If so, the deviating development effect D with the effect time of 39 seconds is selected. If the remaining variation time T is in the range of 44 seconds ≤ T < 47 seconds, and if the current variation display is winning super reach, the winning development effect E with the effect time of 42 seconds is selected, and if it is losing super reach. , the deviating development effect E with the effect time of 42 seconds is selected. If the remaining variation time T is in the range of 47 seconds ≤ T < 48 seconds, and if the current variation display is winning super reach, the winning development effect F with the effect time of 45 seconds is selected, and if it is losing super reach. , the deviating development effect F with the effect time of 45 seconds is selected.

As described above, in order to prevent the end timing of the variable display from deviating from the end timing of the development effect, the remaining variation time T and the effect time of the development effect selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c are determined. The display time of the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are varied according to the difference between the two. As a result, regardless of the length of the remaining variation time T, the end timing of the development effect can be matched with the end timing of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, details of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 14(b). FIG. 14(b) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol pending ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a valid A period flag 223e, an effective period timer 223f, a transformation number counter 223g, a transformation effect in progress flag 223h, a success notification mode timer 223i, a failure notification mode timer 223j, a transition effect time timer 223k, and a development effect storage area 223m. and an effect counter 223n are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the starting winning, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning. From, various information obtained when the lottery of the special pattern corresponding to the starting winning prize is carried out (won or not, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, the predicted various information is , is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It's becoming

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S4908 in FIG. 41). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 203c, its value can be updated.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of , a command for the number of pending balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4902 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S5002 in FIG. 42). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (see S4002 in FIG. 33). It is sent to controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4905 in FIG. 41), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S5009 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command (see S5011 in FIG. 42).

The validity period flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not it is within the period of the operation validity period in the continuous transformation effect. If the validity period flag 223e is ON, it means that the operation is valid, and if it is OFF, it means that the operation is not valid. This validity period flag 223e is set to ON when it is determined that the start timing of the continuous transformation effect has come (see S4403 in (a) of FIG. 37). It is also set to ON when it is determined that the display period of the success notification mode has elapsed and the number of times the success notification mode is displayed (the number of transformations) is less than 5 (see S4605 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, if it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed during the operation valid period, or if the five seconds set as the operation valid period have passed without detecting that the frame button 22 has been pressed, it is set to OFF. (See S4201 in FIG. 35). While the validity period flag 223e is on, pressing (operation) on the frame button 22 is treated as valid. That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed with the validity period flag 223e turned on, transformation setting processing (see FIG. 35) for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode is executed.

Valid period timer 223f is a timer for counting the remaining time of the operation valid period in the continuous transformation effect. When the condition for starting the valid period is satisfied (when the continuous transformation effect starts or when the success notification mode ends), a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds (5000 ) is set (see S4403 in FIG. 37 and S4605 in FIG. 38). When the timer value of the valid period timer 223f is 1 or more, during the valid period process (Fig. 37(b) )), the value is decremented (updated) by one. Based on the value of the effective period timer 223f, it is determined whether or not the operation effective period has elapsed. When it is determined that the operation effective period has elapsed, transformation setting for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode is performed. Processing (see FIG. 35) is executed.

The transformation number counter 223g is a counter for counting the number of times the success notification mode (see FIGS. 6 and 7A) is displayed (the character 811 has successfully transformed) in one continuous transformation effect. The counter value of the transformation number counter 223g is incremented (updated) by one each time the display of the success notification mode is determined. In the continuous transformation production in the first embodiment, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is determined depending on whether or not the upper limit value (see FIG. 15A) determined for each production type of the continuous transformation production is transformed. is reached (see S4203 in FIG. 35). As described above, when the success notification mode for the upper limit number of transformations is displayed, and after that the operation valid period ends, the failure notification is given regardless of whether the remaining variation time has reached the lower limit value at the time of termination. Aspects are displayed. As a result, the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations can be differentiated for each type of continuous transformation production, so that the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations can suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit.

The transformation effect in progress flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not a continuous transformation effect is being executed. If it is ON, it means that the continuous transformation effect is being executed, and if it is OFF, the continuous transformation effect is being executed. means not inside. Here, the execution of the continuous transformation effect means a period from the end of the transformation development mode (the start of the first operation effective period) to the end of the transition effect (the start of the development effect). This transformation effect in-progress flag 223h is set to ON when it is determined that 11 seconds have passed since the start of the variation, which is the start timing of the transformation effect, in the variable display in which execution of the continuous transformation effect has been determined ( See S4404 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the transformation effect in progress flag 223h is set to OFF when it is determined that the transition effect display period has elapsed (see S4804 in FIG. 40).

The success notification mode timer 223i is a timer for measuring the display time of the success notification mode. When the display condition of the success notification mode is established, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the success notification mode is set for the success notification mode timer 223i. As described above, the conditions for displaying the success notification mode are that the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is less than the maximum number of times determined for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect, and that the operation valid period ends. The remaining fluctuation time must be equal to or longer than the lower limit time set for each type of continuous transformation effect. When it is determined that the display timing of the success notification mode has come, this success notification mode timer 223i is set to a timer value (1000) corresponding to one second (S4212 in FIG. 35). Then, in the effect update process (see S4012 in FIG. 33) of the main process, the value is subtracted (updated) by 1 in the process during the success notification mode which is executed every millisecond (see S4601 in FIG. 38). .

The failure notification mode timer 223j is a timer for measuring the display time of the failure notification mode. When the display condition of the failure notification mode is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the display period of the failure notification mode is set for the failure notification mode timer 223j. The conditions for displaying the failure notification mode are, as described above, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of times determined for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect, or the operation valid period ends. The remaining fluctuation time at the time point is less than the lower limit time set for each type of continuous transformation effect. When it is determined that the display timing of the failure notification mode has come, and the presentation mode of the advanced presentation is selected, the failure notification mode timer 223j sets the display time according to the remaining variation time and the presentation time of the advanced presentation. A corresponding timer value is set (see S4208 in FIG. 35). Then, in the effect update process (see S4012 in FIG. 33) of the main process, the value is decremented (updated) by 1 during the failure notification mode process executed every 1 millisecond (see S4701 in FIG. 39). .

The transition effect time timer 223k is a timer for measuring the display time of the transition effect. When the transition effect display condition is satisfied, a timer value corresponding to the transition effect display period is set for the transition effect time timer 223k. Note that the display of the transition effect is started when the display time of the failure notification mode has elapsed, or when the display time of the success notification mode for the fifth time in the continuous transformation effect E has elapsed. This transition production time timer 223k is set to a timer value corresponding to the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the production time of the development production executed after the transition production (S4610 in FIG. 38, FIG. 39, S4704). Then, in the effect update process (see S4012 in FIG. 33) of the main process, the value is decremented (updated) by 1 during the process during transition effect executed every 1 millisecond (see S4801 in FIG. 40).

The development effect storage area 223m is a storage area for storing information indicating the type of development effect. In this development effect storage area 223m, based on the end of the last operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect, the development effect is stored from the development effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15(b)) according to the remaining variation time. is selected, data corresponding to the effect mode is stored. At the start of the transition performance, the mode (performance time) of the development performance is discriminated from the data stored in the development performance storage area 223m, and the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time and the performance time of the development performance is displayed as the transition performance. Set as time. Further, at the end of the transition performance, the type of development performance to be started is specified based on the data stored in the development performance storage area 223m.

The data corresponding to the type of development effect is composed of, for example, 4-bit data. For example, the 1st to 3rd bits are used as an area for storing data indicating the variation time, and the 4th bit is used as an area for storing the data indicating the validity. . Specifically, if the 1st to 3rd bits are "001B", it indicates an extended effect with an effect time of 30 seconds, and if it is "010B", it indicates an extended effect with an effect time of 33 seconds. If there is, it indicates a development performance with a performance time of 36 seconds. Further, if it is "100B", it indicates a development effect with a production time of 39 seconds, if it is "101B", it indicates a development production with a production time of 42 seconds, and if it is "111B", it indicates a development production with a production time of 36 seconds. Show development performance. And, if the most significant bit (4th bit) is 1 (high), it means that it is a development effect corresponding to winning, and if the most significant bit (4th bit) is 0 (low), it means a loss. It means that it is a development production corresponding to Therefore, for example, if the data "1010B" is stored in the development performance storage area 223m, the development performance this time is the development performance that will win in the performance time of 33 seconds (that is, the development performance B). means

The effect counter 223n is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223n is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and is updated by adding 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 33) is executed. . The effect counter 223n has a separate counter for each type of effect.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 41) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third pattern display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash memory 234d) and stored in the buffer RAM 234c. Set once. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR flash memory 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. 2 kilobytes). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR flash memory 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed first.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d is stored in one of the buffer RAMs 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address pointing to the program stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, is previously set to the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR flash memory 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address in the program is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR flash memory 234a. The reason for storing in the memory 234d is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, the NOR flash memory 234d is a memory from which data can be read at high speed. By storing in the memory 234d, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. Programs and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the program and its control program are stored in the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to the storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 43) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. can reliably transfer the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a very small capacity NOR flash memory 234d. can do.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 21) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the selection is made.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 43).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 17 . FIG. 17 shows the power on display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 17(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a symbol "○" at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. 17(b) and 17(c) are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 16, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 18A and 18B are explanatory diagrams for explaining two kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 18B shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 18, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 shifts the corresponding rear image from position a to position a' to the initial position of the display area. , and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 18(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the deep sea stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 235c.

Here, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player to change the stage is performed at arbitrary timing based on the player's will. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed within the range from position a to position a', and from position a including the initial position to position a Since the image data corresponding to the image during b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the player can press the frame button. When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial position of the back B is immediately displayed in the third pattern. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing color tone over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the rear surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 16). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 16, the description is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the ten types of main patterns (see FIG. 4) imitating the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first pattern display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third pattern display device 81 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a fish character 311, a female character 312, and a male character 313 are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

It should be noted that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. It is configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. , the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and that the specific prize winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and notifies the player of the game value (short period of time for normal symbols) given to the player after the end of the big win, or the reserved special symbol. This is an effect for notifying the player that the result of the lottery will be a big win in the lottery.

A player can easily recognize the time period of normal symbols by informing the time period of normal symbols in the ending performance. The longer the time period of the normal pattern is, the more chances the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, so the chances of lottery for the normal pattern are increased and the chances of winning the normal pattern are also increased. . Therefore, the electric accessary 64a is often opened as a jackpot of the normal symbols, so that the ball is easily entered into the first ball entrance 64, and the lottery of the special symbols is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is entered, a jackpot of normal symbols is produced, and the electric accessory 64a is released, and the ball is placed in the first position. When it becomes easier to enter the ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of sub-patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables. Display data tables corresponding to each game menu screen are also stored in the data table storage area 233b.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table for variable effects (variation display data table) among the display data tables. The display data table such as the variable display data table is associated with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at that time.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing the insertion of a character, characters used for various effects, etc., is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of the back surface is to display one of the back surfaces A and B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or to display a back surface different from the back surfaces A and B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A and B as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 19) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 20). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 20).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 43). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 55(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 45B). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 45(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 46 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 55A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 55(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 21) is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 21) describing the content of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 45(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 52) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 21), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite is placed on the backmost side (backmost drawing layer), and the last drawn sprite is placed on the frontmost side (foremost drawing layer). can be placed in When the comment display function is turned on, the image arranged on the foremost side (the foremost drawing layer) is a character image forming the comment. By arranging the comment on the frontmost side (the frontmost drawing hierarchy), the comment can be visually recognized more clearly by the player.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed (FIG. 45(b)). )) is executed, the timer counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 56). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 56). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 57).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 45B) is executed (see S7802 in FIG. 57).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 22 to 31. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 399, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and the first A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the starting winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67. (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special design variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and the variation display of the special design (first design) performed in the first design display device 37 and the third design display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of suspensions of variable display in special symbols) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and when it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), the process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed to start the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S209: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The stop symbols are set in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B will be given.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S211 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot (S212). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the variable probability flag 203e is reset to OFF, the value of the counter 203f during time saving is reset to 0 (S213), and the start of the jackpot is set. (S214). When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S214, when the jackpot control processing (S904) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) is executed, branch to S1001: Yes, and the opening command is set. be done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

In the process of S212, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S215), If the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more (S215: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203f (S216), and the process proceeds to S217. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S215: No), the process of S216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S217. In the process of S217, a stop command indicating the stop of fluctuation of the special symbol is set (S217), and the process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the "big hit of the special design" or "out of the special design" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81 perform It is a process for determining the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be performed.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the variable probability flag 203e of the RAM 203 is ON (S302). The variable probability flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbol. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (low probability state) with special symbols.

When the variable probability flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the number for the high probability time A lottery result as to whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot is acquired based on a random number table (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random numbers stored in the first winning random number table for high probability. As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the variable probability flag 203e is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of special symbols, the first per random number obtained in the process of S301 Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first winning random number table for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big win is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table for low probability. Only "200" is set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 coincides with "200", the special symbol jackpot is determined. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). Yes), based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big winning is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A , jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) (see 202b1 in FIG. 11 (b)), "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot B (16R short-time jackpot) (see 202b2 in FIG. 11(b)).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12) as described above. After the process of S307 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-order.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S308, by comparing the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the defined contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 12), normal reach, Determines the variation time of symbol variation such as super reach. After the process of S309 is completed, the process proceeds to S310.

In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310 ). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S901 of the main processing (see FIG. 30). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), determines whether or not there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), and if there is a starting winning , Reservation processing of values indicated by various random number counters, and processing for executing prefetching of lottery results in special symbols from values indicated by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 (winning a prize) is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered (won a prize) in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (number of times of holding variable display in the special symbol N) is obtained. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. , is stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, prediction of the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not it is a big win), its stop type (in the case of a big win, the big win type), and its variation pattern. (S407).

By the process of S407, when the success or failure of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the stop type), and the variation pattern are predicted, next, the predicted success or failure of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408), and the process ends.

The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts win/fail, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 26, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64a.

In the normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S501). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball entrance 64 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S501: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S508). Specifically, the value of the counter 203f during time saving of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203e is ON, it is determined that it is a time saving state of normal symbols, and the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, And, if the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is determined that it is in the normal state of normal symbols (not in the time saving state).

In the process of S508, when it is determined that it is normal symbol time saving state (S508: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507, and the second per random number table for high probability time Based on this, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S509). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 11(c)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S508, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S508: No), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second winning for low probability time Based on the random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 11(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S509 or S510 is a normal symbol win (S511), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S511: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S511: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state of the normal design (S514), and if it is in the time saving state of the normal design (S514: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second design display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S515), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S514, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (S514: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), and this process exit. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, compared to the normal symbol when the probability is low, the time of the fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds". The pattern lottery frequency increases. Therefore, the frequency of wins in the normal pattern lottery increases, and the electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 is easily opened, so that the ball is easily entered into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加state.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the process of S517, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S517, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S518, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After completion, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S519). If the lottery result of this time is a hit of the normal design (S519: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the present is in the time saving state of the normal design (S520), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S520: Yes), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 are set to "1 second x 2 times", and the process proceeds to S523. On the other hand, in the processing of S520, if it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (not the time-saving state) (S520: No), the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time", and the process proceeds to S523.

In the process of S523, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and the process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the electric accessory 64a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S519: No), the process of S520 to S523 is skipped, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) to determine whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (M) is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203d (S604). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. area (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S812.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S914 of FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S813, S814).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S901). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) or the start winning process (see FIG. 25). Also, the winning information command set in the startup winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control processing, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 64a is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 64a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) ends, the first symbol display device 37, the variable display being executed is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 24). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), in the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S512 or S513 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S908, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 28 has been executed, so the power-off process after S912 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S912), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S913). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S901. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the initial setting processing (see S801 in FIG. 29) , the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process of S901 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the processing of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this processing is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1003: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1004). If it is time to start a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1006). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted number of rounds is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is met (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls When (for example, 10) wins, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the process of S1007, when the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is not met (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the processing of S1009, if it is time to start the ending effect (S1009: Yes), an ending command is set (S1010), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30). It is sent towards device 113 . When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

In the processing of S1009, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011), and the end timing of the ending effect is reached. If it is determined (S1011: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1011, when it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect has come (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current big win is the big win A (S1012).

In the process of S1012, if it is determined that the jackpot A is not (that is, the jackpot B) (S1012: No), by overwriting the value of the counter 203f during time saving with 100, 100 times of normal symbols after the jackpot end. A time period is set to be given (S1013), and the process proceeds to S1015. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, if it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot A (S1012: Yes), by turning on the probability variation flag 203e, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015.

In the process of S1013 or the process of S1015 executed after the process of S1014, the lottery state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot (whether the special symbol is a variable state or a low probability state of the special symbol) is voiced. A status command for notification to the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), the end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and this process is finished.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 42. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 32, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S3901). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S4018 (see FIG. 33) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S3902). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4015: Yes in FIG. 33), the power-off processing of S4018 is executed. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4017 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

In the processing of S3902, if the power-off processing flag is off (S3902: No), the startup processing this time was started after the power was completely cut off or after a momentary power failure occurred. or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). It has been started. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3903).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3906. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S3903: Yes), it will transfer to S3904 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3903: No), the process proceeds to S3908.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3903: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3904. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4018 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3903: No), and the process proceeds to S3908.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S3902: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S4018, the audio lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process moves to S3904 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S3904, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S3904). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S3906). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3905: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3907), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S3908, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3908). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4018 is executed (see S4017 in FIG. 33). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4018 is executed, the reason why the process of S3908 is reached with the power-off flag turned on is that the current start-up processing is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4018 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3908: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3909), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3910), an interrupt Permission is set (S3911), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3908 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3908: No), S3909, which is the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S3910, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3910), interrupt permission is set. Then (S3911), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clear processing of S3909 is skipped is that when the processing of S3908 is reached from S3904 via the processing of S3906, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S3904, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S4001 was executed (S4001). If not (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4013 without performing the processes of S4002 to S4012. In the process of S4001, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S4002 to S4012 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S4013, and S4014 for updating the variable display setting process are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4013 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4014 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4001 (S4001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4003 to S4014 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4002 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4008 described later (S4003), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4004). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4005 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4005, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4006). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4007). This frame button input monitoring/rendering process is a process of monitoring an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed, and setting an effect corresponding to the confirmation of the input of the frame button 22 . That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the valid operation period of the continuous transformation effect, it is a process for displaying a success notification mode or a failure notification mode. The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4008), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4009, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4010), and then menu setting processing is executed (S4011). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S4008 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG. In the menu setting process, a process is executed according to the player's operation when the game menu screen is displayed.

After the processing of S4011, during the execution of the variable display, the rendering update processing is executed for changing the rendering mode according to the remaining variable time, the values of various timers, etc. (S4012), and the processing proceeds to S4013. . The details of this rendering update process (S4012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4013, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S4013). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, when the command determination process ends, the variable display setting process is executed (S4014). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4014 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4015 (S4015: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4017), and the power-off processing is executed (S4018). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S4019), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4015 (S4015: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4016), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4016: No), the process returns to S4001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4016: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4007) executed by the MPU in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing. This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 34) is, as described above, a process of monitoring the input of the frame button 22 and setting the corresponding effect when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 34), first, it is determined whether or not the validity period flag 223e is ON (S4101). means, the process is terminated as it is. This is because there is no possibility of displaying a failure notification mode or a success notification mode even if pressing of the frame button 22 is detected unless it is within the operation valid period.

On the other hand, in the process of S4101, if it is determined that the valid period flag 223e is ON (S4101: Yes), it means that the operation valid period is now. It is determined whether or not (S4102). In the processing of S4102, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4102: Yes), transformation setting processing for setting the success notification mode or failure notification mode is executed (S4103), and this processing is performed. exit. The details of this transformation setting process (S4103) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4102 that the depression of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S4102: No), the process of S4103 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, details of the transformation setting process (S4103) described above will be described with reference to FIG. In this transformation setting process, first, the effective period flag 223e is set to OFF, and the effective period timer 223f is reset to 0 (S4201). This sets the end of the effective period of operation in the continuous transformation effect.

After the process of S4201 is finished, next, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is read out (S4202), and the number of transformation times read (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) becomes the upper limit number of transformations of the continuous transformation effect currently being executed. (S4203). In the process of S4203, if it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g matches the upper limit (S4203: Yes), the remaining variation time in the variation display is specified (S4204), and the specified remaining variation The effect mode of the developed effect corresponding to the time (T) is selected from the developed effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 15(b)) (S4205).

When the processing of S4205 ends, the data corresponding to the presentation mode of the selected development presentation is stored in the development presentation storage area 223m (S4206), and the remaining variation time specified in the processing of S4204 and the development selected in the processing of S4205 are stored. The display time of the current failure notification mode is calculated from the difference from the effect time of the effect (S4207). Specifically, half the time obtained by subtracting the effect time of the development effect from the remaining variation time T is specified as the display time of the failure notification mode. Next, the timer value corresponding to the specified display time of the failure notification mode is set in the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4208), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than the upper limit number (S4203: No), the remaining variation time (T) is within the period during which the success notification mode can be displayed. (S4209). In the process of S4209, when it is determined that the success notification mode can be displayed (S4209: Yes), each process of S4210 to S4212 for setting the display of the success notification mode is executed. That is, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is updated by adding 1 (S4210), the success notification mode is set according to the value of the transformation number counter 223g (S4211), and the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is set to 1 second. A corresponding timer value is set (S4212), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4209, if it is determined that the success notification mode cannot be displayed (the remaining variation time T is less than the lower limit defined in the transformation effect selection table 222b) (S4209: No) , the processing of S4204 to S4208 described above for setting the display of the failure notification mode is executed, and this processing ends.

With this transformation setting process (see FIG. 35), by pressing the frame button 22 within a range that does not fall short of the lower limit remaining variation time set for each effect type, the success notification mode is displayed within the upper limit number of transformations. can be displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed before the lower limit remaining variation time is reached, the failure notification mode can be displayed regardless of whether the upper limit number of transformations has been reached. As a result, the player can be encouraged to press the frame button 22 positively because he/she desires to display more success notification modes within a range that does not fall short of the lower limit remaining variation time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation performance. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation performance (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation level is originally high (the upper limit number of transformations is large). In this case, the performance period of the continuous transformation performance will end after a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, there is a case where the number of transformations ends with a small number of transformations due to the lapse of the performance period despite the continuous transformation performance with a large upper limit number of times (that is, the expectation of a big win is high). can be generated. As a result, even when the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big win can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, details of the effect update process (S4012) described above will be described. This effect update process (S4012) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) of the sound lamp control device 113. This is a process for varying the presentation mode accordingly. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this effect update process.

In this effect update process (see FIG. 36), first, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being executed (S4301). to return to the main processing (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the variable display is in progress (S4301: Yes), then whether the transformation effect in progress flag 223h is ON (that is, whether the continuous transformation effect is being executed) or not. (S4302). In the process of S4302, when it is determined that the transformation effect in progress flag 223h is off (S4302: No), the transformation effect start for determining whether or not to start the continuous transformation effect based on the remaining variation time. Determination processing is executed (S4303), and this processing ends. Details of the transformation effect start determination process (S4303) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the process of S4302, if it is determined that the transformation effect in progress flag 223h is ON (S4302: Yes), since the continuous transformation effect is being executed, first, whether or not the effective period flag 223e is ON. (S4304), and if it is on (S4304: Yes), valid period processing for determining whether or not the operation valid period has expired is executed (S4305), and this process ends. Details of this valid period processing (S4305) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the effective period flag 223e is off (that is, it is not during the operation effective period) (S4304: No), then the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is greater than 0. (S4306), and if the value is greater than 0 (S4306: Yes), processing during the success notification mode for determining whether it is time to end the success notification mode. is executed (S4307), and the process ends. The details of this process during the success notification mode (S4307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4306, if it is determined that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is 0 (that is, the success notification mode is not being displayed) (S4306: No), next, the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j It is determined whether or not it is greater than 0 (whether the failure notification mode is being displayed) (S4308), and if it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S4308: Yes), the A process during the failure notification mode is executed (S4309), and this process ends. The details of this process during failure notification mode (S4309) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4308, when it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is 0 (that is, the failure notification mode is not being displayed) (S4308: No), the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is greater than 0. (that is, whether the transition effect is being executed) or not (S4310), and if it is determined to be greater than 0 (S4310: Yes), it is determined whether or not to switch from the transition effect to the development effect. (S4311) and ends this process. Details of the process during transition effect (S4311) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S4310, when it is determined that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), this processing is terminated as it is and returns to the main processing (see FIG. 33).

By executing this effect update processing (see FIG. 36), appropriate control can be executed according to the progress of the continuous transformation effect, so that the effect mode in the continuous transformation effect can be preferably updated. can.

Next, the details of the transformation effect start determination process (S4303) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37(a). This transformation effect start determination process (S4303) is, as described above, a process for determining whether or not to start the continuous transformation effect based on the remaining variation time.

In the transformation production start determination process (see FIG. 37(a)), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous transformation production (timing when 11 seconds have passed since the start of the variation) (S4401), and the continuous transformation production is started. If it is determined that it is not the start timing (S4401: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to start the continuous transformation effect (S4401: Yes), first, a display command for starting the continuous transformation effect is set (S4402). Next, the valid period timer 223f is set to a timer value (5000) corresponding to 5 seconds, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S4403). Then, the transformation effect in progress flag 223h is set to ON (S4404), and the process ends.

By executing this transformation performance start determination processing (see FIG. 37(a)), the continuous transformation performance is accurately executed at the same timing each time the variable display in which the execution of the continuous transformation performance is set is executed. be able to.

Next, the details of the valid period processing (S4305) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37(b). This valid period processing (S4305) is, as described above, a process for determining whether or not the operation valid period has ended.

In the valid period processing (see FIG. 37(b)), first, the value of the valid period timer 223f is updated by subtracting 1 (S4501). Note that the valid period processing (see FIG. 37(b)) is executed every 1 millisecond, so the value of the valid period timer 223f is decremented by 1 every 1 millisecond.

When the processing of S4501 ends, it is next determined whether or not the value of the effective period timer 223f after subtraction in the processing of S4501 has become 0 (S4502), and if the value of the effective period timer 223f is not 0 ( S4502: No), it is not the time to end the effective period of operation, so the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if it is determined that the value of the effective period timer 223f after subtraction has become 0 (S4502: Yes), the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) and the remaining variation time ( T), the transformation setting process described above (S4503, see FIG. 35) for determining the display mode to be displayed is executed, and this process ends. Details of the transformation setting process (S4503) have already been described above with reference to FIG. 35, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the process during the success notification mode (S4307) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process during the success notification mode (S4307) is, as described above, a process for determining the end timing of the success notification mode.

In this process during the success notification mode (see FIG. 38), first, the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is updated by subtracting 1 (S4601), and it is checked whether the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after the subtraction has become 0. It is determined (S4602). In the process of S4602, if it is determined that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i is not 0 (S4602: No), it is not the end timing of the success notification mode (success notification mode continues), so this process is terminated as it is. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4602 that the value of the success notification mode timer 223i after subtraction is 0 (S4602: Yes), it means that the display time (5 seconds) of the success notification mode has elapsed. , the processing of S4603 to S4611 for setting the effect mode after the end of the display period is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 5 (S4603).

In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is not 5 (S4603: No), a display command for notifying the start of the valid operation period is set (S4604). The display command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted towards device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display command for notifying the start of the operation valid period, the third symbol display device 81 executes a display mode corresponding to the operation valid period (see FIG. 5(b)).

After the processing of S4604 ends, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON to set the start of the operation valid period (S4605), End this process. As a result, a new operation valid period can be started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4603 that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 5 (S4603: Yes), the success notification mode has already been displayed five times, and it is necessary to set the operation valid period any more. Since it means that there is no , the development performance and the transition performance are determined according to the remaining variable time (T). Specifically, the remaining variable time (T) of the variable display is specified (S4606), and the effect mode of the developed effect corresponding to the specified remaining variable time (T) is selected in the developed effect mode selection table 222c (FIG. 15). (b)) (S4607).

When the processing of S4607 ends, next, the data corresponding to the presentation mode of the selected development presentation is stored in the development presentation storage area 223m (S4608), and the remaining variation time (T) and the development selected in the processing of S4607 are stored. The difference from the production time of the production is specified as the production time of the transition production (S4609). Then, the timer value corresponding to the specified effect time is set in the transition effect time timer 223k (S4610), the display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S4611), and this process is terminated.

The display command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted towards device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display command for notifying the start of the transition production, the third symbol display device 81 starts the transition production (see FIG. 8A).

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39, the details of the process during the failure notification mode (S4309) will be described. As described above, this process during failure notification mode (S4309) is a process for determining the end timing of the failure notification mode.

In the process during the failure notification mode (see FIG. 39), first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4701), and it is determined whether or not the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j after the subtraction has become 0 ( S4702). In the process of S4702, if it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j is not 0 (S4702: No), it means that it is not time to end the failure notification mode, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4702, if it is determined that the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j has become 0 (S4702: Yes), it means that the end timing of the failure notification mode has come. ) and the effect time of the development effect indicated by the data stored in the development effect storage area 223m, and the difference time is specified as the effect time of the transition effect (S4703). Then, the specified effect time is set to the transition effect time timer 223k (S4704), a display command indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S4705), and this process is terminated.

The display command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S4002) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted towards device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display command for notifying the start of the transition production, the third symbol display device 81 starts the transition production (see FIG. 8A).

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40, the details of the process during transition effect (S4311) will be described. This process during transition effect (S4311) is, as described above, a process for determining the end timing of the transition effect.

In the process during transition effect (see FIG. 40), first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the transition effect time timer 223k (S4801), and it is determined whether the timer value after the subtraction has become 0 (S4802). In the process of S4802, when it is determined that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is not 0 (S4802: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the transition effect, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4802, when it is determined that the value of the transition effect timer 223k is 0 (that is, it is the end timing of the transition effect) (S4802: Yes), it is stored in the development effect storage area 223m. The start of development effect corresponding to the existing data is set (S4803). Then, the in-transformation effect flag 223h is set to OFF (S4804), the value of the transformation number counter 223g is reset to 0 (S4805), and this processing ends. As described above, the failure notification mode and the display time of the transition effect are set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display exactly match. Therefore, the development effect set in the process of S4803 can be terminated at the end timing of the variation. Therefore, the effect mode can be preferably executed.

Next, the command determination process (S4013) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4013). The command determination process (S4013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and determines the command received from the main controller 110 as described above.

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S4901). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command ( S4903) and returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4901: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S4904). When the stop type command is received (S4904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4906), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4904: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S4907). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S4907: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol ) is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4908). In addition, in the processing of S4908, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S4908 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when a lottery for a special symbol is performed. is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol pending ball number counter of the main controller 110 by the processing of S4908. 203c value. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice ramp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc., At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110.例文帳に追加Incidentally, when the process of S4908 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S4907, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S4907: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4909). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4909: Yes), the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4910), and the process returns to the main process.

In the processing of S4909, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4909: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S4911). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S4911: Yes), the display opening command is set (S4912), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S4002) of the main processing (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

In the process of S4911, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S4911: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4913). And when it determines with having received the number-of-rounds command (S4913: Yes), the number of rounds of big hits is extracted from the received number-of-rounds command (S4914). Then, a display round number command for instructing the display control device 114 to display the extracted number of rounds on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4915), and this process ends. The command for the number of rounds for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S4002) of the main processing (see FIG. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the round effect.

If it is determined in the process of S4913 that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S4916). Then, when an ending command is received (S4916: Yes), an ending setting process for setting the display mode of the ending effect is executed (S4917), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S4002) of the main processing (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4916, if the ending command has not been received (S4916: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S4918 ) and return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

By executing this command determination processing, appropriate processing can be executed according to the command output from main controller 110 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S4014) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4014). This variable display setting process (S4014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, This is a process of generating and setting display variation pattern commands based on the variation pattern commands received from main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S5001). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5001: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S5008. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S5001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S5002). Based on the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command, the variation display mode of the current variation display is determined from the variation pattern table 222a (S5003).

Then, it is determined whether or not the determined variation pattern type is a mode accompanied by a continuous transformation effect (S5004), and when it is determined that it is a mode accompanied by a continuous transformation effect (S5004: Yes), the transformation effect selection table Based on 222b (see FIG. 15(a)) and the value of the effect counter 223n, the form of continuous transformation effect is determined (S5005), and the process proceeds to S5006. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern type determined in the process of S5004 is a mode that does not involve continuous transformation effect (S5004: No), the process of S5005 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5006.

In the processing of S5006, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variable display mode determined in the processing of S5003 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. (S5006). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S5007). In the process of S5007, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S5008.

In the processing of S5008, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S5008). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5008: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S5009: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S5009). The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S5010).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third pattern display device 81 (S5011), and based on the set stop type, the display control device A display stop type command for notification to 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5012), and this processing ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 57. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the first data in the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234 d 1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, following the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is cancelled, , a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the command pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 43) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 43) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, by using the third pattern display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a very small capacity NOR flash memory 234d. can do.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 44, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 55(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 55A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 17 is drawn. Determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 45B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 45B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is given by the main controller 110 under voice lamp control. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 17(b) and (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45(a). FIG. 45(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45(b). FIG. 45(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 21) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 45(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is transferred. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like, the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), 21, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing object buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51, the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S6405) and returns to the processing of S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 47(a). FIG. 47(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

In the process of S6502, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process (see FIG. 52), while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504, the display data table buffer 233d set by the process of S6501 From the variable display data table, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the normal video RAM 236 to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process (see FIG. 52), the timer counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time for the variable effect specified in the variable display data table. When it is determined that the variable performance ends, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display variation type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 47(b). FIG. 47(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, or complete out) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop design counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45(b)) is executed, and the third design display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S6602 is identified from the stop design discrimination flag set by the processing of S6603, and the identification The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description is continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command processing (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6705), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6701, At the same time as extracting the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and specifying the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored by the processing of S6702. From the set transfer data table, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description is continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the round number command process (S6411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 48(b). FIG. 48(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the back image change command process (S6415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50(a) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7603) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7002. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set by the processing in S7002 is used. , specifying the back image type to be displayed at that time, further specifying the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no back image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). Otherwise (S6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50(b) is a flow chart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process of S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a command related to the continuous transformation effect (S6418), and if there is a command related to the continuous transformation effect ( S6418: Yes), a transformation effect related command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

The commands related to the continuous transformation effect include, for example, a display command indicating the start of the operation valid period, a display command indicating the start of display of each notification mode (success notification mode, failure notification mode), and the start of the transition effect. , a display command indicating the start of development effects, and the like. A display data table for displaying these display modes is stored in the data table storage area 223b, like the variable display data table. By executing transformation performance-related command processing (S6419), the type of display mode instructed to start displaying, the display time, etc. are determined from the command related to the continuous transformation performance, and the corresponding display data table is displayed. It is set in the data table buffer 233d.

Details of the transformation effect related command process (S6419) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing transformation effect-related command processing. This transformation effect-related command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the continuous transformation effect-related command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In transformation effect-related command processing, the display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7201), and the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S7202). Next, the time data corresponding to the rendering time indicated by the command is set in the timer counter 233h (S7203), the pointer 233f is initialized (S7204), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process. Note that the continuous transformation effect is a type of effect mode set during execution of the variable display, and the fact that the continuous transformation effect has been executed means that the variable pattern command has been set (variation pattern command processing (Fig. 47 ( a) after executing reference)) and before the end of the variation pattern. Therefore, since the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag have already been set to off in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47(a)), these flags no need to turn off again.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description continues. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no command related to the continuous transformation effect (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the process proceeds to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Only type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 47(b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7302 to S7304 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7302), steps S7303 and S7304 are performed. , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7304).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7401).

In the task processing (see S6304 in FIG. 45(b)), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of the sprite (display object) forming the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7304), or when it is determined in the process of S7303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7303: No), the process proceeds to S7305.

In S7305, pointer update processing is executed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7503). If it is a demonstration display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data table buffer Time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7505), and this processing is terminated and displayed. Return to setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S7503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7506). ), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, the menu display data table, and the two-dimensional code display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, , End information is always displayed at the previous address, so that the third pattern display device 81 is caused to display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 52, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7309: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S7310), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S7311). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7315, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the fixed display flag is ON (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S7316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the timer counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is transferred to the display data table buffer. 233d (S7317), and then by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81. You can set the drawing content to be displayed.

In the process of S7316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 17 (b) or (c)) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7602), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7601, that is, if it is turned off (S7601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7602), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 55(b). FIG. 55B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S7701). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7702). In the processing of S7702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7702 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7702: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to S7703. Further, as a result of the processing of S7701, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to S7703.

In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45B), the command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 46 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 has A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is carried out to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S7601: No in FIG. 55(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7803), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7804), and the process proceeds to S7805.

Also, in the processing of S7802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7802: No), the processing of S7803 and S7804 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7806).

In the process of S7806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7806 that the transfer process has not ended (S7806: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to S7807. Also, as a result of the process of S7805, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7805: No), the process proceeds to S7807.

In the processing of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7809). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S7809: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S7812), and the process proceeds to S7813.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 Data does not exist. Therefore, in the processing of S7812, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing ends.

In the process of S7813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). The determination in the process of S7813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the processing in S7813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7813 (S7813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7814). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7815), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated (S7901). That is, in the processing of S7901, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b. When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and drawing processing and display processing can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7902, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 45(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to execute a continuous transformation effect as one of the effect modes for improving the interest of the player. This continuous transformation production is a production in which the character 811 transforms 1 to 5 times in the third pattern display device 81, and is basically a production that suggests that the greater the number of transformations, the higher the expectation of a big win. be. During execution of this continuous transformation effect, an operation effective period is set multiple times during which pressing (operation) on the frame button 22 is effective. If it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed during this valid period of operation, or if the valid period of operation (5 seconds) has passed, an effect (success notification mode) in which the transformation of the character 811 succeeds is executed. There is a possibility that More specifically, when either of the above two types of conditions is established, the upper limit number of transformations predetermined for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect has not been reached, and the remaining variation time is , the character 811 succeeds in transforming (a success notification mode is displayed) if the value is equal to or higher than the lower limit predetermined for each effect type. On the other hand, if the upper limit number of transformations has been reached or the remaining variation time is less than the lower limit value, a transformation failure mode (failure notification mode) is executed, and the continuous transformation performance ends. .

The operation effective period varies in length according to the game method of the player. That is, when it is detected that the frame button 22 is pressed during the valid operation period, the valid operation period is terminated at that point, and the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed. In addition, each operation valid period is, when all the success notification modes are displayed with the lapse of the operation valid period, the production period of the continuous transformation effect is completed before the maximum number of success notification modes are displayed. set to elapse. In other words, when all transformations are executed with the expiration of the operation valid period as a trigger, the effect period is set to a length that elapses before the maximum number of transformations (success notification mode) is executed. An effect time (lower limit remaining fluctuation time determined for each effect type) is set. As a result, when the effective period of operation has started, unless the frame button 22 is positively pressed to end the effective period of operation at an early stage, transformation cannot be performed up to the maximum number of times. Therefore, since the player who wants to confirm the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation performance can positively press the frame button 22, the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation performance can be improved.

In addition, depending on the game method of the player during execution of the continuous transformation effect (whether the frame button 22 is actively pressed during the operation valid period), the subsequent effect mode (display timing of the success notification mode, Since the display count) can be varied, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation performance (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation level is originally high (the upper limit number of transformations is large). In this case, the performance period of the continuous transformation performance will end after a relatively small number of transformations. In other words, it is difficult to distinguish between the production type with low expectations (low upper limit number of transformations) and the production type with high expectations (high upper limit number of transformations). Transformation production can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of cases leading to a big win even in a mode corresponding to an apparently low degree of expectation, so that even when the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of times of transformation, the expectation for the big win can be increased. can.

In addition, in the first embodiment, after the continuous transformation effect is completed, a development effect for informing the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. This development production is provided with a plurality of types with different production times. Here, the presentation time of the continuous transformation presentation varies according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 during each operation valid period. For this reason, the timing at which the continuous transformation effect ends is not constant, and the remaining variable time at the time when the continuous transformation effect ends is variable. Therefore, in this embodiment, at the timing when the last operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect ends, the remaining variable time is determined, and the development effect of the effect period that can be executed in the remaining variable time is selected. Then, the failure notification mode and the transition effect are executed using the difference period between the remaining variable time and the effect period of the selected development effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the variation of the performance time of the development performance, so that it is possible to reduce the volume of various data for displaying the development performance. In addition, by dynamically varying the display period of the failure notification mode and the transition effect according to the remaining variable time, there is no discrepancy between the remaining variable time at the start of the development effect and the effect time of the development effect. You can prevent it from happening. That is, if the remaining variation time becomes longer, the variation of the third symbol does not stop even though the development effect is completed, or conversely, if the effect period of the development effect becomes longer, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the development performance is not finished when the variation of the third symbol is finished. Therefore, it is possible to match the end timing of the development effect with the end timing of the variable display of the third pattern, so that the display effect without discomfort can be provided.

In the first embodiment, when it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is terminated and the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is displayed. The condition for terminating (shortening) is not limited to this. For example, when a new ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, the valid operation period may be terminated, and a success notification mode or a failure notification mode may be displayed.

In the first embodiment, when it is detected that the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effective period, the operation effective period is always terminated (shortened) and the success notification mode or failure notification mode is displayed. , but not limited to these. For example, the valid operation period may be terminated based on detection of pressing of the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times during the valid operation period. In this case, the same number of presses may be set each time as the number of presses required to terminate the valid operation period, or the number of presses may be randomly selected by lottery each time the valid operation period starts. A predetermined configuration may be used. With this configuration, the player who wants to accurately determine the maximum number of transformations can be encouraged to press the frame button 22 more positively. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the willingness of the player to participate in the continuous transformation performance. Furthermore, when determining the number of times of pressing necessary to terminate the effective period of operation, the type of continuous transformation effect being executed, whether or not the upper limit number of times of transformation has been reached, the result of lottery of special symbols, etc. The number of presses that are likely to be selected may be changed according to the situation when setting the valid period. Specifically, for example, it is possible to make it easier to select a smaller number of presses for the variation display that results in a big win than for the variation display that results in a loss. Further, for example, it may be configured such that a continuous transformation effect with a higher upper limit number of transformations is more likely to be selected with a lower number of presses, or the upper limit of transformation is set higher than when the upper limit number of transformations is reached. It may be configured such that a smaller number of times of pressing is more likely to be selected when the number of times has not been reached. By configuring in this way, the frame button 22 can be pressed while paying attention to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed until the end of the effective period of operation, so that the player's interest in the game during execution of the continuous transformation performance is further improved. can be made

In the first embodiment, when pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 is detected during the valid operation period, the valid operation period is always terminated and the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is displayed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to terminate the valid operation period. Further, for example, a plurality of frame buttons 22 may be provided, and when a depression is detected for each operation valid period, the operation valid period is terminated and the notification mode is displayed (or a lottery is performed as to whether or not to display). , and that the valid operation period is not terminated even if a depression is detected (or that the valid operation period is terminated only with a low probability). With this configuration, the player can play the game during the continuous transformation performance while considering which frame button 22 to press to terminate the effective period of operation, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

In the first embodiment, once the effective period of operation is set, the notification mode is not displayed until the period of effective operation ends unless pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. Alternatively, a case may be provided in which the valid operation period is terminated even if pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. Specifically, for example, each time an operation valid period is set, it may be determined by a lottery whether or not to terminate the period in the middle of the period. In addition, for example, corresponding to the type of continuous transformation effect, a type in which the operation effective period is not interrupted unless the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, and an operation effective period even if the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. may be configured to provide a type that is discontinued in the middle.

In the first embodiment, a value in the range of 1 to 5 times can be set as the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect, but the upper limit number of times may be set arbitrarily. By narrowing the range of the upper limit number of times that can be set (for example, to 1 to 3 times), it is possible to reduce the difference in the degree of expectation for a big hit for each number of transformations, so that the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations. Even in this case, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the big win. Conversely, by widening the range of the upper limit number of times that can be set (for example, 1 to 10 times), it is possible to give the player more opportunities to press (operate) the frame button 22. . Therefore, it is possible to further improve the willingness of the player to participate in the continuous transformation effect. In addition, in the first embodiment, in the continuous transformation production, the transformation was successful at least once (the success notification mode is displayed), but at least in some production types, the upper limit number of transformations is 0. It may be configured to be set every time (the transformation is not successful even once). In addition to the upper limit number of transformations, the length of the valid operation period, the success notification mode, the failure notification mode, the display period of the transition effect, and the like may be arbitrarily determined.

In the first embodiment, when the frame button 22 is never operated (that is, there is no operation effective period interrupted in the middle) in all types of continuous transformation effect, the upper limit number of times corresponding to the type Although the effective period of operation is set so that the continuous transformation performance ends before the success notification mode is displayed (the character 811 succeeds in transformation), it is not limited to this. In some types of continuous transformation effect, even if the frame button 22 is not pressed at all, the success notification mode may be displayed up to the upper limit number of times corresponding to the type. By configuring in this way, even when a player who does not want to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, it is possible to provide a case where the success notification mode is displayed up to the upper limit number of times. Therefore, even a player playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 who does not want to press the frame button 22 can enjoy the continuous transformation effect.

In the first embodiment, regardless of the end condition of the operation valid period, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed (the number of transformations) does not reach the upper limit, and the remaining fluctuation time at the end of the operation valid period is the lower limit. If the time is longer than , the transformation is successful (the success notification mode is displayed), but the configuration is not limited to this. The ratio of displaying the success notification mode may be varied according to the end condition of the operation valid period (whether the time set as the operation valid period has elapsed or whether the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected).

In the first embodiment, when the display time of the success notification mode of the first to fourth times in one continuous transformation effect has elapsed, a new operation valid period of 5 seconds is set, but it is limited to this. not a thing At the start of the continuous transformation effect, the operation valid period is set to 1, and when the depression of the frame button 22 is detected, the operation valid period is interrupted (decrementing of the valid period timer 223f is stopped). good. Then, when the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is less than the upper limit number of times, after the display time elapses, the interrupted effective period of operation is resumed (decrementing of the effective period timer 223f is restarted). good. Also, the length of the operation valid period may be configured to vary according to the maximum number of times the success notification mode is displayed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to reset the value of the effective period timer 223f every time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, so the processing load can be reduced. In this case, even if the frame button 22 is not detected to be pressed down for a predetermined period of time, the success notification mode may be displayed as long as the upper limit is not reached. By configuring in this way, the same operation as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above can be realized. Instead of interrupting the subtraction of the effective period timer 223f, the effective period timer 223f may continue to be decremented during the display time of the success notification mode. Then, during the display time of the success notification mode, even if the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, the pressing may be treated as invalid. Even when configured in this manner, the same operation as in the first embodiment can be realized.

In the first embodiment, by varying the display time of the transition performance, the end timing of the subsequent development performance and the end timing of the variable time are matched, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display time of the transition effect is fixed to 1 second, and after the end of the development effect (or as part of the development effect), the difference between the set effect time of the development effect and the remaining variable time is compensated. It is good also as composition which performs production for. In this way, by adjusting the time at the end of the performance, it is possible to match the end timing of the performance and the end timing of the variable display by simple control rather than simply setting the remaining fluctuation time to the performance time. can.

In the first embodiment, when pressing (operation) on the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period, immediately (before the operation effective period elapses) notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) aspect), but it is not limited to this. For example, when it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed, the notification mode may be displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, one second). In this case, an effect may be executed to inform the player that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been accepted for a predetermined period of time (for example, one second). By setting a predetermined period from the detection of the pressing of the frame button 22 to the display of the notification mode, an opportunity for the player to imagine which notification mode will be displayed during the predetermined period. can give Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, the predetermined period (the period from when the frame button 22 is pressed until the notification mode is displayed) may be fixed, or the predetermined period may be set according to the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22. It may be configured to be variable. As a specific example of changing the predetermined period, for example, if there is a margin of 1 second or more until the end timing of the effective operation period, 1 second is set, and a frame is set in a state of less than 1 second until the end timing of the effective operation period. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the notification mode is displayed at the end timing of the valid operation period when the depression of the button 22 is detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period from setting the operation valid period to displaying the notification mode from becoming longer than when the frame button 22 is not pressed. Further, for example, the notification mode may be displayed at the end timing of the valid operation period regardless of the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed.

In the first embodiment, rather than letting the operation effective period elapse without pressing the frame button 22 before the operation effective period elapses, it is better to press the frame button 22 to terminate the operation effective period. Although the configuration is such that the display timing of the mode is earlier, the present invention is not limited to this. In some or all of the types of continuous transformation effect, the display timing of the notification mode may be delayed when the frame button 22 is pressed. In other words, when it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed, a predetermined pressing effect indicating that the pressing has been detected may be set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). In other words, the effect period of the pressing effect may be set such that the pressing effect ends later than the timing at which the originally set operation valid period ends. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the notification mode is not always displayed immediately, and rather the display timing of the notification mode can be delayed. Each time, the player can predict whether it is better to press 22 or not. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified Example of First Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration is such that the transition effect is executed for a length corresponding to the remaining variation time at the time when the failure notification mode is executed. In addition, as a mode of the transition effect, a predetermined still image (or a moving image whose mode does not change significantly) is displayed until the timing of starting the development effect, and the end timing of the transition effect (the length of the execution period) Regardless, it is configured to prevent the display mode from becoming unnatural when switching to the development presentation.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the transition effect is composed of an effect mode in which the change in the mode is relatively large and an effect mode in which the change in the mode is small (no). Then, the end timing of the transitional effect is configured to be within the period during which the effect mode with relatively few changes in the mode is displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the display mode during execution of the transition effect. In addition, by increasing the degree of freedom of the transition performance, only the performance time of the transition performance covers the difference time between the performance time of the development performance and the remaining variable time. That is, in this modified example, the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to 1 second.

With reference to FIG. 83, the transition effect in this modified example will be described. In addition, in this modified example, data of a base effect, which is the basis for executing the transition effect, is prepared in the same manner as in the development effect in the first embodiment described above. The base performance has a display period of 4 seconds, and by executing the performance from the beginning or in the middle of the base performance, the transition performance of the corresponding performance period can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 83, the data of the base effect for executing the transition effect of this modified example includes data of four types of display modes in one piece of data. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 83, the data for one second (first section) at the beginning of the base effect consists of data corresponding to the effect in which the character 811 looks around for an object (monster 812) to fight in the development effect. ing. The data corresponding to the 1-second to 2-second lapse of the base effect (second section) is composed of data corresponding to the effect in which the silhouette of the enemy monster 812 appears in front of the character 811 . That is, it is composed of data corresponding to an effect in which it is unclear to the player which type the monster 812 that fights against the character 811 this time is. This effect allows the player to imagine which type of monster 812 he will fight.

Also, the data corresponding to the time point of 2 seconds elapsed to the time point of 3 seconds elapsed (the third section) of the base presentation consists of data corresponding to the presentation in which the type of the monster 812 fighting the character 811 is clarified in this development presentation. ing. That is, it is composed of data corresponding to an effect in which the silhouette of the monster 812 that was displayed as a silhouette is removed and the mode of the monster 812 fighting the character 811 is displayed. With this effect, it is possible to suggest to the player, depending on the type of the monster 812, the degree of expectation for the subsequent development effect.

In this way, the effect corresponding to the time from the beginning to the time 1 second has passed (first section), the effect corresponding to the time 1 second has passed to the time 2 seconds have passed (second section), and the time 2 seconds have passed to the time 3 seconds have passed The effect corresponding to (the third section) is an effect in which the change in the display mode on the third symbol display device 81 is relatively large. That is, the character 811 moves to various places, the silhouette of the monster 812 suddenly appears in front of the character 811, and the silhouette of the monster 812 that was displayed as a silhouette disappears. is changed to a completely different content is executed.

On the other hand, the data corresponding to the 3-second to 4-second lapse of the base effect (fourth section) is a stationary state in which the character 811 and the monster 812 of the type announced in the second section are facing each other. It is composed of data corresponding to an effect in which an image (see FIG. 8A) is displayed. In other words, it is composed of data corresponding to an effect in which the display mode does not change (relatively small) over time. By executing the transition performance so that the timing of switching to the development performance comes within the range of the third section, it is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming unnatural when switching to the development performance. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 83, in this modified example, three types of start timings (first positions of the first to third sections) are set in the base effect. Which of the three types of start timing is set as the start timing is selected according to the effect period of the transition effect. To allow a player to confirm the transitional performance without making the player feel uncomfortable even if the transitional performance is started at any start timing, since these start timings are all set at good delimiters of the performance. can be done. Here, in this modification, as in the first embodiment, the difference between the remaining variation time at the display start timing of the failure notification mode and the presentation time of the development presentation is set to be within the range of 2 to 5 seconds. Then, the production time (production type) of the development production is determined. In this modification, as described above, the display period of the failure notification mode is fixed to 1 second, so the effect period of the transition effect is within the range of 1 to 4 seconds. In this modified example, it is determined from which start timing the base effect of the transition effect is to be started based on the effect period of the transition effect.

More specifically, if the effect period of the transition effect is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the data from the third start timing (beginning of the third section) in the data of the base effect Set as data for executing the transition effect of. As a result, the end timing of the transition effect (the timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the fourth section. That is, during the effect period of 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the effect of the 3rd section for 1 second is first executed, and then the effect (still image) of the 4th section is displayed until the end timing of the transition effect. . As a result, the timing of switching to the development performance (the end timing of the transition performance) can be set within the range of the fourth section, so that the player can switch the performance with a natural appearance.

In addition, if the effect period of the transition effect is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the data from the second start timing (beginning of the second section) in the data of the base effect is changed to the transition effect this time. Set as data for execution. As a result, the end timing of the transitional effect (the timing when the value of the transitional effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the range of the fourth section, as in the case where the effect period is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds. can. That is, in the production period of 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the 1-second production of the second section and the 1-second production of the third section are executed, and then the fourth section is performed until the end timing of the transition production. to display the effect (still image). As a result, the timing of switching to the development performance (the end timing of the transition performance) can be set within the range of the fourth section, so that the player can switch the performance with a natural appearance.

Furthermore, if the effect period of the transition effect is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the data from the first start timing (beginning of the first section) in the data of the base effect is changed to the transition effect this time. Set as data for execution. As a result, as in other cases, the end timing of the transition effect (the timing when the value of the transition effect time timer 223k becomes 0) can be set within the range of the fourth section. That is, in the production period of 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the production of 1 second for each of the 1st section to the 3rd section is executed, and then the production of the 4th section (still image) until the end timing of the transition production. display. As a result, the timing of switching to the development performance (the end timing of the transition performance) can be set within the range of the fourth section, so that the player can switch the performance with a natural appearance.

As described above, in this modified example, when executing a transition effect that is a connection effect between the continuous transformation effect and the development effect, the effect data (first section ~ 3rd section performance data) and the performance data corresponding to the mode in which the display mode does not change (the change is relatively small), and the transition performance is executed using the data of the base performance. . In addition, the transition performance is set to start from any one of a plurality of start timings preset for the base performance according to the performance time of the transition performance. In other words, according to the presentation time of the transition presentation, the range of data used for execution of the transition presentation is selected. In this way, by configuring so that the transition performance with different performance time can be executed using one base performance, the display data for executing the transition performance can be reduced, so that the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. can be reduced.

In addition, in this modification, regardless of the effect time of the transition effect, the end timing of the transition effect is set during the display of the effect based on the effect data corresponding to the mode in which the display mode does not change (the change is relatively small). , to select the start timing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a natural appearance to the player when ending the transition effect and switching to the development effect.

In this modified example, three start timings are set for the base effect, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be set arbitrarily.

In this modified example, by adjusting the effect time of the transition effect, the difference time between the remaining variable time and the effect time of the development effect is compensated, but the configuration is not limited to this. As in the first embodiment, the configuration may be such that the remaining presentation time is adjusted by the failure notification mode and the transition presentation. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a base effect is provided for the failure notification mode as well as the transition effect. Then, the failure notification mode may be displayed using the rendering data within the range corresponding to the display period of the failure notification mode among the performance data of the base presentation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the variations of the failure notification mode and the transition effect.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, assuming that the frame button 22 has not been pressed even once during the operation valid period in one continuous transformation effect, before the success notification mode of the upper limit number of times is displayed, It was configured to set an operation effective period of length for ending the transformation effect. In other words, when all the transformations are executed with the expiration of the operation valid period as a trigger, before the maximum number of transformations (success notification mode) are executed, the production period is the length of the production period. was configured to set In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effective period, the operation effective period is terminated, so that only when the game method is performed in which the operation effective period is terminated by positively pressing the frame button 22 is performed. , the upper limit number of successful notification modes can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed during the valid operation period, the success notification mode, Alternatively, the configuration is such that the failure notification mode is not displayed. That is, it is configured such that it is impossible to shorten the period from when the operation effective period is set until the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is displayed. In addition, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 in each operation valid period. It is configured to be long. By configuring in this way, as in the first embodiment, only when the player positively presses the frame button 22, the number of times of transformation can reach the upper limit number of times set for each effect type. It is possible.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Also, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 58, the change over time of the presentation mode during execution of the continuous transformation presentation of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58(a) is a diagram showing changes over time in the effect mode when the maximum number of times of transformation is four and the player does not press the frame button 22 during each operation valid period. Also, FIG. 58(b) is a diagram showing changes over time in the effect mode when the maximum number of transformations is four and the player actively presses the frame button 22 during each operation valid period. be.

In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the super reach variation in which the continuous transformation effect is set is executed, the valid period of the first operation is set 11 seconds after the start of the variation. be. In the second embodiment, since the valid operation period is not terminated in the middle, the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) displayed after the operation valid period starts at the start of the operation valid period is included. predetermined mode. That is, at the start of the valid operation period, a display start of a series of presentation modes, which is a combination of the presentation mode during the valid operation period and the notification mode, is set. Hereinafter, an effect mode composed of one operation effective period and one notification mode set after the effective period is referred to as a transformation effect mode.

Regarding which notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is set, the transformation mode is set when the transformation mode starts (at the start of the operation valid period). It is determined by preliminarily discriminating the remaining fluctuation time at the time of termination (the time of termination of the notification mode). Specifically, first, a period selection table 222d (see FIG. 60), which will be described later, is used to determine the display period of the transformation effect mode. Next, the remaining variation time (T) at the end of the transformation performance mode predicted from the determined display period is compared with the lower limit value of the remaining variation time prescribed for each performance type of the continuous transformation performance. Then, when the predicted value of the remaining variation time (T) at the end of the transformation effect mode is a value greater than the lower limit value by 5 seconds or more, a success report is displayed as the report mode displayed after the operation effective period has elapsed. The configuration is such that the transformation effect mode in which the mode is displayed is selected. On the other hand, in other cases, the failure notification mode is set. Note that 5 seconds is the shortest time (minimum value of the display period of the transformation effect mode) from the start of the valid operation period to the end of the display of the notification mode. That is, when it is determined that there is a margin of 5 seconds or more after the end of the notification mode, the display time for newly displaying at least one new transformation performance mode with the failure notification mode can be secured, so that the success notification can be given. Display the mode. On the other hand, if the margin for the lower limit is predicted to be less than 5 seconds after the transformation effect mode ends, the display period for displaying the new transformation effect mode cannot be secured, so the transformation accompanied by the failure notification mode. By setting the performance mode, the continuous transformation performance is terminated. As a result, the type of transformation effect mode can be flexibly changed according to the remaining variable time.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), a transformation effect mode with a display period of 5 seconds (operation effective period of 4 seconds) is set as the first transformation effect mode. As a result, the predicted value of the remaining variation time is 44 seconds when the display period of the first transformation effect mode has elapsed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, but in this continuous transformation performance (continuous transformation performance D2 in which the maximum number of transformations is 4), the lower limit residual variation time is set to 24 seconds, and the predicted The residual fluctuation time is a value larger than the lower limit by 5 seconds or more. Therefore, the transformation effect mode with the success notification mode is set as the first transformation effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), the first success notification mode is displayed when the 4 seconds set as the operation valid period has passed. Although the details will be described later, in one continuous transformation effect, the number of consecutive operation effective periods in which the frame button 22 has not been pressed even once is counted by a non-press counter 223r, which will be described later. Depending on the counter value of the non-press counter 223r, the length of the operation valid period (the length of the display period of the transformation effect mode) that is set is variable (the larger the counter value, the longer the period that is set). , see FIG. 60(c)). Since this time is the valid period of the first operation, 1 is set to the non-press counter 223r.

When the display period of the first success notification mode (the display period of the transformation effect mode) elapses (when 16 seconds have passed since the start of the variation), the second transformation effect mode is set. The display period of the second transformation effect mode is set to 7 seconds (of which, the operation valid period is 6 seconds) corresponding to 1, which is the value of the non-press counter 223r. The remaining variation time is 37 seconds at the end of the second transformation effect mode, and since there is a margin of 5 seconds or more with respect to the lower limit value, the second transformation effect mode is also set with a success notification mode. be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the success notification mode for 1 second is displayed after the operation effective period of 6 seconds has elapsed.

At the end timing of the second transformation effect mode (at 23 seconds from the start of the variation), the third transformation effect mode is set. As the display period of the transformation effect mode for the third time, 9 seconds (of which, the operation effective period is 8 seconds) corresponding to 2 which is the value of the non-press counter 223r is selected. The remaining variable time at the end of the third transformation performance mode is 28 seconds, and the margin for the lower limit of 24 seconds is less than 5 seconds, so the third transformation performance mode is accompanied by a failure notification mode. mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58(a), an operation effective period of 8 seconds and a failure notification mode of 1 second are displayed, after which the transition effect is executed. That is, the continuous transformation effect is terminated after only two transformations without performing four transformations (display of the success notification mode), which is the upper limit number of transformations. In addition, in the present second embodiment, the presentation time of the development presentation is predetermined for each presentation type of the continuous transformation presentation. For the transition effect, the time difference between the remaining variable time and the effect time of the development effect is set. In the example of FIG. 58(a), after the transition effect of the effect time of 5 seconds is set, the development effect (hit development effect D2) of 23 seconds is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58(b), in the continuous transformation effect, when the player presses the frame button 22 during the operation effective period of each time, the effect period of each transformation effect mode for the first to fifth times is Each is set to the shortest 5 seconds. As a result, four transformations, which is the maximum number of transformations, can be accommodated within the performance period of the continuous transformation performance.

As described above, the player positively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period, thereby setting a short operation valid period, thereby allowing more successful notification modes to be displayed. That is, in the continuous transformation performance, it becomes easy to perform transformation up to the set upper limit number of transformations, so the degree of expectation of the transformation can be more accurately predicted from the number of transformations. Therefore, since the player can be made to press the frame button 22 positively, the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation effect can be enhanced. In addition, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation performance (does not press the frame button 22) plays a game with the pachinko machine 10, the expectation level is originally high (the upper limit number of transformations is large). In this case as well, the performance period of the continuous transformation performance ends with a relatively small number of transformations. As a result, as a case where the number of transformations becomes small, there is a case where the number of transformations ends with a small number of transformations due to the lapse of the performance period despite the continuous transformation performance with a large upper limit number of times (that is, the expectation of a big win is high). can be generated. As a result, even when the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of transformations, the expectation for the big win can be enhanced.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 59(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), the ROM 222 in the second embodiment has a period selection table 222d newly added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14(a)). They are different in that respect. Also, the contents of the transformation effect selection table 222b and the development effect mode selection table 222c are partially changed.

The period selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when setting a new transformation effect mode. is a data table that defines

As shown in FIG. 60(c), the value "0" of the non-press counter 223r is defined in association with "5 seconds" as the display period of the transformation effect mode and "4 seconds" as the operation effective period. It is Therefore, when a new transformation effect mode is set while the value of the non-press counter 223r is 0, a transformation effect mode of 5 seconds including an operation effective period of 4 seconds is selected. It should be noted that the non-press counter 223r becomes 0 when the first valid operation period in the continuous transformation effect starts, or when pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the previous valid operation period. be.

Further, the value "1" of the non-press counter 223r is defined in association with "7 seconds" as the display period of the transformation effect mode and "6 seconds" as the effective operation period. Therefore, when a new transformation effect mode is set with the value of the non-press counter 223r being 1, a transformation effect mode of 7 seconds including an operation effective period of 6 seconds is selected. It should be noted that the value of the non-press counter 223r becomes 1 because, in the continuous transformation effect of 1, pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period two times before, and during the operation effective period one time before. This is the case where the depression of the frame button 22 is not detected, or the case where the depression of the frame button 22 is not detected during the first operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect.

Further, the value "2 or more" of the non-press counter 223r is defined in association with "9 seconds" as the transformation presentation mode display period and "8 seconds" as the operation effective period. As a result, in one continuous transformation effect, if the operation effective period during which no pressing of the frame button 22 is detected continues two or more times and the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is 2 or more, the period of 8 seconds is set. A transformation presentation mode is set for a display period of 9 seconds, including the operation effective period. When setting the transformation effect mode, the remaining variation time at the time when the transformation effect mode to be set ends is determined (estimated). Then, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than the lower limit value set for each effect type, regardless of the specified content of the period selection table 222d, the shortest operation valid period is set. . As a result, it is possible to ensure the production period of the development production.

Thus, in the second embodiment, when setting the display period (operation effective period) of the transformation effect mode, the operation set before the operation effective period to be set in one continuous transformation effect The length of the display period (operation effective period) of the transformation performance mode is determined in consideration of the operation status of the frame button 22 during the effective period, and the operation effective period during which the depression of the frame button 22 was not detected in the past. exists, the operation effective period to be set tends to become longer. More specifically, the longer the display period (operation valid period) is set, the greater the number of continuous operation valid periods during which no pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. As a result, unless the player actively presses the frame button 22, the display period of the transformation effect mode becomes longer, and the chance of displaying the success notification mode decreases. Therefore, a player who wants to display more success notification modes can positively press the frame button 22 during execution of the continuous transformation effect.

In the second embodiment, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected, the value of the non-press counter 223r is reset to 0, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected, a configuration may be adopted in which 1 is subtracted from the value of the non-press counter 223r. With this configuration, as the value of the non-press counter 223r increases, it becomes more difficult to shorten the effective period of subsequent operations. can be motivated to press . Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the continuous transformation effect.

In the second embodiment, when the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is 2 or more, the same length (9 seconds) of the transformation effect mode is displayed. Even in a range where the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r is greater than 2, the display period of the transformation effect mode may be lengthened as the counter value increases.

Next, details of the transformation effect selection table 222b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60(a). Similar to the transformation effect selection table 222b in the first embodiment, this transformation effect selection table 222b selects the effect mode of the continuous transformation effect when a variation pattern with continuous transformation effect is selected from the variation pattern table 222a. It is a data table referred to for determination.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), the transformation effect selection table 222b in the second embodiment defines five types of continuous transformation effects A2 to E2. Continuous transformation production A2 is a production type corresponding to continuous transformation production A in the first embodiment, and the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations and the associated production counter 223n value are are identical. Similarly, the continuous transformation performance B2 corresponds to the continuous transformation performance B in the first embodiment, the continuous transformation performance C2 corresponds to the continuous transformation performance C in the first embodiment, and the continuous transformation performance D2 corresponds to the first implementation. Corresponding to the continuous transformation production D in the form, the continuous transformation production E2 corresponds to the continuous transformation production E in the first embodiment, and the maximum (upper limit) number of transformations and the associated value of the production counter 223n are identical.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the continuous transformation effect A2 has the lower limit of the remaining variation time set to 39 seconds. That is, each transformation effect mode (operation valid period, notification mode) is set so that the remaining variation time is 39 seconds or more at the timing when the last notification mode of the continuous transformation effect A2 ends. Similarly, the continuous transformation performance B2 has the lower limit of the remaining variation time set to 34 seconds, the continuous transformation performance C2 has the lower limit of the remaining variation time set to 29 seconds, and the continuous transformation performance D2 has the lower limit of the remaining variation time. is set to 24 seconds, and the lower limit of the remaining variation time of the continuous transformation effect E2 is set to 19 seconds. The lower limit value of these remaining fluctuation times is set to a value obtained by adding one second to the effect time of the advanced effect corresponding to each effect type. That is, after the end of the continuous transformation effect, at least one second of the transition effect is passed, and a time is set in which the corresponding development effect can be executed. In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during all operation valid periods in one continuous transformation effect, in addition to being able to display the success notification mode of the upper limit number of times, the remaining change time is displayed in the transformation effect selection table 222b. It is configured such that the continuous transformation effect ends at the timing that matches the prescribed lower limit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60(b), details of the development mode selection table 222c in the second embodiment will be described. As with the development mode selection table 222c in the first embodiment, the development mode selection table 222c is a data table that is referred to when selecting the development mode of the development mode to be executed after the continuous transformation mode ends. be.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), the development effect mode selection table 222c in the second embodiment has a pair of the continuous transformation effect type, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the development effect effect mode (performance time). It is one correspondence. Specifically, when the continuous transformation effect A2 is executed as the effect type, the development effect with the effect time of 38 seconds is selected. That is, if the variable display this time is "win super reach", the win development effect A2 with the effect time of 38 seconds is selected, and if it is "loss super reach", the loss development effect A2 with the effect time of 38 seconds is selected.

Similarly, when the continuous transformation performance B2 is executed as the performance type, the hit development performance B2 with the performance time of 33 seconds or the loss development performance B2 is selected, and when the continuous transformation performance C2 is executed, A winning development performance C2 or a losing development performance C2 with a performance time of 28 seconds is selected. Further, when the continuous transformation performance D2 is executed as the performance type, the winning development performance D2 or the losing development performance B2 with the performance time of 23 seconds is selected, and when the continuous transformation performance E2 is executed, the performance is performed. A winning development effect E2 with a time of 18 seconds or a losing development effect E2 is selected. Thus, by prescribing the performance type of the continuous transformation performance and the performance mode of the development performance in association with each other, the processing load when selecting the performance type of the development performance can be reduced.

Next, the RAM 223 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59(b). FIG. 59(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 59(b), the RAM 223 in the second embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14(b)) in the display period timer 223p and the non-press counter. 223r, a depressed flag 223s, and a transition effect flag 223t are added. Another difference is that the success notification mode timer 223i and the failure notification mode timer 223j are deleted.

The display period timer 223p is a timer that measures a period from the start of one transformation effect mode to the end of the display period of the transformation effect mode. The value of the display period timer 223p is updated by 1 in the valid period process 2 executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 33) (see S4511 in FIG. 63).

The non-pressing number counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of consecutive operation effective periods in which pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected in one continuous transformation effect. This non-pressing frequency counter 223r adds 1 to the value when the frame button 22 is not pressed even once during the valid operation period (see S4514 in FIG. 63). Based on the value of the non-press counter 223r and the defined contents of the period selection table 222d, the length of the display period (and operation effective period) of the transformation effect mode is determined.

The pressed flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected in one operation valid period. If it is ON, it means that pressing of the frame button 22 has already been detected. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that the frame button 22 has not been pressed even once during the operation valid period. This depressed flag 223s is set to ON when depression of the frame button 22 is detected for the first time during the operation effective period in frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see S4112 in FIG. 61). Also, after the value of the non-press counter 223r is updated at the end of the valid operation period, it is set to off (see S4515 in FIG. 63).

The transition effect flag 223t is a flag indicating whether or not the transition effect should be set when the display period of the transformation effect mode being executed ends. If this transition effect flag 223t is ON, it means that the start of the transition effect should be set at the timing when the display period of the transformation effect mode ends, and if it is OFF, a new transformation effect mode should be set. means it should. This transition performance flag 223t is set to ON when a new transformation performance mode is set and it is determined that the transformation performance mode is the last transformation performance mode in the current continuous transformation performance. That is, when it is determined that the end timing of the display period of the transformation effect mode is within 5 seconds from the lower limit value of the remaining variation time defined for each effect type, it is set to ON (see S5116 in FIG. 64). .

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 61, the details of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S4021) will be described. This frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S4021) is a process that is executed in place of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. , is a process for performing control according to the pressed status.

In the processing of S4101 and S4102 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, S4101 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment respectively. , S4102 are executed.

Further, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S4102 that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S4102: Yes), It is determined whether or not the done flag 223s is on (S4111). In the processing of S4111, if it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is ON (S4111: Yes), it means that the pressing detected this time is not the first pressing in the valid operation period, and the processing ends as it is. do.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4111 that the pressed flag 223s is off (S4111: No), it means that the first pressing in the valid operation period has been detected, so first the pressed flag 223s is turned on. (S4112). Then, the value of the non-press count counter 223r is reset to 0 (S4113), the press effect corresponding to the press is set (S4114), and this processing ends. Note that the pressing effect is an effect for informing the player that the frame button 22 has been pressed. It is an effect that generates a predetermined sound effect.

Next, the effect update process 2 (S4022) will be described with reference to FIG. This effect update process 2 (S4022) is a process that is executed instead of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. , this is a process for varying the mode of presentation according to the remaining variable time, the values of various timers, and the like.

In the processes of S4301 to S4304, S4310, and S4311 of the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, S4301 to S4304, S4304 and S4304 of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4310 and S4311 is executed.

In addition, in the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the validity period flag 223e is ON (S4304: Yes), during the validity period in the first embodiment Instead of the process (see FIG. 37(b)), the valid period process 2 is executed (S4321), and this process ends. This effective period process 2 (S4321) is a process for determining the end timing of the operation effective period, like the effective period process (see FIG. 37B) in the first embodiment. The details of this valid period process 2 (S4321) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in effect update processing 2 (see FIG. 62), when it is determined that the effective period flag 223e is off in the processing of S4304 (S4304: No), then the value of the timer 223p during the display period is greater than 0. (S4322), and if it is determined to be 0 (S4322: No), the process proceeds to S4310. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4322 that the value of the timer 223p during the display period is greater than 0 (S4322: Yes), the process during the display period is executed (S4323), and this process ends. This display period process (S4323) is a process for determining the timing at which the display period of the transformation effect mode ends, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, details of the valid period process 2 (S4321) described above will be described with reference to FIG. This valid period processing 2 (S4321) is, as described above, a process for determining the end timing of the operation valid period.

In the valid period process 2 (see FIG. 63), first, the value of the valid period timer 223f and the value of the during display period timer 223p are decremented by one and updated (S4511). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effective period timer 223f after the subtraction has reached 0 (the end timing of the operation effective period has come) (S4512). End the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4512 that the valid period timer 223f has reached 0 (S4512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pressed flag 223s is ON (S4513). In the process of S4513, if it is determined that the pressed flag 223s is off (S4513: No), it means that pressing of the frame button 22 was not detected during the current operation valid period. The value of the number-of-presses counter 223r is updated by adding 1 (S4514), and the process proceeds to S4515.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4513 that the pressed flag 223s is ON (S4513: Yes), pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected at least once during the valid operation period. , S4514 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4515. In the process of S4515, the valid period flag 223e is set to OFF to set the end of the operation valid period, and the pressed flag 223s is set to OFF (S4515), and this process ends.

By executing this effective period process 2 (see FIG. 63), it is possible to appropriately update the value of the non-press counter 223r, which indicates the number of consecutive times during the operation effective period in which no pressing of the frame button 22 was detected. . Therefore, it is possible to set the effective period of subsequent operations to an appropriate length.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, details of the processing during the display period (S4323) described above will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this display period processing (S4323).

In the display period processing (see FIG. 64), first, the value of the display period timer 223p is subtracted by 1 (S5101), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the display period timer 223p after the subtraction is 0. (S5102). In the process of S5102, if it is determined that the value of the timer 223p during the display period after the subtraction is not 0 (S5102: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5102, if it is determined that the value of the timer 223p has become 0 during the display period after the subtraction (S5102: Yes), it means that the display period of the transformation effect mode ends. A process for setting either a new transformation effect mode or a transition effect is executed.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the transition effect flag 223t is ON (S5103), and if it is determined to be ON (S5103: Yes), it means that the transition effect should be set. In order to do so, first, the mode of the development effect corresponding to the current type of effect is selected from the development mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 60(b)), and the data corresponding to the read mode of the development effect is developed. Stored in the effect storage area 223m (S5104). Next, the difference between the remaining variable time and the effect time of the development effect selected from the development effect mode selection table 222c in the process of S5104 is set as the effect time of the transition effect set this time (S5105), and this process is executed. finish. By executing the processing of S5105, the difference between the effect time of the development effect and the remaining variable time can be covered by the effect time of the transition effect. can be matched.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, if it is determined that the transition effect flag 223t is off (S5103: No), it means that a new transformation effect mode should be set. The display period of the transformation effect mode and the operation valid period corresponding to the value of are read out from the period selection table 222d (S5106). Next, it is determined whether or not the read display period is within the presently set production period of the continuous transformation production (S5107). More specifically, it is determined whether or not the time obtained by subtracting the read display period from the current remaining variation time is equal to or greater than the lower limit value predetermined for each effect type.

In the process of S5107, when it is determined that the display period of the transformation effect mode exceeds the range of the effect period of the continuous transformation effect (S5107: No), the display period of the transformation effect mode is included in the effect period of the continuous transformation effect. to the shortest display duration of 5 seconds. That is, a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the timer 223p during the display period, and a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set to the effective period timer 223f (S5108). Next, the transformation effect mode of the type in which the failure notification mode is displayed in the set display period is set (S5109), both the transition effect flag 223t and the effective period flag 223e are set to ON (S5110), and this process is executed. finish. That is, when it is determined that a long operation effective period is selected and the end timing of the transformation effect mode exceeds the effect period of the continuous transformation effect, the display period is switched to the shortest and the continuous transformation effect is terminated. .

In the process of S5107, when it is determined that the end timing of the transformation effect mode is within the effect period of the continuous transformation effect (S5107: Yes), the timer value corresponding to the display period read out in the process of S5106 is displayed. During the period, the timer 223p is set, and the timer value corresponding to the read operation valid period is set in the valid period timer 223f (S5111). Next, the effective period of operation is started by setting the effective period flag 223e to ON (S5112).

When the processing of S5112 ends, next, is the timing at which the display period read out in the processing of S5106 elapses (the end timing of the transformation effect mode) is after 5 seconds before the effect time of the continuous transformation effect ends (lower limit is within 5 seconds for the remaining fluctuation time) (S5113), and when it is determined that there is a margin of 5 seconds or more for the effect period when the display period elapses (S5113: No), the value of the transformation number counter 223g is updated by adding 1 (S5114), and the execution of the transformation effect mode accompanied by the success notification mode is set to end in the display period set in the process of S5111 (S5115). , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5113, if it is determined that the end timing of the display period is after 5 seconds before the end of the effect period (S5113: Yes), the continuous transformation effect is ended in the operation effective period set this time. Then, the transition effect flag 223t is set to ON (S5116). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 4 (S5117), and if it is determined that the value is 4 (S5117: Yes), the process proceeds to S5114, and the fifth success. Set the execution of the notification mode. In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the maximum number of success notification modes is five, and after the fifth success notification mode is set, the transition effect is directly executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S5117, if it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is not 4 (is 3 or less) (S5117: No), the process ends when the display period set in the process of S5111 elapses. The execution of the transformation effect mode accompanied by the notification mode is set (S5118), and this process is terminated.

By executing this display period processing, the length of the valid operation period can be varied according to the number of consecutive valid operation periods in which pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment determines whether or not the player has pressed the frame button 22 during each operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect, and determines whether the frame button 22 has not been pressed. The longer the operation effective period is, the longer the operation effective period is set. With this configuration, the number of transformations (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) is set for each effect type only when the player positively presses the frame button 22, as in the first embodiment. It is possible to reach the upper limit number of times. Therefore, the player who wants to perform the transformation up to the upper limit number of times can actively press the frame button 22, so that the player's willingness to participate in the continuous transformation performance can be improved.

In the second embodiment, each value of the non-press counter 223r is associated with one display period of the transformation effect mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices if the tendency of the display period to be selected can be varied according to the number of consecutive times during which the frame button 22 has not been pressed. A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of display period candidates are associated with each other and defined. Then, one display period may be selected by lottery from among the candidates. Further, in the lottery for the display period, the larger the value of the non-press counter 223r, the higher the probability of selecting a longer display period. By configuring in this way, randomness can be imparted to the length of the set display period. Furthermore, in this case, the display period that is likely to be selected may be changed according to the lottery result of the special symbol. By constructing in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention not only to the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, but also to the length of the display period of the transformation performance mode. interest in the game can be further improved.

In the second embodiment, the length of the operation valid period to be set is varied according to the number of consecutive operation valid periods in which pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . If the player presses the frame button 22, the success notification mode can be displayed more frequently. . Then, it may be configured such that the greater the counted number of consecutive times, the shorter the length of the valid operation period to be set. Then, if the frame button 22 is positively pressed to increase the count value of the number of consecutive times, and if a shorter effective period of operation is not set, the number of consecutive times before reaching the upper limit number of times of transformation set for each effect type is reached. You may constitute so that a transformation performance may be complete|finished. By configuring in this manner, the player who wants to display more success notification modes can be encouraged to press the frame button 22 positively, as in the second embodiment described above. That is, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation performance.

In the second embodiment, the number of consecutive times the frame button 22 was not detected to be pressed was counted within one continuous transformation effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of times is inherited and counted. That is, the counter value of the non-pressing number counter 223r at the end of the previous continuous transformation effect is held, and in the next continuous transformation effect, counting is started from the held value of the non-pressing number counter 223r. may be In this case, the non-pressing number counter 223r itself may be held in the same state as when the previous continuous transformation effect ended, or the value of the non-pressing number counter 223r may be stored in the RAM 223 at the end of the continuous transformation effect. It may be saved in an area, and at the start of the continuous transformation effect, the saved counter value may be set again to the non-press counter 223r. By configuring in this way, the player's operation status in one continuous transformation performance can be inherited from the next time onward, so that the effect of not performing the operation can be increased. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to press the frame button 22 more positively.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the upper limit number of times of transformation is set for each effect type of the continuous transformation effect, and when the number of times of transformation is less than the upper limit and the remaining variation time is equal to or greater than the lower limit When the effective period of operation has expired, the transformation is always successful (the success notification mode is displayed).

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the number of times of transformation is less than the upper limit number of times, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the success notification mode. In addition, the ratio of displaying the success notification mode is configured to be higher for the variable display that results in a big hit than for the variable display that results in a loss. As a result, when the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases, the degree of expectation for the big win is further improved as compared with the first embodiment. Furthermore, the lottery executed by depressing the frame button 22 has a higher ratio of displaying the success notification mode than the lottery executed after the expiration of the operation valid period.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the voice lamp The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 65, the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 65(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65(a), the ROM 222 in the third embodiment has the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment. (See FIG. 14(a)), but is different in that a transformability determination table 222e is added.

The transformation propriety determination table 222e is referred to for determining whether to display the success notification mode or the failure notification mode when the display condition for the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is satisfied. data table. The details of the transformation permission/inhibition determination table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 65(b).

FIG. 65(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the transformation propriety determination table 222e. As shown in FIG. 65(b), the transformation propriety determination table 222e includes the variation type of the variation display for which the continuous transformation effect is set (whether it is a winning super reach or a losing super reach), and operation valid. The range of the counter value (random number) of the effect counter 223n for determining the display of the success notification mode is defined in association with each end condition of the period.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65(b), when the variation type is hit super reach and the effective operation period ends due to the detection of pressing of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n is A range of "0 to 79" is associated and defined. Of the 100 possible counter values (random numbers) of the production counter 223n, the number of counter values (random numbers) determined to display the success notification mode is 80. The ratio of displaying the success notification mode when the validity period has expired is 80% (80/100).

On the other hand, when the variation type is out of super reach and the effective operation period ends due to the detection of pressing of the frame button 22, a range of "50 to 99" is associated and defined as the value of the effect counter 223n. ing. Of the 100 possible counter values (random values) of the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random values) determined to display the success notification mode is 50. The ratio of displaying the success notification mode when the validity period has expired is 50% (50/100).

In this way, when the valid operation period expires during the execution of winning super reach, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80%. Since the success notification mode is displayed only at a rate of 50%, the higher the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the possibility that winning super reach is executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game during the continuous transformation performance in hopes that the success notification mode will continue more times.

Also, as shown in FIG. 65(b), when the variation type is hit super reach and the operation effective period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, the value of the effect counter 223n is "0 to 49. ” is specified. Of the 100 possible counter values (random values) of the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random values) determined to display the success notification mode is 50. The ratio of displaying the success notification mode when the validity period has expired is 50% (50/100).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation type is out of super reach, and the operation effective period ends without detecting the pressing of the button 22, the range of "60 to 99" is defined as the value of the effect counter 223n. . Of the 100 possible counter values (random numbers) of the effect counter 223n, the number of counter values (random numbers) determined to display the success notification mode is 40. The ratio of displaying the success notification mode when the validity period has expired is 40% (40/100).

In this way, when the valid operation period expires during the execution of winning super reach, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 50%. A success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 40%. That is, compared to the case where the effective period of operation ends due to the detection of the pressing of the frame button 22, the difference in the rate at which the display of the success notification mode is determined in the case of winning super reach and in the case of losing super reach. is decreasing. Therefore, when the operation effective period elapses without pressing the frame button 22, even if the success notification mode is displayed, the expectation for the big win is not so high. Therefore, a player who wishes to more accurately estimate the degree of expectation for a big win during execution of the continuous transformation performance can be encouraged to press the frame button 22 positively.

Further, when the effective period of operation elapses without pressing the frame button 22, the success notification mode is displayed only at a rate of 50% even during execution of winning super reach. That is, the configuration is such that the success notification mode is less likely to be displayed than when the depression of the frame button 22 is detected and the valid operation period ends. In other words, when a player who does not press the frame button 22 often plays a game, even when a big win is achieved, the continuous transformation effect is likely to end with a relatively small number of times of display of the success notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of cases in which a big win is achieved with a small number of times of displaying the success reporting mode, so that even if the continuous transformation performance ends with a small number of times of displaying the success reporting mode, the expectation for the big win can be made.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG. First, FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (S4031).

Frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66) is a process executed in the main process in place of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. This is a process for setting a corresponding effect when it is detected that the frame button 22 is pressed during the period.

In the processing of S4101 and S4102 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66), S4101 and S4102 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed. Further, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4102 that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S4102: Yes), the first implementation Transformation setting processing 3 is executed instead of transformation setting processing (see FIG. 35) in the form (S4121), and this processing is terminated to return to the main processing (see FIG. 33). Details of this transformation setting process 3 (S4121) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing transformation setting processing 3 (S4121). This transformation setting process 3 (S4121) is the same as the transformation setting process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, and is a process for setting the display of the notification mode corresponding to the remaining variation time, the number of transformations, etc. be.

In transformation setting processing 3 (see FIG. 67), S4201 to S4208 and S4210 to S4212 correspond to steps S4201 to S4208 and S4210 to S4212 of the transformation setting processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing is executed.

Further, in the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, in the process of S4203, the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than the upper limit number of transformations corresponding to the presentation type of the current continuous transformation presentation. (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time is within the period during which the success notification mode can be displayed (transformation is possible) (S4221). That is, it is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or greater than the lower limit defined for each effect type.

In the process of S4221, if it is determined that the display (transformation) of the success notification mode is not possible (S4221: No), the process is performed to set the failure notification mode and select the effect type of the development effect. to S4204. On the other hand, in the process of S4221, if it is determined that the display of the success notification mode is currently within the settable period (S4221: Yes), first, the transformation propriety determination table 222e (see FIG. 66(b)), The value of the effect counter 223n is read (S4222). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223n matches the counter value corresponding to the display determination of the success notification mode (transformation success) defined in the transformation propriety determination table 222e (S4223).

In the process of S4223, when it is determined that the counter value corresponds to the display determination of the success notification mode (S4223: Yes), the process proceeds to S4210 to display the success notification mode. On the other hand, in the process of S4223, if it is determined that the counter value does not correspond to the display determination of the success notification mode (S4223: No), the process proceeds to S4204 to display the failure notification mode.

With this transformation setting process 3, whether or not to display the success notification mode can be selected by lottery probability according to the type of variable display and the end conditions of the operation valid period. Thus, the player can predict whether or not the result of the current variable display will be a win. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying more attention to the type of notification mode displayed after the expiration of the operation effective period.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the rate at which the display of the success notification mode is determined is varied according to the variation type of the variation display in which the continuous transformation effect is set, and when a big win is achieved , the display of the success notification mode is determined at a higher rate than in the case of failure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to whether or not the success notification mode is displayed. In addition, a player who wants to check whether the success notification mode is displayed as many times as possible and to more accurately determine the degree of expectation for a big win is encouraged to press the frame button 22 positively. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the continuous transformation production.

Also in the third embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, by pressing the frame button 22 to terminate the valid operation period, the success notification mode is displayed up to the maximum number of times set for each effect type. It is configured so that it can be That is, in the third embodiment, when the player positively presses the frame button 22 to terminate the valid operation period in the middle and continues to win the lottery as to whether or not to display the success notification mode. , the success notification mode can be displayed up to the upper limit number of times. Therefore, compared to the first embodiment, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed tends to decrease. In other words, the number of times the success notification mode is displayed is likely to be relatively small, whether it is a win or a loss. I can hold you. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the continuous transformation effect.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the valid operation period expires based on detection of pressing of the frame button 22, and when the valid operation period expires without detecting pressing of the frame button 22, The lottery probability of whether or not to display the success notification mode is made different. Then, when the operation effective period ends without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22, the difference in the lottery probability that the display of the success notification mode is determined between the case of winning super reach and the case of losing super reach. configured to be less. With this configuration, when the operation effective period elapses without pressing the frame button 22, even if the success notification mode is displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win is not so high, so the continuous transformation effect is being executed. A player who wants to estimate the degree of expectation of a big win more accurately can be made to press the frame button 22 positively.

In the third embodiment, when the lottery for whether or not to display the success notification mode is omitted, the failure notification mode is displayed and the continuous transformation effect is terminated, but the continuous transformation effect is not necessarily terminated. no need to let For example, instead of the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the upper limit of the number of times for setting the operation valid period is set, and until the upper limit is reached, the continuous transformation effect is continued even if the failure notification mode is displayed. (a new operation effective period is set after the failure notification mode ends). By configuring in this way, the display lottery of the success notification mode can be performed more times. Further, by positively pressing the frame button 22 to terminate the valid operation period, it is possible to perform the display lottery in the success notification mode more times. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately predict whether the game will be a win or a loss based on the percentage of success notification modes displayed. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be pushed more positively in the continuous transformation effect.

In the third embodiment, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the success notification mode is displayed more than when the operation effective period has passed without detecting the pressing of the frame button 22. Although the winning probability in the lottery for whether or not to display is configured to be high, it is not limited to this. For example, when the special symbol lottery results in a big hit, pressing the frame button 22 increases the winning probability of the display lottery of the success notification mode, while the special symbol lottery is lost. may be configured so that the winning probability is the same whether the frame button 22 is pressed or not. By configuring in this way, when the frame button 22 is pressed and the success notification mode is displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win can be increased, so that the player can press the frame button 22 more positively. can be made Further, for example, pressing the frame button 22 increases the winning probability of the display lottery of the success notification mode, while if the lottery of the special pattern is lost, pressing the frame button 22 wins. It may be configured so that the probability is low. By configuring in this way, when the frame button 22 is pressed and the success notification mode is displayed, the expectation of the big win can be made higher. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which makes the lottery probability of whether to display a success notification mode depend only on the lottery result of a special symbol. That is, whether or not the success notification mode is displayed with the same probability whether the depression of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period or when the operation effective period elapses without detecting the depression of the frame button 22. It is good also as a structure which performs lottery of.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72. FIG. In the above-described third embodiment, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the success notification mode, and if the lottery is won, the success notification mode is displayed. In addition, the lottery probability that the display of the success notification mode is determined is set higher during execution of winning super reach than during execution of loss super reach. As a result, as the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases, the player's expectation for the big win is further improved.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, during a predetermined period of one continuous transformation effect (operation effective period of the first two times), the state of depression of the frame button 22 (operation state of the player) is determined, and the It is configured to vary the rate at which the success notification mode is set according to the determination result. That is, in the continuous transformation performance, it is determined whether or not the player actively presses the frame button 22 when the effective period of operation is set, and the degree of expectation as to whether or not the player wins is suggested according to the determination result. The method (selection rate when selecting the notification mode) is made different.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Also, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the third It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Elements that are the same as those of the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
First, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. First, the details of the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 68(a) is a block diagram showing the development mode selection table 222c in the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the development mode selection table 222c of the fourth embodiment, the development mode to be selected corresponds to the value of the transformation number counter 223g and each variation type of the variable display. It is stipulated with

It should be noted that the effect mode of the advanced effect can be determined in accordance with the value of the transformation number counter 223g because, in the fourth embodiment, the valid operation period is not terminated in the middle, as in the second embodiment described above. This is because Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, as in the first and third embodiments, the effective operation period is always set to 5 seconds. Therefore, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the value of the transformation number counter 223g at the time of setting the display of the failure notification mode and the remaining variation time. For example, if the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2, it means that the operation effective period of 5 seconds is displayed 3 times and the success notification mode of 1 second is displayed 2 times, so the failure notification mode is displayed. The elapsed time at the time of setting is always 28 seconds (11 seconds + 5 seconds x 3 + 1 second x 2 until the continuous transformation effect starts). That is, the remaining variation time is 32 seconds. Therefore, considering the display period of 1 second of the failure notification mode and the display period of 1 second of the transition effect, if the effect for 30 seconds is executed as the development effect, the end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the development effect are obtained. can be matched.

Similarly, if the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 4, it means that the operation effective period of 5 seconds has been displayed 5 times and the success notification mode of 1 second has been displayed 4 times. The elapsed time at the time of setting the display is always 40 seconds (11 seconds + 5 seconds x 5 + 1 second x 4). That is, the remaining variation time is 20 seconds. Therefore, if the failure notification mode and the development effect of 18 seconds with the effect time of the transition effect reduced are executed, the end timing of the development effect can be matched with the end timing of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the development mode selection table 222c, the value "2" of the transformation number counter 223g is associated with a development performance with a performance time of 30 seconds. That is, a win development effect A4 with a performance time of 30 seconds is associated with the win super reach, and a loss development effect A4 with a performance time of 30 seconds is defined with respect to the loss super reach.

Similarly, the value "3" of the transformation number counter 223g is defined in association with an extended effect with a duration of 24 seconds. That is, a winning development effect B4 with a performance time of 24 seconds is associated with the winning super reach, and a losing development effect B4 with a performance time of 24 seconds is defined with respect to the losing super reach. Further, the value "4, 5" of the number-of-transformations counter 223g is defined in association with an extended effect with a duration of 18 seconds. That is, a win development performance C4 with a performance time of 18 seconds is defined for the winning super reach, and a losing development performance C4 with a performance time of 18 seconds is defined for the losing super reach.

In this way, by referring to the development mode selection table 222c, it is possible to determine the type of development performance that matches the remaining variation time according to the value of the transformation number counter 223g. can be matched with the end timing of the variable display.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 68(b) to 68(d), details of the transformation permission/inhibition determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 68(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the transformation propriety determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68(b), the transformation permission/inhibition determination table 222e in the fourth embodiment shows that when it is determined that a player who tends to press the frame button 22 in the continuous transformation effect is playing a game, a table for pressing tendency 222e1 used for determining whether or not to display a success notification mode; and a non-pressing tendency table 222e2 used to determine whether to display the mode.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, after the start of the continuous transformation effect, the tendency of the player is discriminated over two valid operation periods. That is, when the depression of the frame button 22 is detected twice in the first two operation valid periods, it is determined that the player who tends to actively press the frame button 22 is playing the game. On the other hand, in other cases, it is determined that a player who tends not to press the frame button 22 is playing the game. In addition, in order to discriminate the player's tendency, the success notification mode is always set as the notification mode after the end of the first two operation valid periods. That is, it is configured so as not to display the failure notification mode and terminate the continuous transformation effect before determining the tendency of the player.

FIG. 68(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the pressing tendency table 222e1. As shown in FIG. 68(c), in the pressing tendency table 222e1, the effect counter 223n determined to display the success notification mode for each variation type and the set number of operation valid periods in one continuous transformation effect are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, when the variation type is win super reach, the value range of the effect counter 223n is defined as "0 to 79" in association with the effective period of the third to fifth operations in the continuous transformation effect. there is As a result, when the valid period of operation for the third to fifth times of the continuous transformation effect ends, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, if the variation type is out of super reach, the range of the value of the effect counter 223n is defined as "0 to 59" in association with the effective period of the third operation in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation is valid. The range of values of the effect counter 223n is defined to be “0 to 39” in association with the period, and the range of values of the effect counter 223n to “0 to 19” corresponds to the effective period of the fifth operation. It is stipulated with

Therefore, when losing super reach is being performed, it is more difficult to determine the display of the success notification mode compared to winning super reach. Furthermore, the longer the operation effective period is, the more difficult it becomes to determine the display of the success notification mode. Therefore, the greater the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the expectation of a big win. Therefore, the player who tends to press the frame button 22 can play the game expecting that the success notification mode will be displayed more times.

FIG. 68(d) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the non-pressing tendency table 222e2. The non-pressing tendency table 222e2 has the same configuration as the pressing tendency table 222e1 (see FIG. 68(c)). That is, as shown in FIG. 68(d), the set number of operation effective periods in one continuous transformation effect and the value of the effect counter 223n determined to display the success notification mode are associated with each variation type. stipulated.

Specifically, when the variation type is win super reach, the range of values of the effect counter 223n is defined to be “0 to 39” in association with the valid period of operation for the third time in the continuous transformation effect. "0 to 79" is defined as the value range of the effect counter 223n for the operation effective period of 1, and "0 to 39" is defined as the value range of the effect counter 223n for the fifth operation effective period. ” are defined in association with each other. That is, during execution of Win Super Reach, it becomes difficult to set the success notification mode at the end of the effective period of odd-numbered (third and fifth) operations, while the effective period of even-numbered (fourth) operations is terminated. Sometimes, it becomes easy to set the success notification mode.

On the other hand, when the variation type is out of super reach, the range of the value of the effect counter 223n is defined as "0 to 69" in association with the effective period of the third operation in the continuous transformation effect, and the fourth operation is valid. The range of values of the effect counter 223n is defined to be “0 to 49” in association with the period, and the range of values of the effect counter 223n to “0 to 69” corresponds to the effective period of the fifth operation. It is stipulated with That is, during the execution of the losing super reach, contrary to the case of the winning super reach, the success notification mode is likely to be set at the end of the operation effective period of the odd numbered (third and fifth) times, while the even numbered It becomes difficult to set the success notification mode at the end of the (fourth) operation valid period.

Therefore, after the expiration of the odd-numbered operation valid period, the expectation of a big win increases if the failure notification mode is displayed. On the other hand, after the even-numbered operation valid period ends, the success notification mode is displayed. The expectation that it will be a big hit will increase. Therefore, during the valid period of the odd-numbered operation, the game can be played with the expectation that the failure notification mode will be displayed after the period ends. The game can be played in anticipation of the display of the success notification mode.

In this manner, the lottery method (table used for lottery) for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode is differentiated between the player who tends to press the frame button 22 and the player who tends to hardly press it. As a result, when a player who tends to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, it is possible to provide a game feature in which the degree of expectation for a big win increases as the number of times the success notification mode is displayed increases. On the other hand, when a player who has a tendency to hardly press the frame button 22 is playing a game, when the success notification mode is displayed for odd numbers, the degree of expectation for a big win is lowered, and when the success notification mode is displayed for even numbers. Then, it is possible to provide a game property in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is improved.

Also, the table used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed during the first two operation valid periods in one continuous transformation performance. That is, since the method (playability) of suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win can be switched, the player can be allowed to select a preferred method of suggesting. Therefore, it is possible to implement a suggesting method that matches the taste of each player. Also, even if the player gets bored with one suggestion method, it is possible to switch to the other suggestion method, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, in order to more accurately determine the degree of expectation for a big hit from the display timing of the success notification mode, as the type of continuous transformation performance, only the continuous transformation performance with a maximum number of transformations of 5 times is provided. It is configured to be set. By configuring in this way, the case where the failure notification mode is displayed can be limited to the case where the display lottery for the success notification mode based on the transformation propriety determination table 222e is omitted. Therefore, it is possible for the player to accurately predict the degree of expectation for a big win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, the RAM 223 according to the fourth embodiment has a pressed flag 223s and a pressed The difference is that a number counter 223u is provided.

The depressed flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not the depression of the frame button 22 has been detected in one valid operation period, as in the second embodiment. Further, the press count counter 223u is a counter for counting the number of operation valid periods in which pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the first two operation valid periods in the continuous transformation effect. Based on the counter value of the number-of-presses counter 223u, the player's tendency (whether or not a player who tends to press the frame button 22 is playing a game) is determined.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 70, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (S4041) will be described. This frame button input monitoring/rendering process 4 (S4041) is executed in place of the frame button input monitoring/rendering process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment. This is a process for displaying an effect corresponding to the detection.

In each of the processes of S4101 and S4102 in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (see FIG. 70) in the fourth embodiment, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment is executed. The same processing as each processing of S4101 and S4102 is executed.

Further, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4102 that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S4102: Yes), whether the pressed flag 223s is on. It is determined whether or not (S4131), and if the depressed flag 223s is ON (S4131: Yes), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4131 that the pressed flag 223s is off (S4131: No), the pressed flag 223s is set to ON (S4132), and then the value of the pressed count counter 223u is incremented by 1. Add and update (S4133). Then, a press effect for informing the player that the press has been detected is set (S4134), and the process ends. In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (see FIG. 70) in the fourth embodiment, the number-of-presses counter 223u can be updated according to the pressing of the frame button 22. It can be determined according to the value of the press count counter 223u.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, valid period processing 4 (S4331) will be described. This valid period process 4 (S4331) is a process executed instead of the valid period process (see FIG. 37(b)) in the third embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for performing control corresponding to the timing.

In the processes of S4501 and S4502 of the valid period process 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, the same process as the valid period process (see FIG. 37B) in the third embodiment is performed. executed. In the valid period processing 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4502 that the value of the valid period timer 223f after subtraction is 0 (S4502: Yes), then , the depressed flag 223s is set to OFF (S4531), and transformation setting processing 4 is executed (S4532). This transformation setting process 4 is a process for selecting the notification mode in the continuous transformation effect, like the transformation setting process 3 (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment. The details of this transformation setting process 4 (S4532) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S4532 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2 (S4533). That is, as described above, in the fourth embodiment, the success notification mode is always displayed (transformation succeeds) after the expiration of the valid periods of the first and second operations. Then, the tendency of the player is determined by the number of times the player presses the frame button 22 during the two operation effective periods. In the process of S4533, it is determined whether or not the timing for determining the player's pressing tendency has come (whether or not the first two operation effective periods have ended).

In the processing of S4533, if it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is not 2 (S4533: No), it is not the time to determine the tendency of the player's pressing, so this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4533, when it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2 (S4533: Yes), the tendency of the player's pressing is determined, and whether or not to display the success notification mode is determined. The processing of S4534 to S4536 for setting the table used for lottery is executed.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is 2 (S4534), and when it is determined that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is 2 (S4534: Yes), As a table used for the lottery (determination of whether transformation is possible) to determine whether or not to display, the pressing tendency table 222e1 (see FIG. 68(c)) is set (S4535), and this process is terminated. The fact that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is 2 means that the player has pressed the frame button 22 both times in the first two operation effective periods of the continuous transformation effect, so the frame button is positively pressed. This is because there is a high possibility that the player who presses 22 is playing a game.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4534 that the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u is 1 or less (S4534: No), there is a high possibility that a player who tends to have difficulty pressing the frame button 22 is playing a game. Then, the non-pressing tendency table 222e2 (see FIG. 68(d)) is set as the table used for the lottery for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode (S4536), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, details of transformation setting processing 4 (S4532) described above will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this transformation setting process 4 (S4532). In transformation setting processing 4 (S4532), S4201, S4202, S4206, and S4210 to S4212 are performed in transformation setting processing 3 (see FIG. 67) in S4201, S4202, S4206, and S4210 in the third embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4212 is executed.

Further, in the transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S4202 ends, it is determined whether or not the value of the transformation number counter 223g read out in the process of S4202 is 2 or more (see FIG. 72). S4231). In the process of S4231, if it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is less than 2 (S4231: No), the current transformation setting process 4 will be executed when either of the first two operation valid periods of the continuous transformation effect is valid. It means that it was executed when it finished. As described above, after the first two operation effective periods have expired, the success notification mode is always displayed. exit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4231, if it is determined that the value of the transformation number counter 223g is 2 or more (S4231: Yes), it is set in the valid period processing 4 (see FIG. 71) in the transformation propriety determination table 222e. (S4222). As described above, by determining whether or not the success notification mode can be displayed with reference to the pressing tendency table 222e1, the greater the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the expectation for the big win. method) can be realized. On the other hand, by referring to the non-pressing tendency table 222e2 to determine whether or not to display the success notification mode, if the success notification mode is displayed after the valid period of the odd-numbered operation, the degree of expectation for the big win is lowered and the even-numbered operation is performed. It is possible to realize a game property (method of suggesting the degree of expectation) in which the degree of expectation for a big win increases when the success notification mode is displayed after the effective period.

When the processing of S4222 ends, next, it is determined whether the read value of the effect counter 223n is a counter value corresponding to the display of the success notification mode (successful transformation) defined in the table (S4223), and the success is determined. If the counter value corresponds to the display of the notification mode (successful transformation) (S4223: Yes), the processing of S4210 to S4212 for displaying the success notification mode is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4223, if it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223n is outside the range of the counter value corresponding to the display of the success notification mode specified in the table (S4223: No), the developed effect mode selection table From 222c, the value of the transformation number counter 223g and the mode of development effect corresponding to the variation type of the current variation display are read out (S4232). Next, the data corresponding to the selected development effect is stored in the development effect storage area 223m (S4206), and the failure notification mode is set (S4233). Next, a timer value corresponding to 1 second is set for the value of the failure notification mode timer 223j (S4234), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this transformation setting process 4 (see FIG. 72), it is possible to change the method of suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win according to the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22, thus making the game monotonous. It is possible to prevent (suppress) from being lost.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, whether or not the player currently playing the game tends to press the frame button 22 during the predetermined period of the continuous transformation effect. can be distinguished (identified). Then, the player who tends to press the frame button 22 positively during the effective operation period and the player who does not tend to press the frame button 22 differently in the method of suggesting the degree of expectation (playability) in the continuous announcement effect. That is, when it is determined that a player who tends to press the frame button 22 positively is playing a game, the greater the number of times the success notification mode is displayed (the number of successful transformations), the greater the win. It is configured to set a suggestion method that increases the degree of expectation. On the other hand, when it is determined that a player who tends not to press the frame button 22 is playing a game, when the success notification mode is displayed after the valid period of the odd-numbered operation, the degree of expectation for a big win is lowered. , when the success notification mode is displayed after the effective period of even-numbered operations, the suggestion method is set such that the degree of expectation for a big win increases.

By configuring in this way, various suggestion methods can be realized, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the table used for determining whether or not to display the success notification mode can be switched depending on whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed during the first two operation valid periods in one continuous transformation performance. That is, since the method (playability) of suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win can be switched, the player can select a preferred method of suggesting. Therefore, it is possible to realize a suggestion method that matches the taste of each player. Also, even if the player gets tired of the first suggestion method, it is possible to switch to the other suggestion method, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, the player's tendency is determined during the first two operation effective periods of the continuous transformation effect, but the method of determining the player's tendency is not limited to this. The player's tendency may be determined based on the state of depression during the effective period of the first one operation. As a result, in the continuous transformation presentation, it is possible to execute the suggestion method that matches the tendency of each player for a greater number of times. Conversely, it may also be possible to determine the player's tendency according to the state of pressing over three or more operation valid periods. With this configuration, it is possible to more accurately determine the tendency of the player. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a period for judging the player's tendency is provided separately from the operation valid period set in the continuous transformation effect. Specifically, for example, before starting the continuous transformation effect, an effect (press effect) that prompts the frame button 22 to be pressed is displayed one or more times, and based on the pressing situation in the one or more press effects, It may be configured to discriminate the player's tendency. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set all notification modes of the continuous transformation effect to suggestive methods according to the tendency of the player.

In the fourth embodiment, the upper limit number of transformations in the continuous transformation effect is always set to 5 times. That is, the display of the failure notification mode is limited to the case where the lottery for whether or not to display the success notification mode, which is executed based on the transformation propriety determination table 222e, is omitted. It is not something that can be done. As in each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types with different upper limit numbers of transformations are provided. By configuring in this way, when the failure notification mode is displayed, the failure notification mode is not selected by lottery based on the transformation propriety determination table 222e, but the upper limit number of transformations in the current continuous transformation effect is reached. It is possible to make the player think that the failure notification mode may have been displayed because of the failure. Therefore, assuming that the failure notification mode is determined by the lottery based on the transformation propriety determination table 222e, even if the failure notification mode is displayed at the timing when the expectation for the big win is low, the player's expectation for the big win is low. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the fourth embodiment, for a player who positively presses the frame button 22, the greater the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the expectation of a big win. For a player who tends not to press , the degree of expectation of a big win increases when the continuous transformation effect is completed in the odd-numbered times, but the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on whether the player actively presses the frame button 22 or the player rarely presses the frame button 22, the method of suggesting the degree of expectation may be different. On the other hand, when the continuous transformation effect is completed in an even number, the degree of expectation for a big win increases, while for the player who does not press the frame button 22, the less transformation times the continuous transformation effect ends, the higher the expectation for a big win. may be configured to be higher. Further, for example, instead of or in addition to varying the tendency of the number of times of transformation, the player may set the rule of the display mode to increase the expectation of the jackpot when the transformation is successful (the success notification mode is displayed). It is good also as a structure which is made to differ according to the tendency of. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who tends to press the frame button 22 , the type of the back image displayed on the back of the character 811 may be used to indicate the degree of expectation. That is, the back image may have a configuration in which the degree of expectation increases in the order of wilderness→mountain→sea. On the other hand, in the case of a player who tends not to press the frame button 22, instead of randomly setting the back image, the facial expression of the character 811 may indicate the level of expectation. In other words, the facial expression of the character 811 may be structured such that the degree of expectation increases in the order of expressionless face, smiling face, and angry face. Further, for example, instead of or in addition to changing the suggestion method during execution of the continuous transformation effect according to the player's tendency, the content of the development effect may be changed according to the tendency. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player who actively presses the frame button 22, the more the character 811 attacks the monster 812 in the development effect, the higher the expectation of a big win. In the case of a player who does not press the button 22, the more the character 811 is attacked by the monster 812, the higher the expectation of a big win.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 82. FIG. In the above-described fourth embodiment, in one continuous transformation effect, the tendency of the player to press the frame button 22 is discriminated, and the notification method of the degree of expectation for the big win is changed according to the discrimination result.

On the other hand, in the present fifth embodiment, the form of the continuous transformation effect is changed according to the status of pressing of the frame button 22 by the player in the past continuous transformation effect. Specifically, for a player who positively presses the frame button 22, an effect mode in which the operation effective period is set a relatively large number of times is executed. On the other hand, for a player who tends to have difficulty pressing the frame button 22, instead of reducing the number of times the operation effective period is set, a long development effect is set. As a result, the player who actively presses the frame button 22 is given the chance to press the frame button 22 more times, while the player who does not want to press the frame button 22 is given the opportunity to press it. Instead of reducing it, you can keep the development rendition entertained for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that matches the taste of each player.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, even when the failure notification mode is displayed in the continuous transformation effect, if the set number of times (2 times or 5 times) of the operation effective period remains, the continuous transformation effect is terminated. It is configured to set the operation valid period again without In other words, it is prevented (suppressed) that the valid operation period ends in a small number of times even though the player who tends to press the frame button 22 positively is playing the game.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Also, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the fourth It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the fourth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the development effect in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, as described above, it is determined whether or not the player tends to press the frame button 22, and depending on the determination result, the tendency to actively press the frame button 22 tendencies), more operation effective periods are set. Also, for a player who tends not to press the frame button 22 very often (tends to participate less frequently), the setting number of operation effective periods is reduced, while the effect time of the development effect is extended. Although the details will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, in the first half of the extended effect (developed effect for low participation frequency) in which the effect time is extended, the character 811 explores the cave and collects items. is configured to execute The discovered item gives the character 811 an advantage in the subsequent battle with the monster 812 . This cave exploration effect (exploration effect) is configured to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win depending on the number of items found by the character 811 (the more items, the easier it is to win against the monster 812). is doing). That is, if the effective period of operation is set to a small number of times for a player whose participation frequency is low, instead of reducing the number of executions of the effect suggesting the degree of expectation depending on whether the character 811 transforms or not, the search effect is performed. The number of items discovered by the character 811 can suggest the degree of expectation. As a result, even when the number of times the operation effective period is set is small, it is possible to provide the same chance of suggesting the degree of expectation as when the number of times of setting is large.

FIG. 73(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the search effect described above. As shown in FIG. 73(a), when the search effect is started, an effect is displayed in which the character 811 advances toward the depths of the cave. In addition, in the display area HR1 displayed above the main display area Dm, the characters "search mode" and the characters "increase the degree of expectation to get items!" are displayed. Further, in the display area HR4 displayed in the lower right of the main display area Dm, characters "Item x 0" are displayed. The characters displayed in this display area HR4 are updated according to the number of items found by the character 811 . Note that the character 811 can discover up to three items in one search effect.

FIG. 73(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the character 811 discovers an item during execution of the search effect. In this case, an effect is executed in which the character 811 opens the treasure box displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and an item appears from the treasure box. A display area HR5 is displayed on the right side of the treasure box for informing the type of acquired item. In the example of FIG. 73(b), the characters "Power up drink GET!!" are displayed in the display area HR5. Also, the characters displayed in the display area HR4 are updated to "item x 1". The number displayed in the display area HR4 can suggest the degree of expectation for a big win to the player. In the search effect, there is a possibility that the character 811 finds the treasure box but the item does not appear. That is, in the search performance, basically, the treasure box is found three times, and the degree of expectation is indicated by how many times the item is found in the three times.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the participation frequency of the player in the continuous transformation performance is low, the searching performance is executed instead of reducing the number of times of setting the effective period of operation in the continuous transformation performance. In this search effect, the number of items found by the character 811 can suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. As a result, even when the operation valid period is set a small number of times, it is possible to provide the same chance of suggesting the degree of expectation as when the operation valid period is set a large number of times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the change over time of the presentation mode when it is determined that the frequency of participation in the continuous transformation presentation is low and when it is determined that the frequency of participation is high will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 74(a), the change over time of the effect mode when the player's participation frequency is low will be described.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), when it is determined that the participation frequency is low, only two operation effective periods are set. That is, the operation effective period of 4 seconds and the notification mode of 1 second are set twice each. In the example of FIG. 74(a), the failure notification mode is set as the first notification mode, and the success notification mode is set as the second notification mode. Note that, as shown in FIG. 74(a), in the fifth embodiment, even if the failure notification mode is displayed, the continuous transformation effect is not terminated until the valid period of operation for the specified number of times is set. . As a result, the degree of expectation for a big win can be estimated more accurately according to the number of times the success notification mode is displayed.

When the display period of the second notification mode ends, then a one-second transition effect is set. When the transition effect ends, the development effect starts. In the development effect when the participation frequency is low, first, a 15-second search effect (see FIG. 73(b)) is executed. In this search effect, as described above, an effect is executed that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win depending on the number of items found by the character 811 . Then, after a 15-second production period has elapsed, a production of a battle mode with the monster 812 is executed. In the example of FIG. 74(a), the win development effect A5 in which the monster 812 is defeated is executed during the effect period of 23 seconds.

In this way, when the participation frequency is low, two opportunities to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win are given by the two operation effective periods set in the continuous transformation effect. In addition, an opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit is given three times by the search performance. Therefore, a total of five opportunities to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win are given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74(b), the change over time of the effect mode when it is determined that the player's participation frequency is high will be described. As shown in FIG. 74(b), when the player's participation frequency is high, the operation valid period of 4 seconds and the notification mode of 1 second are displayed five times each. That is, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the failure notification mode is displayed as the first notification mode, the success notification mode is displayed as the second notification mode, and the failure notification mode is displayed as the third notification mode. , 4th, and 5th notification modes are displayed. As shown in FIG. 74(b), in the fifth embodiment, even if pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the valid operation period, the valid operation period is not terminated. As a result, the performance time of the continuous transformation performance can be fixed, so the performance time of the development performance to be executed thereafter can also be fixed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to prepare various aspects for each performance time of the development performance, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for displaying the development performance.

When the display period of the fifth information mode ends, the transition effect is displayed, and thereafter, the development effect A5 is displayed when the effect time is 23 seconds. In this way, when the player's participation frequency is high, the effective period of operation is always set to 5 times in the continuous transformation effect, so there are 5 opportunities to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win, as in the case where the player's participation frequency is low. given times.

<Electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. First, FIG. 75(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 75(a), the ROM 222 of the fifth embodiment differs from the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment in that a valid period frequency table 222f is added.

The effective period count table 222f is a data table that defines the number of operation effective periods set in the continuous transformation effect for each state of the depression tendency flag 223y. The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag indicating the degree of participation of the player in the continuous transformation effect (whether or not the player positively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period). If this push-down tendency flag 223y is ON, it means that the player actively participates in the continuous transformation performance, and if it is OFF, it means that the player has a low participation frequency in the continuous transformation performance. .

Details of the effective period frequency table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 75(b). FIG. 75(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the effective period frequency table 222f. As shown in FIG. 75(b), "five times" is defined as the set number of operation effective periods in association with the "on" state of the depression tendency flag 223y. Therefore, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation performance (actively presses the frame button 22) is playing a game, the operation valid period is set five times in the continuous transformation performance. . The degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested to the player by the number (percentage) of the success notification mode displayed among the notification modes displayed after the expiration of the set five operation valid periods. .

In this embodiment, as in the above-described third embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 80% after the expiration of each operation valid period, but it is lost. In this case, the transformation permission/inhibition determination table 222e is set so that the success notification mode is displayed at a rate of 50%. Therefore, the greater the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the higher the player's expectation for the big win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75(b), the state "off" of the depression tendency flag 223y is defined in association with "twice" as the set number of operation effective periods. Therefore, when a player who has a low frequency of participation in the continuous transformation effect (low frequency of pressing the frame button 22) is playing a game, the effective period of operation is set twice in the continuous transformation effect. The degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested to the player by the number (percentage) of the number of times (ratio) in which the success notification mode is displayed out of the notification modes displayed after the end of the set valid period of two operations. .

In addition, when the participation frequency for the continuous transformation effect is playing a game, the number of set times of the operation valid period is reduced by three times compared to the case of the player with the high participation frequency. That is, the number of times of suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is reduced in the continuous transformation effect. In order to compensate for this reduction in the number of suggestions, the fifth embodiment is configured to execute an effect (search effect) suggesting the degree of expectation in the development effect. As a result, even for players with low participation frequency, it is possible to secure the same number of times of suggesting the degree of expectation for big wins as for players with high participation frequency. Further, by lengthening the performance time of the development performance instead of reducing the number of times of setting the effective period of operation, it is possible to provide a performance mode suitable for the taste of the player who does not want to press the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. Referring to FIG. As shown in FIG. 76, the RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 69) in that a valid period number counter 223w, a notification mode timer 223x, and a depression tendency flag 223y At least a total press count counter 223aa and a total effective period count counter 223ab are added. Moreover, the success notification mode timer 223i and the failure notification mode timer 223j are deleted.

The valid period number counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of times an operation valid period is set in one continuous transformation effect. The value of the effective period counter 223w is set to 1 when setting the first operation effective period in the continuous transformation effect (see S4412 in FIG. 78). Also, each time a new operation valid period is set, the value is incremented by 1 (see S5209 in FIG. 80). The value of the effective period number counter 223w is used to determine whether to set a new operation effective period or to set a transition effect every time the display period of the notification mode elapses. That is, if the value of the valid period number counter 223w is less than the set number of operation valid periods defined in the valid period number table 222f, a new operation valid period is set. On the other hand, when the value of the valid period number counter 223w matches the set number of times defined in the valid period number table 222f, the start of transition effect is set.

The notification mode timer 223x is a counter for counting the display period of the notification mode set after the expiration of the operation effective period. This notification mode timer 223x is set to a timer value corresponding to one second each time the display of the success notification mode or the failure notification mode is set (see S4241 in FIG. 79). When the value of the notification mode timer 223x becomes 0, it is determined that the success notification mode or the failure notification mode has ended, and it is determined whether to set a new operation effective period or to set a transition effect. .

The pressing tendency flag 223y is a flag indicating whether or not the player tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect. If this pressing tendency flag 223y is on, it means that the player tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect (actively pressing the frame button 22). It means that the frequency of participation in the continuous transformation production is low. The participation frequency is determined by the ratio of the number of operation valid periods in which the player presses (participates in) the frame button 22 to the set number of total operation valid periods. Specifically, when the operation effective period during which the player presses the frame button 22 exceeds 80% of the whole, it is determined that the player who tends to actively participate in the continuous transformation effect is playing the game. discriminate. The pressing tendency flag 223y is updated according to the player's participation status (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous transformation effect every time one continuous transformation effect ends (S5305, S5306 in FIG. 82). reference).

The total number-of-presses counter 223aa is a counter for counting the total number of times during the operation effective period in which pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. That is, the number of times of the effective period of operation involving pressing of all the frame buttons 22 after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on is counted by the total number of pressing times counter 223aa. Percentage of pressing the frame button 22 based on the counter value of the total pressing number counter 223aa and the number of all operation valid periods set after the power is turned on (the counter value of the total valid period number counter 223ab, which will be described later). (player's tendency) is discriminated. This total number-of-presses counter 223aa is updated according to the player's participation status (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) in the continuous transformation effect each time one continuous transformation effect ends (see S5302 in FIG. 82). ).

The total effective period number counter 223ab is a counter for counting the total number of operation effective periods. That is, the number of all operation valid periods after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on is counted by the total valid period number counter 223ab. Based on the value of the total valid period number counter 223ab and the value of the total number of depression counter 223aa, the ratio of pressing the frame button 22 (the player's tendency) is determined. Similar to the total number-of-presses counter 223aa, the total effective period counter 223ab is set according to the player's participation in the continuous transformation effect (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) each time one continuous transformation effect ends. is updated (see S5301 in FIG. 82).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 82. FIG. First, the rendering update process 5 (S4051) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This effect update process 5 (S4051) is similar to the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment), during execution of the variable display, the remaining variable time and various timer values This is a process for varying the presentation mode in accordance with, for example.

In the processes of S4301, S4302, S4304, and S4310 of the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, S4301, S4302, S4302, and S4302 of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4304 and S4310 is executed.

Further, in the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4302 that the transformation effect in progress flag 223h is ON (S4302: Yes), the start timing of the continuous transformation effect is set. Transformation effect start determination processing 5 for determination is executed (S4341), and this processing ends. The details of this transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) will be described later with reference to FIG. 78(a).

In addition, in the effect update process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the validity period flag 223e is ON (S4304: Yes), the end timing of the validity period is determined. Execution of valid period process 5 for doing so (S4342), and ends this process. The details of this valid period process 5 (S4342) will be described later with reference to FIG. 78(b).

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the validity period flag 223e is off (S4304: No), then it is determined whether the value of the notification mode timer 223x is greater than 0 (S4343), If the value is greater than 0 (S4343: Yes), it means that it is in the display period of the notification mode. End the process. The details of this processing during the notification mode will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4343, if it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is 0 (S4343: No), whether the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is a value greater than 0 (during the display time of the transition effect ) is determined (S4310), and if the value of the transition effect time timer 223k is 0 (S4310: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4310, if the value of the transition effect time timer 223x is a value greater than 0 (S4310: Yes), during the transition effect process 5 for determining the end timing of the transition effect is executed. (S4345), this processing ends. The details of this process 5 during transition effect (S4345) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78(a), details of the transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) will be described. This transformation effect start determination process 5 (S4341) determines the start timing of the continuous transformation effect in the same manner as the transformation effect start determination process (see FIG. 37(a)) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This process is for

In each of the processes of S4401, S4402, and S4404 in the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78A) in the fifth embodiment, the transformation effect start determination process in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 37A) )) are executed in steps S4401, S4402, and S4404.

In addition, in the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78(a)) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4402 ends, next, a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the effective period timer 223f. At the same time, the validity period flag 223e is set to ON (S4411). Next, 1 is set to the valid period number counter 223w (S4412), and the process proceeds to S4404.

By executing the transformation effect start determination process 5 (see FIG. 78(a)) in the fifth embodiment, it is possible to set the start of the continuous transformation effect at the same timing every time (11 seconds after the start of variation), It is possible to start counting of the effective period number counter 223w.

Next, details of the valid period process 5 (S4342) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). This effective period process 5 (S4342) determines the end timing of the operation effective period in the same way as the effective period process 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment. This is processing for displaying the corresponding notification mode.

In each of the processes of S4501, S4502, and S4531 of the valid period processing 5 (see FIG. 78(b)) in the fifth embodiment, the valid period processing 4 (see FIG. 71) in the fourth embodiment The same processing as each processing of S4501, S4502, and S4531 is executed. In the valid period processing 5 (see FIG. 78(b)) in the fifth embodiment, when the processing of S4502 ends, the fourth Instead of transformation setting processing 4 (see FIG. 72) in the embodiment, transformation setting processing 5 is executed (S4541), and this processing ends. Details of this transformation setting process 5 (S4541) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing this transformation setting process 5 (S4541). In transformation setting processing 5 (S4541), S4201, S4202, S4210, S4211, S4222, S4223, and S4233 correspond to S4201, S4202, and S4210 of transformation setting processing 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment. , S4211, S4222, S4223, and S4233 are executed.

Further, in the transformation setting process 5 (see FIG. 79) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S4233 or S4211 ends, a timer value corresponding to 1 second is set for the value of the notification mode timer 223x ( S4241), the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the details of the processing during the notification mode (S4344) described above will be described. As described above, the processing during the notification mode (S4344) is a process of determining the end timing of the display time of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode).

In this informing mode processing (see FIG. 80), first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the informing mode timer 223x (S5201), and it is determined whether or not the timer value after the subtraction has become 0 (S5202). In the processing of S5202, if it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x is not 0 (S5202: No), it means that the display time (1 second) of the notification mode has not elapsed, so the present End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5202, if it is determined that the value of the notification mode timer 223x after the subtraction has become 0 (S5202: Yes), the processing for setting either a new operation valid period or a transition effect is executed. Run. Specifically, the pressing tendency flag 223y and the value of the valid period number counter 223w are read (S5203), and these are compared with the defined contents of the valid period number table 222f (S5204).

As a result of the comparison by the process of S5204, it is determined whether or not the value of the effective period number counter 223w matches the upper limit value corresponding to the state of the depression tendency flag 223y (S5205), and it is determined that it matches the upper limit value. In that case (S5205: Yes), a transition effect is set. More specifically, the timer value corresponding to 1 second is set to the transition effect time timer 223k (S5206), the command for display indicating the start of the transition effect is set (S5207), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5205 that the value of the effective period number counter 223w does not match the upper limit value corresponding to the state of the depression tendency flag 223y (S5205: No), a new operation effective period is set. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the valid period timer 223f, and the valid period flag 223e is set to ON (S5208). Next, 1 is added to the value of the effective period number counter 223w (S5209), and this processing ends.

By executing the processing during the notification mode (see FIG. 80), the end timing of the notification mode (success notification mode or failure notification mode) is accurately determined, and the corresponding control (start setting of transition effect or new operation valid period) can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, details of the process 5 during transition effect (S4345) described above will be described. This process 5 during transition effect (S4345) is executed instead of the process during transition effect (see FIG. 40) in the fourth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In the processes of S4801 and S4802 of the process 5 during the transition effect (see FIG. 81), the same processes as the processes of S4801 and S4802 of the process during the transition effect (see FIG. 40) in the fourth embodiment respectively. is executed.

Further, in the process 5 during the transition effect (see FIG. 81) in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S4802, when it is determined that the value of the transition effect time timer 223k after subtraction has become 0 (S4802: Yes), Next, it is determined whether the depression tendency flag 223y is on (S4811). In the process of S4811, when it is determined that the depression tendency flag 223y is ON (S4811: Yes), the development effect corresponding to the lottery result of this time is started from the effect time after the search effect (search mode) ends. (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4814.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4811, if it is determined that the depression tendency flag 223y is turned off (S4811: No), the development effect corresponding to the current lottery result is set to start from the search effect (search mode). (S4813), the process proceeds to S4814.

Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch whether the development effect is started from the search effect or after the end of the search effect, depending on the state of the depression tendency flag 223y (the player's tendency). As a result, it is possible to execute the development effect that matches the remaining variable time.

After the processing of S4812 or S4813, a push-down tendency update process is executed for updating the player's tendency (the state of the push-down tendency flag 223y) according to the player's participation frequency in the current continuous transformation effect (S4814). ). The details of this pressing tendency update process (S4814) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S4814, the transformation effect in progress flag 223h is set to OFF (S4815), the value of the transformation number counter 223g and the value of the effective period number counter 223w are both reset to 0 (S4816), and this process is terminated. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, details of the above-described pressing tendency update processing (S4814) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing this pressing tendency update process (S4814). In the pressing tendency update process (S4814), first, by adding the value of the effective period number counter 223w to the value of the total effective period number counter 223ab, the number of operation effective periods set in the current continuous transformation effect is This is reflected in the set number of times of the total valid period of operation (S5301). Next, by adding the value of the number-of-presses counter 223u to the value of the total number-of-presses counter 223aa, the number of presses of the frame button 22 during the valid operation period during which pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the continuous transformation effect is calculated. is reflected in the total number of detected operation effective periods (S5302).

After the processing of S5302 is completed, the value of the updated total number of presses counter 223aa is divided by the value of the updated total effective period counter 223ab (S5303). It is determined whether the value is greater than .8 (S5304: Yes). In the process of S5304, when it is determined that the calculated value is greater than 0.8 (S5304), when the operation valid period is set, the frame button 22 is pressed at a rate of 80% or more. (that is, the player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect is playing), the depression tendency flag 223y is set to ON (S5305), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5304, when it is determined that the calculated value is 0.8 or less (S5304: No), the player who presses the frame button 22 relatively infrequently during the valid operation period is playing the game. is being performed, the depression tendency flag 223y is set to OFF (S5306), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this pressing tendency update processing (see FIG. 82), the player's tendency can be updated in consideration of the player's participation status in the continuous transformation performance each time the continuous transformation performance ends. .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, based on the player's participation status in the continuous transformation effect (ratio of the operation valid period in which the frame button 22 is pressed to the total number of operation valid periods) Therefore, the production mode in the continuous transformation production is made different. That is, when a player who actively participates in the continuous transformation effect (actively presses the frame button 22 during the operation valid period) is playing a game, the continuous transformation effect is performed a relatively large number of times (5 times), instead of setting the operation effective period, the production time of the development production is shortened. On the other hand, when a player who does not participate in the continuous transformation effect much (does not press the frame button 22 during the effective period of the operation) is playing a game, the number of operations in the continuous transformation effect is relatively small (two times). Instead of setting the validity period, the development time is lengthened. By configuring in this way, players who tend to actively participate in the continuous transformation performance can be given more opportunities to participate in the continuous transformation performance. On the other hand, for players who tend not to participate in the continuous transformation performance, the chances of participating in the continuous transformation performance are reduced, and the development performance can be enjoyed for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the effect according to the tendency of the player.

In the fifth embodiment, the tendency of the player is determined based on the ratio of the effective period of operation in which pressing of the frame button 22 is detected to the number of all effective periods of operation set after the power is turned on. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a function to identify a player who is playing a game. It is good also as a structure which discriminate|determines to. That is, when it is detected that a different player has started a game, the value of the total number-of-presses counter 223aa and the value of the total valid-period number counter 223ab may be reset to zero. As a result, since the tendency of each player can be determined more accurately, it is possible to realize an effect that is more in line with the tendency of the player. The function for identifying a player who is playing a game includes, for example, a known face authentication function, fingerprint authentication function, voiceprint authentication function, and the like. Also, the information of the player currently playing the game may be acquired from the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 . That is, information indicating the type of card inserted in the card unit (for example, card serial number or member number) can be output from the card unit to the pachinko machine 10, while the pachinko machine 10 side , the card type can be identified from the information output from the card unit. Then, based on the information output from the card unit, it may be determined that the same player is playing while the same card is inserted.

Furthermore, for a known game system composed of a mobile terminal (mobile phone, smartphone, tablet, etc.) owned by a player, a server that can communicate with the mobile terminal, and a pachinko machine 10 that can communicate with the server may be applied. That is, in the server, individual information for each player (game history, type and number of generated effects, etc.) is accumulated, and the information accumulated in the server is transferred to the corresponding mobile terminal (for each player A gaming system configured to enable viewing via a mobile terminal that accesses the server with a given login ID and password, and changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 based on accumulated information. may be applied. More specifically, the game history information accumulated on the server side includes the value of the above-described total pressing number counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period number counter 223ab. Then, when starting a game on the pachinko machine 10, the value of the total number-of-presses counter 223aa accumulated (stored) in the server and the value of the total number-of-effective-periods counter 223ab , it is possible to reflect the rate at which the player participates in the continuous transformation performance on different days or on different machines. Therefore, even if the date and time of playing the game or the table (hall) on which the game is played are changed, it is possible to accurately determine the tendency of each player and set an effect mode that matches the tendency of the player.

In the gaming system, as a method of reflecting server information on the pachinko machine 10, for example, a password generated based on a common encoding rule between the server and the pachinko machine 10 is set in the pachinko machine 10 or the server. method. That is, when starting a game, the portable terminal connected to the server requests a password for starting the game from the server. The server converts the game history and the like corresponding to the connected mobile terminal into a password based on the encoding rule described above. When the player inputs the password into the pachinko machine 10, the password is converted into the value of the total number-of-presses counter 223aa, the value of the total valid-period number counter 223ab, etc., based on the encoding rule described above, and set in the RAM 223 or the like. do. As a result, the game can be started from the state of the game history immediately after the operator of the portable terminal finished the game last time. In addition, when the game is to be ended, a predetermined operation for causing the pachinko machine 10 to generate a password corresponding to the game end (for example, selecting an option corresponding to the game end on the menu screen of the pachinko machine 10, etc.). Based on a predetermined operation, the game history including the current value of the total pressing number counter 223aa and the value of the total valid period number counter 223ab is converted into a password based on the above-described encoding rule, and the third symbol display device 81 display for Output the displayed password to the server from the mobile terminal connected to the server. On the server side, the password is converted into information corresponding to the game history, and information corresponding to the operator of the connected portable terminal is updated. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 and the server can share and update individual information for each player.

In the fifth embodiment, the continuous transformation effect is set depending on whether or not the number of valid operation periods in which pressing of the frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80% of the total number of valid operation periods. Although the effect mode in the display (the number of times the operation effective period is set and the mode of the development effect) is variable, the threshold for varying the effect mode is not limited to 80% and may be set arbitrarily. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the effect mode is set (easily set) when the ratio of the operation effective period in which the pressing of the continuous transformation effect frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80%, and when it is 80% or less. However, it is also possible to discriminate the player's tendency more finely and subdivide the effect mode. Specifically, for example, when the proportion of the operation effective period in which the depression of the frame button 22 is detected is 20% or less, a continuous transformation effect is set in which the operation effective period is set once, and the frame button 22 is pressed. If the ratio of the operation effective period for which is detected exceeds 20% and is 40% or less, a continuous transformation effect is set in which the number of times the operation effective period is set is two, and the operation valid for which pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is set. When the percentage of the period exceeds 40% and is less than or equal to 60%, a continuous transformation effect is set in which the number of times the operation valid period is set is 3, and the operation valid period ratio in which pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is 6. If it exceeds 80% and is equal to or less than 80%, a continuous transformation effect is set in which the number of times the operation effective period is set is 4, and the ratio of the operation effective period in which pressing of the frame button 22 is detected exceeds 80%. In this case, the number of times the operation effective period is set may be set to 5 times for continuous transformation effects. That is, according to the tendency of the player (frequency of participation in the continuous transformation effect), one type may be set from among five types of effect mode types that differ in the number of operation valid periods and the effect time of the development effect. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an effect mode that matches the tendency of each player.

In the fifth embodiment, the player's tendency is determined based on the ratio of the operation effective period in which pressing (operation) on the frame button 22 is detected, but the method of determining the player's tendency is limited to this. not a thing For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 equipped with other effects that prompt the pressing of the frame button 22 in addition to the continuous transformation effect, the rate at which the player presses the frame button 22 in the other effects is also taken into account. Then, it may be determined whether or not the player tends to press the frame button 22 (tend to participate in the continuous transformation effect).

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 89. FIG. In the first to fifth embodiments described above, a single specific winning opening 65a is provided directly below the first ball entrance 64 as a specific winning opening (large open opening) that is opened during execution of the jackpot game (privilege game). was configured to provide The specific prize winning opening 65a is provided in a horizontally long rectangular shape at the bottom center of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. A game ball shot toward (left-handed) and a game ball shot (right-handed) toward a flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front enter. It was configured to obtain.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, two types of special prize winning openings are provided in which the benefits (the number of prize balls) given when a game ball enters the game are different. Specifically, a left specific winning hole 650La to which 7 prize balls are awarded each time a game ball enters is provided on the left side of the area below the first ball entry hole 64, and 10 prizes are provided. A right specific winning hole 650Ra to which a ball is awarded is provided on the right side of the area below the first ball entry hole 64. - 特許庁In other words, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are provided in a bilaterally symmetrical arrangement in the central lower part of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. These two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) are normally set in a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter, and when a big hit round is started, either one of the specific winning openings is set. The winning hole becomes ready for ball entry. In addition, although the details will be described later, when each specific winning opening (the left specific winning opening 650La, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) is set to a state in which the ball can be entered, the left-handed game ball is also right-handed. It has a structure in which game balls can also be entered. As a result, the player can freely select his/her favorite shooting direction during the big win, so that the player's interest in the big win game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 , and the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 84, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84, in the sixth embodiment, the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment is deleted. In addition, a left variable winning device 650L is provided on the lower left side of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front, and a right variable winning device 650R is provided on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. is provided.

As shown in FIG. 84, the left variable winning device 650L is provided with a left specific winning hole 650La into which a game ball can enter on the left side in front view. When game balls enter the left variable winning device 650L through the left specific winning hole 650La, seven prize balls are paid out to the player. The left specific winning opening 650La is always open, and a game ball reaching the left variable winning device 650L from the right direction in front view can always enter. However, a plurality of nails are arranged to form an inclination downward to the lower right in the front view of the left variable winning device, and most of the game balls hit to the left are below the first ball entrance 64 via the inclination. Since the game ball reaches the area of , the game ball flows down in the lower right direction in the area below the first ball entrance 64 . That is, since it flows down in the direction away from the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball cannot enter the left specific winning opening 650La in normal times. In addition, the arrangement of the nails and the like of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, and an inclination downward to the left is formed above the right variable winning device 650R. Since the distance is sufficiently far from the device 650R, there is no possibility that the game ball that is hit to the right and flows down the slope formed by the nail above the right variable winning device 650R directly enters the left specific winning port 650La. Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the right side surface (the surface provided with the opening) of the left variable winning device 650L is configured such that the upper side protrudes in the right direction in front view than the lower side. As a result, even if the game ball flows down substantially vertically from above, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the left specific winning hole 650La due to being obstructed by the overhanging portion. The right variable winning device 650R is the same as the left variable winning device 650L except that the arrangement is bilaterally symmetrical with the left variable winning device 650L, and that 10 prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 84, between the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R, there are two variable members 650Lb and 650Rb that are capable of appearing and retracting (variable motion) toward the front side and the back side in front view. is provided. These variable members 650Lb and 650Rb are normally buried in the back side of the front view (that is, they are buried in the back side of the base plate 60). The progress of the game ball that has flowed down is not hindered by the variable members 650Lb and 650Rb.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 85, the variable member 650Lb forms an inclination downward to the lower left when viewed from the front by performing a projecting operation to the front side when viewed from the front. Since this inclination continues to the vicinity of the lower end on the right side surface of the left variable winning device 650L, the game ball that has flowed down the inclination formed by the variable member 650Lb is guided to the left specific winning hole 650La. In addition, the variable member 650Rb forms an inclination downward in the lower right direction when viewed from the front by performing a projecting operation to the front side when viewed from the front. Since this inclination continues to the vicinity of the lower end of the left side surface of the right variable winning device 650R, the game ball flowing down the inclination formed by the variable member 650Rb is guided to the right specific winning hole 650Ra.

In each round of the jackpot, the variable member corresponding to the jackpot type protrudes forward in a front view, so that the game ball can easily enter a different variable winning hole depending on the jackpot type. More specifically, the variable member 650Rb protrudes in each round of the jackpot A6 (16 rounds probability variable jackpot), so that the game balls enter the right specific winning port 650Ra, which has a relatively large number of prize balls (that is, 10 pieces). Easier to enter. On the other hand, in each round of the jackpot B6 (7 rounds of fixed variable jackpot) and jackpot C6 (7 rounds of short-time jackpot), the variable member 650Lb protrudes, so that there are relatively few prize balls (that is, 7) left It becomes easier for the game ball to enter the specific winning hole 650La.

As shown in FIG. 84, when both the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are in a projected state (positioned at the projected position), almost all game balls that reach below the first ball entrance 64 from above It has a configuration that can accept As a result, in a state in which one of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position, both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball are received by the protruding movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. Then, the inclination formed by the movable member leads to the corresponding specific winning opening (either the left specific winning opening 650La corresponding to the movable member 650Lb or the right specific winning opening 650Ra corresponding to the movable member 650Rb). Therefore, in the case of the jackpot type in which the left movable member 650Lb appears and disappears (variable action), and in the case of the jackpot type in which the right movable member 650Rb appears and disappears (variable action), the shooting direction of the game ball The game ball can be entered into the corresponding specific winning hole (either the left specific winning hole 650La or the right specific winning hole 650Ra) simply by continuing to shoot the game ball in the desired shooting direction regardless of the direction. . Therefore, every time a big win is made, the player can select a desired shooting direction and play a game during the big win.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the specific winning opening into which the game ball can be entered during the jackpot game is varied according to the jackpot type. Then, regardless of the type of the specific winning hole into which the game ball can enter, both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball are guided to the specific winning hole into which the ball can enter. be. That is, two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650La and right specific winning opening 650La for the area (area below the first ball entrance 64) where both the left-handed game ball and the right-handed game ball can reach A port 650Ra) is provided. Then, each movable member for guiding game balls to each specific winning hole directs almost all the game balls that have reached the area (specific area) below the first ball entering hole 64 to the corresponding specific winning hole. It is configured to operate variably so that it can be guided. As a result, the game ball can enter the specific winning hole regardless of the shooting direction of the game ball during execution of the jackpot game. In other words, while any of the movable members is arranged at the protruding position, the firing intensity that can reach the game area (at least the firing intensity that allows the game ball to fly past the return ball preventing member 68). Most of the launched game balls (game balls that have reached the specific area without entering the first ball entry hole 64 or the general winning hole 63) can enter the specific winning hole. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game, it is possible to further reduce the number of game balls that cannot enter the specific winning hole and flow down to the out hole 66, so that the game efficiency during execution of the jackpot game. can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Also, the two specific winning holes are configured with different benefits (the number of awarded balls to be paid out) that are given when game balls enter each other. And, according to the type of jackpot, the type of the specific winning opening into which the game ball can enter during execution of the jackpot game is differentiated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. In other words, in addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot and the type of game state to be shifted after the execution of the jackpot game is completed, the privilege (the number of prize balls paid out) given each time a ball enters a specific prize winning port is also determined by the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying more attention to the jackpot type. In particular, the number of rounds for the jackpot cannot be set to an arbitrary value without limit, and must be set within a range of an upper limit (for example, 16 rounds) or less. For this reason, there is a limit to making a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out only by the number of rounds. Also, if you try to increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type within the upper limit (16 rounds), you have to reduce the number of rounds for the relatively unfavorable jackpot type, so the difference in the degree of advantage should be increased. The longer the period of the jackpot of the disadvantageous type becomes shorter. Therefore, in particular, when executing a predetermined display effect (display of a specific character dedicated to the jackpot game, etc.) or sound effect (playback of a specific song, etc.) during the execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a disadvantageous type of jackpot. In this case, there is a possibility that the execution of the jackpot game ends before the player fully enjoys the effects (display effects and sound effects) executed during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, by providing a plurality of specific winning holes with different benefits (number of prize balls to be paid out) to be given, and by making a configuration in which the specific winning holes into which balls can be entered differ according to the type of jackpot, the number of rounds is reduced. (that is, while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game), it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. More specifically, in the advantageous type of jackpot, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning opening (that is, the right specific winning opening 650Ra) with a large number of benefits (number of prize balls) to be given is set so that balls can be entered. , In the jackpot of the disadvantageous type, in each round of the jackpot, a specific winning hole (that is, the left specific winning hole 650La) with a small number of awards (number of prize balls) is set so that balls can be entered. As a result, the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be differentiated without excessively reducing the number of rounds for the jackpot of the disadvantageous type. Therefore, it is possible to make a distinction for each jackpot type while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the configuration of the two variable winning devices (left variable winning device 650L, right variable winning device 650R) in the sixth embodiment will be described in more detail. Fig. 85(a) is a front perspective view when the left specific prize winning port 650La of the left variable prize winning device 650L is in a state where it is possible to enter (win) a ball, and Fig. 85(b) is a right variable prize winning device. It is a front perspective view when the right specific winning opening 650Ra of 650R is in a state in which a ball can be entered.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), when the left specific winning hole 650La can be entered, the movable member 650Lb protrudes forward in front view. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the portion of the movable member 650Lb that protrudes forward from the base plate 60 in a front view forms an inclination downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction. The game ball that has reached the lower area (specific area) of the first ball entrance 64 is guided in the lower left direction in front view where the left specific winning opening 650La is provided, and is made to enter the left specific winning opening 650La. can be done. In addition, since the upper left side of the right specific winning opening 650Ra is blocked by the movable member 650Lb, it becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Therefore, when the left specific winning opening 650La is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first ball receiving opening 64) is surely transferred to the left specific winning opening 650La only. It can be made to enter the ball.

On the other hand, when the right specific winning hole 650Ra is in a state in which a ball can be entered, the movable member 650Rb protrudes forward in front view, as shown in FIG. 85(b). As a result, as shown in FIG. 85(b), the portion of the movable member 650Rb that protrudes forward from the base plate 60 in a front view forms an inclination downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction. , the game ball that has reached the area (specific area) below the first ball entrance 64 is guided in the lower right direction in front view where the right specific winning opening 650Ra is provided, and the ball enters the right specific winning opening 650Ra. can be made In addition, since the upper right side of the left specific winning opening 650La is blocked by the movable member 650Rb, it becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the left specific winning opening 650La. Therefore, when the right specific winning hole 650Ra is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first ball entering hole 64) is surely transferred to the right specific winning hole 650Ra only. It can be made to enter the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, detailed configurations of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb described above will be described. In the explanation of FIG. 86 , the lower side of the figure indicates the front side direction of the game board 13 , and the upper side indicates the back side direction of the game board 13 . First, FIG. 86(a) is a top view of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. As shown on the left side of FIG. 86(a), the movable member 650Lb includes a base member 650Lb1 having a substantially oblong rectangular shape and protruding from the left and right ends of the base member 650Lb1 toward the back side of the game board 13. , protrusions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 are provided, respectively. Although not shown, the projecting portions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 are connected to a left variable winning device solenoid (not shown) at the ends opposite to the base member 650Lb1. By driving the left variable winning device solenoid (setting the solenoid to ON), the base member 650Lb1 is moved forward in front view via the projecting portions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4, and is buried in the back side of the base plate 60. from the base plate 60 to the front side of the base plate 60 . On the other hand, when the left variable winning device solenoid is turned off, the base member 650</b>Lb<b>1 is moved backward in front view, and is buried in the depth side of the base plate 60 .

As shown in FIG. 86(a), at the center of the base member 650Lb1, a notch portion 650Lb5 extending from the front side to the back side when viewed from the front is provided, and only the connection portion 650Lb2 provided on the back side when viewed from the front is provided. The left side and the right side of the base member 650Lb1 are connected without separating from each other. The width of the notch 650Lb5 is at least wider than the thickness of the movable member 650Rb. Although the details will be described later, by engaging the movable member 650Rb with the notch 650Lb2, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be moved independently without interfering with each other.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the movable member 650Rb has the same shape as the movable member 650Lb, except that the orientation (arrangement) of the notch 650Rb5 is opposite to that of the movable member 650Lb. The notch portion 650Rb5 of the movable member 650Rb is provided in the base member 650Rb1 from the back side to the front side in front view, and is connected to the left side of the base member 650Lb1 only by the connection portion 650Rb2 provided on the front side in front view. The right side is connected without separation. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 85, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member Rb intersect each other and are housed on the back side of the base plate 60 . At this time, the cutout portion 650Lb5 and the cutout portion 650 of the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are engaged with each other. That is, the connecting portion 650Lb5 of the movable member 650Lb and the connecting portion 650R5 of the movable member 650Rb are housed while facing each other. By storing in this way, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be stored in a relatively small space, so that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively utilized.

FIG. 86(b) is a top view of each of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the movable member 650Rb performs the projecting motion. As shown in FIG. 86(b), when the movable member 650Rb performs the protruding operation, the base member 650Rb1 of the movable member 650Rb is exposed in front of the base plate 60 almost entirely. As a result, the base member 650Rb1 forms an inclination downward toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra, so that the game ball that reaches the lower area (specific area) of the first ball entrance 64 moves along the inclination. It is guided to the right specific prize winning opening 650Ra.

FIG. 86(c) is a top view of each of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the movable member 650Lb performs the projecting motion. As shown in FIG. 86(c), when the movable member 650Lb protrudes, the connection portion 650Lb2 of the movable member 650Lb approaches the connection portion 650Rb2 of the movable member 650Rb as the movement progresses. This protruding motion continues as the connecting portion 650Lb contacts the connecting portion 650Rb2, and the contacting of the connecting portions hinders the protruding motion of the movable member 650Lb and stops the operation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86(c), the movable member 650Lb is in a state in which at least the connecting portion 650Lb2 is housed deeper than the base plate 60 at the projecting position. In addition, even if a portion of the base portion on the back side (a range including at least the connection portion 650Lb2) is stored, the range protruding forward from the base plate 60 is enough for the game ball to pass through. A possible width is exposed. Therefore, when the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) is reliably transferred to the left specific winning opening by the inclination formed by the base member 650Lb1. It can be induced to 650La.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 87, configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 87, the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first win type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 87(a), the first winning type selection table 202b of the sixth embodiment defines three types of big winnings A6, B6, and C6.

As shown in FIG. 87, "jackpot A6" is defined in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". "Jackpot A6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16, and a variable probability state of special symbols is provided after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when the "jackpot A6" is reached, the right specific prize winning opening 650Ra becomes ready for ball entry in each round of the jackpot (that is, the movable member 650Rb changes to the projecting position). Therefore, "jackpot A6" has the largest number of rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is advantageous (that is, a high probability state of special patterns that is more advantageous than the time-saving state of normal patterns is set), and during the jackpot The privilege (the number of awarded balls to be paid out) provided for each entering ball is increased (to 10). Therefore, "jackpot A6" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A6" are "0 to 4". Since there are 5 pieces, the ratio of determining "jackpot A6" when winning the jackpot is 5% (5/100).

In addition, "jackpot B6" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 49". "Jackpot B6" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 7, and a variable state of special symbols is provided after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when the "jackpot B6" is reached, the left specific prize winning opening 650La becomes ready for ball entry in each round of the jackpot (that is, the movable member 650Lb changes to the projecting position). For this reason, "jackpot B6" has a relatively small number of rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is advantageous (that is, a high probability state of special patterns that is more advantageous than the time-saving state of normal patterns is set), and during the jackpot The number of benefits (the number of awarded balls to be paid out) given for each winning ball is relatively small (7). Therefore, the "jackpot B6" is one of the most advantageous jackpot types in terms of the game state after the jackpot, but it is at least more disadvantageous to the player than the "jackpot A6" in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot. Become. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot B6" are "5 to 49". Since the number is 45, the ratio of determining the "jackpot B6" when winning the jackpot is 45% (45/100).

In addition, "big win C6" is defined in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". "Big win C6" is a big win type in which the number of rounds is 7, and a time-saving state of normal symbols is provided only until the variable display of special symbols is completed 100 times after the end of the big win. Furthermore, when the "jackpot C6" is reached, the left specific prize winning opening 650La becomes ready for ball entry in each round of the jackpot (that is, the movable member 650Lb changes to the projecting position). For this reason, "jackpot C6" has a relatively small number of rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is disadvantageous. become individual). Therefore, "jackpot C6" is the most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot C6" are "50 to 99". Since there are 50 pieces, the ratio of determining the "jackpot C6" when winning the jackpot is 50% (50/100).

In addition, since the structure of ROM202 in the 6th Embodiment is not changed except the content of the 1st hit classification selection table 202b, description of the other structure of ROM202 is abbreviate|omitted.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87(b). FIG. 87(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 10) in that a movable type storage area 203aa is added. there is

The movable type storage area 203aa is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the movable member to be moved (protruded) in each round of the jackpot. When a jackpot is won, data indicating a movable member corresponding to the jackpot type is stored for this movable type. More specifically, when the big win is won and the big win A6 is determined, "01H" indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, while either the big win B6 or C6 is stored. If it is determined, "02H" indicating the movable member 650Lb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (see S322 and S323 in FIG. 88). During execution of the jackpot game, each time a new round starts, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is identified, and the projecting motion of the movable member corresponding to the data is set (FIG. 89). (see S1021 of ). In addition, the initial value of the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is set to "00H", and is reset to the initial value at the end of the big win (see S1024 in FIG. 89). The initial value "00H" means that the jackpot game is not being executed (that is, the type of the movable member is not specified).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 88, special symbol variation start processing 6 (S221) in the sixth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation start process 6 (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Similar to the symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a lottery for "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 as well as performing (validity determination).

Of the special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, in each of S301 to S311, each of S301 to S311 of the special symbol variation start processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 24) The same processing as the processing is executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 88) in the sixth embodiment, after setting the display mode according to the jackpot type in the processing of S306 (S306), the jackpot type this time is jackpot A6. (S321), and if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not jackpot A6 (S321: No), store "02H" indicating the movable member 650Lb in the movable type storage area 203aa ( S322), and the process proceeds to S307.

On the other hand, in the processing of S321, when it is determined that the current jackpot type is jackpot A6 (S321: Yes), "01H" indicating the movable member 650Rb is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa (S323). , the process proceeds to S307. The data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa in each process of S322 and S323 is referred to when a new round is started in the big win, and the movable member corresponding to the stored data is moved to the projecting position. be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, details of the jackpot control process 6 (S921) in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 6 (S921). This jackpot control process 6 (S921) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. ), when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern jackpot state, it is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and setting the state of a specific winning hole.

Of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, in each process of S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, and S1013 to S1016, the jackpot control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31) are executed.

Also, in the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1004 (S1004: Yes), the movable type storage area 203aa A projection operation of the movable member corresponding to the stored data is set (S1021). More specifically, when "01H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the projecting motion of the movable member 650Rb is set so that a ball can enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra. . On the other hand, when "02H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the projection operation of the movable member 650Lb is set so that the ball can be entered into the left specific winning hole 650La. When the processing of S1021 ends, the processing moves to S1006.

Also, in the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1007 that the closing condition of the large opening (specific winning opening) is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the movable The burying operation of the movable member corresponding to the data stored in the type storage area 203aa is set (S1022), and this process ends. That is, when "01H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, setting is made so that the ball cannot be entered into the right specific winning hole 650Ra by setting the moving member 650Rb to enter. On the other hand, when "02H" is stored in the movable type storage area 203aa, the immersion operation of the movable member 650Lb is set so that the ball cannot be entered into the left specific winning hole 650La.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S1015 is completed, next, the data stored in the movable type storage area 203aa is reset to "00H" (S1024 ), and the process proceeds to S1016. By this jackpot control processing 6 (see FIG. 89), variable operation of each movable member is performed so that a ball can be entered in the specific prize winning port corresponding to the jackpot type, out of the left specific prize winning port 650La and the right specific prize winning port 650Ra. can be properly controlled.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to provide two specific winning openings (the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra) with different benefits given to the specific areas. , The configuration is such that the specific winning hole that allows ball entry is variable according to the type of jackpot. More specifically, by performing a projecting action, the movable member 650Lb that forms an inclination that guides the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area to the left specific winning opening 650La, and the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area A movable member 650Rb forming an inclination leading to the specific winning opening 650Ra is provided between the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. In the jackpot types (jackpots B6 and C6) in which the left specific winning hole 650La can enter the ball, the movable member 650Lb is controlled to project in each round of the jackpot. On the other hand, in the jackpot type (jackpot A6) in which the right specific winning hole 650Ra can be entered, the movable member 650Rb is controlled to project in each round of the jackpot.

Both of the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are configured to have a width capable of receiving almost all game balls that have flowed down to the specific area in a state of being arranged at the projecting position. Therefore, in a state in which any movable member is arranged at the projecting position, the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area can almost certainly enter the corresponding specific winning hole. Here, the specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) can be reached by almost all game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 63 or the first ball entrance 64, regardless of the launch direction. is configured to That is, most of the left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls (90% or more) reach the specific area. Therefore, regardless of the shooting direction of the game ball, regardless of whether the left movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position or the right movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position. A game ball can enter a specific winning hole (either the left specific winning hole 650La or the right specific winning hole 650Ra). Therefore, every time a big win is made, the player can select a desired shooting direction and play a game during the big win.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the left and right direction, and the surfaces (left specific winning opening 650La, It is configured such that the right specific winning openings 650Ra) are arranged to face each other. By forming an inclination downward toward each specific winning hole by each movable member, a state is constituted in which a game ball can enter each specific winning hole. In other words, each specific winning hole is provided in a direction in which the game ball normally does not advance, and each movable member changes the traveling direction of the game ball to a direction different from the normal direction, so that the ball can enter each specific winning hole. state. As a result, the configuration of the specific winning hole 65a of the above-described first embodiment (which is provided in the middle of the flow path in which the game ball progresses even at normal times, and allows most of the game balls that flow down the flow path to flow in) Each specific winning hole can be made compact compared to the open structure). That is, since each specific winning hole can be configured with an area equal to or more than one game ball and less than two, the area of the specific winning hole can be reduced. Therefore, since each variable winning device can be made compact, the area shown by the two variable winning devices on the board can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in board configuration can be increased. Here, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of large winning openings (specific winning openings) that are opened and closed during the execution of a jackpot game are provided on the board surface, each of the large winning openings is defined as a channel in which the large winning openings are provided. It is common to configure so that it can be opened with substantially the same width. In addition, the plurality of big winning holes are arranged in a vertical direction in a front view in one flow path, and game balls can be placed in any of the big winning holes just by continuously shooting game balls into the same flow path during a big win. It is common that it is configured so that it can be entered. However, in this configuration, the larger the number of the large winning slots, the larger the installation area, and thus there is a problem that the degree of freedom in board configuration is reduced. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, each variable winning device can be configured compactly, so it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in board configuration.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, two specific winning openings (left specific winning opening 650La, right specific winning opening 650Ra) are provided when game balls enter each other (the number of winning balls to be paid out) are configured differently. And, according to the type of jackpot, the type of the specific winning opening into which the game ball can enter during execution of the jackpot game is differentiated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. In other words, in addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot and the type of game state to be shifted after the execution of the jackpot game is completed, the privilege (the number of prize balls paid out) given each time a ball enters a specific prize winning port is also determined by the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while paying more attention to the jackpot type. In particular, the number of rounds for the jackpot cannot be set to an arbitrary value without limit, and must be set within a range of an upper limit (for example, 16 rounds) or less. For this reason, there is a limit to making a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out only by the number of rounds. Also, if you try to increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type within the upper limit (16 rounds), you have to reduce the number of rounds for the relatively unfavorable jackpot type, so the difference in the degree of advantage should be increased. The longer the period of the jackpot of the disadvantageous type becomes shorter. Therefore, in particular, when executing a predetermined display effect (display of a specific character dedicated to the jackpot game, etc.) or sound effect (playback of a specific song, etc.) during the execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a disadvantageous type of jackpot. In this case, there is a possibility that the execution of the jackpot game ends before the player fully enjoys the effects (display effects and sound effects) executed during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, by providing a plurality of specific winning holes with different benefits (number of prize balls paid out) to be given, and making a configuration in which the specific winning holes into which balls can be entered differ according to the type of jackpot, the number of rounds is reduced. (that is, while sufficiently ensuring the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game), it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type. More specifically, in the advantageous type of jackpot, each round of the jackpot is set to allow balls to be entered in the specific winning hole (that is, the right specific winning hole 650Ra) that provides a large number of benefits (number of prize balls). In a disadvantageous type of jackpot, a specific winning hole (that is, the left specific winning hole 650La) that provides a small number of benefits (number of prize balls) is set to allow balls to be entered in each round of the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to differentiate the degree of advantage for each jackpot type without excessively reducing the number of rounds for the jackpot of the disadvantageous type. Therefore, it is possible to make a distinction for each jackpot type while sufficiently securing the execution period of various effects executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the sixth embodiment, an independent driving source is provided for each movable member, but the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb may be controlled by one driving source. More specifically, for example, only one motor is provided as a drive source, and the motor is driven in the forward direction (first direction) in a state in which each movable member 650Lb is arranged at the retracted position (retracted position). By driving the motor in the negative direction (second direction), only the movable member 650Rb is moved toward the protruded position. You may That is, two types of gears are provided with respect to the rotating shaft of one motor: a left tilting gear for transmitting driving force to the movable member 650Lb and a right tilting gear for transmitting driving force to the movable member 650Rb. In addition, the gear for left tilting has teeth arranged so that the movable member 650Lb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the forward direction at the retracted position of each movable member. In other words, the teeth are arranged in such a range that the gear on the side of the movable member 650Lb and the left-tilting gear engage only when the motor rotates forward. Further, the teeth of the right tilt gear are arranged so that the movable member 650Rb can be driven only when the motor rotates in the negative direction at the retracted position of each movable member. In other words, the teeth are arranged in such a range that the gear on the side of the movable member 650Rb and the right tilt gear engage only when the motor rotates negatively. By configuring in this way, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be separately moved by one drive source, so the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the sixth embodiment, each variable winning device is arranged below the first ball entrance 64, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each variable winning device is provided in the middle of the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a game ball hit to the right in a state in which any movable member is arranged at the projecting position , almost all of them may be guided to a specific prize winning opening. Conversely, each variable winning device is provided in the middle of the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and left-handed with one of the movable members arranged at the projecting position. It may be configured such that almost all game balls are guided to a specific winning hole. Since the flow path on the right side and the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 are narrower than the area below the first ball entrance 64, each variable winning device and each movable member can be placed on the board surface. The area occupied can be made smaller. In this case, the width and inclination angle of each movable member may be adjusted according to the width of the flow path.

<Modified Example of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. In the above-described sixth embodiment, two specific winning openings (the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra) are provided. By forming an inclination toward , a game ball that reaches a specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) is guided to the specific winning opening.

On the other hand, in this modified example, instead of the two movable members, a single moving member 650b capable of parallel movement in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front is provided between the two specific prize winning openings in the specific area. Although the details will be described later, the left side of the moving member 650b forms an inclination toward the lower left direction when viewed from the front, while the right side forms an inclination toward the lower right direction when viewed from the front. When the left specific winning opening 650La is set to a state in which a ball can be entered, the moving member 650b is moved in parallel in the left direction in front view to be adjacent to the left specific winning opening 650La. A game ball can be guided to the left specific winning port 650La. Conversely, when the right specific winning opening 650Ra is set to a state in which a ball can be entered, the moving member 650b is moved in parallel in the right direction in front view, and the right side of the moving member 650b tilts toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra. A game ball is configured to be movable. In this way, by horizontally moving the single moving member 650b, the number of solenoids for driving various movable members can be reduced, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

The board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the board configuration of the game board 13 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 90, the game board 13 in this modified example has a moving member 650b instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb in contrast to the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84). The difference is that they are provided.

As shown in FIG. 90, the moving member 650b is formed in a substantially triangular shape, and normally (when the jackpot game is not being executed), it is in a stationary state at an intermediate position between the specific winning openings. In this state (see FIG. 90), there is a space of one game ball or more between the moving member 650b and each specific winning hole. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) in normal times is a channel between the moving member 650b and the left specific winning opening 650La, or the moving member 650b and the right specific winning It is guided to the out port 66 by flowing down the channel between the port 650Ra.

Next, the detailed structure of the moving member 650b will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91(a) is a top view of the moving member 650b, and FIG. 91(b) is a front view of the moving member 650b. , and FIG. 91(c) is a sectional view taken along line XCI--XCI shown in FIG. 91(b). As shown in FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c), the moving member 650b is configured such that a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular plate-like projecting portion 650bb protrudes from the rear side of a substantially triangular prism-shaped member. Although not shown, the projecting portion 650bb is connected to a moving member motor (not shown), and when the moving member motor is driven in the forward direction, the projecting portion 650bb is moved leftward in front view. The driving force is transmitted, and the moving member 650b is translated leftward in front view. Further, when the moving member motor is driven in the negative direction, a driving force in the right direction in front view is transmitted to the projecting portion 650bb, and the moving member 650b moves in parallel in the right direction in front view.

As shown in FIGS. 91(a) to (c), a right slope 650b1 and a left slope 650b2 each having a width of one game ball or more are provided on the right side and the left side of the moving member 650b when viewed from the front. there is A game ball reaching the moving member 650b from above flows downward along either the right slope 650b1 or the left slope 650b2.

FIG. 91(d) is a front perspective view of the moving member 650b. As shown in FIG. 91(d), the protruding portion 650bb of the moving member 650b is included on the inner side of the base plate 60 through the lateral movement hole 650ba formed in the base plate 60. As shown in FIG. The rear end of the protruding portion 650bb in front view is connected to the moving member motor as described above. When the moving member motor applies a driving force in the horizontal direction to the moving member 650b, the projecting portion 650bb moves in the horizontal direction along the horizontal movement hole 650ba, and as a result, the moving member 650b moves in parallel in the horizontal direction.

Next, referring to FIG. 92, the downward flow direction of the game ball for each arrangement of the moving member 650b will be described. FIG. 92(a) is a diagram showing the downward direction of the game ball when the moving member 650b is translated leftward in front view. As shown in FIG. 92(a), when the moving member 650b is translated in the left direction in the front view and is in a state adjacent to the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the left direction (That is, the left-handed game ball) falls to the left side slope of the moving member 650b in the front view, and flows down along the slope to enter the left specific winning hole 650La. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the right direction (that is, the game ball that has been hit to the right) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the right variable winning device 650R and moves in the direction of the out port 66. flow down Thus, in a state in which the moving member 650b is translated leftward, the game ball can enter only the left specific winning hole 650La.

FIG. 92(b) is a diagram showing the downflow direction of the game ball when the moving member 650b is translated rightward in front view. As shown in FIG. 92(b), the moving member 650b moves in parallel in the right direction in the front view, and when it is in a state adjacent to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game ball that reaches the specific area from the right direction (That is, the game ball hit to the right) falls on the slope on the right side of the moving member 650b in front view, and enters the right specific winning hole 650Ra by flowing down along the slope. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the specific area from the left direction (that is, the game ball hit left) passes through the space between the moving member 650b and the left variable winning device 650L and moves in the direction of the out port 66. flow down Thus, in a state in which the moving member 650b is translated rightward, the game ball can enter only the right specific winning hole 650Ra.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the sixth embodiment, the single moving member 650b is translated in the left-right direction instead of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, so that a specific winning hole ( It is configured to form a state in which a game ball can enter either the left specific winning opening 650La or the right specific winning opening 650Ra. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the state of the two specific winning holes (switch between a state where a ball can be entered and a state where it is difficult to enter a ball) with one drive source (moving member motor). Therefore, since the number of drive sources can be reduced compared to the sixth embodiment described above, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, during execution of the jackpot game, the game balls are guided to the specific winning openings on the side close to the moving member 650b by the inclinations provided on the left and right sides of the moving member 650b. Only by visually recognizing the arrangement in the left-right direction, the player can easily understand the shooting direction in which the game ball can easily enter. That is, when the moving member 650b is moved to the right side in front view and is in a state of being close to the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game ball can easily enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra by hitting to the right. can be balled. On the other hand, when the moving member 650b is moved to the left side in the front view and is in a state close to the left specific winning opening 650La, the game ball can easily enter the left specific winning opening 650La by hitting to the left. can be balled.

Further, in this modification, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and a game ball can be entered. The surfaces (the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra) are arranged to face each other. As a result, as in the sixth embodiment, it is sufficient to secure an area of one game ball or more as the area of each specific winning hole, and it is possible to reduce the area of the specific winning holes. That is, since each variable winning device can be made compact, the area shown by the two variable winning devices on the board surface can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in board configuration.

In addition, in the modification of the sixth embodiment, each specific winning opening is arranged in the horizontal direction, and the moving member 650b is configured to be movable in the horizontal direction between the specific winning openings, but this is not the only option. not a thing For example, each specific winning opening may be vertically arranged, and the moving member 650b may be vertically movable from a position close to one specific winning opening to a position close to the other specific winning opening. Also, in this case, the inclination of the side surface of the moving member 650b opposite to the side surface on which the specific winning opening is arranged may be eliminated. With this configuration, the area occupied by each variable winning device and the moving member 650b on the board can be reduced, so that the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 can be made more flexible.

<Second Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138, a second modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment described above will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above, a driving source (solenoid) for driving the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb (appearing and retracting motion) is provided separately (independently) for each movable member, When the movable condition of each movable member is satisfied, the corresponding drive source is driven to variably operate the movable member (appearing and retracting operation).

On the other hand, in the second modified example, a plurality (two) of movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are configured to be controllable by one drive source. More specifically, only a single motor (driving motor 6500) is provided as a drive source for causing the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb to perform variable operations (appearing and retracting operations). By driving the driving motor 6500 in the forward direction in the retracted position, the movable member 650Lb is variably moved to the projecting position, and by driving the driving motor 6500 in the negative direction, the movable member 650Rb is configured to variably move to the projecting position. As a result, the plurality of movable members can be variably operated with a small number of drive sources, so that the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second modification of the sixth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment in that the structures of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the sixth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 137 is a perspective view showing each movable member 650Lb, 650Rb in the second modified example of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 137 shows a state where the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are both arranged at the buried position. As shown in FIG. 137, in each movable member 650Lb in the second modified example, the projecting portions 650Lb3 and 650Lb4 provided in the movable member 650Lb in the sixth embodiment are deleted, and instead, the movable member 650Lb has A substantially cylindrical projecting portion 650Lb6 is provided so as to project to the rear side in a front view, and a gear member 650Lb7 is connected to the end of the projecting portion 650Lb6 on the side opposite to the movable member 650Lb. Similarly, with regard to the movable member 650Rb, the projecting portions 650Rb3 and 650Rb4 are removed, and instead, a substantially cylindrical projecting portion 650Rb6 that projects toward the rear side in front view with respect to the movable member 650Rb and the projecting portion 650Rb6 are provided. A gear member 650Rb7 connected to the end of the portion 650Rb6 opposite to the movable member 650Rb is provided.

In addition, in the second modified example, as shown in FIG. 137, there is a circular A circular gear 6500a having gear teeth provided on the back side in front view and having no gear teeth on the front side in front view is provided. This circular gear 6500a is joined to the drive shaft of a drive motor 6500 disposed below. When the drive motor 6500 is driven, the drive shaft rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the drive shaft. It rotates at the same period in the same direction as the direction. The circular gear 6500a has a side surface on which gear teeth are provided, which is arranged on the back side in a front view, and is in a state in which it does not mesh with the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 nor the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb7. The arrangement (see FIG. 137) is set as the initial arrangement. In the initial arrangement of the circular gear 6500a, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are arranged at the retracted position. Further, the circular gear 6500a rotates in the direction in which the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 of the movable member 650Lb and the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a mesh with each other when the drive motor 6500 is driven in the forward direction. When the drive motor 6500 is driven in the negative direction, the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb7 of the movable member 650Rb and the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a are engaged with each other.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, operations of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the circular gear 6500a rotates in the positive and negative directions will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 138(a), the operation contents of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb when the drive motor 6500 is driven in the forward direction will be described. FIG. 138(a) is a top view of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb and the circular gear 6500a when the driving motor 6500 is driven in the forward direction.

As shown in FIG. 138(a), when the drive motor 6500 is driven in the forward direction and the circular gear 6500a joined to the drive shaft of the drive motor 6500 rotates counterclockwise, the circular gear 6500a rotates counterclockwise. The gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 arranged on the left side in front view of the circular gear 6500a mesh with the gear teeth provided in a partial range of the side surface of the circular gear 6500a. Therefore, the rotational force that rotates the circular gear 6500a in the counterclockwise direction is transmitted to the gear member 650Lb7 that meshes with the rotating member 6500a, and the driving force directed toward the front side in the front view is applied to the gear member 650Lb7. work. As a result, the movable member 650Lb joined to the gear member 650Lb7 also receives a driving force toward the front side in front view, and the movable member 650Lb protrudes forward in front view. As a result, the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the projecting position. On the other hand, the gear member 650Rb7 of the movable member 650Rb is operated while the movable member 650Lb is performing a variable operation from the retracted position to the projecting position (that is, while the circular gear 6500a is rotating about 180 degrees counterclockwise). , the range of the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a is not located at a position where it meshes with the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb, so the gear member 650Rb7 is not moved. Therefore, while the movable member 650Lb moves from the retracted position (recessed position) to the projected position, the movable member 650Rb does not perform a variable operation. When moving the movable member 650Lb from the projecting position to the recessed position (recessed position), the drive motor 6500 is driven in the negative direction to the origin position, whereby the circular gear 6500a rotates clockwise to the origin position. , the gear member 650Lb7 returns to the retracted position. During this time, the gear teeth of the gear member 650Rb7 of the movable member 650Rb do not mesh with the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a, so the movable member 650Rb7 does not move.

As shown in FIG. 138(b), when the driving motor 6500 is driven in the negative direction and the circular gear 6500a rotates clockwise, the gear arranged on the right side of the circular gear 6500a in the front view The gear teeth of the member 650Rb7 mesh with the gear teeth provided in a partial range of the side surface of the circular gear 6500a. Therefore, the rotational force that rotates the circular gear 6500a in the clockwise direction is transmitted to the gear member 650Rb7 that meshes with the rotating member 6500a, and a driving force acts on the gear member 650Rb7 toward the front side when viewed from the front. . As a result, the movable member 650Rb joined to the gear member 650Rb7 also receives a driving force toward the front side in front view, and the movable member 650Rb protrudes forward in front view. As a result, the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the projecting position. On the other hand, the gear member 650Lb7 of the movable member 650Lb, while the movable member 650Rb is performing a variable operation from the retracted position to the projecting position (that is, while the circular gear 6500a is rotating about 180 degrees clockwise), Since the area of the circular gear 6500a where the gear teeth are provided is not located at the position where the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb mesh, the gear member 650Lb7 is not moved. Therefore, while the movable member 650Rb moves from the retracted position (recessed position) to the protruded position, the movable member 650Lb does not perform a variable operation. When the movable member 650Rb is moved from the projecting position to the recessed position (recessed position), the drive motor 6500 is driven in the forward direction to the origin position, so that the circular gear 6500a rotates counterclockwise to the origin position. As the action is performed, the gear member 650Rb7 returns to the retracted position. During this time, the gear teeth of the gear member 650Lb7 of the movable member 650Lb do not mesh with the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a, so the movable member 650Lb7 does not move.

As described above, in the second modification of the sixth embodiment, it is possible to independently variably operate a plurality of movable members according to the driving direction of one driving motor 6500 . More specifically, by rotating the driving motor 6500 about 180 degrees in the forward direction from the origin position of the rotation operation, the movable member 650Lb is retracted while the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the retracted position (recessed position). While the movable member 650Lb can be variably operated from the position (buried position) to the protruded position, the drive motor 6500 can be rotated about 180 degrees in the negative direction from the origin position of the rotational motion, thereby moving the movable member 650Lb to the retracted position (buried position). position), the movable member 650Rb can be variably operated from the retracted position (retracted position) to the projecting position. By configuring in this way, the plurality of movable members can be variably operated with a smaller number of drive sources, so the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb are moved by only one drive source (driving motor 6500), but the present invention is not limited to this. , another drive source may be additionally provided. More specifically, for example, a configuration in which a second drive source is provided separately from the drive motor 6500 for one of the movable members, and the movable member on the side provided with the second drive source is At least part of the time when the condition for movability is met, the configuration may be such that the movability is achieved by driving the second drive source. With the drive motor 6500 alone, while one movable member is moving (while it is arranged at a position different from the retracted position), the other movable member cannot be moved (the gear teeth of the corresponding gear member and the gear teeth of the circular gear 6500a), it is impossible to simultaneously move a plurality of movable members to a position other than the buried position. On the other hand, by providing the second drive source, both movable members can be moved normally when the condition for moving one movable member is met while the other movable member is being moved. can. In this modification, either one of the left variable winning device 650L or the right variable winning device 650R has the same performance as the first ball entrance 64 (that is, when a game ball enters This is effective when the second ball entrance is used as the second ball entrance which triggers the lottery of the special pattern, and the corresponding movable member is configured as an electric accessory that moves to the protruding position when winning the lottery of the normal pattern. Even during execution of the jackpot game, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the through gate 67 to win the normal pattern. This is because there is a possibility that it overlaps with the release period of the object.

In the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be moved by one driving source (driving motor 6500). The technique of moving the member is not limited to application to the opening/closing control of the specific prize winning opening. For example, the drive motor 6500 having the configuration of this modified example may be employed when moving a plurality of performance accessories.

In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are always open, and each specific winning opening is positioned with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball (vertical direction when viewed from the front). By arranging them so as to be perpendicular to each other, it was configured to prevent (suppress) the game balls from entering each specific winning hole during normal times (states other than during the execution of the jackpot game). , but not limited to these. For example, an opening/closing door for opening/closing each specific winning opening may be provided separately from the movable member. Then, in the jackpot game state, only the opening/closing plate corresponding to the jackpot type (the opening/closing plate attached to the specific winning port where the game ball reaching the specific area is easily guided by the movable member) may be opened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game ball from entering the specific winning hole at normal times and paying out the prize ball even though the game is not in the jackpot game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hole. In this case, the movable member may be configured to move periodically or randomly regardless of the type of jackpot. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize the game property of shooting the game ball aiming at the timing when the game ball is easily guided by the movable member to the specific winning hole with the opening/closing door opened. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. It should be noted that, in order to realize this playability, the player will understand to which specific winning opening the game ball is more likely to be guided by using the moving member 650b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment. easier and more effective. The period during which the movable member is periodically or randomly moved may be only during the execution of the jackpot game, or it may be configured so as to always be movable while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. good too. It should be noted that in the case where each specific winning opening is provided with an opening/closing door in the modified example of the sixth embodiment described above, the moving member 650b is arranged at an intermediate position between the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. , and each opening/closing door tilts toward the direction of the moving member 650b, so that the side surface of the moving member 650b and the tilted opening/closing door form a flow path toward the specific winning opening, Each specific winning hole may be configured to be in a state in which a ball can be entered. By configuring in this way, in a state in which a ball can be entered into each specific winning hole, the width in which the game ball can be guided to the corresponding specific winning hole is widened, thereby reducing the possibility of generating useless balls. can do. Therefore, the player's profit can be increased.

In the sixth embodiment and its modification, ten prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the right specific winning hole 650Ra, while when the game ball enters the left specific winning hole 650La Although seven prize balls are paid out, the amount of privilege given when a game ball enters each specific winning hole can be arbitrarily determined. In this case, it is not necessary to make the number of prize balls awarded when balls enter the right specific prize winning opening 650Ra larger than the number of prize balls awarded when balls enter the left specific prize winning opening 650La. . For example, the number of prize balls to be given may be the same, or the number of prize balls to be given may be larger when the ball enters the left specific prize opening 650La than when the ball enters the right specific prize opening 650Ra. good. Moreover, the privilege given when a ball enters each specific winning hole is not limited to prize balls. For example, when a game ball enters one specific winning hole during execution of a jackpot game, only the winning ball is paid out, while when a gaming ball enters the other specific winning hole, a prize is awarded. In place of or in addition to the payout of the ball, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability variable state of the special symbol is given as a privilege after the big win is finished.

In the sixth embodiment and its modification, two specific winning holes are provided in the specific area, and the specific winning hole that allows the ball to enter is switched according to the type of jackpot, but this is not the only option. It is not something that can be done. For example, one or both of the two specific winning holes provided in the specific area may be used as a ball-in hole (second ball-in hole) that triggers a special symbol lottery. That is, at least one of the two specific prize-winning holes may be configured as a second ball-entering hole having the same function as the first ball-entering hole 64 . In this case, the movable member 650Lb and the movable member 650Rb (the movable member 650b) may be moved in a predetermined movable pattern when the lottery for the normal symbol is won. In addition, in the case of transforming into a combination of a specific winning hole and a second ball-entering hole, the condition that each winning hole (the specific winning hole and the second ball-entering hole) can enter a ball can be established at the same time. Like the movable member in the sixth embodiment, it is preferable that the movable member for forming a state in which the ball can be entered into each winning hole is independently operable. The through gate 67 is always in a state in which game balls can pass through, and the lottery for normal symbols is executed in the same manner as during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, during the round game of each round of the jackpot (while the movable member corresponding to the specific winning opening is arranged at the protruding position), the normal pattern lottery wins, and the movable member corresponding to the second ball entrance protrudes. There is a possibility that the conditions for moving to the position are established. Therefore, if a movable member, such as the moving member 650b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, which can form a state in which a ball can be entered only in one entrance, is adopted, at least one of the entrances will win. A problem may occur in which a state in which the ball can be entered cannot be established even though the condition for allowing the ball to be entered into the mouth is satisfied. Therefore, as exemplified in the sixth embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the separate movable members corresponding to the respective winning openings can be independently movably controlled, each winning opening can be entered. Even if the conditions are met in duplicate, the movable members corresponding to the respective prize winning openings can be moved at the same time. It is possible to suppress the problem that a ball cannot be put into a state in which the ball can be entered even though the condition that the ball can be entered into at least one of the winning holes is met.

In the above-described sixth embodiment and its modification, two specific winning openings are arranged to face each other in the specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64). By forming an inclination, the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided to the corresponding specific winning hole. , but not limited to these. For example, in the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, two variable winning devices with different numbers of awarded balls may be vertically arranged in the specific area. And it is good also as a structure which changes the specific winning opening opened according to a jackpot classification.

In the above-described sixth embodiment and its modification, the configuration is such that the specific winning opening into which the ball can be entered is changed according to the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the type of jackpot, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific winning opening that allows a ball to enter is changed according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Thereby, the degree of freedom of control can be further increased.

In the sixth embodiment and its modification, the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are configured to face each other. That is, the left specific prize winning port 650La and the right specific prize winning port La are arranged side by side, and the left specific prize winning port 650La is configured to face right when viewed from the front, and the right specific prize winning port 650Ra is configured to face left when viewed from the front. It is not necessary to face each specific winning opening. It is possible to enter a ball (easy to enter a ball) while the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruding position, and while the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position and each movable member is at the retracted position (retracted position). The left specific winning hole 650La is provided at a position where it is impossible to enter a ball (difficult to enter a ball) while the movable member 650Rb is arranged, and a ball can be entered (entered a ball) while the movable member 650Rb is arranged in the projecting position easy), and while the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the projecting position and while each movable member is arranged at the retracted position (recessed position), the ball cannot be entered (ball is difficult to enter). Any structure may be used as long as the right specific winning opening 650Ra is provided. As a specific example, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, the spherical entrance surface of the left specific winning hole 650La and the spherical entrance surface of the right specific winning hole 650Ra may be arranged in parallel. That is, as shown in FIG. 136, a left specific prize winning opening 650La constituted by a through hole passing through the base plate 60 is provided on the lower left side of the movable member 650Lb, and a special prize winning opening 650La is provided on the lower right side of the movable member 650Rb. A right specific prize winning opening 650Ra formed of a through hole passing through the base plate 60 may be provided. In addition, with respect to the circumference of each specific winning opening, the corresponding movable member is placed in a state where the corresponding movable member is arranged at a protruding position, and the person who guides the game ball that has flowed down the movable member to the specific winning opening. Outer edge portions 650La1 and 650Ra1 may be provided for preventing (suppressing) the game ball that has flowed down in the state of being placed in the immersed position (buried position) from reaching the specific winning opening. That is, as shown in FIG. 136, a peripheral portion 650La1 having a substantially inverted U-shape is provided around the left specific winning hole 650La. The game ball that has flowed down normally is prevented from reaching the left specific winning opening 650La by the upper side and the left side of the peripheral portion 650La1. In addition, in the state where the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the protruded position, the game ball that has flowed downward to the left via the movable member 650Lb moves from the upper right side to the lower left side in the front view formed by the lower side of the peripheral edge portion 650La1. It is guided to the left specific prize winning opening 650La by the inclination downward to the side. In addition, as shown in FIG. 136, a substantially U-shaped peripheral edge portion 650Ra1 is provided around the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The game ball that has flowed down normally is prevented from reaching the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the upper side and the right side of the peripheral portion 650Ra1. In addition, in the state where the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruded position, the game ball that has flowed down in the lower right direction via the movable member 650Rb is projected from the upper left side in the front view formed by the lower side of the peripheral edge portion 650Ra1. It is guided to the right specific prize winning opening 650Ra by the slope downward to the right. In this way, even if the left specific winning hole 650La and the right specific winning hole 650Ra are not configured to face each other, it is possible to realize the same game performance as in the sixth embodiment described above.

In the above-described sixth embodiment and its modification, by moving the corresponding movable member to the projecting position in each round of the big win, the state in which the ball can enter the left specific winning hole 650La and the right specific winning hole 650La are provided. Although it is configured to form a state in which it is possible to enter a ball at 650Ra, it is not limited to this. For example, the state in which a ball can be entered into the left specific winning hole 650La and the state in which a ball can be entered into the right specific winning hole 650Ra may be switched according to the passage of a game ball. In this case, it may be possible to use a movable member whose state (arrangement) is structurally switched each time a game ball passes through, or to provide a sensor for detecting the passage of a game ball, thereby improving the controllability. It may be configured to be realized in

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 108. FIG. In the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning holes (left A specific winning hole 650La and a right specific winning hole 650Ra) are provided, and the type of the specific winning hole into which balls can be entered in each round of the big win is variable according to the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, instead of the left specific winning opening 650La and the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment, the game ball enters during the execution of the jackpot game. Two definite variable winning openings (left definite variable winning opening 655La, right definite variable winning opening 655Ra) are provided to trigger a state (variable definite winning state of special symbols and short working time state of normal symbols). In the first round of the jackpot, either one of the two variable probability winning openings is set in a state in which the ball can be entered for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). That is, one movable member is moved to the projecting position, thereby forming an inclination downward toward one of the probability variable winning openings. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 95, but in the first round, the predetermined period (1 second) in which one of the variable winning openings can be entered is a game ball hit to the right and reaching a specific area, It consists of a period in which one of the game balls hit to the left and reached the specific area can enter the probability variable winning opening and the other is difficult to enter. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player predicts the shooting direction in which the ball can enter the variable winning opening and shoots the game ball.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 , and the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the sixth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 93, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84) in place of the left variable winning device 650L. The point that the variable probability winning device 655L is provided, the point that the right variable winning device 655R is provided instead of the right variable winning device 650R, the variable winning is below the area where the two movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are provided. The only difference is that device 65 is provided.

Left and right variable winning device 655L and right variable winning device 655R are provided with left and right variable winning ports 655La and 655Ra, respectively, having the same shape as left specific winning port 650La and right specific winning port 650Ra in the sixth embodiment. there is Therefore, the game ball that reaches the specific area at normal time (state other than the execution of the jackpot game) enters the out port 66 without entering the left probability variable winning port 655La or the right probability variable winning port 655Ra. flow down in the direction of Further, in the state where the movable member 650Lb protrudes, the movable member 650Lb forms an inclination in the direction toward the left variable winning opening 655La (inclination in the direction downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction), so that the specific area is formed. The game ball that has reached is guided to the left variable winning opening 655La. On the other hand, in the state where the movable member 650Rb protrudes, the movable member 650Rb forms an inclination in the direction toward the right variable winning opening 655Ra (inclination in the direction downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction), so that the specific area The game ball reaching to is guided to the right probability variable winning opening 655Ra. As described above, the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is placed at the protruded position only for one second (predetermined period) in one round. Even if the game ball reaches the specific area at the time, if it cannot reach the corresponding probability variable winning opening within 1 second after being placed at the projecting position, the movable member is immersed. , the game ball flows down in the direction of the out port 66. - 特許庁

The variable winning device 65 has the same configuration as the variable winning device 65 provided on the game board 13 of the first embodiment. That is, a specific winning opening 65a into which a game ball can enter, a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large open opening solenoid for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. (not shown). The specific winning hole 65a in the seventh embodiment is set to an open state in which game balls can enter in each round after the second round of the jackpot. More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, either the movable member 650Lb or the movable member 650Rb is changed to the projecting position for one second depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, in each round after the second round of the jackpot, the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb are maintained in the immersed state, and the opening/closing plate of the specific prize winning port 65a is opened forward to the specific prize winning port 65a. and form an open state in which a game ball can enter. This open state continues until 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round, or until 10 or more game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a. By entering the game ball into one of the variable winning ports (left variable winning port 655La or right variable winning port 655Ra) in the first round of the jackpot, the variable gaming state (variable state of special symbols, In addition, while the time-saving state of the normal pattern is given, if the game ball does not enter the variable winning opening even once during the execution of the jackpot game, 100 times of the time-saving game state (special A low probability state of the pattern and a short working time state of the normal pattern) are given. Therefore, the degree of advantage after the end of the jackpot varies depending on whether or not the game ball enters the variable probability winning opening, so that the game ball enters the variable probability winning opening in the first round for the player. It can be made to pay attention by whether or not. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, details of the left probability variable winning device 655L and the right probability variable winning device 655R will be described. FIG. 94(a) is an enlarged front view of the specific region portion of the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 94(b) is a sectional view taken along the line XCIV-XCIV shown in FIG. 94(a). As shown in FIG. 94(b), the left probability variable winning device 655L and the right probability variable winning device 655R are connected on the back side of the base plate 60. FIG. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 94(b), it is provided inside the left probability variation winning device 655L, and guides the game ball entering the left probability variation winning port 655La to the back side of the base plate 60 and discharges it. The left probability variable flow path 655Ld and the right probability variable flow path 655Rd for guiding and discharging the game ball entering the right probability variable winning opening 655Ra to the back side of the base plate 60 are on the back side of the base plate 60 are merging at In addition, a discharge port 656 for discharging the entering game ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided at a position where the left variable probability channel 655Ld and the right variable probability channel 655Rd merge. Although not shown, the discharge port 656 is provided with a ball passage switch (probability variable switch) capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. By detecting the passage of the variable probability switch, it is determined that the game ball has entered one of the variable probability winning openings, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the variable probability game state.

In this way, each variable probability winning device is merged inside, and a game ball that has entered one of the variable probability winning ports is discharged from one discharge port 656, and the passage of the one discharge port is monitored. By doing so, it is possible to minimize the number of variable probability switches by determining whether or not the game ball has entered any of the variable probability winning openings. That is, if a variable probability switch is provided for each variable probability winning device, it is necessary to provide at least two variable probability switches. It is possible to accurately determine that the game ball has entered either of them. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of variable probability switches. Further, by joining the variable probability winning devices inside, they can be handled as one winning device. Here, in the game rules, an upper limit (for example, two) is set for the number of prize winning devices that can be entered during execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, as in the seventh embodiment, by treating two variable variable winning devices as one winning device, the number of winning devices according to the game rules can be reduced, making it easier to satisfy the game rules. A pachinko machine 10 can be provided.

Next, referring to FIG. 95, regarding the downflow direction of the game ball in the first round in the case of the jackpot type in which the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the projecting position in the first round of the jackpot in the seventh embodiment. explain. In order to simplify the description, in the following description, the movable pattern (open pattern) in which the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the projecting position is referred to as the "left V "open pattern". On the other hand, the movable pattern (open pattern) in which the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position is referred to as the "right V open pattern" in the sense of the open pattern that easily wins the right variable winning opening 655Ra.

FIG. 95(a) is a diagram showing the downward flow direction of the game ball when the right V opening pattern (the movable pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the projecting position) is determined and the player hits left. be. As shown in FIG. 95(a), a left-handed game ball falls on the movable member 650Rb from the left direction in front view with respect to the specific area. Since the movable member 650Rb is inclined downward from the upper left to the lower right when viewed from the front, the momentum of the game ball (momentum in the lower left direction) is not lost. Therefore, during one second when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the projecting position, the ball can be relatively easily entered into the right variable winning opening 655Ra.

FIGS. 95(b) and (c) are diagrams showing the flowing direction of the game ball when the right V opening pattern is determined and the player hits to the right. As shown in FIG. 95(b), a game ball hit to the right falls onto the movable member 650Rb from the right direction in front view with respect to the specific area. In this case, as shown in FIG. 95(b), since the game ball has momentum (momentum) toward the left direction in front view, until the momentum is reduced (momentum becomes 0) , rolls on the movable member 650Rb in the upper left direction when viewed from the front. Then, when the momentum of rolling in the upper left direction disappears due to the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb (momentum becomes 0), the game ball rolls in the lower right direction in front view along the inclination formed by the movable member 650Rb. to start. However, since it takes a relatively long time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for the momentum of the game ball to become 0, the momentum gradually accelerates from the state of 0 and reaches the right variable winning opening 655Ra. I don't have time left. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 95(c), one second elapses while the game ball rolls on the movable member 650Rb in the lower right direction in front view, and the movable member 650Rb is immersed. That is, since the inclination toward the right variable winning opening 655Ra disappears, the game ball rolling on the movable member 650Rb falls downward and is discharged through the out opening 66. Therefore, when the opening pattern of the right V is determined, if the player hits to the right, the movable member 650Rb reaches the right variable winning opening 655Ra during 1 second when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the projecting position. It becomes extremely difficult to do.

When the left V opening pattern is determined, it is essentially the same as the right V opening pattern, except that the left and right opening patterns are reversed. Therefore, although illustration will be omitted and a brief description will be given, when the left V opening pattern is determined and the right shot is performed, the game ball has a momentum from the right direction to the left direction in the front view with respect to the specific area. Since the game progresses in this state, the ball enters (wins) the left variable winning opening 655La along the slope of the movable member 650Lb while maintaining the momentum. On the other hand, when a left V-opening pattern is determined, the game ball advances in a state having momentum from the left direction to the right direction in front view with respect to the specific area. Therefore, the game ball falling on the movable member 650Lb rolls in the upper right direction on the slope formed by the movable member 650Lb for about 0.5 seconds, and then flows down along the slope in the lower left direction in front view. Therefore, when the open pattern of the right V is determined and hits to the right (see FIGS. 95(b) and (c)), the movable member 650Lb retracts before reaching the left variable winning opening 655La. Then, the game ball flows down to the out port 66. - 特許庁

Here, in the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment, it takes a period of about 1 second for the shot game ball to reach the specific area regardless of whether the game ball is hit left or right. need. Therefore, in the method of confirming the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position in the first round of the jackpot and then shooting the game ball, before the game ball reaches the specific area or immediately after reaching the specific area After one second has passed, the movable member is returned to the retracted position. In other words, even if the game ball is shot after confirming the type of the movable member, the game ball cannot enter the probability variable winning opening. Therefore, for a player who wants to enter the game ball into the variable winning opening, in the first round of the big win, before any movable member is moved to the projecting position, it is moved to the projecting position. A game ball can be shot in the predicted shooting direction by predicting the type of the movable member. As a result, if the movable member predicted by the player to be placed at the protruding position matches the movable member actually placed at the protruding position, the game ball can be entered into the variable probability winning opening. While it is possible, if the movable member opposite to the prediction is arranged at the projecting position, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the probability variable winning opening. Therefore, in the first round of each jackpot, the type of movable member placed at the protruding position (the direction in which the ball is likely to enter the ball entrance with variable probability) is more seriously predicted and the game ball is fired. Since novel playability can be provided, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98(b), but in the seventh embodiment, in the first round, the left V open pattern (open pattern in which the movable member 650Lb is moved to the projecting position) is a big hit. The rate of determining the type is higher than the rate of determining the jackpot type of the right V open pattern (the open pattern in which the movable member 650Rb is moved to the projecting position). On the other hand, the average number of rounds for each jackpot type for which the left V opening pattern is set is configured to be smaller than the average number of rounds for each jackpot type for which the right V opening pattern is set. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, by hitting the right every time, a high percentage (70% rate) of the probability variable game state is given after the jackpot ends, but a relatively large number of rounds (10 rounds or more) jackpot When the type is determined, the probability variation gaming state ends at a high rate. On the other hand, if the game method of predicting the opening pattern each time and changing the shooting direction is performed, the transition to the probability variable game state is confirmed, and the jackpot game of a larger number of rounds (10 rounds or 16 rounds) is performed. However, depending on the accuracy of the player's prediction, the rate of transition to the probability variable gaming state will be significantly reduced (for example, a rate of 50% or less There is a risk that it will become

By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the game method in the first round of the big win according to what element the player gives priority to in the big win. More specifically, for a player who places the most importance on (prioritizes) the rate at which the probability variable gaming state is set, by hitting right every time in the first round of the jackpot, a high rate of about 70% It is possible to select a game method in which a probability change state is given. On the other hand, for players who want to make the jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, such as 16 rounds or 10 rounds, more advantageous (want the number of rounds to be large and the game state after the jackpot to be advantageous), this time. It is possible to select a game method in which it is predicted whether or not the jackpot will be a jackpot with a large number of rounds, and the shooting direction of the game ball is changed according to the prediction result. Also, for example, for the jackpot (so-called first hit) won in the normal state, while hitting the right with emphasis on the set ratio of the probability variable gaming state, the jackpot won during the probability variable gaming state (so-called continuous Hit) is a game method that predicts the jackpot type and switches the firing direction, and for the first hit, while predicting the jackpot type and switching the firing direction, the setting ratio of the probability variable game state (that is, the continuous game) It is possible to allow the player to select various game methods such as a game method of hitting to the right with an emphasis on the ratio of hitting. Therefore, since each player can select his or her favorite game characteristics to play a game, it is possible to realize a wide range of game characteristics that match the different tastes of each player. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 that is popular with all people can be realized, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the first round of the jackpot in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the first round of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 96, when the jackpot is won, a display area HR8 and a display area HR9 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape are formed in the upper left portion and the upper right portion of the main display area Dm, respectively. Inside the display area HR9, the characters "big win" indicating that the big win game is currently being executed are displayed. This allows the player to understand that the jackpot game is being executed.

In addition, inside the display area HR8, various information indicating the progress of the jackpot (the current number of rounds, the maximum number of rounds, the total number of prize balls obtained in one jackpot, and the number of wins that can be obtained) display showing the maximum number of prize balls) is displayed. During the first round, the maximum number of rounds and the maximum number of prize balls that can be obtained are kept secret from the player. That is, as shown in FIG. 96, "ROUND: 01/???" is displayed as a display indicating the number of rounds, and "GET: 0000/???" is displayed as a display indicating the number of winning balls. be done. This is because if the maximum number of rounds or the maximum number of prize balls is displayed first, the type of jackpot will be recognized by the player who sees the displayed contents, and the type of movable member that can be moved (variable prize) This is because there is a risk that the shooting direction in which the ball can enter the mouth is also specified. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, at least until the end of one round, information such as the number of rounds, the maximum number of winning balls, and the like, which can identify the type of jackpot, is kept secret. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the clue for the player to specify the type of the movable member that is moved to the projecting position, so that the type of the movable member that is moved to the projecting position (entering the variable winning opening) It is possible to select the firing direction in which the ball is possible. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, below the display areas HR8 and HR9, a display mode (selection effect) is displayed for prompting the player to select whether to play left-handed or right-handed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, a display area HR10 is formed substantially in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and the characters "CHOOSE!!" are displayed inside. In addition, below the display area HR8 in the main display area Dm (the left half of the main display area Dm), a display area HR11 having a horizontally elongated substantially elliptical shape in which the words "expectation level Low" is displayed, and "the number of rounds A horizontally elongated substantially oval display area 12 displaying the characters "High" and a leftward arrow image YG1 displaying the characters "Left Strike" and imitating a leftward arrow are displayed. On the other hand, below the display area HR9 in the main display area Dm (the right half of the main display area Dm), there is a display area HR13 in a horizontally elongated substantially elliptical shape in which the characters "Expectation High" and "Round A display area HR14 having a horizontally elongated substantially elliptical shape in which characters "Number Low" is displayed, and a rightward arrow image YG2 in which the characters "Righthand" are displayed and which imitates a rightward arrow are displayed.

Due to these display contents, if you hit left, the expectation that the game ball will enter the variable winning opening is low, but if the game ball enters, there is a possibility that it is a type of jackpot with a large number of rounds. It is possible to make the player understand that the is high. Also, when hitting to the right, although there is a high expectation that the game ball will enter the variable winning hole, if the game ball enters, there is a high possibility that it will be a jackpot with a small number of rounds. can be made to be understood by the player. Therefore, after understanding the meaning of each shooting direction, the game ball can be shot by predicting the shooting direction in which the ball can enter the variable winning hole, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the opening pattern that can be set for each movable member in the first round of the jackpot will be described. FIG. 97(a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the movable position of each movable member when the right V opening pattern is set, and FIG. 97(b) is a diagram showing the change over time when the left V opening pattern is set. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time in the movable position of each movable member in the case.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), when the right V open pattern is set, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruded position at the point in time when one second has passed since the start of one round. The state in which the movable member 650Rb protrudes continues for one second, and the movable member 650Rb is buried inside the base plate 60 when one second has elapsed since it was moved to the protruding position. Thereafter, the movable member 650Rb remains buried until the big win is completed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97(a), the movable member 650Lb is maintained in a buried state throughout the jackpot. In addition, as shown in FIG. 97(a), when one round is started, the selection effect (see FIG. 96) is started. More specifically, when it is time to start one round and a round number command indicating the start of the first round is output from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, the main controller 113 starts display control. The device 114 is instructed to start executing the selection effect. When the player who visually recognizes this selection effect hits left, the game ball can enter the right variable winning opening 655Ra via the slope formed by the movable member 650Rb moved to the projecting position. On the other hand, when the player who visually recognizes the selected effect hits to the right, the movable member 650Rb is immersed before the game ball is guided to the right variable winning opening 655Ra. It cannot be entered into 655Ra.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), when the left V opening pattern is set, the movable member 650Lb is moved to the protruded position at the point in time when one second has passed since the start of one round. This protruding state of the movable member 650Lb continues for one second, and the movable member 650Lb is buried inside the base plate 60 after one second has passed since it was moved to the protruding position. Thereafter, the movable member 650Lb remains buried until the big win is completed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the movable member 650Rb is maintained in a buried state throughout the jackpot. When the player who visually recognizes the selection effect displayed from the start of one round hits to the right, the game proceeds to the left variable winning opening 655La via the slope formed by the movable member 650Lb moved to the projecting position. A ball can enter. On the other hand, when the player who visually recognizes the selection effect hits to the left, the movable member 650Lb is immersed before the game ball is guided to the left probability variable winning opening 655La. 655La cannot be entered.

<Electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98(a). FIG. 98(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 98(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 11(a)). The difference is that a table 202aa is added. Moreover, it is also different in that the content of the first hit type selection table 202b is changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The opening pattern table 202aa is a data table that defines variable operations to be set for the movable member in each opening pattern (right V opening pattern and left V opening pattern). At the start of the first round of the jackpot, data for the opening pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot this time is read out from the opening pattern table 202aa and set as a variable operation of the movable member (see S1103 and S1104 in FIG. 101). ).

Next, with reference to FIG.98(b), the 1st hit classification selection table 202b in the 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 98(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first win type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 98(b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 4" in association with "jackpot A7" (of FIG. 98(b) 202b1). This "jackpot A7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the largest with 16 rounds, and the open pattern of the right V is set in the first round of the jackpot. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, 5 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with "jackpot A7". Therefore, the ratio of "jackpot A7" being determined as the jackpot type in the event of a jackpot is 5% (5/100).

Also, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "5 to 29" in association with "jackpot B7" (see 202b2 in FIG. 98(b)). This "jackpot B7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds, which is the second largest after the "jackpot A7", and the opening pattern of the right V is set in the first round of the jackpot. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the first winning type counter C2 can take, 25 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the "jackpot B7". In this case, the rate at which "jackpot B7" is determined as the jackpot type is 25% (25/100).

In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "30 to 69" in association with "jackpot C7" (see 202b3 in FIG. 98(b)). This "jackpot C7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 7, which is less than the "jackpot A7" and the "jackpot B7", and the opening pattern of the left V is set in the first round of the jackpot. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the first winning type counter C2 can take, 40 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the "jackpot C7". In this case, the percentage of "jackpot C7" determined as the jackpot type is 40% (40/100).

Also, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 89" in association with "jackpot D7" (see 202b4 in FIG. 98(b)). This "jackpot D7" has five rounds, and is a jackpot type with the second smallest number of rounds among all the jackpot types. In addition, "jackpot D7" is a jackpot type in which a left V opening pattern is set in the first round. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the first winning type counter C2 can take, 20 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the "jackpot D7". In this case, the percentage of "jackpot D7" determined as the jackpot type is 20% (20/100).

Also, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with "jackpot E7" (see 202b5 in FIG. 98(b)). This "jackpot E7" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 2, which is the smallest, and the opening pattern of the left V is set in the first round. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the value of the first winning type counter C2 can take, 10 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the "jackpot E7". In this case, the rate at which "jackpot E7" is determined as the jackpot type is 10% (10/100).

Thus, in the seventh embodiment, when the "jackpot A7" or "jackpot B7" is reached, the opening pattern of the right V is set, while the "jackpot C7" to "jackpot E7" are set. In this case, the opening pattern of the left V is set. Since the rate at which either "jackpot A7" (distribution 5%) or "jackpot B7" (distribution 25%) is determined is 30%, the rate (30%) at which the right V opening pattern is set is , left V open pattern is lower than the set ratio (70%). Therefore, for players who place the most importance on (prioritize) the ratio of setting the probability variable gaming state, by hitting right every time in the first round of the jackpot, the probability variable state is set at a high rate of about 70%. The game method to be given can be selected. On the other hand, for players who want to make the jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, such as 16 rounds or 10 rounds, more advantageous (want the number of rounds to be large and the game state after the jackpot to be advantageous), this time. It is possible to select a game method in which it is predicted whether or not the jackpot will be a jackpot with a large number of rounds, and the shooting direction of the game ball is changed according to the prediction result. Also, for example, for the jackpot (so-called first hit) won in the normal state, while hitting the right with emphasis on the set ratio of the probability variable gaming state, the jackpot won during the probability variable gaming state (so-called continuous Hit) is a game method that predicts the jackpot type and switches the firing direction, and for the first hit, while predicting the jackpot type and switching the firing direction, the setting ratio of the probability variable game state (that is, the continuous game) It is possible to allow the player to select various game methods such as a game method of hitting to the right with an emphasis on the ratio of hitting. Therefore, since each player can select his or her favorite game characteristics to play a game, it is possible to realize a wide range of game characteristics that match the different tastes of each player. Therefore, since the pachinko machine 10 that is popular with all people can be realized, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98(c). FIG. 98(c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 98(c), the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment has a variable probability setting flag 203ba and a variable probability passage counter for the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 87(b)). 203bb, winning number counter 203bc, remaining ball timer flag 203bd, remaining ball timer 203be, and discharged number counter 203bf are added.

The variable probability setting flag 203ba is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the variable probability state after the big hit game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not a game ball enters a variable probability winning hole during a jackpot game. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the variable probability switch described above provided in the discharge port 656, this variable probability setting flag 203ba is set to ON (see S1305 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203ba is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 102). In addition, this variable probability setting flag 203ba is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

In addition, when the probability variation setting flag 203ba is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability variation switch before the power is cut off, and if it can be determined that it has passed Only in this case, the variable probability setting flag 203ba may be formally set to ON to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the variable probability switch is passed before the power is turned off, depending on whether the variable probability passage counter 203bb, which will be described later, is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage of holes by determining fraud such as turning ON only the variable probability setting flag 203ba and turning on the power again while the power is turned off.

The variable probability passage counter 203bb is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch after one round (in this embodiment, one round of the jackpot) during the jackpot game. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the gaming balls that have entered the variable probability winning opening in the first round have been discharged, based on the sum of the variable probability passage counter 203bb and the discharge number counter 203bf, which will be described later. This variable probability passage counter 203bb is updated by incrementing the value by 1 every time it detects passage of the variable probability switch in a predetermined period (so-called ball sweeping period) after one round is completed (S1409 in FIG. 104 ). In addition, after executing the process of whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the probability variable winning opening and the number of discharge matches, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1415 in FIG. 104). It should be noted that the probability variable passage counter 203bb is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203bc is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the variable winning openings 655La, 655Ra or the specific winning opening 65a in each round of the jackpot game. Specifically, based on detection that the game ball has passed through the above-described variable probability switch provided in the variable winning device 65 or the above-described probability variable switch provided in the variable winning device 65, It is updated by adding one by one (S1303 in FIG. 103). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning the variable winning device 65 and the probability variable winning device (the total value of the winning number counter 203bc and the probability variable passing counter 203bb) and the number discharged (the number of discharge value of the counter 203bf), it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1415 in FIG. 104). The value of the winning number counter 203bc is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The remaining ball timer flag 203bd is a ball sweeping period for discharging the remaining game balls when the game balls remain inside the variable winning device 65 or the probability variable winning device at the time the round ends. It is a flag indicating whether or not. When the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to ON, it means that it is the ball sweeping period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203be, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated (see S1405 in FIG. 104).

Remaining ball timer 203be, when one round is completed and the specific winning opening 65a or the probability variable winning opening 655La, 655Ra is changed to a state where it is difficult to enter, the variable winning device 65 or the probability variable winning device (left probability variable winning device 655L, right variable winning device 655R) is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the remaining game balls to be discharged has elapsed. The time required until the game ball is discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in the seventh embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203be. Based on the upper limit value (in this embodiment, 0.8 seconds) of the remaining ball timer 203be, whether the number of winning prizes to the variable winning device 65 or the variable winning device and the number of discharged matches. is executed (S1411 in FIG. 104). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to inform early that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65 or the probability variable winning device. In addition, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of illegally leaving game balls in the variable probability prize winning device and letting the game balls flow down to the variable probability switch at the timing of the first round of the big win.

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variable setting flag 203ba is turned on even if the game ball passes through the variable probability switch. may be configured not to be set to . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

The discharge number counter 203bf is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged outside from the variable winning device 65 or the probability variable winning device in each round of the jackpot. This discharge number counter 203bf counts the number of game balls passing through a ball discharge port for discharging game balls from each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 or probability variable winning device). The exit switch is turned on by the passage of the game ball), the value is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1403 in FIG. 104). After it is determined that the number of played game balls matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to 0 (S1415 in FIG. 104).

Next, referring to FIG. 99, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. Referring to FIG. As shown in FIG. 99, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14(b)). The difference is that a flag 223aa is added.

The V winning flag 223aa is a flag indicating whether or not it has already been detected that the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch in the first round of the big hit. If this V winning flag 223aa is on, it means that the passage of the variable probability switch has been detected, and if it is off, it means that the passage of the variable probability switch has not been detected. This V winning flag 223aa is set to ON based on the first reception of the probability variable winning command output from the main controller 110 each time the passage of the variable probability switch is detected in the first round of the jackpot ( See S5503 in FIG. 108). Also, this V winning flag 223aa is set to OFF when it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is ON at the end timing of the first round (see S5404 in FIG. 107). At the timing when the V-winning flag 223aa is set to ON, a V-winning success effect is executed to inform the player that the player has won a prize in the variable probability winning opening. By executing this V prize success effect, it is possible for the player to recognize that his selection (shooting direction) is correct, and that it will shift to the probability variable game state after the end of the jackpot, so the game can be played. It can give people greater satisfaction.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 104. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 100, the jackpot control process 7 (S931) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 7 (S931) is a process executed instead of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 30).

In each of S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011 of the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, S1001 to S1004 of the jackpot control process 6 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 89) , and S1009 to S1011 are executed. Also, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the process of S1004 (S1004: Yes), opening according to the round and jackpot type A jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation is executed (S1031), and the process ends. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1031) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), the game state after the jackpot ends is set. A jackpot ending process is executed (S1032) to end this process. The details of this jackpot ending process (S1032) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 100) in the seventh embodiment, in the process of S1011, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), the specific winning opening 65a and the probability variable winning A prize winning process for performing a process according to the winning to the mouth is executed (S1033). Details of the winning process (S1033) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the winning process (S1033) is completed, an abnormal process is executed to determine whether the game balls entered into the specific winning hole 65a and the probability variable winning hole are discharged normally (S1034), and this process is performed. exit. Details of the winning process (S1033) and the abnormality process (S1034) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, details of the above-described jackpot operation setting process (S1031) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the jackpot operation setting process (S1031). This jackpot operation setting process (S1031) is, as described above, a process for setting the opening action according to the round and the jackpot type.

In the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 101), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round (S1101). ), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1102), and the process proceeds to S1105.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S1101: Yes), the release pattern corresponding to the jackpot type of this time is read from the release pattern table 202aa (S1103). In the processing of this S1103, if the current jackpot type is jackpot A7 or jackpot B7, while reading the data for performing variable operation in the right V open pattern (see FIG. 97 (a)), the jackpot type this time is any one of the jackpots C7 to E7, the data for performing the variable operation with the left V opening pattern (see FIG. 97(b)) is read.

When the process of S1103 is completed, the start of the release pattern read out in the process of S1103 is set (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1105. In the process of S1105 executed after the process of S1102 or S1104, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1105), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot action setting process (see FIG. 101), the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb can be variably controlled in an appropriate opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, details of the jackpot ending process (S1032) will be described. This jackpot end process (S1032) is, as described above, a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends. In this jackpot end process (S1032), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203ba is on (S1201), and if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203ba is off (S1202: No), this time Since it means that no game ball entered (winning) to the probability variable winning port (left probability variable winning port 655La and right probability variable winning port 655Ra) during the jackpot, the value of the time saving medium counter 203f By setting 100, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to a time-saving game state (low-probability state of special symbols and time-saving state of normal symbols) (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203ba is ON (S1201: Yes), it means that the game ball entered the variable probability winning opening during this jackpot. By setting the flag 203e to ON, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probability variable game state (the probability variable state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

In the process of S1204 executed after the process of S1202 or S1203, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the state after the jackpot set by the process of S1202 or S1203 is set (S1204), The variable probability setting flag 203ba is set to OFF (S1205), and this process is terminated. By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 102), an appropriate game state can be set according to the state of the probability variation setting flag 203ba.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the details of the winning process (S1033) will be described. This prize winning process (S1033) is, as described above, a process for performing a process according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a and the variable probability winning opening. In the winning process (S1033), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S1301). Here, the round effective period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning opening 65a or the variable probability winning opening becomes ready for ball entry until the interval period ends. In the processing of S1301, if it is not the round effective period (S1301: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, when it is determined that the current round valid period (S1301: Yes), then, winning to any of the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, or variable winning opening) was detected. (S1302), and if it is determined that winning to a specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or variable winning opening) is not detected (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning for a specific winning hole has been detected (S1302: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203bc is updated by adding 1 (S1303), and the process proceeds to S1304.

In the process of S1304, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch (S1304), and if it is determined that the probability variation switch has passed (S1304: Yes), the probability variation setting flag 203ba is set to ON ( S1305), sets a probability variable winning command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the game ball has passed the probability variable switch (S1306), and proceeds to S1307. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1304 that the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch (S1304: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1307.

In the processing of S1307, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203bc has reached a value of 10 or more (S1307). Yes), the process proceeds to S1309 to set the end of this round. On the other hand, in the process of S1307, if it is determined that the value of the prize number counter 203bc is less than 10 (S1307: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the round time has elapsed (S1308). If it has passed (S1308: Yes), the process proceeds to S1309 to set the end of this round. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round period has not elapsed (S1308: No), it is not necessary to end the round, so this processing ends. In the process of S1308, if the current round is the first round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if the end timing of the set release pattern has come. It is determined that the round time has passed when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round.

In the process of S1309, closing of the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or variable winning opening) is set (S1309), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning opening is closed is set (S1310). Next, by setting the remaining ball timer flag 203bd to ON, the ball sweeping period is set (S1311), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, details of the abnormality processing (S1034) will be described. This abnormal process (S1034) is, as described above, a process for determining whether or not the game balls entered into the specific winning opening 65a and the variable probability winning opening are discharged normally. In this abnormal process (S1034), first, it is determined whether or not the current round valid period is reached (S1401). On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1401: Yes), then whether the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (the game ball is discharged from the discharge port for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device) ejected) (S1402).

In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203bf (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is on (S1404), and if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is off (S1404: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is ON (S1404: Yes), it means that the ball is currently being swept, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is set to 1. is added and updated (S1405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit value (that is, whether it is the end timing of the ball sweeping period (when 0.8 seconds have passed since the end of the round)) (S1406), and the remaining ball timer If it is determined that the value of 203be is not the upper limit value (not the end timing of the ball sweeping period) (S1406: No), it is determined whether or not the current is the ball sweeping period after the end of the first round. (S1407), when it is determined that it is the ball sweeping period after the end of one round (S1407: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch (S1408), and the variable probability switch is pressed. If it is determined that the game ball has not passed (S1408: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1408, if it is determined that the game ball has passed the variable probability switch (S1408: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability passage counter 203bb (S1409), and the variable probability setting flag 203ba is set to ON (S1410), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that the current ball sweeping period is the ball sweeping period after the end of the second and subsequent rounds (S1407: No), each of S1408 to S1410 Skip the process and end the present process as it is.

Also, in the processing of S1406, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is the upper limit value (the end timing of the ball sweeping period) (S1406: Yes), then the number of discharged balls (the discharge number counter 203bf value) matches the winning number (the sum of the value of the winning number counter 203bc and the value of the probability variable passing counter 203bb) (S1411).

In the processing of S1411, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes do not match (S1411: No), an error command is set (S1412), and the process proceeds to S1413. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress cheating of passing a game ball through the variable probability switch while the variable probability winning opening is in a state where it is difficult to enter.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1411 that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes match (S1411: Yes), the processing of S1412 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S1413. In the processing of S1413, the remaining ball timer flag 203bd is set to OFF (S1413), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203be is reset (S1414). After that, the values of the winning prize number counter 203bc, the discharge number counter 203bf, and the variable probability passing counter 203bb are reset (S1415), and this process is finished.

By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 104), each specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, and It is possible to early detect and notify the occurrence of a problem that the game ball entered into each variable winning hole is not normally discharged.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. FIG. First, the command determination process 7 (S4061) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 7 (S4061) is a process executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). ), similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 41), the unprocessed command stored in the command storage area is analyzed and control is performed according to the type of the unprocessed command.

Of the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 105) in the seventh embodiment, each process of S4901 to S4910 and S4918 performs the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). 4901 to S4910 and S4918 are executed. Further, in the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 105) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4909 that the unprocessed commands do not include the winning information command (S4909: No), Next, it is determined whether or not a command related to winning has been received (S4921). Here, the winning-related commands are specifically an opening command, a round number command, a closing command, a probability variable winning command, an ending command, and the like.

In the process of S4921, if it is determined that any command related to winning is received from the main controller 110 (S4921: Yes), the type of the unprocessed command related to winning is analyzed, and the command Win-related command processing for executing control according to the type of (S4922), and ends this processing. The details of the hit-related command processing (S4922) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4921, if it is determined that the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 does not include a win-related command (S4921: No), the process proceeds to S4918.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, details of the hit-related command processing (S4922) described above will be described. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the win-related command processing (S4922). Of the win-related command processing (S4922), each processing of S4911 to S4917 is performed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Since each process is merely ported as it is, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

In the hit-related command process (see FIG. 106) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4913 that the round number command is not included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 (S4913 : No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a close command (S4951). In the processing of S4951, if it is determined that the closing command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 (S4951: Yes), it means that it is the end timing of one round of the jackpot. Therefore, the closing command process for setting the effect mode at the end of the round is executed (S4952), and this process ends. The details of this close command processing (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4951, if it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S4951: No), then whether or not the probability variable winning command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 It is determined whether (S4953), and if it is determined that the probability variation winning command is included (S4953: Yes), it means that it is the timing when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch, so the probability variation switch (S4954) to execute a probability variable winning command process for performing control according to the number of passages, and terminate this process. The details of this probability variation winning command process (S4954) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the processing of S4953, if it is determined that the unprocessed command does not include the probability variable winning command (S4953: No), the processing proceeds to S4916.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, details of the closing command processing (S4952) described above will be described. This closing command process (S4952) is, as described above, a process for setting the rendering mode at the end of the round. In this closing command process (S4952), first, it is determined whether or not the first round of the jackpot has ended this time (S5401), and if it is determined that it is not the first round of the jackpot (S5401: No) , setting the execution of the interval production in a mode according to the number of rounds (S5402), and ends this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that the round that ended this time is the first round (S5401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 223aa is ON (S5403).

In the processing of S5403, if it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is ON (S5403: No), during one round probability variation winning opening (either left probability variation winning opening 655La or right probability variation winning opening 655Ra) Since it means that the winning of 2 has already been detected, the V winning flag 223aa is set to OFF (S5404), and the process proceeds to S5402. On the other hand, in the processing of S5403, if it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is off (S5403: No), one round of jackpot is made without allowing the game ball to enter the variable winning opening during one round. means that the has ended, a V winning failure effect is set for informing the player that the game ball could not be entered into the probability variable winning opening (S5405), and this processing ends. . By executing this V winning failure effect, the game ball did not enter the probability winning opening (the launch direction selected by the player and the launch that actually makes it easier for the game ball to enter the It is possible to make the player easily understand that the direction did not match). Therefore, it is possible to make the player think to predict the shooting direction more seriously so that the game ball will win (enter) the variable winning hole in the next big win. Therefore, since the player's motivation for the next big win can be improved, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, details of the variable probability winning command process (S4954) described above will be described. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing variable probability winning command processing (S4954). This variable probability winning command process (S4954) is, as described above, a process for performing control according to the number of passages of the variable probability switch.

In this variable winning command process (S4954), first, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag 223aa is ON (S5501), and if it is determined that the V winning flag 223aa is OFF (S5501: No) , This means that the variable winning command of this time is a command output based on the passage of the first variable variable switch in the first round of the jackpot, so it notifies that the game ball has entered the variable winning port. Execution of the V winning success effect for the player is set (S5502), the V winning flag 223aa is set to ON (S5503), and this processing ends. By executing this V winning success effect, the game ball enters the variable winning hole (the launch direction selected by the player and the firing direction that actually makes it easier for the game ball to enter the variable winning hole) match) can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a greater sense of satisfaction, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5501, if it is determined that the V winning completion flag 223aa is ON (S5501: Yes), it means that the V winning success effect has already been executed, so the V winning success effect is duplicated. In order to prevent the execution of this process by skipping the processes of S5502 and S5503, the process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the game ball enters during execution of the jackpot game, and after the jackpot ends, the variable probability game state (variable probability state of special symbols, and short time state of normal symbols) ) are provided with two definite variable winning openings (left definite variable winning opening 655La, right definite variable winning opening 655Ra). In the first round of the jackpot, either one of the two probability variable winning openings is set in a state in which a ball can be entered. That is, one movable member is moved to the projecting position, thereby forming an inclination downward toward one of the probability variable winning openings. Since the period during which the movable member is placed in the projecting position in the first round of the jackpot is as short as 1 second, the time for the game ball to roll on the upper surface of the movable member must be shortened as much as possible to avoid the slope formed by the movable member. The movable member is buried before the game ball enters the probability variable winning hole along the line, and the game ball cannot enter the probability variable winning hole. In the seventh embodiment, when the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the projecting position, if left-handed hitting is performed, the time for rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 650Lb is longer than when right-handed hitting is performed. Hitting makes it difficult to enter the game ball into the left variable winning hole 655La, while hitting to the right makes it easier to enter the game ball into the left variable winning hole 655La. On the other hand, when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the projecting position, right-handed hitting takes longer than the left-handed hitting on the upper surface of the movable member 650Rb, so right-handed hitting is performed. While it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the right probability variable winning hole 655Ra, hitting to the right makes it easy to enter the game ball into the left probability variable winning hole 655Ra. Here, in the first round of the big win, since it is difficult for the player to perceive in advance the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position from the presentation mode, etc., the game ball enters the ball. It is possible to realize a novel playability that allows the player to predict the possible shooting direction (the type of the movable member arranged at the projecting position). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, one of the variable winning openings can be entered in the first round of the jackpot (that is, one of the movable members can be changed to the protruding position). Instead, the round in which one of the variable winning openings is set to be able to enter the ball may be determined arbitrarily. Also, the number of rounds in which the variable probability winning opening is set in a state in which the ball can be entered is not limited to one time, and may be set twice or more in one jackpot. In this case, if the game ball can enter the variable winning hole in the first round in which the variable winning hole is set to be able to enter the ball, the variable winning hole can be entered after the next time. In the round set in the state, the configuration may be such that the player is notified (navigated) of the shooting direction in which the game ball can enter.

In the seventh embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the period required for the game ball to reach the variable probability winning opening is varied according to the shooting direction of the game ball. That is, when the movable member 650Lb is arranged at the projecting position, the game ball that reaches the specific area by hitting to the right wins in a shorter period of time than the game ball that reaches the specific area by hitting to the left. The configuration is such that the port 655La can be easily reached. In addition, when the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the protruding position, the game ball that reaches the specific area by hitting to the left is more likely to win the right variable prize in a shorter period than the game ball that reaches the specific area by hitting to the right. Although the opening 655Ra is easily accessible, it is not limited to this. In the round in which the variable probability winning opening is in a state where the ball can be entered, the launch direction that shortens the time required to reach the variable probability winning opening may be fixed. That is, in all jackpot types, it may be configured so that the period required to reach the variable winning opening is shorter than that of hitting to the right, or conversely, to the left. It may be configured so that the period required for reaching the variable winning opening is shorter for those who hit.

In the seventh embodiment, depending on the type of the movable member arranged at the protruding position, the period until reaching the corresponding variable winning opening of 1 is different between right-handed and left-handed. It is not limited to this. For example, the left probability variable winning hole 655La is arranged at a position where the game ball may enter only when hitting to the left, and the right variable winning hole 655Ra is entered only when hitting to the right. It may be configured to be arranged in a position where there is a possibility of doing so, and a configuration in which the period until reaching each probability winning opening is changed according to the type of jackpot. More specifically, for example, in the jackpot type of 1, the game ball launched by the left hit is longer than the period until the game ball fired by the right hit reaches the right probability winning opening 655Ra. While the period until reaching the opening 655La is configured to be shorter, in the other jackpot types, the period until the game ball fired by left hitting reaches the left variable winning opening 655La is longer than the period. , It may be configured so that the period until the game ball fired by hitting to the right reaches the right variable winning opening 655Ra is shorter. Also, in this case, the winning hole into which a ball can be entered by right-handed hitting and the winning hole into which a ball can be entered by hitting left-handed are not necessarily variable winning holes. By doing so, the configuration may be replaced with a specific winning hole in which only prize balls are paid out. In addition, instead of differentiating the period until reaching the winning opening in the case of hitting to the right according to the type of jackpot and the period until reaching the winning opening in the case of hitting to the left, The period until it does may be constant regardless of the jackpot type. In other words, by arranging nails, pinwheels, etc., it takes a shorter time to reach the winning opening when one of right-handed or left-handed is aimed than when the other is aimed. You can

<Modified example of the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment described above will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described seventh embodiment, two variable probability winning devices (left probability variable winning device 655L, right probability variable winning device 655R) and one variable A prize-winning device 65 is provided, and the type of the prize-winning device that allows a ball to enter is changed according to the round of the jackpot. That is, in the first round of the jackpot, one of the variable winning openings (the left variable winning opening 655La, the right variable winning opening 655Ra) is set to a state in which the ball can be entered, while the second round of the big winning and subsequent rounds are specific winning. The configuration is such that the mouth 65a is set in a state in which the ball can be entered.

On the other hand, in this modification, only two variable probability winning devices (left variable winning device 655L, right variable winning device 655R) are provided, and a plurality of flow paths (variable switch is provided inside the variable variable winning device) After providing a flow path with a variable probability switch and a flow path without a variable probability switch), depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot, one of the variable winning ports (left variable winning port 655La, right variable winning port 655Ra) To It is configured to vary the flow path to which the entered game balls are distributed. More specifically, the game ball entered into the variable probability winning opening in the first round of the jackpot is a channel provided with a variable probability switch among the plurality of flow paths provided inside the variable probability winning device On the other hand, the game balls entered into the variable probability winning openings after the second round of the jackpot are controlled to be distributed to the flow path in which the variable probability switch is not provided. By configuring in this way, by only two variable probability winning devices, a round (first round) in which a variable probability game state is given after a big hit by entering a variable probability winning opening and a game ball is shot into a specific area. A round (after the second round) can be provided in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained by continuing to play.

The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described seventh embodiment in that the variable winning device 65 is omitted, the left probability variable winning device 655L, And the point that the internal structure of the right probability variable winning device 655R is changed, and the point that the operation contents of each movable member 650Lb, 650Rb are changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the seventh embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in form.

First, referring to FIG. 133, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 133 is a front view of the game board 13 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 133, the game board 13 of this modified example differs from the game board 13 of the seventh embodiment in that the variable winning device 65 is eliminated. In addition, although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 134, the internal structure of each probability variation winning device (left probability variation winning device 655L and right probability variation winning device 655R) is also partially changed from the above-described seventh embodiment. there is Since other board configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 134, the internal structure of each probability variable winning device in this modification will be described. FIG. 134 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the specific area of the game board 13 of this modification. As shown in FIG. 134, in this modification, the inside of the left probability variation winning device 655L and the right probability variation winning device 655R, and on the back side of the base plate 60, the left probability variation winning opening 655La and the right probability variation winning opening 655Ra A plurality of flow paths are provided through which the entered game balls flow down. More specifically, the downstream side of the left variable probability winning device 655L branches into two flow paths (variable probability induction flow path 655Ld1, normal induction flow path 655Ld2), and downstream of the variable probability induction flow path 655Ld1 A variable probability entrance 656a provided with a switch is provided. When the game ball is guided to the variable probability entrance 656a by flowing down the variable probability induction channel 655Ld1 during the execution of the jackpot game, the game ball always passes through the variable probability switch, so that the big hit The game state after the end is set to the variable probability game state. In addition, the gaming ball that enters the variable probability entrance 656a and passes through the variable probability switch is discharged to the outside as it is.

On the other hand, a ball discharge port 656b1 for discharging game balls to the outside is provided downstream of the normal guide flow path 655Ld2. Since the ball discharge port 656b1 is not provided with a variable probability switch, even if the game ball passes through the ball discharge port 656b1, it does not affect the game state after the big win. In other words, regardless of the number of passages of the ball discharge port 656b1 during execution of the jackpot game, if the game ball has passed through the probability change switch even once, the probability change game as a gaming state after the execution of the jackpot game is completed. When the state is set and the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch even once, the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the execution of the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 134, at the position where the variable probability induction flow path 655Ld1 and the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 are branched, the game ball can be placed in one of the flow paths (the variable probability induction flow path 655Ld1 and the normal induction flow path 655Ld2). Either) is provided with a channel distribution valve 655Lc for distribution. The channel distribution valve 655Lc is tilted leftward in the front view (inclination is formed downward from the upper left side to the lower right side in the front view) in the first round of the jackpot (see FIG. 134). That is, the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Ld2 is closed by the flow path distribution valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the variable probability induction flow path 655Ld1 is opened. In this state, the game ball entered into the left variable winning opening 655La is distributed to the variable variable guiding flow path 655Ld1 whose upstream side is open and guided to the variable variable entrance opening 656a. Therefore, if the game ball can be entered into the left probability variable winning port 655La in the first round of the big hit, in addition to the award ball for the ball entering the left probability variable winning port 655La, the variable probability switch Since the game ball can be passed through, a probability variable game state is provided as a game state after the end of the big win.

On the other hand, when the first round of the jackpot ends and the ball-scoring period elapses, the channel distribution valve 655Lc tilts rightward in front view. As a result, the upstream side of the variable probability guide channel 655Ld1 is closed by the channel distribution valve 655Lc, and the upstream side of the normal guide channel 655Ld2 is opened. In this state, the game ball entered into the left variable winning port 655La is distributed to the normal guidance flow path 655Ld2 whose upstream side is open, and is guided to the ball discharge port 656b1 on the downstream side of the normal guidance flow path 655Ld2. be done. Therefore, after the second round of the big hit, even if the game ball is entered into the left probability variable winning port 655La, the entered game ball cannot pass through the probability variable switch, so simply entering the left probability variable winning port 655La Only prizes for balls are awarded.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 134, the internal structure of the right variable winning device 655R is just a symmetrical internal structure of the left variable winning device 655L. By tilting the flow path distribution valve 655Rc provided inside the variable probability winning device 655R to the right side in front view, the upstream side of the variable probability induction flow path 655Rd1 is opened (the upstream side of the normal induction flow path 655Rd2 is closed). As a result, the game ball entering the right variable winning hole 655Ra in the first round of the jackpot is distributed to the variable variable induction path 655Rd1 and enters the variable variable ball opening 656a. On the other hand, after the second round of the jackpot, the upstream side of the normal induction channel 655Rd2 is opened (the upstream side of the variable probability induction channel 655Rd1 is closed) by tilting the channel distribution valve 655Rc to the left side in front view. As a result, game balls entered into the right variable winning opening 655Ra after the second round of the jackpot are distributed to the normal induction path 655Rd2 and enter the ball discharge opening 656b2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, operation patterns (flow path switching patterns) of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc in the variable probability winning device will be described. FIG. 135 compares the change over time of the variable operation of the movable member 650Rb when the left V opening pattern is set for the movable members 650Lb and 655Rb and the change over time of switching of the flow path in the variable winning device. It is a diagram shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 135, in the first round of the jackpot, each of the flow path distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc operates in each normal induction flow path (normal induction flow path) until 1 second elapses when the movable member 650Rb protrudes to the projecting position. 655Ld2, and is held in an arrangement that distributes the game balls to the normal guiding path 655Rd2). Then, one second has passed since the start of the first round of the jackpot, and when the movable member 650Rb moves to the protruding position, each flow path distribution valve 655Lc, 655Rc each variable induction flow path (variable probability induction flow path 655Ld1, variable probability It is movable to an arrangement (see FIG. 134) for allocating game balls to the guide flow path 655Rd1). The arrangement of distributing game balls to this variable probability induction channel continues even after the first round ends and the movable member 650Rb is moved from the protruded position to the retracted position, and 0.5 seconds after the end of the first round As time elapses, the channel distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc return to the arrangement for distributing game balls to the normal induction channels (normal induction channel 655Ld2, normal induction channel 655Rd2). A period of 0.5 seconds after the end of this one round is a so-called ball sweeping period. That is, a sufficient period is set for the game ball entering the variable probability winning opening just before the end of one round to reach the variable probability winning opening 656a. By setting a 0.5 second ball throwing period, even though the ball entered the variable probability winning opening just before the end of the first round, the variable probability state will not be granted after the big win. Since this can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the pachinko machine 10 and the pachinko hall.

After the end of the first round, the arrangement of the channel distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc is not switched until the big win is completed. Therefore, after the second round of the jackpot, the game ball entered into the variable probability winning port (either the left variable variable winning port 655La or the right variable variable winning port 655Ra) is guided to one of the ball discharge ports 656b1 and 656b2. be. On the other hand, the movable member 650Rb is also moved to the projecting position in the second and subsequent rounds. That is, the movable member moved to the protruding position in the first round is also moved to the protruding position in the second and subsequent rounds. That is, the shooting direction is fixed at 1 jackpot, which makes it easier for the ball to enter the probability variable winning hole (the period from when the game ball is shot until it enters the probability variable winning hole is shortened). Thus, only by confirming the type of the movable member moved to the protruding position in the first round, the player can easily recognize the shooting direction in which the ball is likely to enter the variable probability winning hole in each round of the big win. Therefore, a game ball can be shot in a shooting direction in which the period until the ball enters the variable winning hole is likely to be shortened for a player who wants to finish the big winning game speedily. On the other hand, for a player who wants to take a longer time to complete the jackpot game (want to enjoy it more carefully), the game ball is shot in a shooting direction in which the period until the ball enters the variable winning hole tends to be longer. can be made As a result, the player himself/herself can select a game method according to the taste of each player.

Incidentally, in the big win in which the left V open pattern is set, the operation is exactly the same except that the movable member 650Lb is moved to the projecting position in each round of the big win. In other words, the channel switching pattern (the operation pattern of the channel distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc) inside the probability variable winning device is exactly the same as the big win in which the right V opening pattern is set.

In this way, in this modification, only two definite variable winning devices are provided with respect to the board surface, and in the inside of the definite variable winning device, it is possible to pass the definite variable switch for each round of the jackpot or to make it difficult to pass. It is configured to switch (change the arrangement of the channel distribution valves 655Lc and 655Rc). With this configuration, the variable winning device 65 in the seventh embodiment can be eliminated, so the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

It should be noted that in the seventh embodiment and its modification, the selection effect is always executed from the start of one round of the jackpot until one of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb is moved to the projecting position. However, it is not limited to this. For example, at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 1% in the case of a big hit), instead of the selection effect, it may be configured to execute a notification effect that notifies the shooting direction in which the ball can enter the probability variable winning opening. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to please the player when the notification effect is executed.

In the seventh embodiment and its modified example, two variable probability winning openings are arranged to face each other in the left-right direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of them is replaced with a ball entrance (second ball entrance) that has the same function as the first ball entrance 64 (that is, a special symbol lottery is executed by entering a game ball), The electric accessory 64a attached to the first ball entrance 64 may be deleted. Then, when the player wins the normal pattern lottery, the movable member on the side that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance may be moved to the projecting position. By constructing in this way, the game ball that has reached the specific area can be efficiently entered into the second ball entrance in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, so that the game efficiency during the time-saving state is further improved. be able to. In this case, during the probability variable gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, and the time saving gaming state, it becomes easier to enter the second ball entrance (after the game ball is fired, the second ball entrance The player may be notified of the direction in which the period until the ball is landed tends to be short. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more reliably enter the game ball into the second ball entrance during the period in which the movable member is arranged at the protruding position as a hit of the normal symbol.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 113. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above is configured to have two specific winning holes (the left specific winning hole 650La and the right specific winning hole 650Ra). A slope toward a specific winning hole is formed so that a game ball that reaches a specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) is guided to the specific winning hole.

In contrast, in the eighth embodiment, one movable member 657b having a shape in which two movable members are combined in the sixth embodiment is provided. The game ball that reaches the specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) can enter (that is, is guided by the movable member 657b). Further, in the eighth embodiment, one specific winning opening 657a and one general winning opening 630 are provided in place of the two specific winning openings in the sixth embodiment. And, by arranging the movable member 657b completely at the projecting position, while forming an inclination that can guide the game ball to the specific winning opening 657a, the movable member 657b moves from the buried position (recessed position) to the projecting position. At an intermediate position in the middle of the movement, the configuration is such that the game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 630 .

The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment in that a general winning opening 630 is provided instead of the left specific winning opening 650La, and a right specific winning opening is provided. Part of the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 has been changed in that a special prize winning opening 657a is provided in place of the opening 650Ra, a movable member 657b is provided in place of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in Section 6. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the sixth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 109, the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described. 109(a) is a front perspective view of the movable member 657b, FIG. 109(b) is a front view of the movable member 657b, and FIG. 109(c) is a left side view of the movable member 657b. It is a side view of the case. As shown in FIGS. 109(a) to 109(c), the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment is a front inclined member 657bf forming an inclination downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction on the front side in front view. is provided, and a rear side inclined member 657bb forming a downward inclination from the upper left direction to the lower right direction is provided on the back side in front view. As shown in FIGS. 109(a) to 109(c), the front inclined member 657bf and the rear inclined member 657bb are joined together at approximately the central portions of the respective side surfaces to form one member.

As shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 109(c), two positions on the rear side surface of the rear inclined member 657bb protrude like rods. Although not shown, a movable member solenoid for causing the movable member 657b to appear and retract (variably operate) is connected to the tip of the projecting portion (the end opposite to the rear inclined member 657bb). ing. In each round of the jackpot, the movable member solenoid is driven to change the movable member 657b to the projecting position. In addition, although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 111, in the eighth embodiment, the appearing/removing operation of the movable member 657b in each round is changed according to the jackpot type, and the general winning opening 630 is opened during execution of the jackpot game. It is configured to provide a jackpot type in which a haunting motion that tends to increase the chance of winning a prize and a jackpot type in which a haunting motion that tends to decrease is set are provided. During the execution of the jackpot game, the more game balls enter the general prize winning port 630, the more the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot increases, so that the chances of winning the general prize winning port 630 tend to increase. A game can be played with the expectation that the type will be determined. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, operation contents of the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110(a) is a diagram showing a case where the movable member 657b is temporarily placed at an intermediate position after performing the projecting operation and before being placed at the projecting position. As shown in FIG. 110, when the movable member 657b performs a protruding operation and only the front side sloping member 657bf protrudes forward from the base plate 60 (only the rear side sloping member 657bb is buried), the front side slopes. A state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided to the general winning opening 630 is temporarily formed by the inclination from the upper right side to the lower left side formed by the member 657bf. In each round of the jackpot, when a specified number (10) or more of game balls are detected entering the specific winning hole 657a, or when a specified time (30 seconds) passes before the specified number enters. Therefore, no matter how many game balls enter the general prize winning opening 630, the end condition of the round is not affected. In other words, the more game balls are entered into the general winning opening 630, the more prize balls of the jackpot will be won. Therefore, while the game ball is in the middle position (see FIG. 110(a)) that can be arranged while performing the projecting action, the player can be made to actively shoot the game ball toward the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the jackpot game.

FIG. 110(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the movable member 657b is arranged at the projecting position. As shown in FIG. 110(b), when the movable member 657b is placed at the protruded position, the rear slanted member 657bb as well as the front slanted member 657bf protrude forward from the base plate 60. . As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area falls to the rear side tilting member 657bb, and the specific winning opening Directed to 657a. That is, by arranging the movable member 657b at the projecting position (see FIG. 110(b)), a state is formed in which the ball can easily enter the specific winning hole 657a.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the winning opening to which the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided is changed according to the arrangement (protrusion amount) of the movable member 657b. In the intermediate position that can be arranged until the movable member 657b reaches the projecting position, the game ball forms a state (first guidance state) in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630, and the movable member 657b is at the projecting position , a state (second induction state) is formed in which the game ball is easily guided to the specific winning hole 657a. As a result, the more the game balls are guided to the general prize winning opening 630 during the first induction state, the more the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game state increases, so that the player is guided to the first induction state. During this time, game balls can be actively shot toward a specific area. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the jackpot game can be improved, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, even if the arrangement of the movable member 657b does not completely match the intermediate position shown in FIG. If so, the game ball will be guided to the general winning opening 630 by the front side inclined member 657bf. More specifically, for example, the front inclined member 657bf of the movable member 657b protrudes from the base plate 60 by approximately 70%, and the rear inclined member 657bb projects from the base plate 60 by approximately 30%. The game ball is in a state in which it can be guided to the general winning opening 630 until it is arranged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the movable pattern of the projecting member 657b in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, two types of movable patterns (movable patterns A and B) are provided as the movable patterns set for the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot. Movable pattern A is a movable pattern in which there are more chances for a game ball to enter the general winning hole 630 than in movable pattern B (that is, the number of times that the first guidance state occurs increases). First, with reference to FIG. 111(a), the change over time of the movable position of the movable member 657b when the movable pattern A is set will be described.

As shown in FIG. 111, when the movable pattern A is set, the movable member 657b starts moving to the projecting position at the same time as the round of the big win starts. As shown in FIG. 111, it takes two seconds for the movable member 657b buried inside the base plate 60 to protrude to the projecting position. Approximately 0.7 seconds of the 2 seconds during which the game ball moves to the projecting position is in a state in which the game ball is guided to the general winning opening 630 (first guidance state, see FIG. 110(a)). Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the general winning hole 630 during the first guidance state by continuously shooting the game ball toward the specific area immediately after the start of the round. In each round of the jackpot, although an upper limit (10) is set for the number of balls entering the specific winning hole 657a, since no limit is imposed on the number of balls entering the general winning hole 630, the game ball As the ball enters the general winning hole 630, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases. Therefore, the game ball can be actively shot to the player.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), the state (the second induction state in which the game ball is guided to the specific winning opening 657a) in the projecting position continues for 2.5 seconds. During this 2.5 seconds, every time the game ball reaches the specific area, it is guided to the specific winning opening 657a, so it is possible to obtain a prize ball for each ball entering the specific winning opening 657a. In addition, since the game balls are configured to be able to be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest, by continuing to shoot the game balls from the start of the round, 4 to 5 balls can be shot in 2.5 seconds. It is possible to enter a game ball of about 1 to the specific winning hole 657a.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), when 2.5 seconds have passed since the movable member 657b was placed at the projecting position (that is, when 4.5 seconds have passed since the start of the round), the movable member 657b is moved to the retracted position. Start moving to (immersion position). This variable motion to the buried position is performed over 2 seconds in the same manner as the variable motion to the protruding position. That is, since the movement to the protruding position is completely opposite to the movement to the protruded position, the first guidance state is maintained for about 0.7 seconds even during the movement to the retracted position. Therefore, by continuing to shoot the game balls to the specific area even during the variable operation to the buried position, it is possible to allow about one to two game balls to enter the general winning hole 630 . After this, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), it is movable from the buried position to the protruded position over 2 seconds, the state in the protruded position is maintained for 2.5 seconds, and the protruded position is extended for 2 seconds. The movement to the buried position is repeated twice with an interval of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, when the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A, the first induction state is set six times at maximum. It should be noted that the movable pattern A is forcibly terminated when 10 game balls enter the specific winning hole 657a even if all the variable operations shown in FIG. 111(a) are not completed. The period during which the movable member 657b is arranged at the projecting position is 7.5 seconds in total (2.5 seconds x 3 times). It is possible to reach about 13 game balls. Therefore, only by continuing to shoot the game balls, the specified number (10) of the game balls can be surely entered into the specific winning hole 657a, and the first induction state can be set up to six times. can be done. Therefore, in addition to prize balls for the prescribed number of balls entering the specific prize winning port 657a, prize balls based on winning to the general prize winning port 630 by being set in the first induction state six times at most can be obtained. . Therefore, since the number of prize balls exceeding the prescribed number of prize balls can be easily obtained in each round, the player's sense of satisfaction can be enhanced. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

FIG. 111(b) is a diagram showing temporal changes in the movable position of the movable member 657b when the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B. FIG. As shown in FIG. 111(b), when the movable pattern B is set, the movable member 657b is moved to the projecting position for 2 seconds immediately after the start of the round, and the state at the projecting position is 26 at maximum. Seconds (until 28 seconds have passed since the start of the round), and when 26 seconds have passed, it is moved to the burial position (immersion position) over 2 seconds. Therefore, when the movable pattern B is set, the first guidance state in which the ball can be entered into the general prize winning opening 630 is entered only twice, immediately after the start of the round and at the end of the round.

Thus, in the eighth embodiment, the number of times the movable member 657b is in the first guidance state (the state where the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630) according to the movable pattern set in the movable member 657b. are configured differently. If the number of times of the first induction state is large, the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the execution of the jackpot game is also large. It can bring you greater joy. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the set movable pattern while playing the game, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 112, the first hit type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. It is the figure which showed the defined content of hit classification selection table 202b. Note that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment except that the content of the first winning type selection table 202b is changed. Descriptions other than the winning type selection table 202b are omitted. As shown in FIG. 112, the first hit type selection table 202b of the eighth embodiment defines five types of jackpots A8 to E8.

As shown in FIG. 112, "jackpot A8" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" (see 202b1 in FIG. 112). "Jackpot A8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and a probability variable gaming state (probability variable state of special symbols and time-saving state of normal symbols) is given after the end of the jackpot. Further, when the "jackpot A8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A (the movable pattern that tends to increase the number of times the first guidance state is reached) in each round of the jackpot. For this reason, "jackpot A8" has the largest number of rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is advantageous (that is, a probability variable game state that is more advantageous than the time-saving game state is set), and the general winning port 630 is entered during the jackpot. The more chances to enter the ball (the number of prize balls paid out in each round of the jackpot increases). Therefore, "jackpot A8" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A8" are "0 to 4". Since there are 5 pieces, the ratio of determining "jackpot A8" when winning the jackpot is 5% (5/100).

In addition, "jackpot B8" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 29" (see 202b2 in FIG. 112). “Jackpot B8” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a probability variable gaming state is provided after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when the "jackpot B8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern A (the movable pattern that tends to increase the number of times the first guidance state is reached) in each round of the jackpot. For this reason, "jackpot B8" has the second largest number of rounds after "jackpot A8", and the game state after the jackpot is advantageous (that is, a probability variable game state that is more advantageous than the time-saving game state is set), and during the jackpot There are more chances for balls to enter the general winning hole 630 (the number of prize balls paid out in each round of the jackpot increases). Therefore, the "jackpot B8" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player next to the "jackpot A8". Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot B8" are "5 to 29". Since there are 25 pieces, the ratio of determining the "jackpot B8" when winning the jackpot is 25% (25/100).

In addition, "jackpot C8" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "30 to 54" (see 202b3 in FIG. 112). "Jackpot C8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and a probability variable gaming state is provided after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when the "jackpot C8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (movable pattern in which the number of times of the first guidance state is small) in each round of the jackpot. For this reason, "jackpot C8" has the second largest number of rounds after "jackpot A8", and the gaming state after the jackpot is advantageous, but the chance of entering the general winning hole 630 during the jackpot is reduced (jackpot The number of prize balls paid out in each round of the game is relatively small). Therefore, the "jackpot C8" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous to the player than the "jackpot A8" and the "jackpot B8" in terms of prize balls. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot C8" are "30 to 54". Since there are 25 pieces, the ratio of determining the "jackpot C8" when winning the jackpot is 25% (25/100).

In addition, "jackpot D8" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "55 to 69" (see 202b4 in FIG. 112). "Jackpot D8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is seven and a probability variable gaming state is provided after the jackpot ends. Further, when the "jackpot D8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (movable pattern in which the number of times of the first guidance state is small) in each round of the jackpot. For this reason, "jackpot D8" has an advantage in the gaming state after the jackpot ends, but the number of rounds is the smallest, and there are fewer opportunities to enter the general winning hole 630 during the jackpot (each round of the jackpot). The number of prize balls paid out to is relatively small). Therefore, "jackpot D8" is a jackpot type that is advantageous in terms of the game state after the jackpot is finished, but is the most disadvantageous to the player in terms of prize balls. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot D8" are "55 to 69". Since there are 15 pieces, the ratio of determining the "jackpot D8" when winning the jackpot is 15% (15/100).

In addition, "jackpot E8" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99" (see 202b5 in FIG. 112). "Jackpot E8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is seven and a time-saving game state is given 100 times after the jackpot ends. Further, when the "jackpot E8" is reached, the movable member 657b is moved in the movable pattern B (movable pattern in which the number of times of the first guidance state is small) in each round of the jackpot. For this reason, "jackpot E8" has a disadvantageous gaming state after the jackpot ends, has the smallest number of rounds, and has fewer opportunities to enter the general winning opening 630 during the jackpot (payouts are made in each round of the jackpot). The number of prize balls is relatively small). Therefore, the "jackpot E8" is the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous to the player in terms of the game state after the jackpot is finished and the prize balls. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot E8" are "70 to 99". Since there are 30 pieces, the ratio of determining the "jackpot E8" when winning the jackpot is 30% (30/100).

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern set to the movable member 657b is changed in each round of the big winning game according to the big winning type. As a result, the game can be played in anticipation of the big win type (either of the big wins A or B) in which the movable pattern A, which gives many chances to enter the general winning hole 630, is set. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the jackpot control process 8 (S941) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 8 (S941) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, and is similar to the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment. Secondly, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern jackpot state, it is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and setting the state of a specific winning hole.

Of the jackpot control processing 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, in each of S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022, the jackpot control processing in the sixth embodiment 6 (see FIG. 89), S1001 to S1004, S1006, S1007, S1009 to S1011, S1013 to S1016, and S1022.

In addition, in the jackpot control processing 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round in the processing of S1004 (S1004: Yes), the movable pattern corresponding to the jackpot type (movable Either pattern A or B) is set (S1041), and the process proceeds to S1006. More specifically, if the current jackpot is one of the jackpots A8 and B8, the movable pattern A is set as the movable pattern of the movable member 657b. A movable pattern B is set as the movable pattern of .

Also, in the jackpot control process 8 (see FIG. 113) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect has come in the process of S1011 (S1011: Yes), the jackpot type this time is the jackpot E8. It is determined whether or not there is (S1042), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot E8 (S1042: Yes), the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving game state, and the process proceeds to S1013 to end the jackpot and migrate. On the other hand, in the processing of S1042, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not jackpot E8 (it is one of jackpots A8 to D8) (S1042: No), the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable game state Then, the process proceeds to S1014 to end the jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the front inclined member 657bf forming an inclination that descends from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, and A movable member 657b having a shape that is combined in the front-rear direction with a rear-side inclined member 657bb that forms a The game ball that reaches the ball hole 64) can enter (ie, is guided by the movable member 657b). More specifically, in an arrangement in which only the front side sloping member 657bf protrudes forward from the base plate 60 and the rear side sloping member 657bb is housed inside the base plate 60, the front view upper right corner formed by the front side sloping member 657bf A game ball that has reached the specific area is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 arranged on the left side of the movable member 657b in front view due to the inclination downward to the left from the direction. On the other hand, when the movable member 657b is completely protruded (positioned at the protruded position), the slope formed by the rear side slope member 657bb from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view causes the specific A state is formed in which the game ball that has reached the area is easily guided to the specific winning opening 657a arranged on the right side in front view with respect to the movable member 657b. The general winning hole 630 does not affect the end condition of the round no matter how many game balls enter during the execution of the jackpot game. The more balls you play, the more prize balls you can get. Therefore, in the intermediate position until the movable member 657b reaches the projecting position (the first guidance state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630 by the front side inclined member 657bf), the game ball is actively pushed. Since the balls can be shot to the specific area, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be enhanced. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern set for the movable member 657b in each round of the jackpot is a movable pattern that tends to increase the number of times that the first guidance state occurs during one round. Either one of the two movable patterns A and the movable pattern B in which the number of times the first induction state is likely to be reduced is set. More specifically, the movable member 657b is moved according to the movable pattern A in each round of the big win when the jackpot hits A8 or B8, whereas the movable member 657b moves when the jackpot hits C8 to E8. It is configured to be movable in the movable pattern B. As a result, the game can be played with a stronger expectation of either the big win A8 or B8, which increases the number of times the first induction state is brought about, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, two types of movable patterns, that is, the movable pattern A and the movable pattern B are provided. Good or less. By reducing the number of types of movable patterns to one, it becomes unnecessary to perform control processing for selecting a movable pattern according to the type of jackpot at the start of a new round, thereby reducing the processing load during execution of the jackpot game. can do. In addition, by increasing the number of movable pattern types to more than two (for example, five types) and diversifying the number of times that the first induction state occurs, the game is played with more attention paid to the set movable pattern. can let Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

In the eighth embodiment, the configuration is such that the movable pattern set to the movable member 657b is varied in each round of the big win according to the type of the big win, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the jackpot type, the movable pattern may be switched according to the number of rounds. As a result, the motion of the movable member 657b can be further diversified, so that each time a new round is started, the game can be played while paying attention to the movable pattern set for the movable member 657b. .

In the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern A is set when one of the jackpots A8 and B8 is reached, and the movable pattern B is set when one of the jackpots C8 to E8 is reached. It is not limited to this, and the correspondence relationship between the types of movable patterns and the types of jackpots can be determined arbitrarily. For example, in contrast to the eighth embodiment, the movable pattern A may be set when a jackpot type with a small number of rounds (for example, a jackpot of 7 rounds) is set. By configuring in this way, when a jackpot type with a small number of rounds is selected, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round of the jackpot is likely to increase. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

<Modified example of the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, a modification of the eighth embodiment described above will be described. This modified example of the eighth embodiment is different in that a rotating member 658 is provided in place of the movable member 657b in the eighth embodiment described above. As shown in FIGS. 114(a) to 114(c), the rotating member 658 is rotatable about a rotating shaft 658a in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front. By rotating the rotating member 658 until the upper end of the rotating member 658 approaches the lower end of the specific winning hole 657a again (see FIG. 114(c)), a ball can easily enter the specific winning hole 657a. That is, the game ball that has reached the specific area is guided to the specific winning opening 657a by the slope formed by the rotating member 658 from the upper left side to the lower right side in the front view. In each round of the jackpot, the rotating member 658 is controlled to rotate in a predetermined rotating pattern, so that a game ball can enter the specific winning hole 657a. Although the details will be described later, depending on the rotation position (rotation angle) until the rotation member 658 is positioned so that a ball can be entered in the specific winning opening 657a (see FIG. 114(c)). It has a configuration in which the ball winning opening is variable. That is, it is possible to realize the same operation as in the eighth embodiment described above.

The rotating member 658 normally stands vertically as shown in FIG. 114(a). The game ball that has reached the specific area in this state is the space between the rotating member 658 and the general winning opening 630 (left side of the rotating member 658 when viewed from the front), or between the rotating member 658 and the specific winning opening 657a. (the right side of the rotating member 658 when viewed from the front) and flows down to the out port 66 .

FIG. 114(b) is a diagram showing an intermediate position temporarily arranged until the rotating member 658 rotates to a state in which the game ball can be guided to the specific winning opening 657a. As shown in FIG. 114(b), at the intermediate position, the rotating member 658 forms an inclination that descends from the upper right side to the lower left side in front view, so that the game ball that reaches the specific area is directed to the general winning opening 630. Create a state of being easily induced. When the rotating member 658 is further rotated in this state, the ball is easily entered into the specific winning hole 657a shown in FIG. 114(c). When canceling the state in which the game ball is likely to enter the specific winning hole 657a, the rotating member 658 is rotated counterclockwise with the rotating shaft 658a as the rotating shaft as shown in FIG. 114(a). returned to its original state.

Thus, in the modified example of the eighth embodiment, the rotating member 658 that rotates is provided between the general winning opening 630 and the specific winning opening 657a. Depending on the rotational position (rotational angle), the rotating member 658 is arranged to form an inclination that can guide the game ball to the general winning opening 630 (see FIG. 114(b)) and to the specific winning opening 657a. At least an arrangement (see FIG. 114(c)) that forms an inclination that can guide the game ball can be taken. More specifically, in each round of the big hit, at an intermediate position during the rotation of the rotating member 658 until the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 657a, the game is temporarily moved to the general winning opening 630. The ball is placed in a state where it can be entered. As a result, as in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to realize a game property in which the more game balls enter the general winning hole 630 during the big win, the more the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big win increases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Note that the rotating member 658 in the modified example of the eighth embodiment can also be diverted to the sixth and seventh embodiments described above. More specifically, a rotating member 658 is provided in place of the movable members 650Lb and 650Rb, and the left specific winning opening 650La in the sixth embodiment and the left variable winning opening 655La in the seventh embodiment can be entered. In this case, the rotation member 658 may be rotated counterclockwise to form an inclination downward from the upper right side to the lower left side in the front view. Further, when the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the sixth embodiment and the right variable winning opening 655Ra in the seventh embodiment are allowed to enter, the rotating member 658 is rotated clockwise and It is sufficient to form an inclination that descends to the lower right side.

In the eighth embodiment, in the state where it is arranged in the intermediate position, it was configured so that the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 630, but the state in which it is easy to be guided to the general winning opening 630 The game ball may be easily guided to the general winning opening 630 in a movable range including the open position or the closed position without being limited to the intermediate position. In addition, it is not limited to the general winning opening 630 that the game ball is easily guided. For example, it may be a winning opening that triggers a special symbol lottery, a variable winning opening that triggers a variable probability state after the end of a big hit, or a winning opening that triggers the start of a big hit. (So-called two types of V winning openings) may be used. Also, the player does not have to be given a privilege (for example, an exit).

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 123. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment described above, according to the movable position (protrusion amount) of the movable member 657b that is moved in a predetermined movable pattern (either movable pattern A or B) during execution of the jackpot game, It has a configuration in which the prize-winning opening that enables prize-winning is variable. As a result, it is possible to change the winning opening to which the game ball is guided according to the timing when the game ball reaches the specific area, and to change the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the execution of the jackpot game. was

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the type of ball entrance that is easy to enter is changed according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that is moved when the normal symbol lottery is won. did. As a result, in a time-saving game state in which the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is high, the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the ball entrance into which the game ball enters.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 are partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 The only difference is that the control processing to be executed is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eighth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 115, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment. In the description of the eighth embodiment described above, the description of the board configuration of the game board 13 is omitted, and the configuration replaced from the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (the general winning opening 630, the specific winning opening 657a, the movable member 657b), only the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described with respect to the differences from the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84) for easier understanding.

As shown in FIG. 115, the game board 13 according to the ninth embodiment differs from the game board 13 according to the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 84) in that the motor-operated The left variable winning device 650L and the right variable winning device 650R are deleted, and the variable winning device 65 is provided. A second ball entrance 640 into which a game ball can enter, an electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and a front view of the second ball entrance 640 The difference is that a general winning hole 63 is provided on the left side and into which game balls can enter. The second ball entrance 640 is a ball entrance that triggers a special symbol lottery when a game ball enters. That is, it has performance equivalent to that of the first ball entrance 64 . If a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing the variable display, the number of times the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is different from the number of times the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. Reserved up to 4 times separately. Also, if a ball on hold for entering the first ball entrance 64 and a ball on hold for entering the second ball entrance 640 exist at the same time, a ball on hold for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 A lottery for a special symbol based on the ball is preferentially executed.

Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 116, in the ninth embodiment, it is provided in association with the second ball entrance 640, and when the normal symbol lottery wins, the second ball entrance The moving direction of the game ball reaching the electric accessory 640a is variable according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that moves to the open state where the game ball can enter the opening 640. The traveling direction of the game ball for each movable position of the electric accessory 640a will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 116 shows the flow path of the game ball when the game ball hit into the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the front view by hitting to the right reaches the electric accessory 640a. It is the figure shown for every movable position of the electric accessory 640a. FIG. 116(a) shows a state in which the electric accessory 640a closes the second ball entrance 640 (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is placed in the closed position), and FIG. 116(b) shows 116(c) shows a state in which the electric accessory 640a is arranged at an intermediate position in the middle of moving to the open position for opening the second ball entrance 640, and FIG. It shows how it is placed.

As shown in FIG. 116(a), when the electric accessory 640a is placed at the closed position, a game ball shot toward the right side of the variable display unit 80 by hitting to the right is not the closed second ball. It flows down through the space between the ball entrance 640 and the general prize winning opening 63 . As shown in FIG. 116( a ), the plurality of nails arranged above the general prize-winning opening 63 , which slope downward from the upper left to the lower right when viewed from the front, It protrudes rightward from a plurality of nails arranged in the front view, which form an inclination downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in front view. Therefore, in the state where the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position, the possibility that the right-handed game ball flows down toward the general winning hole 63 is extremely low.

As shown in FIG. 116(b), at an intermediate position in which the electric accessory 640a moves to the open position, a game ball hit to the right easily collides with the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a. When the game ball collides with the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a, the collided game ball is reflected leftward in front view and is easily guided in the direction in which the general winning opening 63 is provided. This makes it easier to win a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10) based on the balls entering the general prize winning opening 63 .

Note that in the ninth embodiment, even if the arrangement shown in FIG. Approximately 10% of the movable range), the game ball can be guided to the general winning opening 63. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the possibility that the game ball is guided to the general winning hole 63 .

As shown in FIG. 116(c), when the electric accessory 640a is placed in the open position (the second ball entrance 640 is opened), the game ball hit to the right is basically electric It is guided to the second ball entrance 640 by the accessory 640a. In addition, when the electric accessory 640a is completely opened, the height of the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a is lower than the height of the tip portion of the electric accessory 640a. The height at which the upper end nail is arranged among the plurality of nails forming the inclination of the direction is higher. Therefore, even if the game ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 along the path formed by the electric accessory 640a and collides with the electric accessory 640a and is reflected leftward in front view, multiple It becomes difficult to reach the general winning opening 63 by passing above the nail. Therefore, the game ball collided with the electric accessory 640a and reflected leftward passes through the space on the left side of the tip of the electric accessory 640a and flows downward, as shown in FIG. 116(c). .

Thus, in the ninth embodiment, a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the general winning opening 63 or is easily guided to the second ball entrance 640 is formed according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a. Create a state or create a state where it is difficult to enter any ball entrance. Therefore, when the lottery for the normal symbol wins, the game can be played by paying attention to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a when the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a. In the ninth embodiment, the number of prize balls that enter the general winning hole 63 is larger than that of the second ball entering hole 640 . Therefore, the more the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a at an intermediate position in the middle of the movement of the electric accessory 640a to the open position, the more advantageous it is for the player. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a game property that draws attention to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117(a). FIG. 117(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment is second to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 11(a)). The difference is that a hit type selection table 202ba is added.

The second win type selection table 202ba is a data table that is referred to for determining the release pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the case of a win in the normal symbol lottery. Details of the second win type selection table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 117(b).

FIG. 117(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second win type selection table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117(b), the second winning type selection table 202ba includes, for each state of the normal symbol, the type of opening pattern set to the electric accessory 640a and the second winning pattern for determining each opening pattern. It is defined in association with the value of the hit type counter. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 117(b), in the normal symbol low probability state, the value of the second winning type counter is in the range of "0 to 94", the electric accessory 640a is " 117(b) 202c1). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) "0 to 99" that can be taken by the second winning type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times". Since there are 95 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 94", an opening pattern is determined in which the electric accessory 640a is opened "0.1 seconds x 5 times" in the low-probability state of normal symbols. ratio is 95% (95/100). Since it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the 0.1 second when the electric accessory 640a is opened, even if the electric accessory 640a is opened 5 times, "0.1 It is almost impossible to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 while the opening pattern of "5 times per second" is set.

In addition, in the low-probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning type counter is in the range of "95 to 99", the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened "2 seconds x 1 time" is associated. (see 202c2 in FIG. 117(b)). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) "0 to 99" that can be taken by the second winning type counter, the electric accessary 640a is associated with an opening pattern in which it is opened "2 seconds x 1 time". Since there are five random numbers (counter values) "95 to 99", the rate at which the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened "2 seconds x 1 time" is determined is 5 in the low-probability state of the normal symbol. % (5/100). Since it is easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 for 2 seconds, the opening pattern of “2 seconds x 1 time” allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. It is an open pattern that is easy to hit.

In this way, in the low probability state of the normal design, the probability of winning the normal design is low, and even if the normal design hits, most of them will be an open pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times". Therefore, it becomes extremely difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 even if hitting to the right in the low probability state of the normal symbol. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is moved in the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times", the electric accessory 640a is continuously between the closed position and the open position for a short period of time. is placed at an intermediate position (see FIG. 116(b)). Therefore, while the electric accessary 640a is performing the opening action in the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times", the general winning hole 63 with a relatively large number of awarded balls is paid out by hitting to the right. And enter the ball at a high rate. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to hit to the right while the opening action is being performed in the opening pattern of "0.1 second x 5 times".

In addition, although not shown, in the ninth embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 in the normal symbol low probability state, A very long variation time (for example, 300 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special symbol. In other words, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the special symbol low probability state, the special symbol lottery is not executed for five minutes thereafter, resulting in a disadvantageous state. Therefore, in the low-probability state of the normal pattern, if the right-handed hit is performed while the "2 seconds x 1 time" opening pattern (opening pattern that makes it easy to enter the second ball entrance 640) is performed, the game is played. disadvantageous to the person. For this reason, in the ninth embodiment, the opening pattern of "0.1 second x 5 times" which makes it almost impossible to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the low probability state of the normal symbol is determined. In this case, the player is notified to hit right (navigation to hit right). Has a configuration that does not perform a right-handed navigation effect. As a result, while giving the player the maximum opportunity to enter the ball into the general winning hole 63, it is excessively disadvantageous to the player in the low probability state of normal symbols (lottery of special symbols is performed for 5 minutes or more). unfavorable situation) can be prevented.

In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the variable display will be referred to as "first special symbol lottery" and " The special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, and the variable display are referred to as the "second special symbol lottery" and the "second special symbol lottery". 2. It is called “variation display of special symbols”.

As shown in FIG. 117(b), in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the value of the second hit type counter is in the range of "0 to 29", the electric accessory 640a is "0.1 seconds × 5 117 (b) 202c3). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) "0 to 99" that can be taken by the second winning type counter, the electric accessory 640a is associated with the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times". Since there are 30 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 29", an opening pattern is determined in which the electric accessory 640a is opened "0.1 seconds x 5 times" in the time-saving state of normal symbols. The proportion is 30% (30/100).

In addition, an opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened "2 seconds x 1 time" is defined in association with the range of the value of the second winning type counter of "30 to 99" (Fig. 117). (b) at 202c4). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) "0 to 99" that can be taken by the second winning type counter, the electric accessary 640a is associated with an opening pattern in which it is opened "2 seconds x 1 time". Since there are 70 random numbers (counter values) from "30 to 99", the ratio of determining the opening pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is opened "2 seconds x 1 time" is 70% in the time-saving state of normal symbols. (70/100).

In this way, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the probability of hitting the normal pattern increases, and when it comes to the normal pattern, the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" at a rate of 70%. By continuing to hit to the right in the time-saving state of the pattern, it is possible to continuously enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 . Also, when the opening pattern of "0.1 second x 5 times" is selected, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the general prize winning opening 63, so that more prize balls can be won. Furthermore, in the time-saving state of normal patterns, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special pattern is shortened (equivalent to the fluctuation time of the first special pattern), so the lottery of the second special pattern is performed many times at short intervals. can be done. As a result, while the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, it is advantageous for the player to hit the right, so while the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, the right-handed navigation effect is executed. continue to be

By continuing to hit to the right in the time-saving game state and continuously executing the release pattern of ``2 seconds x 1 time'', it is possible to continuously execute the lottery for the second special symbol without reducing the number of balls held. can. Also, in the time-saving state, if many opening patterns of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" are fortunately selected, prize balls can be obtained by entering the general winning hole 63 without reducing the number of times of time-saving. . Therefore, for the player, during the time-saving gaming state, there is an open pattern in which the period of being placed in the open position is short (that is, an open pattern with relatively few opportunities for the ball to enter the second ball inlet 640). It is possible to realize a novel game property that a game can be played in anticipation of being decided. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117(c). It is a block diagram showing a configuration. As shown in FIG. 117(c), the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eighth embodiment (and the sixth embodiment) (see FIG. 87(b)). Instead of the reserved ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are provided, and instead of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, the second The difference is that a 1 special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 are provided. Another difference is that the movable type storage area 203aa is deleted.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 This is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640 . The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 have the same configuration as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). there is That is, it has four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area), and each of these areas includes a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3 are stored respectively. When the special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 are shifted (moved) to the execution area, Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed. On the other hand, when each counter value is not stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 (when the second special symbol reserved ball is 0), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a special Judgment such as lottery of patterns is performed. That is, in the ninth embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery for the first special symbol.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to 4 times, and the second special symbol pending ball number counter 203c2 is the second ball entrance 640. The number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on (starting winning) is up to 4 It is a counter that counts up to times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 has an initial value set to zero. It is incremented by 1 (see S424 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S228 in FIG. 118). The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 has an initial value set to zero. It is incremented by 1 (see S430 in FIG. 119). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S223 in FIG. 118).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 122. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 118, special symbol variation processing 9 (S141) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 9 (S141) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and first embodiment) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). It is a process for setting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, like the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 23). be.

Of the special symbol variation processing 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, in each processing of S201, S202, and S208 to S217, the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 118) in the eighth embodiment (first embodiment) 23), the same processes as those of S201, S202, and S208 to S217 are executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 9 (see FIG. 118) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is not being varied in the process of S202 (S202: No), the number of second special symbol reserved balls The value (N2) of the counter 203c2 is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is greater than 0 (S222).

In the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S222: Yes), then the second special symbol reserved Update by subtracting 1 from the value (N2) of the number of balls counter 203c2 (S223), and set a special figure 2 reserved number of balls command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved number of balls counter 203c2 after updating (S224) . The command for the number of pending balls set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 30), It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S224, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a2 are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is not a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (that is, it is 0) (S222: No) Next, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is acquired (S226), and whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is greater than 0 (S227).

In the process of S227, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (that is, is 0) (S227: No), the Since neither the reserved ball of the first special symbol nor the reserved ball of the second special symbol exists, it means that the variable display of the special symbols cannot be newly started, and this processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S227, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S227: Yes), then the first special 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 to update (S228), and a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the updated first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is set ( S229). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 in the same manner as the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, and the main processing executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 30) It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S901).

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S229, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted by the same method as the process of S225 (S230), and the process is executed. The process proceeds to S208.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the details of the starting winning process 9 (S142) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This starting prize winning process 9 (S142) is executed in place of the starting winning process (see FIG. 25) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). , and is a process for executing corresponding control when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is detected.

In the starting winning process 9 (S142), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S421). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S421, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S421: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol (S422). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S423).

Then, in the process of S421, if it is determined that the first ball entrance 64 has not won (S421: No), or even if the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the process of S423 is performed. , when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S423: No), the process proceeds to S427. On the other hand, there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S421: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the first special 1 is added to the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 (S424). Then, a special figure 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 changed by calculation is set (S425).

The special figure 1 reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 30) External output processing (S901) of the main processing described later (see FIG. 30) , to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S425, the first per random number counter C1 updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the first per type counter C2 and stop Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a1 of the RAM 203 (S426), and the process is executed. The process proceeds to S427. In the process of S426, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c1 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) (S427). In this process as well, similarly to the process of S421, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S427, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S427: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (for the lottery of the second special symbol Acquire the number of times of holding the corresponding variable display N2) (S428), and determine whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) ( S429).

Then, there is no winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S427: No), or even if there is a prize to the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S429: No), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S427: Yes), and if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S429: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 (S430). Then, a special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 changed by calculation is set (S431).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 from the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol of the RAM 223 Stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b.

After setting the special figure 2 pending ball number command by the process of S431, the first per random number counter C1 updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the first per type counter C2 and the fluctuation Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a2 of the RAM 203 (S432), and the processing of S433 Move to In the process of S432, as in the process of S426, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c2 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

In the process of S433, a prefetching process is executed for prefetching the success or failure from the various counter values acquired based on the start winning (S433), and the present process is terminated. Details of this prefetch processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the prefetching process (S433). In this look-ahead processing (S433), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has been detected in the current starting winning processing 9 (see FIG. 119). Then (S1501), if it is determined that no new ball has been detected (S1501: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, if it is determined that a new ball has been detected (S1501: Yes), then whether the number of held balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit (that is, 4). It is determined whether or not (S1502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1502: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if it is determined that the number of held balls is less than the upper limit (S1502: No), various counter values (start winning process 9 (Fig. 119 Reference) S426 or various counter values stored in the processing of S432), the success or failure of the lottery in the special design (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and its A variation pattern is predicted (S1503).

By the process of S1503, when the propriety of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the type of stop), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted, next, the predicted propriety of the lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S1504), and the process ends.

The prize winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, a sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts win/fail, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 121, normal symbol variation processing 9 (S143) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This normal symbol variation process 9 (S143) is a process executed instead of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is performed in the second symbol display device 83. This is a process for controlling the variable display of normal symbols, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, and the like.

Among the normal symbol variation processing 9 (see FIG. 121) in the ninth embodiment, in each processing of S501 to S519, each of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) The same processing as each processing of S501 to S519 is executed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation processing 9 (see FIG. 121) in the present generation 9 embodiment, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit in the process of S519 (S519: Yes), the second per type By referring to the selection table 202ba, an opening pattern to be set for the electric accessary product 640a is determined, and an electric accessary product operation start process for starting an opening operation based on the determined opening pattern is executed (S531), End this process. Details of this electric accessary product operation start processing (S531) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the electric accessary product operation start process (S531) described above. In this electric accessary product operation start process (S531), first, the second hit type selection table 202ba (see FIG. 117 (b)) is read (S1601), and from the read table, the current normal symbol state and the third The open pattern corresponding to the value of the type counter per 2 is read (S1602). Here, the state of the current normal design is determined to be the time saving state of the normal design if the probability variation flag 203e is on or the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more, while the probability variation flag 203e is off and the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, it is determined that the normal pattern is in a low probability state. As described above, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the second per type selection counter is in the range of "0 to 94", "0.1 seconds × 5 times" is selected as the open pattern, If the value of the second win type selection counter is in the range of "95 to 99", "2 seconds x 1 time" is selected as the release pattern. In addition, in the time saving state of the normal pattern, if the value of the second per type selection counter is in the range of "0 to 29", "0.1 seconds × 5 times" is selected as the open pattern, while the second per If the value of the type selection counter is in the range of "30 to 99", "2 seconds x 1 time" is selected as the release pattern.

When the process of S1602 is completed, next, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a based on the opening pattern read out in the process of S1602 is set (S1603). Then, it is determined whether the present is a low probability state of normal symbols (probability variation flag 203e is off, and the value of counter 203f during time saving is 0) (S1604), and in a low probability state of normal symbols If there is (S1604: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the release pattern set to start in the process of S1603 is the release pattern of "0.1 second x 5 times" (S1605). In the processing of S1605, when it is determined that the opening pattern set to start this time is the opening pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" (S1605: Yes), the opening of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is determined. An opening start command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the pattern has started is set (S1606), and this processing ends. Upon receiving the open start command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a right-handed navigation effect for prompting the player to hit right. As a result, when the opening pattern of "0.1 second x 5 times" is set to obtain many opportunities to enter the ball into the general winning hole 63, the player is given the opportunity to enter the ball into the general winning hole 63. can definitely give. Therefore, in the most disadvantageous normal game state (low-probability state of special symbols and low-probability state of normal symbols), the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

On the other hand, in the process of S1604, when it is determined that the current is the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1604: No), and when it is determined that the opening pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" is set in the process of S1605 (S1605: No), the process of S1606 is skipped, and the process ends.

<Control processing of the sound ramp control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 9 (S4071) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment. This command determination process 9 (S4071) is executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Similar to the process (see FIG. 41), this is a process for analyzing unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area and performing control according to the type of the unprocessed command.

Of the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 123) in the ninth embodiment, each process of S4901 to S4918 corresponds to S4901 to S4901 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processing as each processing of S4918 is executed. Also, in the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 123) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4909 that the winning information command is not included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 (S4909: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include an open start command (S4931), and it is determined that the unprocessed commands include an open start command. If so (S4931: Yes), a right-handed navigation effect is set to prompt the player to hit rightward (S4932), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4931 that the unprocessed commands do not include the release start command (S4931: No), the process proceeds to S4911.

By setting the right-handed navigation effect by the processing of S4932, when the opening pattern of "0.1 second x 5 times" is set to obtain many opportunities to enter the ball into the general winning opening 63, the general winning opening is set. It is possible to surely give the player an opportunity to enter the ball into 63. Therefore, in the most disadvantageous normal game state (low-probability state of special symbols and low-probability state of normal symbols), the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the electric accessory 640a, which is moved to the open position when winning in the normal symbol lottery, is temporarily moved to the open position. When the game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a at the intermediate position where it can be arranged, the game ball is easily guided to the general winning hole 63 arranged on the left side of the second ball entrance 640. did. Thus, in a time-saving game state in which the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is high, the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the ball entrance into which the game ball enters. In addition, in the ninth embodiment, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, it is easy to arrange in the middle position (the number of times it is arranged in the middle position is large), but it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640 ( The opening period of the second ball entrance 640 is short), and it is difficult to be placed in the intermediate position (the number of times it is placed in the intermediate position is small), but it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640 (second At least an open pattern in which the ball entrance 640 is open for a long period of time is provided. By setting an open pattern that is easy to be arranged in the intermediate position (the number of times that it is arranged in the intermediate position) is set, an opportunity to win a large amount of prize balls by entering the game balls into the general winning hole 63 is obtained. Therefore, the opening pattern that makes it difficult for the player to enter the second ball entrance 640 (that is, the opening that is disadvantageous in general gaming machines) It is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played during the time-saving game state in anticipation of becoming a pattern). Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, in the normal game state (low probability state of special symbols and low probability state of normal symbols), the electric accessory 640a is easily arranged at the intermediate position (the number of times it is arranged at the intermediate position When execution of the open pattern is determined, a right-handed navigation effect (effect suggesting that a game ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 640) is executed. By constructing in this way, in the most disadvantageous game state for the player, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to win a prize ball by entering the ball into the general winning hole 63 each time a normal symbol wins. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in a disadvantageous game state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game in the normal game state.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, in the normal game state, only when the execution of the open pattern in which the electric accessory 640a is likely to be placed in the middle position (the number of times it is placed in the middle position is large) is determined. Although it is configured to execute navigation, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute a right-handed navigation effect regardless of the open pattern when the normal pattern hits, and it is difficult to be placed in the intermediate position (the number of times it is placed in the intermediate position is small), but the second A right-handed navigation effect may be executed only when an open pattern in which the ball is easily entered into the entrance 640 (the second entrance 640 is open for a long period of time) is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the chances of a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 in the normal game state, so it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the normal game state.

In the ninth embodiment, the game ball is configured to be easily guided (reflected) to the general winning opening 63 in the state of being arranged at the intermediate position. The state is not limited to the intermediate position, and the game ball may be easily guided to the general winning opening 63 in a movable range including the open position or the closed position. In addition, it is not limited to the general winning opening 63 that the game balls are easily guided. For example, it may be a winning opening that triggers a special symbol lottery, or a winning opening that triggers the start of a jackpot (so-called two types of V winning openings). Also, the player does not have to be given a privilege (for example, an exit).

In the ninth embodiment, while the time saving state of the normal design is set, in the low probability state of the normal design, and the hit of the normal design, the open pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" Although the right-hand navigation effect is executed only when it is determined, the execution timing of the right-hand navigation effect is not limited to this. For example, when the normal pattern hits during the time saving state, and after the time saving state ends, the fluctuation of the normal pattern ends and the open pattern of "0.1 seconds x 5 times" is started, the "0.1 Until the opening pattern of "×5 times per second" ends, the right-handed navigation performance that has been executed during the time saving state may be extended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the execution of the right-handed navigation effect immediately after the player returns to the left-handed hand.

In the ninth embodiment, according to the movable position of the electric accessory 640a that opens and closes the second ball entrance 640, there is a state in which it is easy to enter the general winning hole 63, and a state in which it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640. Although the state where it is easy to enter the ball and the state where it is difficult for the ball to enter either hole are switched, this configuration is not limited to the second ball entry hole 640 . For example, the specific winning opening may be configured similarly to the second ball entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a in the ninth embodiment, and the general winning opening 63 may be arranged in the same manner as in the ninth embodiment. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give an opportunity to enter the ball into the general winning opening 63 during the jackpot game, so that the number of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game can be increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 126. FIG. In the first to ninth embodiments described above, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 (arrangement of nails, arrangement of windmills, etc.) is substantially symmetrical. A game ball fired toward the flow path (right-handed game ball) and a game ball (left-handed game ball) fired toward the flow path provided on the left side. It was configured so that the period from when the ball was shot until it reached the specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) was substantially the same.

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, the game ball (the game ball hit to the right) shot toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 on the game board 13 is the left side. A game ball (a game ball hit to the left) shot toward a flow path provided in the tee is configured to take a longer time to reach a specific area. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open, the game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is more likely to reach the variable display unit 80 than the game ball. It is configured such that a game ball that has flowed down the flow path provided on the left side has a higher percentage of entering the specific winning hole 65a.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board structure of the game board 13 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in form. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 124, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 2). The difference is that a detour accessory 700 into which a play ball can enter is provided on the right side of 80 . Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but this detour accessory 700 is the time required for the game ball struck to the right (shot to the right side of the game board 13) to reach the specific winning opening 65a. provided for lengthening. In other words, the detour accessory 700 is longer until the game ball fired by right hitting reaches the specific winning port 65a than the period until the game ball fired by left hitting reaches the specific winning port 65a. The falling time of the game ball hit to the right can be lengthened so that the time of . In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is 1 to 2 seconds, whereas the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. is set to be 7 to 8 seconds.

Here, with reference to FIG. 125, details of the detour accessory 700 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detour accessory 700. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 125, the detour accessory 700 is provided with an opening 710 in its upper portion. A game ball shot to the right can enter the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710 . In addition, an opening 720 is provided at the bottom of the detour accessory 700 for discharging the game ball flowing down inside the detour accessory 700 to the outside of the detour accessory 700 . Furthermore, in order to prevent the ball that has progressed inside from being discharged to the outside without going through the opening 720, the detour accessory 700 is provided with a peripheral edge 730 that extends in the front, back, and left and right directions as viewed from the front. are surrounded on four sides. Since the peripheral portion 730 is made of a translucent member (for example, PS material), the player can easily see how the ball flows down.

In addition, since the plane on the rear side in the front view of the peripheral edge portion 730 can be assembled so as to be substantially flush with the base plate 60 , a gap is generated between the peripheral edge portion 730 and the base plate 60 . It is possible to suppress the ball from being caught in the gap. Further, of the peripheral edge portion 730, the plane on the front side of the front view and the glass unit 16 are configured to be in contact with each other without any gap when the front frame 14 is closed. By creating a gap between and, it is possible to suppress the ball from being caught in the gap.

As shown in FIG. 125, inside the detour accessory 700, there are provided a plurality of flow paths (guiding flow paths 740 to 790) inclined downward of the detour accessory 700. As shown in FIG. In each of the guiding channels 740 to 790, the surface with which the sphere contacts has a substantially flat plate shape, and its width is the width of the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 (the inner wall on the back side when viewed from the front and the inner wall on the front side when viewed from the front). distance between ). That is, it is configured to prevent the sphere from passing through gaps generated between the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 and the guide channels 740 to 790 .

As shown in FIG. 125, the guide channels 740, 760, 780 are inclined downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction. Further, the guide channels 750, 770, 790 are inclined downward from the upper left direction in front view to the lower right direction. Guidance channels 740 , 750 , 760 , 770 , 780 , 790 are arranged in order from above the detour accessory 700 . That is, the flow paths inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in the front view and the flow paths inclined in the direction downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view are provided alternately.

A game ball that enters the opening 710 first falls into the guide channel 740 and flows down along the slope formed by the guide channel 740 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. When the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 740 , the game ball falls from the guide channel 740 toward the guide channel 750 . Then, the dropped game ball flows down along the guide channel 750 in the lower right direction when viewed from the front. When the game ball that has flowed down reaches the lower end of the guide channel 750, the game ball falls into the guide channel 760, and along the slope formed by the guide channel 760, it flows down in the lower left direction in front view.

After that, the game ball alternately repeats the action of flowing down along the channel and the action of falling into the lower channel. Finally, the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 790 and falls from the lower end of the guide channel 790 toward the opening 720 . As a result, the ball entering the detouring accessory 700 is discharged to the outside of the detouring accessory 700 through the opening 720 . Since the direction in which the game ball flows changes every time the flow path through which the game ball flows changes (that is, changes from the lower right direction to the lower left direction, or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction), the game ball changes every time the flow path changes. You can cut down the momentum (flowing speed) of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time until the game ball entering the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710 is discharged to the outside through the opening 720 . As a result, compared to shooting the game ball to the left side of the game board 13, when the ball is shot to the right side of the game board 13, the ball is ejected from the lower part of the game board 13 (first ball entrance 64 or variable winning). The time to reach the area where the device 65 is arranged can be lengthened (7 seconds or more).

Further, as shown in FIG. 125, the guide channels 740 to 790 are supported by channel support shafts 741 to 791, respectively, and rotate clockwise or counterclockwise around each channel support shaft as a rotation axis. is configured to be rotatable. In addition, the rotation operation is performed by the rotation stop members 742a to 792a provided on the lower sides of the guide flow paths 740 to 790, or the lower surfaces of the guide flow paths 740 to 790 with respect to the rotation stop members 742b to 792b. Stop by contact. This rotation operation will be described by taking the guiding channel 740 as an example.

As described above, the guide channel 740 is configured to be rotatable around the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. This rotating motion is performed based on the weight of the game ball flowing down the guide channel 740 . Specifically, when the game ball flows down the upper half of the guide channel 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the upper half of the guide channel 740, causing the upper half of the guide channel 740 to move downward. A force is generated in the direction to rotate it. That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide channel 740 clockwise when viewed from the front, the guide channel 740 rotates clockwise about the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotating motion is stopped when the lower surface of the guiding channel 740 comes into contact with the rotating stop member 742b. The rotation stop member 742b can prevent the guide channel 740 from rotating excessively in the clockwise direction and the inclination of the guide channel 740 from becoming reversed.

Here, the rotation stop member 742b is a substantially cylindrical member, and is joined to the inner wall on the front side and the inner wall on the back side of the peripheral edge portion 730, respectively. That is, it is configured so that the position is not displaced due to the impact when the lower surface of the guide channel 740 contacts. The other rotation stop members 742a to 792a and rotation stop members 752b to 792b also have the same structure as the rotation stop member 742b.

On the other hand, when the ball flows down the lower half of the guide channel 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the lower half of the guide channel 740, so the lower half of the guide channel 740 is rotated downward. A directional force is generated. That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide channel 740 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the guide channel 740 rotates counterclockwise around the channel support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotating motion is stopped when the lower surface of the guiding channel 740 comes into contact with the rotating stop member 742a. The rotation stopping member 742a can prevent the guiding passage 740 from rotating too much in the counterclockwise direction. In other words, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the guide channel 740 from becoming too large and the impetus of the game ball to be reduced. Therefore, the game ball fired by hitting to the right can surely flow down to the lower part of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the specific winning opening 65a are arranged) over 7 seconds or more. . In addition, when the game ball flows down with the inclination of each guide channel 740 to 790 at its maximum, each guide channel is set so that it takes 7 seconds for the game ball to reach the second ball entrance 640 A path length of 740-790 and a maximum tilt angle are set. Since it is rare for the game ball to flow down while all the guide channels 740 to 790 maintain the maximum inclination angle, the time for the game ball to reach the second ball entrance 640 is surely set to 7 seconds or more. be able to.

In this way, by configuring the inclination of each of the guide channels 740 to 790 to change based on the load due to the weight of the game ball, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down each of the guide channels 740 to 790 can be varied. be able to. Therefore, the time until the game ball finishes passing through the detour accessory 700 can be varied. Also, in the above explanation, the case where one ball progresses on the guidance channel 740 was explained, but a state in which a plurality of balls progress on the same guidance channel may occur during the actual game. In this case, the turning motion of each of the guide channels 740 to 790 can be made more irregular, so that the time required for the game ball to finish passing through the detour accessory 700 can be varied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 125, each of the guiding channels 740 to 790 is processed so that the left and right corners of the lower surface are rounded compared to the left and right corners of the upper surface. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the corners of the lower surface and the inner wall portion of the peripheral portion 730 to come into contact when each of the guide channels 740 to 790 rotates. Therefore, since the guide channels 740 to 790 can be arranged at positions closer to the peripheral edge 730, gaps are formed between the guide channels 740 to 790 and the peripheral edge 730, and game balls are formed in the gaps. can be suppressed from being caught or a game ball passing through the gap. Each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is constructed so as to return to the largest inclination due to its own weight when the game ball is not flowing down. For example, in a state where the ball does not flow down the guide channel 740 , the self weight of the guide channel 740 causes the guide channel 740 to rotate counterclockwise in front view with the channel support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. This rotating operation is performed until the lower surface of the guide channel contacts the rotation stopping member 742a, and stops when it contacts the rotation stopping member 742a. Similarly, the guidance channels 750-790 are configured to rotate until they come into contact with the respective rotation stop members 752a-792a due to their own weight when the game ball is not flowing down. As a result, it is determined whether the game ball flows down while the guide channels 750 to 790 are rotating, or the game ball flows down after the guide channels 750 to 790 have finished rotating. The flow speed of the spheres can be varied accordingly.

It should be noted that each of the guide channels 740 to 790 may be constructed so as not to rotate by its own weight, but to rotate only by the passage of the game ball. Further, for example, each guide channel 740 to 790 may be configured to be rotated regularly or irregularly by a motor or the like.

Returning to FIG. 124, the description continues. As shown in FIG. 124, below the detour accessory 700, a large number of nails are provided so as to restrict the flowing direction of the game ball flowing out of the detour accessory 700 through the opening 720 on the lower end side of the detour accessory 700. are placed. With these nails, all the game balls flowing out of the detour accessory 700 can be dropped onto the curved surface member 800 provided on the left side of the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front (the first ball entrance 64 It is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing down in the direction). A game ball falling on the curved surface member 800 rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 800 and is guided toward the variable winning device 65 . As shown in FIG. 124, the space between the variable winning device 65 and the curved surface member 800 is very narrow (there is only a width of less than one game ball). Almost all the game balls guided to the left end of 800 can be made to win (enter the ball) into the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, on the left side of the variable winning device 65 in a front view, a relatively wide space (with a width exceeding one game ball) for guiding the game ball to the out port 66 below the variable winning device 65. (channel) is provided. Therefore, when the specific winning hole 65a is open and the game ball is shot left-handed, although many game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, some of the game balls (for example, 10 1 ball per ball) is guided from the left side of the variable winning device 65 to the out port 66 without entering the specific winning port 65a.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the detour accessory 700 and the curved surface member 800 are provided for the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. As a result, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning hole 65a can be made longer than the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning hole 65a. It should be noted that, basically, the right-handed player takes a longer time to reach the specific winning hole 65a, but depending on the reflection direction and ejection situation of the game ball, the left-handed player may reach the specific winning hole 65a. There is also a non-zero possibility that the period until reaching the ball will be longer (for example, if a game ball fired to the left temporarily stops, or if a ball clog occurs in the left channel of the variable display unit 80) etc). For this reason, the game ball that has flowed down (passed) through the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 has a longer period of time to reach the specific winning opening 65a than the game ball that has flowed down (passed) through the flow path on the left side. (the game ball that has flowed down the left channel tends to take a shorter time to reach the specific winning opening 65a).

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open, the rate at which the right-handed game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a It can be higher than the rate of entering the ball. As a result, players who want to progress the jackpot game speedily (want to end the jackpot game early) will experience some loss (waste of about 1 ball out of 10 balls) during the execution of the jackpot game. The game can be played aiming at the specific winning hole 65a by hitting left handed, with the preparedness of the ball). On the other hand, for a player who does not want to generate useless balls (loss) as much as possible, the game is aimed at the specific winning hole 65a by hitting to the right, with the expectation that the period of the jackpot game will be long. can let Therefore, each player can select his or her favorite game during execution of the jackpot game, so that the game can be realized in accordance with the taste of each player. Each jackpot round ends when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round, or when 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a before the 30 seconds have passed. Even if the game balls are shot right after each round of the jackpot is started, 10 game balls are allowed to pass through the detour accessories 700 before 30 seconds elapse and the specific winning opening 65a. (10 game balls can be entered in about 13 to 14 seconds). Therefore, when hitting to the right, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being disadvantageous (the round ends before the specified number of game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a).

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the display mode during execution of the jackpot game in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the big win.

As shown in FIG. 126, in the tenth embodiment, when the jackpot is won, substantially rectangular display areas HR15 and HR16 are formed in the main display area Dm on the upper left side in the front view and the upper right side in the front view. , and below the display regions HR15 and HR16, a display region HR17 having a substantially rectangular shape and having an area larger than that of the display regions HR15 and HR16 is formed. In the display area HR15, an image resembling a left-pointing arrow is displayed, along with the characters "Left-handed, high-speed mode" and the characters "You can win big wins quickly." To make a player easily understand that the player can consume the big win in a relatively short period of time (the big win progresses at a relatively high speed) by hitting left during the big win by these display contents. can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 126, in the display area HR16, an image resembling a right-pointing arrow is displayed, along with the words ``Right shot in low speed mode'' and the words ``You can take your time to get the big win''. characters are displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that if the player hits right during the big win, the big win can be consumed in a relatively long time (the big win progresses at a relatively low speed). can be made

As shown in FIG. 126, various images and information indicating that the jackpot is in progress are displayed in the display area HR17. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 126, an image TB simulating a treasure chest containing a large amount of gold coins is displayed in the central portion of the display area HR17, and at the upper right inside the display area HR17, " A display area HR19 is formed to which characters "big win" are added. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the jackpot game is being executed. A display area HR18 for displaying characters indicating the progress of the jackpot (the number of rounds and the number of prize balls paid out) is formed in the upper left inside the display area HR17. In the example of FIG. 126, the characters "ROUND: 01/16" (information indicating the comparison between the current number of rounds and the maximum number of rounds) and the characters "GET: 0000/1600" and information showing a comparison between the number of payouts and the maximum number of payouts) is displayed. The display contents displayed in the display area HR18 allow the player to easily understand the progress of the big win.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is longer than the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. configured to be long. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open, the percentage of right-handed game balls entering the specific winning hole 65a is calculated as follows: It is configured to be higher than the rate of entering the ball at 65a. With these configurations, a player who wants to progress the jackpot game speedily (want to win a large amount of prize balls in a short time) may experience some loss (1 ball out of 10 balls) during execution of the jackpot game. The game can be played aiming at the specific winning hole 65a by hitting to the left while being prepared for a certain percentage of useless balls). On the other hand, for players who do not want to generate waste balls (losses) as much as possible, they aim at the specific winning hole 65a by hitting to the right, with the expectation that the period of the jackpot game will be long. can be done. Therefore, each player can select his or her favorite game during execution of the jackpot game, so that the game can be realized in accordance with the taste of each player.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, by providing the detour accessory 700 on the right side of the variable display unit 80, the period until the game ball fired by right hitting reaches the variable winning device 65 is reduced to It is configured to be longer than the period until the game ball shot by reaches the variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加That is, by making the path length of the game ball launched by right-handed hitting flow down longer than the path length of the game ball launched by left-handed hitting, the right-handed hitting is more likely to flow to the left. Although it is configured so that the flow time is longer than when striking, it is not limited to this. For example, in the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in front view, instead of the detour accessory 700, a known crew member may be provided. By constructing in this way, the period from reaching the crooning means to passing through the crooning means can be lengthened, so that the flow-down time of the game ball shot by hitting to the right can be lengthened. Further, for example, in place of the detour accessory 700, an accessory that stops the flow of the game ball for a predetermined period may be provided in the channel provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Of these, the right side of the game board 13 is made of a material (e.g., an elastic body such as rubber) having a higher coefficient of friction than the left side, so that the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 13 is equal to that of the base plate 60. It may be configured to be easily decelerated by the friction of In addition, instead of the detour accessory 700, by making the arrangement of the nails different between the left channel and the right channel of the variable display device unit 80, the flow down the right channel is the same as the left channel. It may take a longer time to reach the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) than when it flows down the path.

In the tenth embodiment, in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot, the game characteristics when hitting left and the game characteristics when hitting right are displayed in display areas HR15 and HR16, respectively. Although it has been configured to display in response to the display, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during a big win, only an image that encourages hitting to the left may be displayed, or only an image that encourages hitting to the right may be displayed. Since the big win can be completed in a short period of time by displaying only the image prompting left-handed hitting, a large amount of prize balls can be won in a short period of time. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which only an image that encourages hitting to the right is displayed, useless balls (game balls that enter the out hole 66 without entering the specific winning hole 65a) can be reduced. , the player's profit in the jackpot can be increased.

Further, when notifying the player of the shooting direction during the big win, the shooting direction to be notified may be changed according to the type of the big win, the type of the performance performed during the big win, or the like. More specifically, for example, when a probability variable jackpot is achieved, a variable display effect (a production mode that is executed only when a probability variable jackpot is achieved) is executed in which the main symbols (probability variable symbols) with odd numbers are aligned. Or, it is determined by lottery whether to execute a variable display performance (a performance mode always executed when a normal jackpot is achieved) in which main patterns (ordinary patterns) with even-numbered numbers are aligned. Then, when it is determined that the normal big win or the variable probability big win and the performance that the normal patterns are aligned by lottery are determined, the performance for informing whether or not the variable probability big win is during the big win is executed. . In this case, a production mode for notifying whether it is a variable probability jackpot (for example, a performance in which it is not known whether it is a variable probability jackpot until the final round of the jackpot, and an immediate notification at the end of the first round The player is made to select either the effect mode that is announced or the effect mode that does not know where in each round of the jackpot) (that is, the operation means such as buttons and levers that the player can operate) is provided to determine the effect mode corresponding to the operation content), and the selection of the effect mode may be executed in the first round. Then, in order to ensure a longer time for selecting the performance mode, in the first round of the big win notified by the variable display performance in which the normal patterns are aligned (the big win of the normal pattern notification), it is configured to suggest hitting to the right. may be By configuring in this way, a longer period can be ensured for allowing the player to select the presentation mode, so that the player can be made to more reliably select the preferred presentation mode. On the other hand, when the player is not prompted to make any selection in the first round (for example, when a big hit is notified by a variable display effect in which the variable probability symbols are aligned), it may be configured to notify a left-handed hit during the big win. . By configuring in this way, the period until the end of the big win can be shortened, so that a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

In addition, for example, when it is determined that the normal jackpot or the probability variable jackpot is obtained and the normal patterns are aligned by lottery, the production for informing whether or not the probability variable jackpot is achieved in the first round of the jackpot is executed. In the production, an production (operation production) prompting the user to operate the operating means may be executed. More specifically, for example, push buttons that can be pressed by the player are provided as operation means, and an effect is executed to prompt the player to continuously press the push buttons within a predetermined period. Depending on the number of times the push button is pressed, the display mode is changed (for example, the gauge of the indicator is accumulated), and the display mode is changed to a specific display mode in conjunction with the pressing (for example, the gauge is filled). Accumulating up to the maximum of the indicator) may be configured to notify that it is a probability variable jackpot. In this case, when a normal jackpot or a probability variable jackpot is obtained, and when a performance in which normal patterns are aligned is determined by a lottery (when an operation performance is executed), a right-handed hit is reported in the first round of the jackpot. With this configuration, the round period of one round can be made relatively long, so that a longer period can be secured for performing the operation effect. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect of the operation performance. On the other hand, when it becomes a probability variable jackpot and the production of matching probability variable patterns is determined by lottery (when the operation production is not executed), the jackpot is achieved by notifying the left-handed hit in the first round. The period until completion can be shortened. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

In addition, instead of selecting the effect mode when notifying whether or not it is a variable probability jackpot, for example, in the first round, the type of music (voice effect) played during the execution of the jackpot game is selected. It may be configured to be selectable, and at least right-handed hitting may be notified during the period for selecting a song (music selection period). More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display a music selection menu screen for selecting the type of music (sound effect). Images corresponding to each of a plurality of (for example, 10) pieces of music set in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on this music selection menu screen. In addition, instead of or in addition to the frame button 22, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an operation means such as a button that can be operated by the player, and a music selection menu screen is displayed according to the operation contents of the operation means. 1 image is configured to be selectable. For example, on the music selection menu screen, the images corresponding to each song are arranged in a vertical line, and one image (for example, the image displayed in the center) appears lit, and the other images appear unlit. configured as follows. Also, as operation means, there are provided three types of buttons: a button corresponding to upward movement (up button), a button corresponding to downward movement (down button), and a button corresponding to decision operation (decision button). do. Then, by detecting pressing of the upper button during the music selection period, the image that was illuminated immediately before the pressing is switched to appear to be off, and the image that was arranged one above is switched to appear to be illuminated. (the image that appears to be illuminated moves upward by one). Likewise, when it is detected that the lower button has been pressed, the illuminated image is configured to move downward by one position. Furthermore, by detecting the depression of the decision button during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the image that appears to be lit at the time of depression is determined as the music to be reproduced during the current jackpot. That is, the song is set as a piece of music to be reproduced from the end of the first round to the end of the final round of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reproduce the player's favorite music during the big win, so that the player's interest in the game during the big win can be further improved.

In such a situation, if left-handed hits are notified in the first round of the jackpot, the first round ends relatively early, so the music selection period is shortened. For this reason, there is a possibility that the music selection period will end before the player selects the desired music by operating the up button and the down button and sets the reproduction by pressing the enter button. On the other hand, a right-handed hit is notified during the first round (music selection period) of a jackpot (a jackpot in which the performance of selecting a music piece is determined) for which a music selection period is set, thereby achieving one round. Since the eye round period can be set to a relatively long period, the player can search for a favorite song from the song selection menu screen (operate the upper and lower buttons so that the corresponding image appears to light up). a longer period for making a decision (pressing a decision button). As a result, it is possible to ensure that the player selects a favorite song without rushing the player, so that the convenience of the player when selecting a song can be enhanced. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which left-handed hitting is notified during the first round of a jackpot (jackpot in which a normal jackpot performance is executed) in which the music selection period is not set, the game is prevented from being slowed down and speedy. A jackpot game can be digested. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of an appropriate shooting direction according to the effect mode executed during the big win.

Furthermore, in the case where the effect (operation effect) prompting the player to operate the operating means, such as setting the music selection period in the first round, is executed at a predetermined rate in the case of a big win, the player's past A configuration may be adopted in which the firing direction notified in the first round is changed according to the operation situation (operation history). More specifically, for example, it is possible to store information (operation history) as to whether or not the player has operated the operation means in the first round of the big win in which the operation presentation is set. Then, when starting the jackpot with the operation effect set, the game is played over the big win with the operation effect set a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) based on the stored past operation history. When the player does not operate, the configuration may be such that a left-handed hit is notified, while a right-handed hit is notified when the player has performed an operation in a jackpot within a predetermined number of times. That is, for a player who tends not to perform an operation even when the operation performance is executed, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short time by informing the player of left-handed hitting to end the first round of the jackpot earlier. While realizing the playability that can be acquired, for the player who tends to actively operate during the operation performance, the execution period of the operation performance is extended by notifying the player of the right-handed hitting, so that the player can enjoy the operation performance. It is possible to secure a period for performing sufficient operations on the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a playability according to the tendency of the player.

In the tenth embodiment, a right-handed hitter has a higher ball entry rate into the specific winning hole 65a than a left-handed hitter. Although the configuration is slightly advantageous, the configuration for giving the right-handed hitter an advantage on the winning ball is not limited to this. For example, instead of setting the same rate of entering the specific winning hole 65a between the game ball fired by right-handed and the game ball fired by left-handed, the right side of the specific winning hole 65 A general winning hole with a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15) may be provided at a position where it is difficult for a game ball hit to the right to enter and a game ball hit to the right can enter. That is, in the state in which the specific winning hole 65a is open, the left-handed game ball basically enters the specific winning hole 65a, and some of the game balls cannot enter the specific winning hole 65a and are out. While flowing down to the opening 66, the right-handed game ball basically enters the specific winning opening 65a, and a part of the game balls may enter the general winning opening. With this configuration, when a right-handed ball is hit, the prize ball obtained by entering the general winning hole is a prize ball due to a big hit (that is, the game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a). Since it is awarded in addition to the award ball), it is possible to make it more advantageous to hit the right during the big hit. Therefore, a player who wants to win more prize balls can be made to hit to the right while being prepared for a long jackpot period. On the other hand, for a player who wants to win a jackpot prize ball in a shorter period of time, it is recommended that the left-handed hit be made during the big win, with the expectation that the prize ball surface will be somewhat disadvantageous compared to the right-handed hit. can be done.

In the tenth embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the features of the case of hitting to the right and the features of hitting to the left are simply displayed in the display areas HR15 and HR16 (see FIG. 126). ), but not limited to For example, a sensor capable of detecting whether a right-handed or left-handed ball is played is placed at a predetermined location on the game board 13 (for example, in the middle of the left channel and the right channel of the variable display unit 80). A configuration may be adopted in which detection means such as the above is provided, and the direction in which the player shoots the game ball is determined from the detection result of the detection means. And it is good also as a structure which changes the production|presentation during a big hit according to the determined shooting direction. For example, when a right-handed hit is detected, the display area HR15 is turned off and the display area HR16 is turned on. It is good also as a structure which makes it look like it turned off. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand what kind of game characteristics will be obtained by the shooting direction selected by the player.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 132. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, in the game board 13, the game ball flows through the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 more than when the game ball flows down the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. When it flows down, it takes longer to reach the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged). It constituted the path length of the flow path, the flowing direction of the game ball, and the like. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, when the specific winning hole 65a is open (that is, during execution of the jackpot game), the game is played with the right hand more than when the game ball is shot with the left hand. A game board 13 having a board surface configuration is adopted so that winning (entering a ball) into a specific winning hole 65a is facilitated at a higher rate when a ball is shot.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, in addition to the variable winning device 65, a right variable winning device 659 is provided as a variable winning device opened and closed during the jackpot. The right probability variable winning opening 659a of the right probability variable winning device 659 is set to an open state in which a ball can be entered in the first round of the jackpot, and is the same as the left probability variable winning opening 655La and the right probability variable winning opening 655Ra in the seventh embodiment described above. In addition, when the game ball enters during the big win, the probability variable state of the special symbol is imparted after the big win. On the other hand, the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened after the second round of the jackpot, and only a predetermined number of prize balls are provided by entering game balls. In addition, the right probability variable winning opening 659a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach even when hitting to the left or hitting to the right. If you continue to do, the number of game balls that reach the variable probability winning device 659 while the right variable winning port 659a can enter the ball increases, but the percentage of the reaching game balls entering the right variable winning port 659a designed to be low. On the other hand, if the right-handed hitting is continued in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the variable probability winning device 659 while the right variable winning port 659a can enter is reduced, but the game balls that have reached is configured to increase the percentage of balls entering the right variable winning hole 659a. With these, the game property in the first round of the big hit can be changed according to the launch direction of the game ball. Instead, it is possible to select either a game property in which the number of game balls that reach the player is increased, or a game property in which the number of game balls that reach the player is small, but the rate of entering a ball is increased.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 , and the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is changed to be the same as the various control processing in the seventh embodiment. . Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in 10th It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the tenth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 127, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 127 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 127, in the game board 13 of the eleventh embodiment, a curved member 810 is provided instead of the curved member 800 provided in the game board 13 (see FIG. 124) of the tenth embodiment. There is a difference. As shown in FIG. 127, a variable probability winning device 659 is arranged on a part of the slope of the curved surface member 810 .

The variable probability winning device 659 is provided with a right variable probability winning opening 659a in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape at its substantially central portion. This right probability variable winning opening 659a is normally closed by the opening/closing door 659f1 (that is, it is set in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball), and when the first round of the jackpot starts, the opening/closing door 659f1 hits the jackpot. It is opened and closed in an opening and closing pattern predetermined for each type. In other words, in the first round of the jackpot, the state in which it is possible to enter the right variable winning opening 659a and the state in which it is difficult to enter are switched in a specific switching pattern. Then, while the open/close door 659f1 is open (while the ball can be entered into the right probability variable winning port 659a), when the game ball enters the right probability variable winning port 659a, the game state after the end of the jackpot , The probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are set (the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON at the end of the big hit). On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the right probability variable winning opening 659a even once in the 1 jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends is a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol time saving state. It is set (100 is set to the value of the counter 203f during time saving). In other words, it is more advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the right variable probability winning port 659a than when the game ball never enters the right variable probability winning port 659a during the big hit. (The game state after the end of the jackpot becomes advantageous).

As shown in FIG. 127, the right variable winning opening 659a is arranged along the curved path on the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, so that the game ball that passed through the detour accessory 700 and fell on the curved surface member 810 , By rolling along the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, it is possible to easily reach the right variable winning opening 659a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 127, the left end of the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 and the left end of the right probability variable winning opening 659a are arranged on substantially the same horizontal plane. In addition, the curved surface member 820 provided below the left channel of the game board 13 is configured such that the height of the right end of the upper surface thereof is higher than the height of the left end of the curved surface member 810. . 127, a plurality of nails are arranged between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810 so as to form an inclination downward from the curved surface member 820 toward the curved surface member 810. As shown in FIG. With these configurations, when a game ball that is hit to the left and has passed through the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 reaches the upper surface of the curved surface member 820, it rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 820. reach the right end. Then, the game ball ejected from the right end of the curved surface member 820 to the right in the front view flows down in the lower right direction in the front view while interfering with the nail planted between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810. and reaches the left end of the curved surface member 810 . The game ball that reaches the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 from the left side of the curved surface member 810 rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 in the right direction in front view, thereby easily reaching the right variable winning opening 659a. can be done. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball can reach the probability variable winning device 659 regardless of whether the game ball is hit to the right or left. Therefore, in the first round of the big win, the game ball can be shot in a desired direction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the structure of variable probability winning device 659 will be described in more detail. FIG. 128(a) is a front perspective view of the variable probability winning device 659 in a state where the open/close door 659f1 of the variable probability winning device 659 is closed (a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the right variable winning port 659a), and FIG. (b), the opening and closing door 659f1 of the variable probability winning device 659 is switched from the closed state to the open state (switches from the state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the right variable winning port 659a to the state in which it is possible to enter) probability variation in the middle FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of a winning device 659;

As shown in FIG. 128 (a), in the state where the right variable winning opening 659a is closed, the left end of the opening and closing door 659f1 that closes the right variable winning opening 659a, and the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, the variable winning device 659 The left side portion (left floor surface 810b) is smoothly connected with almost no step. On the other hand, at the right end of the opening/closing door 659f1, there is a convex portion 659g1 for suppressing the game ball rolling from the left side in the front view from passing over the upper surface of the opening/closing door 659f1 and rolling rightward. is provided. Since the convex portion 659g1 protrudes from the upper surface of the opening/closing door 659f1, the game ball rolling on the opening/closing door 659f1 from the left side of the opening/closing door 659f1 is prevented from rolling by the convex portion 659g1 and rolls. motion stops. As shown in FIG. 128(a), the upper surface of the opening/closing door 659f1 is inclined downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction in a front view. The upper surface of the door 659f1 flows down toward the lower left direction in front view. Then, it rolls on the left floor surface 810 b in the left direction in front view and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66 . In addition, since the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the variable winning device 659 (rolled along the right floor surface 810a) has a strong momentum due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810, the opening and closing door 659f1 is closed, the liquid can flow down to the direction of the out port 66 over the convex portion 659g1. In this way, by arranging the variable probability winning device 659 in an inclined manner, it is possible to suppress the game balls from accumulating in the upper part of the opening/closing door 659f1 during the period when the opening/closing door 659f1 is closed, and to the out port 66. can flow down.

As shown in FIG. 128(b), in the first round of the jackpot, when the right probability variation winning opening 659a switches to a state where the ball can be entered, the opening and closing door 659f1 blocking the upper side of the right probability variation winning opening 659a is The opening/closing door 659f1 is opened by sliding to the left in front view. As shown in FIG. 128(b), while the open/close door 659f1 is open, the game ball rolling from the right side in the front view can enter the right probability winning opening 659a, but it rolls from the left side in the front view. The moving game ball is blocked by the convex portion 659g1 and becomes difficult to enter the right specific winning hole 659. - 特許庁Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, when the opening/closing door 659f1 is completely opened, the upper end of the projection 659g1 and the left floor surface 810b are almost at the same height (they are connected almost smoothly). ), the game ball rolling from the left side of the probability variable winning device 659 can also pass through the convex portion 659g1 and enter the right variable probability winning port 659a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, when the open/close door 659f1 of the variable probability winning device 659 is closed, and when it is open, the flowing direction of the game ball reaching the variable probability winning device 659 will be described. First, FIG. 129(a) is a cross-sectional view of the probability variable winning device 659 and the curved surface member 810 in a state in which the opening/closing door 659f1 is completely opened. As shown in FIG. 129(a), when the opening/closing door 659f1 is completely opened, the height of the upper end of the projection 659g1 provided at the right end of the opening/closing door 659f1 and the left floor surface 810b are substantially the same. As a result, the game ball that rolls from the left direction in the front view to the variable probability winning device 659 can easily pass through the convex portion 659g1. That is, it is possible to easily enter (win) the ball into the right probability variable winning opening 659a without being hindered by the convex portion 659g1. In addition, regarding the game ball that has rolled from the right direction of the variable probability winning device 659 (flowed down along the right floor surface 810a), there is something that prevents the ball (winning) from entering the right variable winning port 659a. Since it does not exist, it is possible to easily enter (win) the ball into the right probability variable winning hole 659a.

FIG. 129(b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable variable winning device 659 and the curved surface member 810 in a state where the opening/closing door 659f1 is completely closed. As shown in FIG. 129(b), when the opening/closing door 659f1 is closed, the right variable winning opening 659a is blocked by the opening/closing door 659f1, so that the game ball cannot enter. In this state, the game ball rolling from the left direction of the variable probability winning device 659 in the front view is inclined upward to the upper right direction formed by the open/close door 659f1, so that gravity acts in the downward direction to the left direction. , the momentum of rolling is reduced. In addition, since the right end of the opening/closing door 659f1 is provided with a convex portion 659g1 that protrudes upward from the other portion of the opening/closing door 659f1, even if the momentum of the rolling toward the right direction is strong, the opening/closing door 659f1 is almost Even if it can climb all the way up, it is prevented from reaching the right floor surface 810a side by the convex portion 659g1. Therefore, it flows downward to the left along the inclination of the opening/closing door 659 f 1 and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66 .

On the other hand, the game ball rolling from the right direction in the front view on the probability variable winning device 659 is in a state where sufficient momentum is added to overcome the convex portion 659g1 due to the inclination formed by the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, it is possible to climb over the protrusion 659g1 and pass through the opening/closing door 659f1. Thereby, it can be dropped from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 659f1 (right probability variable winning opening 659a) in the first round of the jackpot will be described. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the jackpot type (jackpot A11) in which the right probability variable winning opening 659a is set in a state where the ball can be entered for a relatively long period of time, and the ball for a relatively short period of time. A jackpot type (jackpot B11) that is set to a possible state is provided. If the state in which it is possible to enter the ball becomes longer, the opportunity to enter the game ball into the right variable winning opening 659a increases, so the state in which the game state after the big hit is advantageous (the variable state of the special symbol and the time reduction of the normal symbol) state). Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot A11 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B11 (the game state after the jackpot ends is likely to be in an advantageous state). Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the opening pattern of the right probability variable winning opening 659a set in the first round of the jackpot A11 is referred to as an open pattern that can win a V prize, and the right probability variable set in the first round of the jackpot B11 The opening pattern of the winning opening 659a is referred to as an opening pattern in which V winning is difficult.

FIG. 130(a) is a diagram showing a change over time of the state of the right variable probability winning opening 659a when an opening pattern capable of winning a V prize (an opening pattern set in the first round of the jackpot A11) is set. . When the V winning open pattern is set, first, the right variable winning opening 659a is kept closed for 1.5 seconds from the start of the first round. Then, when 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the right probability variable winning opening 659a is switched from the closed state to the open state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 130(a), it takes 0.3 seconds from the start of the opening operation of the right probability variation winning opening 659a to the state where the right probability variation winning opening 659a is completely opened. Therefore, it will be completely released 1.8 seconds after the start of the first round. This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.2 seconds have passed (that is, when 2.0 seconds have passed since the start of the first round), the closing operation of the right probability variable winning opening 659a is started. . This closing action, like the opening action, is completed in 0.3 seconds (completely closed 2.3 seconds after the start of one round). Then, when the right variable probability winning opening 659a is completely closed, the state in which the right variable probability winning opening 659a is closed continues for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed (that is, when 2.8 seconds have passed since the start of the first round), the right probability variable winning opening 659a is opened again. In this opening operation, the same operation as the first opening operation is repeated. That is, it is completely opened in 0.3 seconds, remains open in 0.2 seconds, and closes in 0.3 seconds.

After that, the completely closed state for 0.5 seconds and the opening operation for 0.8 seconds (the right variable winning opening 659a is completely opened for 0.3 seconds, and the open state is 0.2 seconds A series of actions that are maintained and closed over 0.3 seconds) are repeated. Due to this repeated operation, in the opening pattern in which the V winning is possible, the opening operation for 0.8 seconds is repeated six times in the first round of the big win. Also, as shown in FIG. 130(a), the final opening/closing operation is performed after 8.0 seconds have passed since the start of the first round. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, as in the tenth embodiment, a detour accessory 700 is arranged in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 to lengthen the flow time of the game ball. . When the right-handed game ball passes through the detour accessory 700, the area below the game board 13 (the area where the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable winning device 659 are equally arranged) is 7 to 8 seconds as in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, when the right hitting is started in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball reaches the probability variable winning device 659 over a period of at least 7 seconds from the start of the round. Therefore, when hitting to the right, the game ball reaches the probability variable winning device 659 around the start of the last open period in the open pattern that can win a V prize (when 8 seconds have passed since the start of the first round). For this reason, when hitting to the right in the first round, there is a possibility that the game ball can enter the right probability variable winning opening 659a only in the last opening period of the six opening periods. be.

On the other hand, if you continue to hit left in the first round of the jackpot, the area below the game board 13 (first ball entrance 64, variable winning device 65, fixed variable winning device 659) Since the game ball reaches the area where are equally arranged), if the game ball is immediately left-handed at the start of the first round, the game ball can reach the specific winning opening 650a from the first open period. . That is, it is possible to obtain a maximum of six opportunities to enter the ball into the right probability variable winning opening 659a. However, as described above, the game ball rolling from the left side toward the right variable winning opening 659a has an opening period of 1 (completely closed after opening is started) compared to the game ball rolling from the right side. Until 0.8 seconds), the period during which it is possible to enter the right variable winning opening 659a is shortened. Furthermore, in the case of hitting to the left, the number of game balls that cannot reach the probability variable winning device 659 increases compared to the case of hitting to the right. That is, by slipping through the plurality of nails planted between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810, when the game ball enters the out port 66 without reaching the curved surface member 810, or the second 1 There are cases where the ball enters the ball entrance 64 . Therefore, when an open pattern capable of winning a V prize is set, the number of game balls that reach while the right probability variable winning opening 659a is open is large by hitting left in the first round, but The playability is such that the rate of throwing balls becomes low and the number of wasted balls increases. On the other hand, when hitting to the right in the first round of the jackpot, the number of game balls reaching while the right probability variable winning opening 659a is open is small, but the rate of entering balls is high. becomes. Therefore, since the playability of the first round can be varied according to the shooting direction of the game ball, the interest of the player in the first round of the jackpot can be improved. In the first round of the jackpot, the probability that the game ball will enter the ball during one round is almost the same (for example, about 80%) when hitting with the right hand and when hitting with the left hand. As shown, the opening period, board configuration, etc. are set.

FIG. 130(b) is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of the right variable winning opening 659a when an opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize (an opening pattern set in the first round of the big win B11) is set. be. When the opening pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize is set, as shown in FIG. be. Therefore, it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball into the right variable winning hole 659a while the right variable winning hole 659a is open ( The possibility of a game ball entering during one round is almost 0%). Therefore, when the player wins the jackpot, the player can expect that the jackpot type will be the jackpot A11 (the opening pattern that allows the V win is set).

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing in more detail the state of the opening/closing door 659f1 during one open period when the opening pattern capable of winning a V prize is set. As shown in FIG. 131, until the opening operation is started, the upper part of the right probability variation winning opening 659a is blocked by the opening and closing door 659f1, so the game ball is placed against the right probability variation winning opening 659a. It becomes impossible to enter the ball (see FIG. 131(a)). Then, at the timing when the opening/closing door 659f1 starts to open, the opening/closing door 659f1 slides to the left in the front view, and is housed inside the curved surface member 810 . When 0.1 second has passed since the start of the opening operation, the width of the portion of the right probability variable winning opening 659a that is not blocked by the open/close door 659f1 becomes the width of one game ball or more (Fig. 131). (b)). As a result, the game ball rolling from the right direction can be entered into the right probability variable winning opening 659a. On the other hand, the game ball rolling from the left side is tilted upward to the right and formed by the portion of the opening/closing door 659f1 that is not housed inside the curved surface member 810, and the convex portion 659g1. The ball is prevented from entering the variable winning opening 659a. That is, the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the right probability variable winning opening 659a in the same manner as the open/close door 659f1 is completely closed. This state in which the game ball rolling from the right side can enter the right variable winning opening 659a and the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter continues for 0.1 seconds. Then, when 0.1 seconds have passed (that is, when 0.2 seconds have passed since the start of the opening operation), most of the opening/closing door 659f1 is stored inside the curved surface 810 (the protrusion 659g1 and the left floor surface 810b are closed). The width between the right end and the right end is less than one game ball), the game ball that reaches the right end of the left floor surface 810b passes directly above the convex portion 659g1 without passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 659f1. (See FIG. 131(c)). Therefore, even a game ball rolling from the left side of the variable probability winning device 659 in front view can pass through the convex portion 659g1 and enter the right variable probability winning opening 659a. That is, both the game ball rolling from the right direction (game ball fired by right-handed hitting) and the game ball rolling from the left direction (game ball fired by left-handed hitting) are both right variable winning openings 659a. It becomes possible to enter the ball. After that, until the opening/closing door 659f1 is completely opened, game balls rolling from both directions (both right and left) can enter the right probability variable winning opening 659a.

As shown in FIG. 131, when 0.3 seconds have passed since the opening operation was started, the opening/closing door 659f1 is completely housed inside the curved surface member 810, and only the convex portion 659g1 is exposed to the outside (the opening/closing door 659f1 is completely opened) (see FIG. 131(d)). This fully opened state lasts for 0.2 seconds as described above, and when 0.2 seconds have elapsed, the closing action is initiated. This closing operation is executed in the same time (ie, 0.3 seconds) as the operation opposite to that of the opening operation. Therefore, during the period from the start of the opening operation until the open/close door 659f1 is closed again, the period in which the game ball can enter the probability variable winning device 659a is the time when the opening operation is started. 0.6 seconds from the time when 0.1 seconds have passed since the opening and closing door 659f1 to 0.1 seconds before the open/close door 659f1 is completely closed. On the other hand, at the time of left-handed hitting, it is 0.4 seconds from 0.2 seconds after the start of the opening operation to 0.2 seconds before the opening/closing door 659f1 is completely closed. That is, the percentage of game balls reaching the probability variable winning device 659 entering is higher in the case of hitting to the right than in the case of hitting to the left.

Thus, in the eleventh embodiment, the period during which the game ball is possible for the right variable winning opening 659a is the game ball that has reached from the right side with respect to the variable winning device 659, or the game ball that has reached from the left side. It is configured to be variable depending on whether it is a sphere. As a result, when the game ball reaches the variable probability winning device 659 from the right side, it is possible to strongly expect that the ball enters the right variable probability winning opening 659a. Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, as described above, more game balls are sent to the variable winning device 659 in the first round of the jackpot when hitting left than when hitting right. It is configured to reach Therefore, when hitting left in the first round of the big hit, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right variable winning opening 659a, but it is possible to realize a game property with many opportunities to enter the ball. When the ball is hit, it is easy for the game ball to enter the left variable winning hole 659a, but it is possible to realize a game with less opportunity for the ball to enter. Therefore, since the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be changed depending on the shooting direction of the game ball, the player's interest in the game in the first round can be improved.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, by providing a convex portion 659g1 at the right end of the opening and closing door 659f1, the period in which the game ball rolling from the left side can enter the right probability variable winning opening 659a can be rolled from the right side. Although it is configured to be shorter than the period in which the moving game ball can enter, it is not always necessary to provide the convex portion 659g1. Even if the convex portion 659g1 is removed, due to the slope formed by the opening/closing door 659f1, which is inclined upward to the upper right, it rolls from the left side during the opening operation of the opening/closing door 659f1 (for example, the arrangement shown in FIG. 131(b)). It is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the right probability variable winning opening 659a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the display mode of the first round of the jackpot A11 (jackpot in which an opening pattern that allows a V win is set) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first round of the jackpot A11. As shown in FIG. 132, when the first round of the jackpot A11 is started, the characters "Left-handed hitting a few hits mode" and " The number of arrivals is large, but it is difficult to enter V!" and an image simulating a leftward arrow is displayed. According to these display contents, when hitting to the left, while it is possible to reach more game balls to the probability variable winning device 659, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the right probability variable winning port 659a (V winning It is possible to make the player easily understand that the game becomes more difficult).

Also, as shown in FIG. 132, the display area HR16 is provided with the characters "Right-handed single-hit deadly mode", the characters "Although the number of hits is small, it's easy to enter V!", and a rightward arrow. The selected image is displayed. According to these display contents, when hitting to the right, the number of game balls reaching the probability variable winning device 659 decreases, while the game ball becomes easier to enter the right probability variable winning opening 659a (V winning becomes easier). It is possible to make the player easily understand that it becomes

Further, as shown in FIG. 132, in the display area HR17 of the third symbol display device 81, an image simulating the probability variable winning device 659 and the curved surface member 810 is displayed. In addition, on the front side of the right probability variable winning device 659, a decoration imitating the alphabet "V" is displayed, and on the upper left side in the front view in the display area HR17, "Aim for V" is displayed. !!” is displayed in the display area HR20. According to these display contents, by making the game ball enter the variable prize winning device 659 decorated with the letter "V", the result will be advantageous for the player (special It is possible to make the player easily understand that the pattern is in a probability changing state).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 132, for the display area HR17, on the left side of the front view with respect to the image simulating the probability variable winning device 659, and on the upper right side, arrows pointing in the direction of the probability variable winning device 659 respectively image is displayed. The arrow image displayed on the left side of the image simulating the variable prize winning device 659 when viewed from the front is labeled with the text "A few hits will win", and the arrow image displayed on the upper right side when viewed from the front. is marked with the words "one hit kill". According to these display contents, when the player hits to the left according to the display contents of the display area HR15 (selects a mode that hits a few hits), the game ball hits the right variable winning device 659 from the left direction in the front view. It is possible to make the player easily understand that the ball is rolling. In addition, when the player hits to the right according to the display contents of the display area HR16 (selects the one-hit deadly mode), the game ball rolls toward the right variable winning device 659 from the upper right direction when viewed from the front. It is possible to make the player easily understand that. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand which direction should be focused on to confirm whether or not the game ball enters the right probability variable winning opening 659a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the game ball is entered during execution of the jackpot game (during the special game state), so that a privilege (prize ball) is awarded to the player. As the winning device, two types of the variable winning device 65 and the right probability variable winning device 659 are provided. The right variable winning port 659a of the right variable winning device 659 is set to an open state in which it is possible to enter the ball in the first round of the big hit, and when the game ball enters during the big win, in addition to the prize ball, a special prize is awarded after the big win. A probability change state of the pattern is given. Therefore, depending on whether or not the game ball enters the right probability variable winning port 659a, it changes whether the game state after the big hit is advantageous for the player, so in the first round of the big win, the right probability variable winning port 659a A game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters the ball.

The right probability variable winning opening 659a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach even when hitting to the left or hitting to the right. Although the number of game balls reaching the right probability variable winning device 659 increases while 659a can enter the ball, the ratio of the reached game balls entering the right probability variable winning port 659a is low. . On the other hand, if you continue to hit right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right probability variable winning device 659 while the right probability variable winning port 659a can enter the ball is reduced, but the game reached It is configured such that the rate of balls entering the right probability variable winning opening 659a is high. That is, the number of gaming balls that reach the right variable winning device 659 during a predetermined period (period until the opening pattern of one round ends) (the number of opportunities to win the right variable winning opening 659a) aspect ( Element) is configured so that left-handed hitting is more advantageous than right-handed hitting. In addition, the aspect (element) of the ease of entering the ball (entering rate) for the right probability variable winning device 659 is configured so that right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting. With these, the game property in the first round of the big hit can be changed according to the launch direction of the game ball. Instead, it is possible to select either a game property in which the number of game balls that reach the player is increased, or a game property in which the number of game balls that reach the player is small, but the rate of entering a ball is increased. As a result, it is possible to realize game characteristics that suit the tastes of a greater number of players, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, in the predetermined period (first round) of the big win, when the right-handed hit is performed, it is advantageous in terms of the ball entry rate compared to the left-handed hit (right The game ball that reaches the probability variable winning device 659 is easily entered into the right probability variable winning port 659a). It was configured to be advantageous in terms of (more game balls easily reach the right variable winning device 659). As a result, the advantage and disadvantage are different between right-handed and left-handed, so that the player can decide whether to play right-handed or left-handed. However, the difference in superiority between right-handed and left-handed players is not limited to this. For example, when the game ball is hit to the left, it is easy to enter (it is difficult to enter when the ball is hit to the right). There are many prize balls awarded when hitting (for example, 15 balls per time). A) position may be configured to provide a specific prize winning opening that has a long opening time (eg, 5 seconds maximum) but few prize balls are awarded (eg, 3 balls per time). Then, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific winning openings to be opened are alternately switched for each round, and the interval between rounds is extremely shortened (for example, to 0.1 seconds). By constructing in this way, the number of game balls entering the specific winning hole tends to decrease when left-handed hitting is continued during the big win, but the number is awarded when the ball enters the specific winning hole. It is possible to realize a game property in which the number of prize balls increases. On the other hand, when the player continues hitting right during the big win, more game balls are likely to enter the specific winning hole, but fewer prize balls are awarded when the ball enters the specific winning hole. It is possible to realize sexuality. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select a favorite game property and play the game. In addition, for example, a variable prize winning device 65 is provided at a position where the game ball is easy to enter when hitting to the left (it is difficult to enter when hitting to the right), and the game ball enters when hitting to the right. A right variable winning device 659 is provided at a position where it is easy to hit the ball (difficult to enter the ball when hitting the left), and the variable winning device 65 is opened during the period in which the right variable winning device 659 is opened in one big hit. It may be configured to be shorter than the period of time. That is, if the player continues to hit to the right in one big hit, the ball enters the right variable winning opening 659a and the possibility of being given a variable probability state after the big win increases, while the number of prize balls to be obtained is reduced, If left-handed hitting is continued, a lot of game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a large amount of winning balls can be obtained, while it becomes difficult to enter the balls into the right variable winning hole 659a. , the game state after the big hit may be disadvantageous. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to make the superiority different for each shooting direction during the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, the variable winning device 65 (a variable winning device that gives only winning balls to winning balls) and the right variable winning device 659 (a variable winning device that gives winning balls to winning balls and is in a variable state) The positional relationship with the variable winning device that is also awarded) may be reversed. Moreover, setting the side (element) in which the right-handed player is more advantageous and the side (element) in which the left-handed player is more advantageous is not limited to the first round of the big win. For example, during a normal game, a configuration may be provided in which an element that makes left-handed hitting more advantageous than right-handed hitting and an element that makes right-handed hitting more advantageous than left-handed hitting. More specifically, for example, a configuration is provided in which a left ball entrance into which a game ball launched with a left strike can enter and a right ball entrance into which a game ball launched with a right strike can enter, A lottery for a special pattern is executed when a game ball enters one of the ball entrances. Then, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, by playing the game aiming at the right ball entrance with the right hand, it is more advantageous in terms of game efficiency than left hand hitting, while left hand hitting is more efficient in terms of game efficiency. In this case, it is more disadvantageous than right-handed hitting, but if you win the jackpot, it is also possible to make it easier to select a jackpot type that is more advantageous than right-handed hitting (a type that is advantageous in terms of the number of rounds or the continuation rate of the advantageous state). good.

In the eleventh embodiment, in the predetermined period of the jackpot (first round), when hitting to the right, the game ball reaching the right probability variable winning device 659 is changed to the right probability compared to when hitting to the left. While the ball is easily entered into the winning opening 659a, more game balls are likely to reach the right variable winning device 659 in the case of hitting to the left than in the case of hitting to the right. It was configured. In addition to this, the game board 13 may be provided with a sensor or the like capable of detecting the shooting direction of the game ball in the first round of the big win. And it is good also as a structure which performs corresponding production|presentation according to the discharge direction detected by the sensor. More specifically, for example, when a left-handed strike is detected, the display mode of the first round (see FIG. 132) is a display mode in which the display area HR15 lights up and the display area HR16 goes out. Then, when a right-handed hit is detected, the display mode may be set such that the display area HR16 lights up and the display area HR15 goes out. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more easily understand the playability he or she has selected.

In the eleventh embodiment, the opening and closing door 659f1 of the right probability variable winning device 659 is opened by sliding in the left direction in front view, so that the right probability variable winning device 659 is rolled from the right side. The ball is configured to be able to enter for a longer period than the game ball rolling from the left side, but the shape and operation of the open/close door 659f1 are not limited to this. For example, the opening/closing door 659f1 may be configured to open from the front side toward the back side in a front view. The length of the open/close door 659f1 on the right front side when viewed from the front may be shorter than the length of the left front side when viewed from the front by one game ball or more. That is, when the opening/closing door 659f1 is retracted to the rear side in the front view, the right side of the opening/closing door 659f1 becomes ready for a game ball to enter earlier than the left side thereof, and when the opening/closing door 659f1 is closed. Alternatively, when the opening/closing door 659f1 faces forward and protrudes forward, the left side of the opening/closing door 659f1 may be configured so that a game ball cannot be entered earlier. Even when configured in this way, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, the game ball rolling from the right side of the right probability variable winning device 659 is more likely to enter than the game ball rolling from the left side. It can be configured to allow longer periods of time.

In the eleventh embodiment, due to the board configuration, the left-handed hitting is physically more advantageous than the right-handed hitting (that is, the game ball that reaches the right variable winning device 659 enters the right variable winning opening 659a ratio) and a surface where right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting (that is, the number of game balls that can reach the right variable winning device 659 during one round). It is not limited. For example, it may be realized by control. More specifically, for example, the right probability variable winning opening 659a is provided at a position where the arrival ratio of the game ball is the same regardless of whether the player hits to the right or hits to the left. Then, in the first round of the jackpot, it is configured to be able to detect whether the player has hit the right side or the left side. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the opening pattern is made different between the case of opening and the opening. That is, when right-handed hitting is detected, the number of times the right variable-probability winning opening 659a is opened is small, but the opening period of each opening is relatively long. In the case, while the number of times of opening the right probability variable winning opening 659a is relatively large, the right probability variable winning opening 659a may be opened in an opening pattern in which the opening period of each opening is relatively short. Further, it is also possible to allow the player to select the game property of the big win by operating an operation means such as a button instead of the shooting direction of the game ball.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 151. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above, two specific winning holes (the left specific winning hole 650La and the right specific winning hole 650Ra), which are set in a state where a ball can be entered during execution of a jackpot game, are arranged to face each other. At the same time, a movable member corresponding to each specific prize winning port is arranged between the specific prize winning ports, and by protruding the corresponding movable member, an inclination downward toward the corresponding specific prize winning port is formed. It was configured.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, a second left ball entry hole 640L having the same performance as the first ball entry hole 64 is provided instead of the left specific winning hole 650La. That is, the second left ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are arranged to face each other. Then, in the case of winning the normal pattern, by projecting the electric accessory 640La provided in place of the movable member 650Lb in the sixth embodiment, the player moves toward the second left ball entrance 640L. It is configured to form a downward slope.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, when a normal symbol wins at a specific timing during execution of a jackpot game, a special state is formed in which more prize balls than usual can be obtained in the jackpot game. do. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot, the state in which 8 or 9 game balls enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra (that is, the remaining entering balls for 10, which is the upper limit of the winning number of each round When the number of wins is 2 or less, the normal symbol wins, and when the electric accessory 640La moves to the projecting position, the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are opened during the opening period (2 seconds) based on the win of the normal symbol. and both are projected, and instead of guiding the game ball to neither the right specific winning opening 650Ra nor the left second ball entrance 640L, the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb On the other hand, it becomes possible to store (accumulate) game balls. When the electric accessory 640La is closed in this state (that is, when the opening period based on the win of the normal symbol has elapsed), the game balls that have been stored (accumulated) are guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the movable member 650Rb. By doing so, it becomes possible to enter game balls into the right specific winning hole 650Ra in excess of the prescribed number of rounds.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment in that a second left ball entry hole 640L is provided instead of the left specific winning hole 650La. In place of the movable member 650Lb, an electric accessory 640La is provided, in the configuration of the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and in that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is the same. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the sixth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 139, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 139, in the twelfth embodiment, the normal entrance (through gate) 67 provided in the left channel of the variable display device unit 80 in the sixth embodiment is removed, The appearance of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 provided in the right channel is changed from that of the sixth embodiment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 139, it has been modified to be decorated in the likeness of the letters "GO". Also, in the game board 13 of the twelfth embodiment, a second left ball entry hole 640L is provided in place of the left specific winning hole 650La of the sixth embodiment. In addition, the electric accessory 64 attached to the first ball entrance 64 is removed, and an electric accessory 640La is provided instead of the movable member 650Lb. When the normal pattern hits, this electric accessory 640La is placed at the projecting position for a predetermined period (2 seconds x 1 time, or 2 seconds x 2 times), so that the specific area (below the first ball entrance 64) area) to easily enter the second left ball entrance 640L.

In the twelfth embodiment, when the game state (time saving game state, variable probability game state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, an image for notifying the player that the game is played by hitting right (right hitting notification image) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . In the time-saving state of the normal pattern (time-saving gaming state, probability variable gaming state), the right-handed notification image is displayed because the game ball that has reached the specific area by being hit to the left is hit to the right and is in the specific area. This is because the game ball that has reached has a shorter period of time until it enters the second left ball entrance 640L. The correspondence relationship between the direction in which the game ball is launched and the period until the game ball enters the ball is the content described with reference to FIG. 95 in the above-described seventh embodiment. With the 640La positioned at the projecting position, the game ball that is struck to the right and reaches the specific area from the right direction rolls along the downward slope from the upper right side to the lower left side of the electric accessory 640La, The ball enters the second left ball entrance 640L in a relatively short period of time. On the other hand, in the state where the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the projecting position, the game ball that is struck leftward and reaches the specific area from the left travels in the direction opposite to the inclination formed by the electric accessory 640La ( rolls up the slope). After that, when the momentum of the rolling is reduced by gravity and the momentum in the direction of climbing the slope becomes 0, the ball is guided to the second left ball entrance 640L along the slope formed by the electric accessory 640La. In other words, for a game ball that is hit from the right and reaches a specific area from the right, a game ball that is hit from the left and reaches from the left has an extra period of time from when it once climbs the slope to when it begins to descend the slope. , the period until reaching the left second entrance 640L tends to be long. For this reason, if left-handed hitting is performed in the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, during the opening period (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the protruding position) based on the win of the normal symbol It may be difficult for the game ball that has reached the specific area to go down the slope formed by the electric accessory 640La and enter the second left ball entrance 640L before the end of the open period. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, by displaying the right hitting notification image, it is configured to encourage the player to play the game by right hitting. . By configuring in this way, the player can be made to hit to the right during the time-saving state of the normal symbols, so that the game ball that reaches the specific area during the open period based on the winning of the normal symbols , can be guided to the left second entrance 640L in a shorter period of time. Therefore, the game in the time-saving state of normal symbols can be performed more efficiently.

On the other hand, in the game state in which the time-saving state of normal symbols is not set, it is configured so as not to specify the firing direction, including during the execution of the jackpot game. In each big win round, if a specified number (10) of game balls can be entered before 30 seconds elapse from the start of the round, the same number of prize balls can be obtained. Here, since the game balls can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest, the period required to shoot 10 game balls is around 6 seconds. In addition, until the game ball that is shot leftward and reaches the movable member 650Rb from the left flows down the slope formed by the movable member 650Rb toward the lower right direction and enters the right specific winning hole 650Ra. The period of is about 1 second, and the game ball that is shot from the right and reaches the movable member 650Rb from the right flows down the slope formed by the movable member 650Rb toward the lower right direction and flows down the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The period until the ball enters the ball is about 3 seconds. Therefore, even if the player hits to the right or hits to the left during the execution of the jackpot game, if the game balls are continuously shot, 10 or more game balls can be won in about 10 seconds. A ball can be entered into the mouth 650Ra. Therefore, regardless of the shooting direction, the specified number (10) of game balls can be entered into the right specific winning hole 650Ra within the specified time (30 seconds).

It should be noted that even during the execution of the jackpot game, when the normal pattern lottery executed based on the game ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 wins, the electric accessary 640La protrudes. is moved to That is, both the movable member 650Rb and the electric accessory 640La are arranged at the projecting positions. In this case, the movable member 650Rb and the electric accessory 640La intersect at their intermediate positions, so that the game ball that has reached the specific area is positioned above the upper half of the movable member 650Rb and the electric accessory 640La. It forms a state that tends to stay in the region formed by the two halves. That is, the game ball cannot be guided to either the right specific winning hole 650Ra or the left second winning hole 640La. This state is basically a disadvantageous state for the player because the game ball cannot enter any of the ball entrances (second left ball entrance 640L, right specific winning opening 650Ra). However, depending on the timing at which the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the projecting position, the player may be in an advantageous state. The relationship between the timing at which the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the projecting position and the degree of advantage for the player will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 140(a) shows that during the round period of the big win (while the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruding position), the normal pattern wins (that is, the left second ball entrance 640L is open). 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the electric accessory 640a has been moved to the projecting position. As shown in FIG. 140(a), when both the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are arranged at the projecting positions, the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb intersect each other. In the vicinity of the intermediate position, the inclination formed by one of the two blocks each other (blocks each other). In other words, the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are inclined downward from both left and right sides toward the crossing position. As a result, the game ball that reaches the specific area is blocked by the upper half (right half) of the electric accessory 640La and the upper half (left half) of the movable member 650Rb, and is also blocked by the left second ball entrance 640L. Since the ball cannot be entered into the right specific winning hole 650Ra, the game ball continues to remain in the specific area until at least one of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb moves to the retracted position (buried position). . While in this state (a state in which both the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are arranged at the projecting positions), the game ball that reaches the specific area can enter any ball entrance. This state is disadvantageous to the player compared to the state where only one of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb is arranged at the projecting position. In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the state in which both the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are arranged at the projecting position state) is referred to as a "protruding overlap state".

When game balls are continuously shot toward a specific area in a projecting overlapping state, a plurality of game balls are accumulated in the area (upper area) formed by the upper half of the electric accessory 640La and the upper half of the movable member 650Rb ( stopped). In a state in which a plurality of game balls are stored (suspended) in the upper region, at least one of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb is moved to the retracted position (buried position), thereby storing (suspending). A game ball flows down toward one of the ball entrances. Below, the flow path of the game ball accumulated (suspended) in the upper area will be described for each type of member (electric accessory 640La, movable member 650) that has moved to the retracted position (recessed position) earlier in the overlapping projecting state. do.

FIG. 140(b) shows a case where the movable member 650Rb is moved to the retracted position (recessed position) after the jackpot round ends before the open period associated with the normal symbol win after the projecting overlapping state. Fig. 3 shows. The case where the jackpot round ends first is, for example, just before 30 seconds have passed since the jackpot round started (for example, when 29 seconds have passed), the normal symbol wins and the electric accessory 640La. is moved to the projecting position, or just before hitting the normal symbol, the 10th game ball rolls downstream from the intermediate position of the movable member 650Rb, and immediately after hitting the normal symbol, 10 This is the case, for example, when the second game ball enters the right specific winning hole 650Ra.

In the projecting overlapping state, when the movable member 650Rb moves to the retracted position (recessed position) first, the game ball that has been stored (stayed) in the upper area moves to the left second ball due to the slope formed by the electric accessory 640La. It is guided to the mouth 640L. As a result, a plurality of game balls collectively enter the second left ball entrance 640L. In addition, since the number of prize balls given when a ball enters the second left ball entrance 640L is set to one, even if the number of game balls entered is returned as prize balls. However, the number of balls in possession will not increase. That is, the degree of advantage is less than when a game ball is entered into the right specific winning hole 650Ra (when 10 prize balls are provided for one entered ball). In particular, the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruded position immediately before 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round, and the movable member 650Rb is moved to the retracted position before the electric accessory 640La is moved to the retracted position. In this case, only the number of balls less than the specified number (10) in the relevant round can be entered into the right specific prize winning opening 650Ra, so the electric accessory 640La is not moved to the projecting position. It is more disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained.

In FIG. 140(c), after the projecting overlapping state, the open period associated with winning the normal symbol ends before the round of the big win ends, and the electric accessory 640La is in the recessed position (buried position). It is the figure which showed the case where it moved to. In addition, when the open period accompanying the winning of the normal symbol ends first, it is before 28 seconds have passed since the round of the big win started, and the specified number ( 10) game balls have not entered the ball, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, the game ball stored (stayed) in the upper area is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the slope formed by the movable member 650Rb. For this reason, since a plurality of game balls enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra in succession, especially the number of game balls that have already entered the right specific winning hole 650Ra in the round and the upper part When the total number of game balls stored in the area exceeds the specified number, the electric accessory 640La moves to the immersed position so that the specified number or more of game balls can enter. That is, it is possible to pay out prize balls for a predetermined number or more of entering balls in one round, so that more prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big win is larger than usual, which is advantageous for the player.

Here, in the twelfth embodiment, when a normal symbol is won during a big win, an open pattern of "2 seconds x 1 time" is set for the electric accessory 640La. Since the shortest shooting interval of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, three game balls can reach the front and rear upper regions during the two seconds in which the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the projecting position. Therefore, when 8 or 9 game balls enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra and the electric accessory 640La is placed at the protruding position, there is a high probability that 10 balls, which is the prescribed number of balls entered in each round, is placed. , can be entered into the right specific winning hole 640La. In the following description, for the sake of simplification, entering the number of game balls exceeding 10, which is the prescribed number of entering balls in each round, into the right specific winning hole 640La is referred to as "over winning". In the twelfth embodiment, an effect (right-handed navigation effect, (see FIG. 141(a)) can be executed. If the game ball is passed through the through gate 67 according to this right-handed navigation effect, and the normal symbol hits as intended, it will be in a state where over winning is likely to occur (see FIG. 140 (c)), so the game for the jackpot game. It is possible to further improve the interest of the person. In addition, when the player hits to the right according to the right-handed navigation effect and passes the game ball through the through gate 67, when the normal pattern hits, the normal pattern hits are started (Electric Accessory 640La is moved to the projecting position), an effect (storage effect, see FIG. 141(b)) is executed to prompt the game balls to be stored in the upper area. With this accumulation effect, the player can more easily aim for over-winning.

Although illustration is omitted, when the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are moved to the retracted position (recessed position) with almost no time difference, the game balls stored (suspended) in the upper region are moved to the left. The ball cannot enter either the second ball entry hole 640L or the right specific winning hole 650Ra, and flows down to the out hole 66 provided below the game board 13. - 特許庁Therefore, when the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb move to the immersed position without a time difference (for example, within 0.5 seconds), the prize ball cannot be obtained and is held. Since the number of balls does not increase, it is the most disadvantageous for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141(a), details of the above-described right-hand navigation effect will be described. FIG. 141(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the right-hand navigation effect is generated. As shown in FIG. 141(a), during the jackpot interval period, a horizontally elongated approximately rectangular display area HR21 is formed below the display area HR8 in the main display area Dm, and a vertically elongated approximately rectangular shape is formed below the display area HR9. A rectangular display area HR22 is formed. As shown in FIG. 141(a), inside the display area HR21, the characters "Right hit and pass GO!!" are displayed. In the display area HR22, an image simulating the through gate 67 and an image simulating an arrow passing through the image simulating the through gate 67 are displayed. The text "Pass !!" is displayed inside. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that there is some advantage in hitting the game ball rightward so that the game ball passes through the through gate 67 .

In this embodiment, the right-handed navigation effect is executed during the first half of the two seconds set as the interval period. During this 1 second, when the right-handed game ball passes through the through gate 67, 8 to 9 game balls enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra, and the normal pattern. can increase the possibility that time will pass. In other words, if the normal symbol lottery wins, there is a high possibility that the electric accessory 640La will be arranged at the projecting position in a state in which 8 to 9 game balls enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra. It is configured to be As described above, when the electric accessory 640La moves to the protruding position with 8 to 9 game balls entering the right specific winning hole 650Ra, both the movable member 650Rb and the electric accessory 640La move to the protruding position. It will be in a projecting overlapping state arranged in If game balls are continuously shot during this projecting overlapping state, about three game balls can be stored (stayed) in the upper area. When the open period (2 seconds) passes in this state and the electric accessory 640La moves to the immersed position, the stored game balls are collectively guided to the right specific winning port 650Ra, so over-winning can occur. become more sexual. Therefore, when an over-winning occurs as intended, the interest of the player can be further improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the probability of winning a normal symbol is 1/10. That is, when right-hand hitting is performed according to the right-hand navigation effect, 8 to 9 game balls enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra at a rate of once in 10 times on average, resulting in a projecting overlapping state. can do. During the projecting overlapping state, as described above, around 3 game balls can be stored in the upper region, so when the electric accessory 640La moves to the retracted position, 3 game balls on average can be stored once. Then, the ball enters the right specific winning hole 650Ra. When 8 game balls have already entered the right specific winning hole 650Ra, and 3 additional game balls enter the right specific winning hole, 1 extra game ball is added to the right specific winning hole. Since the ball will enter 650Ra, the number of prize balls to be paid out will be 10 more than the normal number (the number of prize balls to be paid out for the specified number of entering balls). In addition, when 9 game balls have already entered the right specific winning hole 650Ra, and 3 additional game balls enter, 2 more than the specified number (10) of game balls are specified on the right side. Since the ball enters the winning hole 650Ra, the number of awarded balls to be paid out is 20 more than the normal number (the number of awarded balls to be paid out for the prescribed number of entered balls). Therefore, with a probability of 1/10, it is possible to win about 10 to 20 more prize balls than usual, so during the jackpot interval period, right-handed navigation effects (see FIG. 141(a)) are followed every time. The expected value of the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the execution of the jackpot game increases when the player hits right and passes through the through gate 67.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make the player positively hit to the right when the right hit navigation effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 141(b), details of the above-described retention effect will be described. FIG. 141(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the accumulation effect is executed. During each round period of the jackpot, the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position with 8 or 9 game balls entered into the right specific winning hole 650Ra, and 0.5 seconds is maintained in this storage effect. It is a production that is executed when the time has passed. This accumulation effect is an effect for urging game balls to be stored in the upper region during the opening period of the electric accessory 640La, and forming a state in which over winning is likely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 141(b), when the accumulation effect is executed, the text "The more balls accumulate at the crossing portion, the better!" is displayed in the display area HR21. In addition, an image simulating the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb in a projecting overlapping state is displayed in the display area HR22, and an arrow pointing to the position where the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb intersect is displayed. is displayed. The text "Aim!!" is displayed inside the image imitating this arrow. These display contents allow the player to actively shoot the game ball to the upper area during the projecting overlapping state. As a result, even a player who has never played a game with the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment can easily generate an over-win. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that, instead of executing the storage effect immediately when the projecting overlapping state occurs, the storage effect is executed after 0.5 seconds have passed. , enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra and the round ends, the purpose is to prevent the execution of the storage effect. When there is a game ball flowing down the movable member 650Rb immediately before entering the projecting overlapping state, the game ball flows down the movable member 650Rb within 0.5 seconds after entering the projecting overlapping state and enters the right specific winning hole. Enter the ball to 650Ra. For this reason, if the round has not ended even after 0.5 seconds have passed since the projecting overlapping state, there is a possibility that the round of the jackpot will end until the opening period associated with the normal pattern has passed. Therefore, by storing game balls in the upper area, it is an advantageous state in which over-winning can be generated with a high probability. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the accumulation effect is executed only when the round has not ended even after 0.5 seconds have passed since the projecting overlapping state. As a result, it is possible to accurately execute the accumulation effect only when an over-winning can be aimed at, so that the interest of the player can be further improved when the accumulation effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the change over time of the effect mode when winning the normal symbol during the round period of the big win in the twelfth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 142, when the jackpot interval period starts, a right-handed navigation effect (see FIG. 141(a)) is executed. This right-hand navigation effect is executed for one second. During this time, the game ball is passed through the through gate 67 by striking to the right, and if the game ball wins in the normal pattern lottery, a state is formed in which over winning is likely to occur. Considering the period from when the right-hand navigation effect is visually recognized until the game ball is shot, and when the shot game ball passes through the through gate 67, the timing of passing through the through gate 67 is the second half of the interval period (1 seconds to 2 seconds). Note that FIG. 142 illustrates a case where the game ball passes through the through gate 67 when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period as a result of hitting to the right during execution of the right hitting navigation effect.

When one second elapses after the execution of the right-handed navigation effect, the right-handed navigation effect ends and is switched to a normal interval effect. Then, when one second elapses, the interval period (two seconds) elapses and the next round is started. When the round starts, the movable member 650Rb is moved to the protruded position, and the right specific winning hole 650Ra becomes ready for ball entry. As described above, the shortest shooting interval of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, so if the player keeps shooting the game ball at the shortest shooting interval, the right specific winning hole 650Ra will receive about 0.6 A game ball enters at intervals of seconds. Therefore, 8 or 9 game balls have already entered the right specific winning hole 650Ra in about 5 seconds after the start of the jackpot round. In the twelfth embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbols during execution of the jackpot game is set to 5.5 seconds. Elapses (if the hit is the normal pattern, the electric accessory 640La is moved to the projecting position). Therefore, if a win is obtained in the normal pattern lottery, the electric accessory 640La is moved to the projecting position in a state in which about eight game balls have already entered the right specific winning hole 650Ra. Note that FIG. 142 illustrates a case where the electric accessory 640La is moved to the projecting position in a state in which eight game balls have entered (winning).

As shown in FIG. 142, when 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the opening period of the electric accessory 640La and the jackpot round period has not ended, the storage effect (see FIG. 141(b)) starts. be done. By shooting game balls during execution of this accumulation effect, it is possible to accumulate (stay) about three game balls in the upper area. The retention effect is terminated at the same time that the electric accessary 640La is released during the period (2 seconds during which it is placed at the projecting position). When the electric accessory 640La is moved to the immersed position (buried position), the game balls stored in the upper area are guided to the right specific winning hole 650Ra at once. Then, the ball enters the right specific winning hole 650Ra in about 0.5 seconds with almost no time difference. As a result, it is possible to enter (win) game balls in excess of the prescribed number of balls (10) entering the right specific winning hole 650Ra in one round of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

<Electrical Configuration of the Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 143 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 143, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14(b)). , in that a waiting period timer 223bb and a winning number counter 223bc are provided.

Whether or not the retention effect standby flag 223ba is a standby period (0.5 seconds) from when the execution condition for the retention effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is met until the actual start of the retention effect. is a flag indicating If this retention effect waiting flag 223ba is ON, it indicates that it is a waiting period until the retention effect is started, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is not a waiting period. As described above, the storage effect is that the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the projecting position during the jackpot round period and when 8 or 9 game balls have already entered the right specific winning hole 650Ra. , the execution condition is established, and the retention effect standby flag 223ba is set to ON (see S5704 in FIG. 149). In this state, when the standby period (0.5 seconds) elapses without the end of the big hit round, the retention effect is started and the retention effect standby flag 223ba is set to OFF (see S5610 in FIG. 147). . Moreover, also when the round of a big hit is complete|finished during a waiting period, this accumulation|storage effect waiting flag 223ba is set to OFF (refer S5604 of FIG. 147).

The waiting period timer 223bb is a timer for measuring the waiting period from when the execution condition for the retention effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is satisfied until the retention effect is actually started. A timer value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set to the standby period timer 223bb at the start of the standby period (see S5705 in FIG. 149). During the waiting period, the waiting period timer 223bb is updated each time the process during the jackpot is executed (see S5607 in FIG. 147), and when the timer value is updated to 0, the execution of the storage effect is started (see FIG. 147 S5609). Also, the waiting period timer 223bb is reset to 0 when the round ends before the waiting period elapses (see S5604 in FIG. 147).

The winning number counter 223bc is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the right specific winning opening 650Ra in each round of the jackpot. The initial value of the winning number counter 223bc is set to 0, and when the main controller 110 detects winning (entering a ball) into the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the winning is notified by the large open opening winning command. The value is updated by adding 1 each time it is entered (see S4972 in FIG. 150). In addition, the value of the winning number counter 223bc is reset to 0 each time each round of big winning ends (see S5603 in FIG. 147). When the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position due to the winning of the normal symbol during the round period of the jackpot, the counter value of the winning number counter 223bc is referred to, and if the value is 8 or 9 (that is, If the number of winnings to the right specific winning opening 650Ra is 8 or 9 in the round, a waiting period is set (see S5704 in FIG. 149).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 144, control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing normal design variation processing 12 (S151) executed instead of normal design variation processing (see FIG. 26) in the sixth embodiment (and first embodiment). Among the normal symbol variation processing 12 (S151) in the twelfth embodiment, in each processing of S501 to S515, S517 to S520, and S523, the normal symbol variation processing in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) ( 26) are executed.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 144) in the twelfth embodiment, in the process of S514, the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (the probability variation flag 203e is off, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f 0) (S514: No), the normal symbol variation time is set to 5.5 seconds (S541), and this process is terminated. During this 5.5 seconds, as described above, when the game ball is passed through the through gate 67 by hitting to the right according to the right hitting navigation effect (see FIG. 141(a)) executed during the jackpot interval period, the variation It is a variable period in which the possibility that 8 or 9 game balls have entered the right specific winning hole 640Ra at the end timing is high.

Further, in the normal symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 144) in the twelfth embodiment, in the process of S520, the normal symbol is not in time saving (the probability variation flag 203e is off and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 0 (S520: No), as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640La, set the opening time and number of opening pattern of "2 seconds × 1 time" (S542), the process proceeds to S523 Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S520, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving (probability variation flag 203e is on, or the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more) (S520: Yes), the electric As the release pattern of the accessory 640a, the release pattern of the release time and number of times of "2 seconds x 2 times" is set (S543), and the process proceeds to S523.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 144) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S523 is completed, the start of the opening period of the electric accessory 640La (the state in which it is arranged at the projecting position) is announced by voice. A normal map open command for notification to the lamp control device 113 is set (S544), and this process is terminated. The normal figure open command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 Main processing (see FIG. 30) External output processing (S901) In the voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the general pattern open command, it is in a state where 8 or 9 game balls have entered the right specific winning opening 650Ra in the jackpot (that is, the electric role at the timing when aiming for over winning (Whether or not the object 640La has been moved to the projecting position) is determined, and if it is time to aim for over-winning, a waiting period for the accumulation effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is set.

<Regarding control processing of the sound lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 151. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 145, main processing 12 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. This main process 12 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 33) in the sixth embodiment (and first embodiment).

Of the main processing 12 (see FIG. 145) in the twelfth embodiment, the processing of S4001 to S4011 and S4014 to S4019 respectively correspond to the main processing (see FIG. 33) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as those of S4001 to S4011 and S4014 to S4019 are executed. In addition, in the main processing 12 (see FIG. 145) in the twelfth embodiment, when the processing of S4011 is completed, the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is performed instead of the effect update process. Process 12 is executed (S4081), then command determination process 12 is executed (S4082) in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the process proceeds to S4014. and migrate. Details of these effect update process 12 (S4081) and command determination process 12 (S4082) will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 151, respectively.

First, with reference to FIG. 146, details of the effect update process 12 (S4081) described above will be described. This effect update process 12 (S4081) is a process that is executed instead of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for updating. Of the effect update process 12 (S4081) in the twelfth embodiment, in each process of S4301 to S4311, S4301 to S4311 of the effect update process (see FIG. 36) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) The same processing as each processing is executed.

In addition, in the effect update process 12 (see FIG. 146) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4301 that the variable display is not being executed (S4301: No), the effect mode during the big win is updated. (S4351) and ends this process. The details of this jackpot middle process (S4351) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the process during jackpot (S4351). In the process during the jackpot (S4351), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is being executed (S5601). finish. On the other hand, in the process of S5601, if it is determined that the jackpot game is being executed (S5601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to end the round of the jackpot (S5602), and the end timing of the round If so (S5602: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 223bc is reset to 0 (S5603). Next, while setting the retention effect waiting flag 223ba to OFF, the timer value of the waiting period timer 223bb is reset to 0 (S5604), and it is determined whether or not the finished round is the final round (S5605).

In the processing of S5605, if it is determined that the finished round is not the final round (S5603: No), it means that it is time to start a new interval period, so a right-handed navigation effect (see FIG. 141(a)) is performed. ) is set (S5606), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5605, if it is determined that the end timing of the final round has come (S5603: Yes), the next round does not exist, and even if the game ball is passed through the through gate 67 by striking to the right, the game ball wins over. cannot be generated, the process of S5606 is skipped and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5602, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the round period in the jackpot (S5602: No), then whether the retention effect standby flag 223ba is ON (that is, the start of execution of the retention effect (S5607). In the processing of S5607, when it is determined that the retention effect standby flag 223ba is off (S5607), it means that it is not the standby period, and since there is no possibility of executing the retention effect, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S5607, if it is determined that the retention effect standby flag 223ba is ON (S5607: Yes), first, the value of the standby period timer 223bb is updated by subtracting 1 (S5608), then subtracted It is determined whether or not the subsequent timer value has reached 0 (S5609).

In the process of S5609, if it is determined that the timer value after the subtraction has become 0 (S5609: Yes), it means that the waiting period has elapsed, so the start of the retention effect is set (S5610), and the retention standby flag is set. 223ba is set to OFF (S5611), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5609, if it is determined that the timer value of the waiting period timer 223bb after subtraction is not 0 (S5609: No), it means that it is not the start timing of the retention effect, so S5610, S5611. skip each processing of , and terminate this processing as it is.

By executing this process during the jackpot (see FIG. 147), it is possible to accurately determine the elapse of the standby period and set the execution of the accumulation effect. By executing the standby effect, it is possible to easily cause over-winning, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, command determination processing 12 (S4082) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 12 (S4082) is executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for performing Of the command determination processing 12 (S4082) in the twelfth embodiment, S4901 to S4910 and S4918 each correspond to S4901 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as those of S4910 and S4918 are executed.

Further, in the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 148) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4909 that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include the winning information command (S4909 : No), then, it is determined whether or not the received command includes a general pattern open command (S4961). In the process of S4961, if it is determined that the general pattern open command is included (S4961: Yes), it means that the open period based on the hit of the normal symbol is started, so the open period Normal figure open command processing for executing control according to the start timing is executed (S4962), and this processing ends. The details of this general pattern open command process (S4962) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 148) in the twelfth embodiment, in the process of S4961, it was determined that the normal pattern open command was not included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 If so (S4961: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include hit-related commands (S4963). In the process of S4963, if it is determined that the hit-related command is included in the unprocessed commands (S4963: Yes), hit-related command processing 12 for performing control according to the type of the hit-related command is executed (S4964), and the process ends. The details of the hit-related command process 12 (S4964) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the command determination process 12 (see FIG. 148) in the twelfth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4963 that the hit-related command has not been received (S4963: No), then the main controller It is determined whether or not the status command is included in the unprocessed commands received from 110 (S4965). This state command is a command indicating that the game state has been changed. Specifically, when the probability variable jackpot ends and the probability variable gaming state is set, a state command indicating the transition to the probability variable gaming state is output, and when the normal jackpot ends and the time saving gaming state is set, time saving A state command indicating the shift to the game state is output, and when the lottery of 100 times of special symbols is completed in the time-saving game state and the game state shifts to the normal game state, the state command indicating the shift to the normal game state is output.

In the processing of S4965, if it is determined that the state command is included in the unprocessed commands (S4965: Yes), state command processing for performing control according to the game state notified by the state command is performed. Execute (S4966) and terminate this process. Details of this state command processing (S4966) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4965 that the status command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S4965: No), the process proceeds to S4918.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the details of the general pattern open command process (S4962) described above will be described. This normal figure opening command process (S4962) is a process for performing control according to the start timing of an opening period as above-mentioned. In this general pattern open command process (S4962), first, it is determined whether or not it is in the jackpot (S5701), and if it is determined that it is in the jackpot (S5701: Yes), then in the round period of the jackpot It is determined whether or not there is (S5702). In the process of S5702, if it is determined that the round period is in progress (S5702: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 223bc is either 8 or 9 (S5703). If the value is 8 or 9 (S5703: Yes), the standby period of the retention effect is set by setting the retention effect standby flag 223ba to ON (S5704). Then, a timer value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the standby period timer 223bb (S5705), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5701, if it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed (S5701: No), or if it is determined that it is not in the round period in the processing of S5702 (S5702: No), winning in the processing of S5703 When it is determined that the value of the number counter 223bc is neither 8 nor 9 (S5703: No), this processing is terminated without setting the waiting period for the retention effect.

By executing this general pattern open command processing (see FIG. 149), when the electric accessory 640La is moved to the protruding position due to the normal pattern hit at the timing at which over winning can be aimed, execution of the storage effect is set. can do. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that there is a chance of over-winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, details of the above-described win-related command process 12 (S4922) will be described. This win-related command process 12 (S4964) is a process for performing control according to the type of win-related command received from main controller 110, as described above. Of this win-related command process 12 (S4964), each process of S4911 to S4917 is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). , the detailed description of which is omitted here.

In the hit-related command process (see FIG. 150) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4913 that the round number command is not included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 (S4913 : No), and then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a large opening prize winning command (S4971). Incidentally, as described above, the large opening winning prize command is output from the main controller 110 each time a ball (winning) into the right specific winning prize opening 650Ra is detected during execution of the jackpot game in the twelfth embodiment. command.

In the processing of S4971, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands include a large open mouth winning command (S4971: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 223bc is incremented by 1 (S4972). End the process. On the other hand, in the processing of S4971, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands do not include the large opening prize winning command (S4971: No), the processing proceeds to S4916. By executing the hit-related command process 12 (see FIG. 150), each time a game ball wins in the right specific winning hole 650Ra, the sound lamp control device 113 side can also accurately grasp the winning number.

Next, referring to FIG. 151, the state command processing (S4966) described above will be described. This state command process (S4966) is, as described above, a process for performing control according to the game state notified by the state command. In this state command processing (S4966), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state notified by the state command is the time-saving gaming state (S5801), and it is determined that the command indicates transition to the time-saving gaming state. If so (S5801: Yes), the process proceeds to S5803. On the other hand, in the processing of S5801, if it is determined that it is not a command indicating the transition to the time-saving gaming state (S5801: No), then it is determined whether it is a command indicating the transition to the probability variation gaming state (S5802 ), if it is a command indicating the transition to the probability variation gaming state (S5802: Yes), the process proceeds to S5803. In the processing of S5803 executed when the shift to the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state is notified, the display of the hitting to the right notification image indicating the start of the hitting to the right state is set (S5803), and this processing ends. .

In addition, the reason why the right-handed notification image is displayed in the time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set and the variable probability gaming state is to more efficiently enter the game ball into the second left ball entrance 640L. is. That is, as described above, if the left-hand shot is performed while the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position, the opening period (the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the protruding position) based on the winning of the normal symbol period), it may become difficult for the game ball that reaches the specific area to enter the left second ball entrance 640L by the end of the open period by going down the slope formed by the electric accessory 640La. have a nature. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, by displaying the right hitting notification image, it is configured to encourage the player to play the game by right hitting. . By configuring in this way, the player can be made to hit to the right during the time-saving state of the normal symbols, so that the game ball that reaches the specific area during the open period based on the winning of the normal symbols , can be guided to the left second entrance 640L in a shorter period of time. Therefore, the game in the time-saving state of normal symbols can be performed more efficiently.

On the other hand, in the process of S5802, if it is determined that it is not a command indicating the transition to the variable probability gaming state (S5802: No), then it is determined whether it is a command indicating the transition to the normal gaming state (S5804), when it is determined that the command indicates the transition to the normal game state (S5804: Yes), the display of an image for notifying that the right-handed state has ended is set (S5805), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the processing of S5804, when it is determined that the command is not a command indicating transition to the normal game state, the processing of S5805 is skipped and the processing ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific prize winning opening 650Ra are arranged to face each other, and when a normal symbol wins, the left second By projecting the electric accessory 640La provided between the second ball entrance 640L and the right specific prize winning opening 650Ra, a downward slope is formed toward the left second ball entrance 640L. and Then, in the time-saving game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, and the variable probability game state, in order to match the direction of the inclination formed by the electric accessory 640La and the flowing direction of the game ball, for the player The configuration is such that a right-handed shot is notified (a right-handed notification image is displayed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to minimize the period required for the game ball that has reached the electric accessory 640La to flow down the slope formed by the electric accessory 640La. It is possible to enter the ball into the left second ball entrance 640L well. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently advance the game in the time saving game state and the variable probability game state.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, when a normal symbol wins at a specific timing during execution of a jackpot game, a special state is formed in which more prize balls than usual can be obtained in the jackpot game. do. More specifically, in each round of the jackpot, the state in which 8 or 9 game balls enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra (that is, the remaining entering balls for 10, which is the upper limit of the winning number of each round When the number of wins is 2 or less, the normal symbol wins, and when the electric accessory 640La moves to the projecting position, the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are opened during the opening period (2 seconds) based on the win of the normal symbol. and both are projected, and instead of guiding the game ball to neither the right specific winning opening 650Ra nor the left second ball entrance 640L, the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb On the other hand, it becomes possible to store (accumulate) game balls. When the electric accessory 640La is closed in this state (that is, when the opening period based on the win of the normal symbol has elapsed), the game balls that have been stored (accumulated) are guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra by the movable member 650Rb. By doing so, it is possible to generate an over-winning. As a result, the player's interest in the game during execution of the jackpot game can be further improved. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the timing of launching to the through gate 67, which is likely to pass the normal symbol fluctuation period with eight or nine game balls winning in the right specific winning opening 650Ra, is set to the right. The configuration is such that the player is notified by the hitting navigation effect (see FIG. 141(a)). As a result, the game ball can be shot actively aiming at the through gate 67 each time the right-handed navigation effect is executed for the player, thereby preventing (suppressing) the jackpot game from becoming monotonous. )can do.

In the twelfth embodiment, the game method (shooting method) is not specified except when the right-hand navigation effect or the storage effect is displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, but it is limited to this. not a thing For example, except when the right-handed navigation effect is being executed, it may be configured to notify the player to hit left-handed. With this configuration, the slope formed by the movable member 650Rb can be matched with the flowing direction of the game ball that has entered the specific area. period can be further shortened. Therefore, the jackpot game can be progressed more speedily. In addition, since the through gate 67 is provided only in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, it is possible to notify the player to hit left except when the right-handed navigation effect is being executed. , It is possible to prevent frequent wins of normal symbols during a big win. As described above, when the normal symbol hits during the round period of the jackpot, it becomes a projecting overlapping state (see FIG. 140 (a)), and the game ball is placed in the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. It becomes impossible to enter the ball. Therefore, except for the state in which 8 or 9 game balls have already entered the right specific winning opening 650Ra, the game balls cannot enter the right specific winning opening 650Ra, and over winning is not possible. Since it becomes difficult to aim, the situation is unfavorable for the player. On the other hand, if left-handed hitting is notified when the right-handed navigation effect is not executed, it will be a waste of time (that is, at a timing when it is difficult to aim for over-winning). , it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the right specific winning hole 650Ra.

In the twelfth embodiment, the second left ball entrance 640L and the right specific prize winning opening 650Ra are arranged to face each other, and the electric accessory 640La provided between them and the movable member 650Rb are movable. Although the ball entrance (the degree of advantage for the player) that allows a ball to be entered is variable according to the combination of positions, it is not limited to this. For example, the second ball entrance and the specific winning hole may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and the ball entrance into which the ball is easy to enter may be changed depending on the combination of the open/closed states of the ball entrance. More specifically, for example, a second ball entrance is provided upstream of one flow path, and a specific prize winning opening is provided downstream, and in a state where the second ball entrance is open, the specific winning opening Regardless of whether or not is open, it may be configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning hole. Conversely, in a state where the specific winning hole is arranged on the upstream side and the second ball entry hole is arranged on the downstream side, and the specific winning hole is open, regardless of whether the second ball entry hole is open or not. , may be configured to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance. In addition, when the ball entrances are arranged vertically, the two ball entrances may be configured such that it is more advantageous for the player not to enter the game ball than to enter the game ball. Specifically, for example, it is composed of a ball entrance with a small number of prize balls (1 or 0) given to the game ball entering, and downstream of each ball entrance, a game ball It is also possible to dispose a general winning hole with a large number of winning balls (for example, 10) to be awarded for each winning ball. By configuring in this way, it is most difficult to win a prize in the general winning opening when both ball entrances are open. That is, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to reach the general prize winning opening than when only one ball entrance is open or when both of the ball entrances are closed. Therefore, the state in which both the ball entrances are open can be the most disadvantageous state for the player. Playability can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modified Example of the Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific prize winning opening 650Ra are arranged to face each other, and the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are provided between them. It was configured. When the normal pattern is won, the electric accessory 640La is arranged at the protruding position to form a downward slope toward the left second ball entrance 640L. By arranging 650Rb at the protruding position, it is configured to form an inclination downward toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra. In addition, by winning the normal symbol during the round period of the jackpot, both the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are arranged in the protruding position, and the upper area above the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb. A projecting overlapping state is formed in which game balls can be stored (stationed). When 8 or 9 game balls have already entered the right specific winning hole 650Ra, it becomes a projecting overlapping state, and by storing a plurality of game balls in the upper area, the right winning hole 640La is opened when the opening period of the electric accessory 640La elapses. It is configured such that game balls exceeding a prescribed number (10) can be awarded to the specific winning opening 650Ra. As a result, the player can play the game while paying attention to the timing of winning the normal symbol.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment, the opening and closing plate 6400La that can open and close the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra that are arranged to face each other, and an opening/closing plate 6500Rb. The opening and closing plate 6400La and the opening and closing plate 6500Rb have a structure that does not interfere with each other, and even if the winning of the normal pattern and the round period of the big winning overlap, one opening and closing plate will move to the other ball entrance. It is configured to be openable without hindering the entry of the ball. By configuring in this way, when a normal symbol is won during execution of a jackpot game (that is, the opening condition of the left second ball entrance 640L and the opening condition of the right specific winning opening 650Ra overlap and are established. ), the game ball can be allowed to enter both the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently proceed with the game during execution of the big winning game regardless of the frequency of winning the normal symbols.

The board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board 13 in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 152, in this modification, an inclined member 6500b having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front is arranged between the second left ball entrance 640L and the right specific prize winning opening 650Ra. As shown in FIG. 152, the left and right side surfaces of the slant member 6500b are slanted in the lower left direction and the lower right direction. Due to the inclination, it is guided to the lower left direction when viewed from the front or the lower right direction when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152, the second left ball entrance 640L in this modified example is provided with an opening/closing plate 6400La capable of opening and closing the second left ball entrance 640L. The opening/closing plate 6400La is normally erected in the vertical direction so as to prevent a game ball from entering from the right direction in front view. On the other hand, when a normal pattern is won, the opening/closing plate 6500La tilts rightward toward the tilting member 6500b, forming a downward tilt toward the left second entrance 640L. Thereby, a state is formed in which the game ball that has reached the specific area can be guided to the second left ball entrance 640L.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152, an opening/closing plate 6500Rb capable of opening and closing the right specific winning opening 640Ra is provided in association with the right specific winning opening 650Ra in this modified example. The opening/closing plate 6400Rb is normally erected in the vertical direction so as to prevent a game ball from entering from the left side in front view. On the other hand, when the big winning round is started, the opening/closing plate 6500Rb tilts leftward toward the tilting member 6500b, forming a downward tilt toward the right specific winning hole 650Ra. Thereby, a state is formed in which the game ball that has reached the specific area can be guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra.

Next, referring to FIG. 153, the downward direction of the game ball when the opening/closing plates 6500La and 6500Rb are opened will be described. First, referring to FIG. 153(a), the downward flow direction of the game ball when the opening/closing plate 6500Rb is opened will be described. As shown in FIG. 153(a), when the opening/closing plate 6500Rb is opened, the opening/closing plate 6500Rb leans against the right side surface of the inclined member 6500b. That is, as shown in FIG. 153(a), the inclined member 6500b and the opening/closing plate 6500Rb form a downward inclination toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra. The game ball reaching the right side of the inclined member 6500b in this state is guided to the right specific winning opening 650Ra. On the other hand, the game ball that reaches the left side of the inclined member 6500b flows down to the out port 66 through the channel between the opening/closing plate 6500La and the inclined member 6500b.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153(b), the downward direction of the game ball when the opening/closing plate 6500La is opened will be described. As shown in FIG. 153(b), when the opening/closing plate 6500La is opened, the opening/closing plate 6500La leans against the left side surface of the inclined member 6500b. That is, as shown in FIG. 153(b), the inclined member 6500b and the opening/closing plate 6500La form a downward inclination toward the second left ball entrance 640L. A game ball reaching the left side of the inclined member 6500b in this state is guided to the left second ball entrance 640L. On the other hand, the game ball that reaches the right side of the inclined member 6500b flows down to the out port 66 through the channel between the opening/closing plate 6500Rb and the inclined member 6500b.

Thus, in this modification, if the opening/closing plate 6500La is open, regardless of whether or not the opening/closing plate 6500Rb is open, the game ball is likely to enter the second left ball entrance 640L. It is configured to form Similarly, if the opening/closing plate 6500Rb is open, regardless of whether or not the opening/closing plate 6500La is open, a state is formed in which game balls can easily enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra. With this configuration, even in a situation where the conditions for opening the second left ball entrance 640L and the conditions for opening the right specific winning opening 650Ra may overlap, such as during the execution of a jackpot game, the opening is always possible. It is possible to form a state in which a game ball can easily enter the ball entrance. That is, it is possible to temporarily create a state in which a game ball cannot enter either the left second ball entrance 640L or the right specific winning opening 650Ra, like the projecting overlapping state of the twelfth embodiment described above. Therefore, the jackpot game can be smoothly progressed. Therefore, the player can play the game without feeling the stress of not being able to enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra during the big win game, so that the player can enjoy the big win game.

<Second Modification of Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described twelfth embodiment, the second left ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra are arranged to face each other, and the electric accessory 640La provided between them is arranged at the projecting position. , a downward slope is formed toward the second left ball entrance 640L, and a game ball is easily entered into the second left ball entrance 640L. In addition, the movable member 650Rb provided between the left second ball entrance 640L and the right specific winning opening 650Ra is arranged at a projecting position, thereby forming an inclination downward toward the right specific winning opening 650Ra. Then, the configuration is such that the game ball can easily enter the right specific winning hole 650Ra. In addition, while both the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Rb are in the protruding overlapping state in which they are arranged in the protruding positions, a state is temporarily formed in which a ball cannot be entered into any of the ball entrances. was. That is, when the projecting overlapping state occurs, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter various ball entrances, which is disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, in the second modification of the twelfth embodiment, the central second ball entrance 640C is located at the crossing position where the electric accessory 640Ca provided instead of the electric accessory 640La and the movable member 650Ra intersect. is provided, and it is easier for the game ball to enter the central second ball entrance 640C when it is in the projecting overlapping state than when only the electric accessory 640Ca is arranged at the projecting position. configured as

The flowing direction of game balls around the specific area (the area below the first ball entrance 64) of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154(a) is a view showing the flowing direction of the game ball when the electric accessory 640Ca is arranged at the projecting position and the movable member 650Ra is arranged at the retracted position. It should be noted that this state is formed mainly when the winning pattern is normal in a state other than the jackpot. That is, it is a state that is likely to be formed in a time-saving game state or a probability variation game state with a high probability of winning a normal symbol (1/1.2).

When only the electric accessory 640Ca is arranged at the protruding position, as shown in FIG. 154(a), the game ball moves in the lower left direction due to the downward tilt formed by the electric accessory 640Ca. Induced. As shown in FIG. 154(a), in the second modification, the central second ball entrance 640C is provided at a substantially intermediate position of the electric accessory 640Ca. Some of the game balls that flowed down along enter the second central ball entrance 640C, and some pass through the second central ball entrance 640C. In the second modification, since no ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the electric accessory 640Ca, the game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 640Ca falls downward and flows down to the out port 66. Therefore, since only a part of the game balls that have reached the specific area are guided to the central second ball entrance 640C, even if the game state is set in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, the central second ball entrance 640C is reached. Lottery based on incoming balls is relatively difficult to execute.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 154(b), in the projecting overlapping state, the game ball flowing down along the slope formed by the electric accessory 640Ca directly enters the second central ball entrance 640C. A game ball that passes through the position of the second ball entrance 640C and rolls up to the slope of the movable member 650Ra is also finally guided to the central second ball entrance 640C. More specifically, the game ball rolling on the slope of the movable member 650Rb side climbs the slope formed by the movable member 650Rb until the momentum becomes zero. Then, when the momentum becomes 0, it rolls in the lower right direction along the slope formed by the movable member 650Ra. As a result, the game ball is again guided to the intersection position where the central second ball entrance 640C is provided. Even if it passes through the central second ball entrance 640C again and progresses to the slope formed by the electric accessory 640Ca, it climbs on the electric accessory 640Ca in the same way as when climbing the movable member 650Rb, and the momentum is 0. , and is guided downward to the left on the electric accessory 640Ca to the central second entrance 640Ca. Therefore, the game ball reaching the specific area while in the projecting overlapping state is always guided to the central second ball entrance 640C unless the projecting overlapping state is canceled on the way. Therefore, in the second modification, it is easier for the ball to enter the central second ball entrance 640C in the projecting overlapping state than in the state where only the electric accessory 640Ca is arranged at the projecting position. From the viewpoint of the rate of ball entry into the second ball entrance 640C, the projecting overlap state is the most advantageous state.

In particular, the lottery for the second special symbol (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640C) is better than the lottery for the first special symbol (lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64). If the configuration is such that it is easy to become advantageous (the kind of advantageous jackpot is easily determined when the jackpot is won), it is possible to make the player want to accumulate more reserved balls of the second special symbol during the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, the player can actively pass through the through gate 67 and play the game while anticipating a projecting overlapping state. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from turning into a work for simply obtaining prize balls, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

In addition, in the second modified example, the time-saving game state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, and the probability variable game state continues until the next big hit. is not limited to For example, the time-saving gaming state and the variable probability gaming state may be limited only until the special symbol lottery is executed four times. Then, the lottery for the second special symbol may be preferentially executed rather than the lottery for the first special symbol. By constructing in this way, when only the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists at the end of the jackpot game, the lottery of the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage draws the time-saving game state or the variable probability game state. The lottery number of times will be subtracted. Therefore, for a player who wants to draw lots of advantageous second special symbols for all the lotteries executed while the time-saving game state or the variable-probability game state is set, more 2nd prizes are generated during the execution of the jackpot game. It can make you think that you want to acquire a reserved ball with a special pattern. Therefore, during the execution of the big win game, it is possible to create a situation in which it is easy for the ball to enter the central second ball entrance 640C in the projecting overlapping state more times, so that the normal symbol during the execution of the big win game. A game can be played by paying attention to the result of the lottery. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the second modified example of the twelfth embodiment, the central second ball entrance 640C is provided at the intersection position between the electric accessory 640Ca and the movable member 650Rb, but it is not limited to this. For example, the second ball entry hole and the specific winning hole may be exchanged. By constructing in this way, when the winning of the normal pattern is achieved during execution of the jackpot game, the game ball is more likely to enter the specific winning opening at the crossing position, so that the winning of the normal pattern is achieved during the jackpot. The game can be played with a strong expectation that it will become

In each of the above-described embodiments, a continuous transformation effect is set for one variable display. A continuous transformation performance may be executed over time. That is, if there are a plurality of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, whether or not to set the continuous transformation effect based on the look-ahead result of each reserved ball (whether or not each reserved ball is correct, the type of fluctuation, etc.), and When it is determined to set the continuous transformation effect, it may be determined whether the continuous transformation effect is to be continued until the variable display corresponding to which ball is held. Moreover, it is also possible to calculate the effect time of the continuous transformation effect from the result of the read-ahead of each reserved ball, and set the upper limit number of transformations according to the effect time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the production time of the continuous transformation production, so that the upper limit number of times of the success notification mode can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to give the player more opportunities to display the success notification mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved when the continuous transformation effect is executed. In addition, by configuring the continuous transformation effect to continue over a plurality of variable displays, it is configured to make it more difficult for the player to predict how long the success of the transformation (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed) will continue. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected presentation.

Also, if you want to continue the continuous transformation effect over the variable time of multiple variable displays, the progress of the continuous transformation effect (the number of times the success notification mode is displayed, the number of remaining changes, the change time of the pending ball, etc.) Accordingly, it is also possible to increase or decrease the number of fluctuations until the end of the continuous transformation effect, the upper limit number of success notification modes, or the like. Regarding this, at the start of the fluctuation, a continuous transformation effect is executed over the display period of the fluctuation display three times including the fluctuation (the fluctuation + two balls held), and the big hit is announced at the third fluctuation display. A more specific description will be given by taking as an example a case where it is determined. For example, when the player presses the frame button 22 almost without interval from the start of the valid operation period, most of the valid operation period is shortened, and the upper limit number of success notification mode is displayed during the second variable display. If it ends, the continuous transformation effect may be completed during the second variable display. In addition, in the third variable display, which is supposed to continue the continuous transformation effect, a completely different effect from the continuous transformation effect may be executed. Further, when the last operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect ends immediately after the start of the third variable display, for example, by increasing the upper limit number of times of transformation, the effect time of the third variable display is left. It is good also as a structure which prevents putting away. In this way, by flexibly changing the presentation mode according to the progress of the continuous transformation presentation, it is possible to further diversify the presentation mode.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is set as the effect during execution of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the continuous transformation effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot (for example, 1st to 5th rounds). In this case, for example, the continuous transformation effect is a big hit notified by the stop display of the same normal pattern (main pattern imitating an even number) (that is, whether it is a big win A or a big win B). difficult to identify), it may be configured to be executed. Then, as the number of transformations in the continuous transformation production (number of times of display of the success notification mode) increases, for example, the degree of expectation that the probability change state will be after the end of the big win (the current big win is the big win A) may be higher. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the big win from turning into work for simply getting a promotion, and make the game more enjoyable during the big win.

In this case, instead of pressing the frame button 22, a predetermined number of game balls may be entered into the specific winning hole 65a as the condition for terminating each operation valid period. With this configuration, it is possible to participate in the continuous transformation performance simply by shooting game balls into the specific winning hole 65a in order to obtain prize balls during the big win. Therefore, convenience for the player can be enhanced.

In each of the above embodiments, the explanation was given on the premise of a continuous transformation effect in which the effect of whether or not the character 811 transforms is executed one or more times. is not limited to the application of For example, one of two types of results (success or failure, victory or defeat, determination or loss) may be applied to an effect (single effect) in which one is notified. That is, depending on whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation effective period set in the one-shot effect, the subsequent display mode, effect period selection method, etc. may be varied. Further, it is not always necessary to vary the display mode, the selection method of the presentation period, etc., depending on whether or not the depression is detected. Exactly the same notification mode ( For example, the success notification mode) may be displayed at the same timing (for example, the end timing of the valid operation period, etc.). That is, when the frame button 22 is pressed, only the point of notifying that the pressing has been detected may be different, and the determination timing and the display timing of the notification mode may be common. In addition, when it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed, it is not necessary to notify that the pressing has been detected. Furthermore, it is not always necessary to provide the frame button 22 that can be operated (depressed) by the player.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the continuous transformation effect is executed as one type of interest effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbols, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be executed as one type of entertainment effect during execution of a big win, as one type of so-called pending advance notice effect, or during a so-called demonstration effect.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the effect time for the transition effect and the like is set so that the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol match, but it is necessary to completely match the end timing. It is not necessary to have a degree of freedom. Concretely, for example, the end timing of the development effect and the end timing of the variable display of the third symbol are within the range of a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to roughly calculate the effect time such as the transition effect, so that the additional processing required for the calculation can be reduced.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (The total effective period is longer than the performance period)
specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect capable of displaying a specific display mode in one effect period; upper limit frequency setting means for setting an upper limit number of times of the specific display mode to be displayed in the one specific effect; Specific period setting means for setting a specific period based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition in the performance period, and establishment of a first condition in the specific period set by the specific period setting means. a first mode display means for displaying the specific display mode based on the above; and a second mode display means for displaying the specific display mode based on the above, wherein the specific period setting means displays the specific display mode only by the first mode display means in one of the presentation periods. The game machine A1 is characterized in that the specific period is set to have a length that the performance period ends before the specific display mode of the upper limit number of times is displayed when the game machine A1 is displayed.

According to the gaming machine A1, a specific effect that can display a specific display mode is executed by the specific effect executing means. The upper limit number of times of the specific display mode to be displayed in one specific effect is set by the upper limit number setting means. A specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition in the production period, and based on establishment of the first condition in the specific period set by the specific period setting means. Then, a specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means. On the other hand, the specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means based on the satisfaction of the second condition different from the first condition before the first condition is satisfied in the specific period. In one production period, when the specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means, there is a specific period of length such that the production period ends before the upper limit number of times of the specific display mode is displayed. It is set by the specific period setting means.

Thus, if the specific display mode is displayed only by the first mode display means in one presentation period, the presentation period of the specific presentation ends before the upper limit number of times of the specific display mode is displayed. Therefore, the game can be played in hopes that a specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display means. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to whether or not the second condition is satisfied during the specific period, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the first mode display means displays the specific display mode based on the elapse of the specific period, and the second mode display means displays the display mode during the specific period. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the specific period ends and the specific display mode is displayed based on the establishment of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, based on the elapse of the specific period, the specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means, while the second display mode is displayed during the specific period. Based on the fact that the condition is met, the second mode display means ends the specific period and displays the specific display mode. Therefore, the earlier the second condition is met, the earlier the specific display mode is displayed. The specified period can be terminated early. Therefore, the earlier the timing at which the second condition is satisfied, the easier it is to increase the number of times a specific display mode is displayed in one rendering period. There is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation that the second condition will be satisfied early.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, an operation means operable by the player is provided, and the second mode display means detects the operation of the operation means a predetermined number of times in the specific period of 1, the specified A game machine A3 characterized in that it displays a display mode of .

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the second mode display means is displayed based on detection of a predetermined number of operations on the operation means that the player can operate in one specific period. Therefore, a player who desires to display more specific display modes can actively operate the operating means during the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the specific performance can be improved.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the specific period setting means can set the specific period based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode. A4.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the end of the display period of the specific display mode. A period and a display period of a specific display mode are repeated. Therefore, the earlier the specific period ends, the more times the specific display mode can be displayed. When set, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that the second condition will be satisfied sooner.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A4, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. wherein the upper limit number setting means sets one number out of a plurality of numbers including at least a first number and a second number different from the first number to the upper limit The first number is set as the number of times, and the first number is higher than the second number set by the upper limit number of times setting means when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination means. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. The upper limit number setting means sets one of a plurality of numbers including at least the first number and a second number different from the first number as the upper limit number. The first number of times is configured to be higher than the second number of times set by the upper limit number of times setting means when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means, the setting ratio of the first number of times as the upper limit number of times is increased, so that the player can guess the determination result of the determination means from the upper limit number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who desires to know the upper limit number of times accurately can play a game during the specific effect with a strong expectation that the second condition is satisfied.

A gaming machine A6, wherein in the gaming machine A5, the first number of times is greater than the second number of times.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5, since the first number of times is larger than the second number of times, it is expected that the specific display mode will be displayed at least more times than the second number of times. Then, the player can play the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the second condition can be expected to be satisfied more times.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means executed by the dynamic display time determination means for determining a dynamic display time of dynamic display of the identification information, wherein the specific effect execution means is configured to perform the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means; A gaming machine A7 characterized in that the specific effect can be executed while the game machine A7 is running.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. While the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored during the period from the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information to the end of the dynamic display.

In a game machine A7, after the end of the specific effect, a second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the specific effect, and the effect time of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means, A gaming machine A8, further comprising a second presentation time determining means for determining based on the remaining dynamic display time.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, after the specific attraction ends, the second attraction different from the specific attraction is executed by the second attraction executing means. The effect time of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is determined by the second effect time determining means based on the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even if the specific effect ends, the second effect can be executed in the remaining dynamic display time. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that the person is bored.

<Characteristic group B> (Control in which the period until transformation becomes longer as the number of button pushes decreases during the transformation performance of 1)
a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed at least once during one effect period; condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied; and display time setting means for determining and setting a display time of the predetermined effect mode based on the result of determination by the condition determining means, wherein the display The time setting means sets a higher percentage of setting a longer display time when the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not met than when it is determined that the specific condition is not met. A gaming machine B1 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B1, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period. In the performance period of 1, it is determined by the condition determining means whether or not a predetermined specific condition has been established at least during the previous display of the predetermined performance mode, and based on the determination result by the condition determining means, the predetermined performance mode is performed. The display time is determined and set by the display time setting means. A longer display time is set by the display time setting means at a higher rate when the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not satisfied than when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied.

As a result, if the specific condition is not satisfied, the display time of the predetermined effect mode tends to become longer, so the number of times the predetermined effect mode is executed in one effect period is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make a player who desires to display a predetermined effect mode more times expect that a specific condition is established every time a predetermined effect mode is displayed. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is established, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising operation means operable by the player, and wherein the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established when an operation on the operation means is detected. Game machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied by the player's operation of the operation means, so the display time of the predetermined presentation mode is shortened. The player who wants to play the game can be made to actively operate the operation means every time a predetermined performance mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can actively participate in the game.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the condition determining means determines the number of consecutive times of the predetermined effect mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied in one of the effect periods, and the display period setting means The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the greater the number of consecutive times determined by the condition determining means, the higher the rate of setting a longer display time.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the condition determination means determines the number of consecutive times of a predetermined performance mode in which the specific condition is not satisfied in one performance period. The greater the number of consecutive times determined by the condition determining means, the higher the proportion of the display period setting means setting a longer display time.

As a result, the longer the predetermined performance mode in which the specific condition is not established, the more likely it is that a long display time is set, so that the number of times of the predetermined performance mode that can be displayed in one performance period is reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who wants to display a predetermined effect mode more often can play a game expecting that a specific condition is satisfied each time a predetermined effect mode is displayed. be.

A game machine B4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the game machine B4 is characterized by comprising an upper limit frequency setting means for setting an upper limit of the number of times the predetermined effect mode is displayed in one of the effect periods.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the upper limit of the number of times a predetermined effect mode is displayed in one effect period is set by the upper limit number setting means. It is possible to make the user want to display more presentation modes within the range. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the display time is determined by the display time setting means, and the predetermined effect mode of the determined display time ends after a predetermined threshold. and the display time determined by the display time setting means is set based on the end determination means determining that the predetermined effect mode ends after the threshold is reached by the end determination means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by comprising an avoiding means for avoiding the

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. Based on the determination of the display time by the display time setting means, the period determination means determines whether or not the predetermined performance mode of the determined display time ends after a predetermined threshold value, and the termination determination means. The avoiding means prevents the display time determined by the display time setting means from being set based on the determination that the predetermined effect mode ends after the threshold value.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the performance time of the specific performance becomes too long.

In the game machine B5, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoiding means, setting determination for determining whether the display time is set to be shorter than the display time whose setting is avoided. A game machine B6 characterized by comprising means.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoiding means, the display time is set to be shorter than the display time for which the setting is avoided. Since it is determined by the setting determining means whether or not to perform, there is an effect that a greater number of predetermined performance modes can be displayed within a range in which the performance time of the specific performance does not become too long.

In the gaming machine B6, the display time setting means sets the shortest display time that can be set based on the fact that the display time of the short length is determined by the setting determination means. A gaming machine B7 characterized by:

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the shortest length that can be set is set by the display time setting means based on the determination by the setting determination means that a short display time is set. Since the display time is set, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the effect time of the specific effect from becoming too long.

A game characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B5 to B7, an end determination means for determining whether or not to end the specific effect when the setting of the display time is avoided by the avoidance means. Machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines B5 to B7, the end determination means determines whether or not to end the specific effect when the display time is avoided by the avoidance means. Therefore, when the display time exceeding the predetermined threshold value is determined, there is a possibility that the end determination means determines the end of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with the hope that the display time is set as short as possible.

<Characteristic group C> (Control that makes the transformation success rate higher when the button is pushed than when the effective period has passed without pushing)
specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect; determination period number determination means for determining the set number of determination periods for executing a predetermined determination in one effect period of the specific effect; and one specific effect During the performance period, a determination period setting means for setting the determination period of the number of times determined by the determination period number determination means, and whether a predetermined specific condition is established during the determination period as the predetermined determination. a first mode display determination means for determining whether to display a specific display mode based on the fact that the specific condition is determined by the condition determination means to be satisfied; and the condition determination a second mode display determination means for determining whether to display the specific display mode based on the elapse of the determination period without determining that the specific condition is established by the means; and the first mode display determination. a ratio setting means for setting a ratio at which the means determines that the specific display mode is displayed, higher than a ratio at which the second mode display determination means determines that the specific display mode is displayed; A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C1, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. In the effect period of one specific effect, the set number of times of the determination period for executing the predetermined determination is determined by determination period frequency determination means. During the effect period of one specific effect, the determination period setting means sets the number of determination periods determined by the determination period number determining means. As the predetermined determination, the condition determining means determines whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the determination period, and the specific display is performed based on the fact that the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. Whether or not to display the mode is determined by the first mode display determining means. Based on the fact that the determination period has passed without the condition determination means determining that the specific condition has been established, the second mode display determination means determines whether to display the specific display mode. A rate setting means sets a higher rate than a rate at which a specific display mode is displayed by the second mode display determination means as a rate at which the first mode display determination means determines that the specific display mode is displayed. be done.

As a result, the specific display mode is displayed at a higher rate when the specific condition is satisfied during the determination period. Therefore, a player who wants to display a specific display mode can play a game expecting that a specific condition is satisfied. In addition, when the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to make the user strongly expect that the specific display mode will be displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved during execution of the specific effect.

The game machine C1 is characterized in that it comprises operation means that can be operated by the player, and that the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established when an operation to the operation means is detected. Game machine C2 to play.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, when the operation of the operation means that the player can operate is detected, the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is met. By operating the operation means during , it is possible to increase the ratio of displaying a specific display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can positively operate the operating means.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. a game executing means, wherein the specific effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect based on the execution of the determination by the determining means; and the ratio setting means, It is executed based on the specific determination result rather than during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means. The game machine C3 is characterized in that a ratio of determining that the specific display mode is to be displayed is set higher when the specific effect is being executed.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. Judgment is executed by the judging means based on the establishment of the judging condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means when the judgment by the judging means results in a specific judgment result. A specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the execution of the determination by the determining means. During the execution of the specific effect executed based on the determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means, the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result During execution, the ratio of determining that the specific display mode is to be displayed is set higher by the ratio setting means.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained, the specific display mode is likely to be displayed, and when the specific display mode is displayed, the player has an expectation that the privilege game will be executed. It has the effect of being able to hold

In the gaming machine C3, the ratio setting means causes the first mode determination means to display the specific display mode during execution of the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result. A first ratio is set as a ratio to be determined, and the specific display mode is determined by the second mode display determination means during execution of the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result. A second ratio lower than the first ratio is set as a ratio at which it is determined to be displayed, and during execution of the specific effect executed based on the determination result being out, the first aspect is performed. A third ratio that is lower than the first ratio is set as a ratio at which the display determining means determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed, and the specification is executed based on the result of the determination that the specific display mode is displayed. A fourth rate lower than the second rate is set as a rate at which the second mode display determining means determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed during execution of the effect. and the third ratio is larger than the difference between the second ratio and the fourth ratio.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ratio setting means determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed by the first mode determination means during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result. A percentage is set. A second rate lower than the first rate is determined by the second mode display determination means to display the specific display mode during execution of the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result. 2 is set by the ratio setting means. A third rate lower than the first rate as a rate at which the first mode display determining means determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed during the execution of the specific effect executed based on the determination result being out. is set by the ratio setting means. A fourth mode lower than the second rate as a rate at which the second mode display determination means determines that the specific display mode is displayed during execution of the specific effect executed based on the result of the out-of-range determination. is set by the ratio setting means. The difference between the first percentage and the third percentage is set larger than the difference between the second percentage and the fourth percentage.

Thereby, the degree of expectation of the privilege game is higher when the first mode display determination means determines that the specific display mode is displayed than when the second mode determination means determines that the specific display mode is displayed. The player can be made to recognize that the is high. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that a specific display mode will be displayed after the specific condition is established during the discrimination period.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the discrimination period number determining means is executed based on the specific discrimination result rather than the specific effect executed based on the non-discrimination discrimination result. The game machine C5 is characterized in that the specific effect makes it easier to set a large number of times as the number of times of the discrimination period.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3 or C4, the performance is executed based on the specific determination result, rather than the specific effect executed based on the result of the determination that it is out. In the specific effect, a large number of times can be easily set by the determining means for determining the number of times of the discrimination period, so there is an effect that the greater the number of discrimination periods, the more the player's expectation for the privilege game can be heightened.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the specific effect is determined based on the fact that the specific display mode is determined not to be displayed by either the first mode display determining means or the second mode display determining means. A game machine C6 characterized by comprising a specific effect ending means for ending the.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines C1 to C5, it is determined by either the first mode display determination means or the second mode display determination means that the specific display mode is not to be displayed. Based on this, the specific performance is terminated by the specific performance ending means, so that the player who wants to enjoy the specific performance for a longer period of time can be expected to display the specific display mode more strongly. . Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger hope that the specific condition is satisfied during the discrimination period.

In the gaming machine C6, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and movement of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. and dynamic display time setting means for setting a dynamic display time of the target display, wherein the specific effect executing means performs the specific display within the range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means. Effect is executed, and based on the fact that either the first mode display determining means or the second mode display determining means determines not to display the specific display mode, the remaining dynamic Remaining time discriminating means for discriminating a display time, and an effect to be executed after the specific effect is terminated by the specific effect ending means based on the remaining dynamic display time determined by the remaining time discriminating means. A game machine C7 characterized by comprising performance time determination means for determining time.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set by the dynamic display time setting means. . Within the range of the dynamic display time set by the dynamic display time setting means, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect. The remaining dynamic display time is determined by the remaining time determination means based on the fact that either the first mode display determination means or the second mode display determination means determines not to display the specific display mode. Based on the remaining dynamic display time discriminated by the remaining time discriminating means, the effect time of the effect to be executed after the specific effect is finished by the specific effect ending means is determined by the effect time determining means.

As a result, in the dynamic display of one piece of identification information, the effect can be suitably executed in the remaining dynamic display time after the end of the specific effect regardless of the end timing of the specific effect.

In the game machine C7, the performance time determination means determines one performance time from among a plurality of different performance times defined in advance within a range in which the performance end timing does not exceed the dynamic display time. A gaming machine C8 characterized by:

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C7, the effect time determining means selects a plurality of different effect times from among a plurality of predetermined effect times within a range in which the end timing of the effect does not exceed the dynamic display time. Since the effect time of 1 is determined, there is an effect that the processing load when determining the effect time can be reduced.

<Characteristic group D> (Possibility of transformation and effect mode after transformation effect are changed according to the remaining variation time and the number of times of transformation at the time of button push)
A specific performance executing means for executing a specific performance comprising at least a first performance in which a specific performance mode is displayed at least once in one performance period and a second performance to be executed after the first performance is finished. and upper limit number setting means for setting the upper limit number of times of the specific display mode to be displayed in the first effect of 1, and a specific determination period for determining whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied is set in the first effect. determination period setting means for setting one or more times during execution; first mode display means for displaying the specific display mode based on the elapse of the specific determination period; a second mode display means for ending the specified determination period and displaying the specified display mode based on the establishment of the specified condition; and 1, the specified display displayed during execution of the first effect. Based on at least one of mode display count counting means for counting the number of times a mode is displayed, the number of times of display counted by the mode count counting means during execution of the first effect, and the remaining effect period, A game machine D1 characterized by comprising an effect time determination means for determining the effect time of the second effect.

According to the gaming machine D1, a specific effect comprising at least a first effect in which a specific effect mode is displayed at least once in one effect period and a second effect to be executed after the first effect is finished. is executed by the specific effect executing means. The upper limit number of times of the specific display mode to be displayed in the first effect of 1 is set by the upper limit number setting means. A specific determination period for determining whether or not a predetermined specific condition is established is set once or a plurality of times during execution of the first effect by the determination period setting means. A specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means based on the elapse of the specific determination period. Based on the establishment of the specific condition during the specific determination period, the second mode display means terminates the specific determination period and displays the specific display mode. The display count of the specific display mode displayed during the execution of the first effect of 1 is counted by the mode display count counting means. During the execution of the first performance, the performance time of the second performance is determined by the performance time determination means based on at least one of the number of times of display counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining performance period.

As a result, the effect time of the second effect is variable according to the situation of the first effect, so there is an effect that the variations of the specific effect can be diversified.

In the gaming machine D1, an operating means operable by a player is provided, the determination period setting means sets a period during which the operation to the operation means is valid as the specific determination period, and the specific condition is , a game machine D2 characterized in that it is established when an operation to the operation means is detected.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the specific discrimination period, the discrimination period setting means sets a period during which the operation to the operating means is valid. A specific condition is established when an operation on the operating means is detected.

As a result, there is an effect that the player who desires to display the second effect with a longer effect time can positively operate the operating means.

In a gaming machine D1 or D2, display means for displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means and dynamic display time determination means for determining a dynamic display time of the dynamic display of said specific effect execution means, within said dynamic display time determined by said dynamic display time determination means, said The specific effect is executed, and the effect time determination means determines the second effect based on at least one of the number of times of display counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining dynamic display time. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it determines a performance mode.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. . A specific effect is executed by a specific effect execution means within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination means. The effect mode of the second effect is determined by the effect time determining means based on at least one of the number of times of display counted by the mode number counting means and the remaining dynamic display time.

As a result, during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, the specific presentation can be executed within the range of the dynamic display time, so that the interest of the player during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information can be improved. has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the performance time determination means selects a plurality of different performance times defined as the performance time of the second performance before the performance period of the specific performance ends. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it determines the longest presentation time in the range in which the second presentation ends.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a specific rendering period is selected from a plurality of different rendering times defined as the rendering time of the second rendering before the rendering period of the specific rendering ends. Since the longest performance time in the range where the second performance ends before is determined by the performance time determining means, the performance time of the second performance can be made longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the specific effect includes a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect, and is determined by the effect time determination means. The game machine D5 is characterized by comprising a third performance time determining means for determining the performance time of the third performance based on at least one of the performance time set and the remaining performance period.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect includes the third effect that is different from both the first effect and the second effect. The performance time of the third performance is determined by the third performance time determination means based on at least one of the performance time determined by the performance time determination means and the remaining performance period.

Thus, the third performance, which is different from the first performance and the second performance, can be executed during the execution of the specific performance, so that there is an effect that the performance modes during the execution of the specific performance can be diversified.

In the gaming machine D5, the third effect is executed after the first effect ends and before starting the second effect, and the third effect time determination means The performance time of the third performance is determined based on the difference between the performance time remaining when the first performance ends and the performance time determined by the performance time determination means. game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, the third effect is executed after the first effect is finished and before the second effect is started. The performance time of the third performance is determined by the third performance time determination means based on the difference between the performance time remaining when the first performance is finished and the performance time determined by the performance time determination means.

Thereby, there is an effect that the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed in accordance with the effect period of the specific effect.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the gaming machine D7 is characterized by comprising an effect mode determining means for determining the effect mode of the second effect based on the number of display times counted by the mode number counting means. .

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the presentation mode of the second presentation is determined by the presentation mode determining means based on the number of display times counted by the mode number counting means. Therefore, the player can have an impression that the first effect and the second effect are related. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game in the specific effect can be improved.

In the game machine D7, based on the storage means for storing the execution information used for executing the second effect for each effect mode of the second effect, and the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means, a selection means for selecting the corresponding execution information from the storage means; specifying means for specifying a range used for execution of the effect; and second effect executing means for executing the second effect based on the execution information of the range specified by the specifying means. A game machine D8.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution information used for executing the second effect is stored in the storage means for each effect mode of the second effect. Based on the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means, the corresponding execution information is selected from the storage means by the selection means. Based on the effect time determined by the effect time determination means, the specifying means specifies the range of the execution information selected by the selection means to be used for the current execution of the second effect. The second effect executing means executes the second effect based on the execution information within the range specified by the specifying means.

As a result, a plurality of second effects with different effect times can be executed from the respective pieces of execution information, so the execution information can be stored in comparison with the case where the execution information is individually stored for each effect time. There is an effect that the storage area required for storing the data can be reduced.

<Characteristic group E> (Different expectation level suggestion mode according to button push tendency)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed a plurality of times in one effect period, and a predetermined display condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means. a performance mode determination means for determining one performance mode from a plurality of modes predetermined as the predetermined performance mode; and a performance mode setting for setting a display of the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means. means, specific determination means for executing a specific determination in one of the performance periods, and at least one performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means in accordance with the determination result of the specific determination means. A game machine E1, characterized by comprising determination ratio variable means for varying when determining the predetermined effect mode.

According to the gaming machine E1, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in which a predetermined effect mode is displayed multiple times in one effect period. Based on the establishment of a predetermined display condition during execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means, one effect mode is determined by the effect mode determining means from among a plurality of modes predetermined as the predetermined effect mode. be. The display of the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means is set by the effect mode setting means. A specific determination is performed by the specific determination means in one performance period, and the performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means with a high ratio according to the determination result of the specific determination means is at least one predetermined performance mode. When determined, it is varied by the determination ratio varying means.

As a result, it becomes easier to determine a different effect mode according to the determination result by the specific determination means, so that the impression of the specific effect can be varied according to the result of the specific determination. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is difficult for the player to get tired of.

The gaming machine E1 is provided with condition determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed, and the specific determination means determines whether the specific determination is 1. It determines the determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one of the predetermined performance modes set in the performance period, and the determination ratio varying means determines the specific determination means during the one performance period. With respect to the predetermined effect mode set by the effect mode setting means after the predetermined effect mode that is the object of the determination by, the effect mode with a high ratio determined by the effect mode determination means is varied. A gaming machine E2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it is determined by the condition determining means whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed. As the specific determination, the specific determination means determines the result of determination by the condition determination means executed in at least one predetermined effect mode set in one effect period. In one performance period, a performance mode in which a ratio determined by the performance mode determining means is high with respect to the predetermined performance mode set by the performance mode setting means after the predetermined performance mode that is the object of discrimination by the specific discrimination means. is varied by the determination ratio varying means.

As a result, while the predetermined effect mode to be determined by the specific determination means is displayed, the game can be played while paying attention to the determination status by the specific determination means. In the effect mode, the game can be played while paying attention to which effect mode is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to change the point to be noticed in accordance with the timing at which the predetermined effect mode is set, so that there is an effect that the interest during execution of the specific effect can be further improved.

In the gaming machine E2, the specific determination means determines that the specific condition is established by the condition determination means in at least one of the predetermined effect modes set in one effect period as the specific determination. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it determines the number of times of the predetermined effect mode.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, as a specific determination, the condition determination means determines that a specific condition has been established among at least one predetermined effect mode set in one effect period. Since the number of times of the predetermined performance mode thus set is discriminated by the specific discriminating means, it is possible to vary the performance mode which is easily set according to the number of times the specific condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of times the specific condition is established.

Any one of the game machines E1 to E3 is provided with operation means that can be operated by the player, and the specific condition is met when an operation on the operation means is detected while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed. A gaming machine E4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, when an operation to the operation means is detected while a predetermined effect mode is being displayed, the specific condition is established, so that the game can be played. The mode of presentation can be varied depending on whether or not the player operates the operating means. Therefore, since the mode of presentation can be changed according to the player's selection, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a presentation that is less boring.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E4, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. and a privilege game execution means for executing, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, and the determination ratio variable means is the When the determination result by the specific determination means is the first determination result, and the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result is being executed, it is displayed for the predetermined specific number of times. When determining the predetermined effect mode, the ratio of determining the first mode is variable so that it is higher than the other effect modes, and the determination result by the specific determination means is different from the first determination result. If the second determination result is obtained and the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result is being executed, the predetermined effect mode to be displayed for the specific number of times is determined. The ratio of determining the second mode different from the first mode is changed so as to be higher than the other performance modes, the determination result by the specific determination means is the first determination result, and the specific When the specific effect executed based on the determination result different from the determination result of is being executed, when determining the predetermined effect mode to be displayed for the specific number of times, the second The ratio of determining the two modes is varied so as to be higher than the other performance modes, and the discrimination result by the specific discriminating means becomes the second discrimination result and the outlier discrimination result is executed. When the specific effect displayed is being executed, when determining the predetermined effect mode to be displayed for the specific number of times, the ratio of determining the first mode is higher than the other effect modes. The gaming machine E5 is characterized by being variable.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. be. A specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the execution of the determination by the determining means. When the determination result by the specific determination means is the first determination result, and the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result is being executed, a predetermined display is performed for a predetermined specific number of times. is varied by the determination ratio varying means so that the ratio of determining the first mode is higher than the other performance modes when determining the performance mode of . When the determination result by the specific determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the specific effect executed based on the specific determination result is being executed, the specific number of times When determining a predetermined performance mode displayed on the table, the determination ratio changing means changes the rate of determining the table 2 mode different from the first mode to be higher than the other performance modes. Displayed at a specific number of times when a specific effect is being executed based on the determination result by the specific determination means being the first determination result and the deviation determination result different from the specific determination result being performed. When determining the predetermined presentation mode to be executed, the determination rate changing means varies the rate of determining the second mode so that it is higher than the other presentation modes. When the determination result by the specific determination means is the second determination result and the specific effect executed based on the result of the outlier determination is being executed, the predetermined effect mode displayed for the specific number of times is displayed. At the time of determination, it is varied by the determination ratio varying means so that the ratio of determining the first mode is higher than that of the other performance modes.

Thus, the player can guess the degree of expectation for the privilege game according to the determination result by the specific determination means and the predetermined effect mode of the specific number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine E1 is provided with condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed, and the specific determination means performs the current determination as the specific determination. A game machine E6 characterized in that determination is executed based on the result of determination by the condition determining means executed in at least one specific effect executed before the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it is determined by the condition determining means whether or not a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect mode is being displayed. As the specific determination, the determination is performed by the specific determination means based on the determination result by the condition determination means executed in at least one specific effect executed before the current specific effect.

As a result, the effect mode of the current specific effect is varied depending on the determination result of the condition determining means in the previously executed specific effect, so there is an effect that the effect mode can be diversified.

In the gaming machine E6, the specific determination means determines the number of times of the predetermined effect mode displayed in at least one specific effect executed before the current specific effect, and the condition determination means determines the specific condition A game machine E7 characterized in that determination is executed based on the number of times of the predetermined effect mode determined to be established.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the number of times of the predetermined effect mode displayed in at least one specific effect executed before the current specific effect, and the specific condition by the condition determination means Since the determination is executed by the specific determination means based on the number of times of the predetermined effect mode determined to be satisfied, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of times of the predetermined effect mode when the specific condition is satisfied. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine E7 comprises identification means for identifying a player who is playing a game, and the specific identification means is displayed while the identification means identifies that the same player is playing a game. A game machine E8 characterized in that determination is executed based on the number of times of the predetermined effect mode and the number of times of the predetermined effect mode determined by the condition determining means that the specific condition is established. .

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the player who is playing the game is identified by the identifying means. The number of predetermined performance modes displayed while the identification means identifies that the same player is playing the game, and the number of predetermined performance modes determined by the condition determination means that the specific condition is established. Based on and, determination is performed by the specific determination means.

As a result, it is possible to vary the tendencies of the presentation modes that are likely to be set according to the game result of each player, so that there is an effect that the presentation corresponding to the player can be provided.

<Characteristic group F> (Adjust the connection between the first half of the production and the second half of the production)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect comprising at least a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect within one effect period, and during execution of the first effect, An end condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and a first effect for ending the first effect based on the fact that the end condition determining means determines that the end condition is satisfied. The length of the period from the end of the first performance by the end means and the first performance end means to the start of the second performance is set based on at least the length of the remaining performance period. and an effect start means for starting the second effect based on the elapse of the period set by the period setting means.

According to the game machine F1, a specific effect comprising at least a first effect and a second effect executed after the first effect is executed within one effect period by the specific effect executing means. During the execution of the first performance, it is determined by an end condition determination means whether a predetermined end condition is established, and based on the fact that the end condition is determined to be established by the end condition determination means, the first performance is performed. The end means ends the first effect. The length of the period from the end of the first performance by the first performance end means to the start of the second performance is set by the period setting means based on at least the length of the remaining performance period. When the period set by the period setting means has passed, the second effect is started by the effect starting means.

As a result, the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect can be varied according to the remaining effect time, so that the specific effect can be preferably executed. be.

In the gaming machine F1, the period setting means sets the length of the period from the end of the first effect to the start of the second effect, and sets the second effect to the end of the first effect period. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that it sets the length for which the performance ends.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the length of the period from the end of the first presentation to the start of the second presentation is the length of the period until the end of the first presentation period. Since the period setting means sets the length during which the second effect ends, there is an effect that the specific effect can be executed more preferably.

In the game machine F1 or F2, a type selecting means for selecting one of a plurality of effect types having at least different effect times as the second effect is provided, and the period setting means is selected by the type selecting means. The game machine F3 is characterized in that the length of the period from the end of the first performance to the start of the second performance is set based on the performance time of the performance type.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the second effect, one effect type is selected by the type selecting means from among a plurality of effect types having at least different effect periods. Based on the performance time of the performance type selected by the type selection means, the length of the period from the end of the first performance to the start of the second performance is set by the period setting means.

As a result, the start timing of the second effect can be set according to the effect time of the second effect, so there is an effect that the second effect can be executed more favorably.

In any one of game machines F1 to F3, upper limit frequency setting means for setting an upper limit of the number of times a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the first effect of 1; and a number counting means for counting the number of times a specific condition is satisfied, wherein the termination condition is when the number of times counted by the number counting means exceeds the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that at least the above is established.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in one first effect, the upper limit of the number of times that a predetermined specific condition is met is set by the upper limit number setting means. The number of times that the specific condition is established during the execution of the first effect of 1 is counted by the number of times counting means. At least the end condition is met when the number of times counted by the number counting means is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of times set by the upper limit setting means.

Thus, even if the end timing of the first effect varies according to the upper limit number of times set by the upper limit setting means, the start of the second effect can be preferably set.

In the game machine F4, an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period for validating an operation to the operation means once or a plurality of times during execution of the first effect, and a first mode display means for displaying a specific display mode based on the elapse of the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means; and one operation validity set by the operation valid period setting means. a second mode display means for ending the operation effective period and displaying the specific display mode based on detection of an operation to the operation means during the period, wherein the specific condition is the specific A game machine F5 characterized in that it is established when the display mode of is displayed.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation effective period during which the player can operate the operation means is set one or more times by the operation effective period setting means during execution of the first effect. A specific display mode is displayed by the first mode display means when the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means has passed. Based on detection of an operation to the operation means during one operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means, the second mode display means terminates the operation valid period and displays a specific display mode. . A specific condition is established when a specific display mode is displayed.

As a result, the end timing of the effective operation period is changed according to the timing at which the player operates the operating means, so that even if the end timing of the first effect is changed, the start of the second effect is preferably set. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines F1 to F5, a third effect execution means for executing a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect in the period of the length set by the period setting means; effect data storage means for storing effect data for executing the third effect; and one effect data from the effect data storage means based on the length of the period set by the period setting means. data reading means for reading the third effect, and data within the range corresponding to the length of the period set by the period setting means, among the one effect data read by the data reading means, and data range setting means for setting data to be executed.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third effect executing means executes the third effect different from the first effect and the second effect during the period of the length set by the period setting means. Effect data for executing the third effect is stored in the effect data storage means. One effect data is read out from the effect data storage means by the data reading means based on the length of the period being set by the period setting means. Of the one performance data read by the data reading means, data within a range corresponding to the length of the period set by the period setting means is set by the data range setting means as data for executing the third performance. be done.

Thus, when the third performance is executed, data with different performance periods can be set based on the one performance data, so that the increase in data for executing the third performance can be suppressed. has the effect of

In the gaming machine F6, at least a part of the effect data is composed of data for displaying a specific still image, and the data range setting means sets the period set by the period setting means. The gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the range of data for executing the third effect is set so that the display time of the specific still image varies according to its length.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least part of the effect data is composed of data for displaying a specific still image. A data range for executing the third effect is set by the data range setting means such that the display time of the specific still image varies according to the length of the period set by the period setting means.

As a result, even if the effect time of the third effect is changed, only the display time of the specific still image is changed. .

In any one of game machines F1 to F7, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means dynamic display time determination means for determining a dynamic display time of the dynamic display of the identification information, wherein the specific effect execution means determines the dynamic display time by the dynamic display time determination means; The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed within the determined dynamic display time based on the fact.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display time of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determination means. Based on the determination of the dynamic display time by the dynamic display time determination means, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect within the determined dynamic display time.

As a result, there is an effect that the specific effect can be executed within the dynamic display time.

<Characteristic group G> (Adjusting the mode after the end of the performance with an indefinite performance time)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect including at least a predetermined first effect in one effect period, and a predetermined end condition before the effect period elapses during the execution of the first effect. end condition determining means for determining whether or not is satisfied, effect ending means for ending the first effect based on the determination that the end condition is satisfied by the end condition determining means, and the effect ending means a production mode setting means for setting a production mode from the end of the first production to the end of the production period based on at least the length of the remaining production period. Gaming machine G1 to play.

According to the gaming machine G1, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect including at least the predetermined first effect in one effect period. During the execution of the first performance, it is determined by an end condition determination means whether or not a predetermined end condition is established before the performance period elapses. The first effect is ended by the effect ending means when the ending condition determining means determines that the ending condition is satisfied. A performance mode from the end of the first performance by the performance end means to the end of the performance period is set by the performance mode setting means based on at least the length of the remaining performance period.

As a result, it is possible to set an effect mode according to the length of the remaining effect time, so there is an effect that the specific effect can be preferably executed.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized by comprising type selection means for selecting one type from at least a plurality of types of the effect modes having different effect times as the effect mode set by the mode setting means. Machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, at least one of a plurality of presentation mode types having different presentation times is selected by the type selection means as the presentation mode set by the mode setting means. Since it is selected, there is an effect that it is possible to set the effect mode of the effect time that matches the length of the remaining effect period.

In the gaming machine G2, based on the effect time of the effect mode selected by the type selection means and the length of the remaining effect period, after the first effect is completed, it is set by the effect mode setting means. A game machine G3 characterized by comprising period setting means for setting a period until the performance mode is started.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, based on the performance time of the performance mode selected by the type selection means and the length of the remaining performance period, the performance is performed after the first performance is completed. Since the period until the performance mode set by the mode setting means is started is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the interval between the first performance and the performance mode can be preferably set. .

In the gaming machine G3, the period setting means sets the period so that the timing at which the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means ends and the timing at which the effect period ends are within a predetermined period range. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that it is a setting.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, the timing at which the rendering mode set by the rendering mode setting means ends and the timing at which the rendering period ends are within a predetermined period. Since the period is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the end timing of the presentation mode can be preferably set.

In the gaming machine G3 or G4, the period setting means provides a difference between the length of the remaining effect period at the time when the first effect ends and the effect time of the effect mode of the type selected by the type selecting means. is set as the period.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4, the length of the remaining rendering period at the time when the first rendering ends and the rendering time of the type of rendering mode selected by the type selecting means. Since the period of the difference is set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the end timing of the performance period and the end timing of the performance mode can be matched.

The gaming machine G1 comprises storage means for storing performance data used for executing the performance mode, and the performance mode setting means corresponds to the length of the remaining performance period of the one performance data. A gaming machine G6 characterized in that the range of data to be played is selected and set.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage means stores the effect data used for executing the effect mode. A range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining performance period is selected and set by the performance mode setting means from among the one performance data.

As a result, since a plurality of performance modes with different performance times can be set from one performance data, there is an effect that the amount of data for displaying the performance modes can be reduced.

The game machine G6 comprises data selection means for selecting one of the performance data to be used for setting the performance mode by the performance mode setting means from the plurality of performance data stored in the storage means, wherein the performance mode setting is performed. The means selects and sets a range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining performance period from the one performance data selected by the data selection means. .

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the data selection means selects one effect data used for setting the effect mode by the effect mode setting means from the plurality of effect data stored in the storage means. Of the one performance data selected by the data selection means, the range of data corresponding to the length of the remaining performance period is selected and set by the performance mode setting means.

As a result, there is an effect that the mode of presentation can be diversified.

In a game machine G7, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege game execution for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. means, wherein the data selection means selects one of the performance data from the storage means based on at least the result of determination by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determining means executes determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the privilege game executing means executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. . One performance data is selected from the storage means by the data selection means based on at least the determination result by the determination means.

As a result, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the bonus game will be played based on the effect mode, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the effect mode.

<Characteristic group H> (Make the period until the right-handed ball reaches the attacker longer than the left-handed one)
A first flow path through which a game ball shot in a first direction can flow, a second flow path through which a game ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction can flow, and the first flow path. and a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path is provided at a position where at least the game ball can enter; wherein the second flow path is launched in the second direction before the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering means. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it is constructed so that a period until a game ball that has been hit reaches the ball-entering means is longer.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning opening is a winning, the big winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times to shift to a winning state. there is something In such a conventional type gaming machine, a predetermined number of prize balls are given each time a game ball is entered into the big winning opening during the winning state, so that the player can enjoy the winning state as one of the pleasures of the game. can let

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to make the game ball enter the big winning hole, it is necessary to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction for each gaming machine, so the game during the win state becomes monotonous. There was a problem that it becomes

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, game balls shot in the first direction flow down the first flow path, and game balls shot in the second direction different from the first direction flow down the second flow path. flow down A ball entry means is provided at a position where at least a game ball that has flowed down through the first channel and a game ball that has flowed down through the second channel can enter. A predetermined privilege is imparted by a privilege imparting means based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means. Secondly, the period until the game ball shot in the second direction reaches the ball entering means is longer than the period until the game ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball entering means. A flow path is configured.

As a result, the game ball can be shot aiming at the first flow path for the player who wants the game ball to reach the ball entry means as soon as possible, while the game ball can be shot for a relatively long time. A game ball can be shot aiming at the second flow path for a player who wants to reach the ball-entering means. Therefore, since each player can select his or her favorite firing direction to play the game, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine H1, the ball entry means is positioned at a position where the rate of game balls that have flowed down through the second flow path are higher than the rate of game balls that have flowed down through the first flow path. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is arranged in the .

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the rate at which game balls that flow down the second flow path enter is higher than the rate at which game balls that flow down the first flow path enter. Since the ball-entering means is arranged at a higher position, when the ball flows down the first flow path, the period until it reaches the ball-entering means is shortened, but it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the ball-entering means. On the other hand, when the ball flows down the second flow path, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball-entering means, but it takes longer to reach the ball-entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player himself/herself can select a shooting direction suitable for each player's taste.

A gaming machine H3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H1 or H2, it comprises deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the speed of the game balls flowing down the second flow path is reduced by the decelerating means, so that the game balls launched in the second direction enter. There is an effect that the period until reaching the ball means can be made longer than the period until the game ball shot in the first direction reaches the entering ball means more reliably.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H3, it is variable between a first position where the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. variable means, determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means, the variable means performs a predetermined number of times from the second position to the and variable game executing means for executing a variable game variable to the first position.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is varied between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Judgment is executed by the judging means based on the establishment of the judging condition. A variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of a specific determination result in determination by the determination means.

In the gaming machine H4, a shooting means capable of shooting game balls in the first direction and the second direction at a shooting interval equal to or greater than a specific shooting interval; A first variable that changes the variable means to the second position based on a predetermined specific number or more of game balls entering the ball entry means after being varied from the position to the first position. and control means, during execution of the variable game, based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means is changed to the first position. and a second variable control means for varying between two positions, wherein the specific period is after the game ball is started to be shot in the second direction, and is shot in the second direction at the specific shooting interval. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the period is at least longer than the period until the specified number of game balls finish flowing down the second flow path.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machine H4, the following effects are produced. That is, the shooting means is configured to be able to shoot game balls in the first direction and the second direction at a shooting interval equal to or greater than a specific shooting interval. During the execution of the variable game, based on the fact that game balls of a predetermined specific number or more enter the ball entry means after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the variable means moves to the first position. 1 is changed to the second position by the variable control means. During execution of the variable game, the variable means is variable to the second position by the second variable control means based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period after the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position. be done. At least a specific period of time from the start of shooting game balls in the second direction until the specified number of game balls shot in the second direction at specific shooting intervals finish flowing down the second flow path. is configured to be longer.

Thereby, when the game balls are shot in the second direction during execution of the variable game, the game balls of the specific number can be entered into the ball entry means before the specific period elapses. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that a person loses.

In the gaming machine H4, the variable game executing means is triggered by the establishment of a specific condition during the execution of the variable game, and the predetermined first period after the variable means is changed to the first position. The variable means is controlled to vary with a specific variable pattern including the predetermined number of times of the first variable operation that is changed to the second position after the elapse, and one or more of the specific variable patterns During the execution period of the first variable operation, the game ball launched in the first direction after the specific variable pattern is started can reach, and the specific variable pattern is started after the first The game machine H6 is characterized in that game balls shot in two directions are difficult to reach.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of the game machine H4, the following effects are produced. That is, when a specific condition is established during the execution of the variable game, the variable means is varied to the first position, and after a predetermined first period elapses, the first variable is varied to the second position. The variable means is controlled by the variable game execution means to be variable in a specific variable pattern including a predetermined number of variable motions. The execution period of one or more first variable actions in a specific variable pattern is such that the game ball fired in the first direction can reach after the specific variable pattern is started, and the specific variable pattern is started. After that, it becomes difficult for the game ball shot in the second direction to reach.

As a result, when the game ball is shot in the second direction, the chances of the game ball entering the ball-entering means are reduced compared to when the game ball is shot in the first direction. It has the effect of making you think.

In the gaming machine H6, as a game state after execution of the variable game is completed, a first game state is set when a game ball does not enter the ball-entering means in the variable game of 1; game state setting means for setting a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entry means in the variable game of Machine H7.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6, as a gaming state after execution of the variable game is completed, a game is played when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means in the first variable game. While the first game state is set by the state setting means, when the game ball enters the ball entering means in one variable game, the second game state is set by the game state setting means more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Since the game state is set, there is an effect that the game can be played while the variable game is being executed, paying more attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means.

In the game machine H6 or H7, the first flow path allows the falling game ball to reach the ball entry means from the third direction, and the second flow path allows the falling game ball to reach the third direction. The variable means is configured so that a game ball can flow down its upper surface while being varied to the second position, and The fourth direction side is inclined so as to be higher than the third direction side. , in a state in which a game ball can be entered from above and the variable means is variable to the second position, the variable means blocks the upper part, and the variable means is , the gaming machine H8 is variable from the second position to the first position by sliding in a direction from the fourth direction side to the third direction side.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6 or H7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path reaches the ball entry means from the third direction, while the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path reaches the ball entry means from the fourth direction different from the third direction. and reach. While the variable means is variable to the second position, the variable means is inclined so that the game ball can flow down the upper surface thereof, and the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side. are placed. The ball entry means is configured so that a game ball can be entered from above when the variable means is changed to the first position. Further, in a state in which the variable means is varied to the second position, the upper part of the ball-entering means is blocked by the variable means. By sliding from the fourth direction side to the third direction side, the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position.

As a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball arriving from the third direction side to enter the ball entering means while the variable means is changing to the first position, while the game ball arriving from the fourth direction side enters the ball. becomes easier. Therefore, during the execution of the variable game, the possibility of the game ball reaching the ball-entering means entering the ball-entering means is higher when the game ball is shot in the second direction than in the first direction. There is an effect that it can be made higher.

<Characteristic Group I> (Right-handed hits during a big win are more advantageous than left-handed hits in some respects, but are more disadvantageous than left-handed hits in other respects.)
A shooting means capable of shooting at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and determination by the determination means. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of (1) and a first element regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the privilege game are included in the execution period of the privilege game. a first element advantageous means for making it more advantageous for the player to keep shooting game balls in the first direction than to keep shooting game balls in the second direction during a specific period; A second element, which is different from the element, is advantageous to the player if the game ball is continuously shot in the second direction rather than in the first direction during the specific period. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising a two-factor advantageous means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning opening is a winning, the big winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times to shift to a winning state. there is something In such a conventional type of gaming machine, by allowing a game ball to enter the big winning hole during the winning state, a predetermined benefit such as a prize ball is given to the player, which is advantageous to the player. A state can be made to play a pleasure.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to win the game ball into the big winning hole, it is necessary to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the winning state ( Since the amount of a predetermined privilege that can be acquired is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will be like a task of simply continuing to shoot game balls in a fixed direction. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, the shooting means is configured to be capable of shooting at least game balls in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. Judgment is executed by the judging means based on the establishment of the judging condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means when the judgment by the judging means results in a specific judgment result. The first element regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the privilege game is that the game balls are continuously shot in the first direction rather than the game balls are continuously shot in the second direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. is advantageous by the first element advantageous means. The second element regarding the degree of advantage of the player in the privilege game is that the game balls are continuously shot in the second direction rather than the game balls are continuously shot in the first direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. is advantageous by the second element advantageous means.

As a result, the game ball can be shot in the first direction to the player who wants to make the first element advantageous during execution of the privilege game, while the game ball can be shot to the player who wants to make the second element advantageous. Game balls can be shot in two directions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide game characteristics that suit the tastes of each player.

In the gaming machine I1, a ball entering means provided at a position where at least the game ball launched in the first direction and the game ball launched in the second direction can enter, and the ball entering means and a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means, and the ball entering means rather than the first position A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter a ball, and a variable that changes the variable means from the second position to the first position a predetermined first number of times during execution of the privilege game. A gaming machine I2 comprising: a control means;

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where at least the game ball launched in the first direction and the game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering means. The variable means is varied between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means and a second position where entering the ball into the ball entering means is more difficult than in the first position. During execution of the privilege game, the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by the variable control means a predetermined first number of times.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means, so there is an effect that the interest during the execution of the privilege game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine I2, the first element advantageous making means is more likely to continue shooting game balls in the first direction than to continue shooting game balls in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. increases the percentage of balls entering the ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, it is better for the game balls to be continuously shot in the first direction than to be continuously shot in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. Since the rate of entering a ball into the ball entering means is increased by the first element advantage making means, the game is suitable for players who want to play a game with a high rate of entering a ball into the entering means during execution of the privilege game. On the other hand, there is an effect that the game ball can be actively shot in the first direction.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the second element advantageous means is more likely to keep shooting game balls in the second direction during the specific period than to keep shooting game balls in the first direction. A game machine I4 characterized in that the number of game balls reaching said ball entering means is increased.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2 or I3, it is better to continue shooting game balls in the second direction than to shoot game balls in the first direction during the specific period. Since the number of game balls reaching the ball entering means is increased by the second element advantage making means, the second direction is actively offered to the player who wants more game balls to reach the ball entering means. There is an effect that the game ball can be fired.

In the gaming machine I4, the variable control means performs the first variable operation in which the variable means is varied to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable means was varied to the first position. The second element advantageous means is that the game ball launched in the first direction after the start of the specific period is executed the first number of times during the specific period. It suppresses reaching the ball-entering means until the execution period of the variable action ends, and at least part of the execution period of the first variable action of the predetermined number of times is the specific period. A gaming machine I5 characterized by a period in which a game ball launched in the second direction can reach after the start.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the variable means was varied to the first position, the variable control means performs the first variable operation to the second position the first number of times during the specific period. be done. The second element advantageous means ensures that the game ball shot in the first direction from the start of the specific period reaches the ball entering means during the period until the execution period of the first variable action of a predetermined number of times is completed. Suppressed. At least part of the execution period of the first variable action of the predetermined number of times is constituted by a period during which the game ball launched in the second direction can reach after the specific period is started.

Thus, shooting the game ball in the second direction allows the game ball to reach the ball entering means during execution of the first variable action more times than shooting the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to obtain more opportunities for the ball to enter the ball-entering means.

In the gaming machine I5, the second element advantageous means is such that the period until the game ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball entering means is longer than the game ball shot in the second direction. A gaming machine I6 characterized by suppressing the flowing speed of the game ball shot in the first direction so as to be longer than the period until reaching the entry ball means.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5, the period until the game ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball-entering means is the same as that of the game ball shot in the second direction. Since the flowing speed of the game ball shot in the first direction is suppressed by the second element advantageous means so as to be longer than the period until it reaches the means, the game ball shot in the first direction is suppressed. , it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from reaching the ball-entering means before the end of the predetermined number of first variable motions. Therefore, shooting the game ball in the second direction has the effect of increasing the chances of making the ball enter the ball entering means more reliably.

In the gaming machine I5 or I6, the first variable operation has a predetermined period from when the second position starts to change to the first position to when the change to the first position ends. The variable means is variable so as to be the second period, and the first element advantageous means is such that the game ball shot in the second direction enters the ball entering means during the second period. The game ball launched in the first direction is more likely to enter the ball entering means if it reaches the ball entering means during the second period. Characterized game machine I7.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5 or I6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first variable operation, the variable means is configured so that the period from the start of the variable movement from the second position to the first position to the end of the variable movement to the first position is the predetermined second period. is variable. The game ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period more than the game ball shot in the second direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period. The first element advantageous means makes it easier to enter the ball into the ball entering means.

Thereby, when the game ball is shot in the first direction, in addition to the first period during which the variable means is varied to the first position, it is also during the second period during which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position. Since there is a possibility of entering the ball entering means, the period during which the ball can enter the ball entering means can be lengthened by shooting the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, when the game ball is shot in the first direction, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game ball reaching the ball-entering means entering the ball-entering means as compared to when the game ball is shot in the second direction. effective.

In the gaming machine I7, a first flow path through which a game ball launched in the first direction can flow down and the flowed-down game ball reaches the ball-entering means from a third direction; a second flow path through which a game ball that has been shot can flow down, and that allows the game ball that has flowed down to reach the ball-entering means from a fourth direction different from the third direction; While being varied to the second position, the upper surface is configured so that game balls can flow down, and the upper surface is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. The ball entry means allows a game ball to enter from above in a state in which the variable means is changed to the first position, and the variable means is at the second position. , the upper part is blocked by the variable means, and the first element advantageous means is directed from the third direction side to the fourth direction side. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by sliding the variable means.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball launched in the first direction reaches the ball entering means from the third direction through the first flow path. A game ball shot in the second direction reaches the ball entering means from a fourth direction different from the third direction through the second flow path. While the variable means is variable to the second position, a game ball can be placed on its upper surface. Further, the upper surface of the variable means is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. When the variable means is varied to the first position, a game ball can enter the ball entering means from above, while when the variable means is varied to the second position, the ball entering means is blocked by the variable means. When the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position, the variable means is slid from the third direction side to the fourth direction side by the first element advantage means.

As a result, the game ball launched in the second direction and reaching the upper surface of the variable means from the fourth direction during the second period is returned to the fourth direction by the inclination of the upper surface of the variable means. Since gravity can be applied, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball-entering means. On the other hand, the third direction side above the ball entering means becomes ready to enter the ball from above earlier than the fourth direction side. It is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball that has reached the ball entering means. Therefore, the game ball shot in the first direction can have a higher ball-entering rate when reaching the ball-entering means more reliably than the game ball shot in the second direction.

In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I8, as a game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, when the game ball does not enter the ball entering means during the execution of the privilege game of 1, the second A game state setting means for setting one game state and setting a second game state more advantageous than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of the privilege game of the one. A gaming machine I8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I2 to I8, as a gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the privilege game of 1. When the ball is not entered, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of one privilege game, the second game state more advantageous than the first game state is set by the game state setting means. Therefore, when the game ball enters the ball entering means, the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the advantageous second game state, so that the game ball enters the ball entering means. There is an effect that the game can be played while the privilege game is being executed, paying attention to whether or not it is played.

<Feature J Group> (Various attackers with which game balls that reach the same area are likely to win)
A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a specific area where the game ball shot by the shooting means can reach, and a first ball entry provided at a position where the game ball reaching the specific area can enter. means, second ball entering means, first privilege granting means for imparting a first privilege based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means. A second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the entry of the game ball, and a game ball reaching the specific area enters the first ball entering means. A first position where it is possible and makes it difficult to enter the ball in the second ball-entering means, and a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball in the first ball-entering means and makes it possible to enter the ball in the second ball-entering means. and a variable means capable of varying at least a position, and the variable means are varied to the first position based on the establishment of a first condition, and based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. and variable control means for varying the game machine J1 to the second position.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to win the game ball into the big winning hole, it is necessary to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the winning state ( Since the amount of a predetermined privilege that can be acquired is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will be like a task of simply continuing to shoot game balls in a fixed direction. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the winning state when the winning is won, but the game value that can be obtained during winning is almost constant for each winning type. Since this is the same as other conventional gaming machines, it has been difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game during the winning state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, a specific area is provided at a position where a game ball shot by a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball can reach. A first ball-entering means and a second ball-entering means are provided at a position where a game ball that reaches the specific area can be entered. A first privilege is granted by a first privilege imparting means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a first privilege is granted based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A second privilege different from the privilege of is granted. A first position where the variable means makes it possible for the game ball that has reached the specific area to enter the first ball entering means and makes it difficult to enter the second ball entering means, and makes it difficult to enter the first ball entering means. and a second position where the ball can be entered by the second ball entering means. While the variable means is changed to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the first condition, the variable means is moved to the second position by the variable control means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. is changed to

As a result, the ball entry means for allowing the game ball that has reached the specific area to enter can be changed according to the variable position of the variable means, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the variable position of the variable means. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means are arranged with a predetermined distance on the board surface, and the variable means is the first ball-entering means. and the second ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means are arranged with a predetermined distance on the board surface. A variable means is arranged between the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means.

Accordingly, there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified as compared with the case where the variable means are separately provided for the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the variable means includes the first position, the second position, and the third position where it is difficult to enter the ball into either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. , wherein the variable control means varies the variable means from the third position to the first position based on the establishment of the first condition, A gaming machine J3 characterized in that it is variable from the third position to the second position based on the establishment of two conditions.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between at least the first position, the second position, and the third position where it is difficult to enter the ball with either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. The variable means is varied from the third position to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the first condition, while the variable means is varied from the third position to the second position based on the establishment of the second condition. It is varied by the variable control means.

As a result, when neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the ball into either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. There is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that

In the gaming machine J3, the first ball entering means is provided in the first direction with respect to the specific area, and the second ball entering means is provided in the first direction with respect to the specific area. It is provided in a second direction different from the direction, and the first position is a position where the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is likely to be the first direction, The 2nd position is a position where the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area tends to be the second direction, and the 3rd position is the position that the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area is the first direction. A game machine J4 characterized by being a position that tends to be in a direction different from both the direction of and the second direction.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball-entering means is provided in a first direction with respect to the specific area, while the second ball-entering means is provided in a second direction different from the first direction with respect to the specific area. is provided. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the traveling direction of the game ball reaching the specific area tends to be the first direction, while when it is arranged at the second position, the game ball reaching the specific area The traveling direction of the ball is likely to be the second direction. On the other hand, when the variable means is arranged at the third position, the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area tends to be different from both the first direction and the second direction.

As a result, in the first direction and the second direction, the possibility that the game ball that has reached the specific area in a state where the first condition or the second condition is not established is low, so that the game ball moves from the specific area to the first direction. The configuration up to the ball-entering means and the configuration from the specific area to the second ball-entering means can be minimized. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be made compact.

In the gaming machine J4, the first ball entering means is configured to make it difficult for a game ball traveling in a direction other than the first direction from the specific area to enter, and the second ball entering means A gaming machine J5 characterized in that it is configured such that a game ball traveling in a traveling direction other than the second direction from the specific area is difficult to enter.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J4, the first ball entering means is configured to make it difficult for a game ball traveling in a direction other than the first direction from the specific area to enter. Since the second ball entering means is configured to make it difficult for a game ball traveling in a traveling direction other than the second direction from the specific area to enter, the game is played in a state where the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means.

In any one of game machines J1 to J5, the variable means comprises a first variable member capable of appearing and disappearing on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member. , the first position is an arrangement in which the first variable member protrudes forward with respect to the board surface in a front view and the second variable member is buried in the board surface; The first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member protrudes toward the front side of the board surface when viewed from the front. The second variable member is arranged to be buried in the board surface, and the first variable member can guide the game ball that has reached the specific area by protruding from the board surface to the first ball entering means. The second variable member protrudes from the board surface to form a flow path that can guide the game ball that has reached the specific area to the second ball entering means. A gaming machine J6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J-6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of appearing and retracting on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member. At the first position, the first variable member protrudes toward the front side of the board surface in a front view, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface. At the second position, the first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member protrudes forward from the board surface when viewed from the front. At the third position, the first variable member and the second variable member are buried in the board surface. The first variable member protrudes with respect to the board surface, thereby forming a channel capable of guiding the game ball that has reached the specific area to the first ball entering means. The second variable member protrudes with respect to the board surface, thereby forming a channel capable of guiding the game ball that has reached the specific area to the second ball entering means.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can easily identify the ball-entering means that can enter the ball according to the type of the protruding variable member.

In the gaming machine J6, the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means are arranged with a predetermined distance in the horizontal direction in a front view on the board surface, and the first ball-entering means , a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entering means side can be entered, and a game ball arriving from other directions is difficult to enter; The second ball-entering means is constructed so that game balls arriving from the direction of the first ball-entering means can be entered, and game balls arriving from other directions are difficult to enter. A gaming machine J7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means are arranged with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in front view on the board surface. The first ball-entering means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball-entering means can be entered, and a game ball arriving from other directions will be difficult to enter. The second ball-entering means is configured so that game balls arriving from the direction of the first ball-entering means can be entered, and game balls arriving from other directions are difficult to enter.

Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means when the variable means is arranged at the third position.

In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determining condition, and the variable means moving from the third position to the third position based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. and variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable to the first position or the second position a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J6 or J7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. The variable game execution means executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the third position to the first position or the second position for a predetermined number of times based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the result of discrimination by the discriminating means, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J8, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position a predetermined number of times during execution of the variable game. a game; and a second variable game in which the variable means is varied from the third position to the second position a predetermined number of times; The gaming machine J9 is characterized in that the first privilege is composed of a privilege more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable game in which the variable means is changed from the third position to the first position a predetermined number of times during execution of the variable game, and a variable means is the third position 1 type is determined by the type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a second variable game that is varied from the second position to the second position a predetermined number of times. The first privilege is composed of privileges that are more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

As a result, when the first variable game is executed, it is more advantageous to the player than when the second variable game is executed, so the game is performed while paying attention to the type of the variable game determined by the type determining means. can let Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J9, in the first variable game, the variable means is varied from the third position to the first position a first number of times, and in the second variable game, the variable means is the first A gaming machine J10 characterized in that it is changed from the 3rd position to the second position a second number of times smaller than the first number of times.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J9, in the first variable game, the variable means is varied from the third position to the first position the first number of times, while in the second variable game, the variable Since the means is changed from the third position to the second position by the second number of times smaller than the first number of times, when the first variable game is executed, the first privilege more advantageous than the second privilege is granted. In addition, the number of times the variable means is varied to the first position also increases. Therefore, there is an effect that the superiority of the first variable game can be further enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means are arranged with a predetermined distance in the horizontal direction in a front view on the board surface, and the variable The means is configured to be variable between the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means in the left-right direction in a front view, and the first position is such that the variable means is the first ball-entering means. The second position is a position where the variable means is close to the second ball entering means, and the third position is a position between the first position and the second position. A gaming machine J11 characterized by being in the middle position.

According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means are arranged with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction in the front view on the board surface. The variable means is configured to be variable between the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means in the left-right direction in front view. When the variable means is placed at the first position, the variable means approaches the first ball-entering means, while when the variable means is placed at the second position, the variable means approaches the second ball-entering means. When the variable means is placed in the third position, the variable means is placed between the first position and the second position.

As a result, the position can be switched by a relatively simple operation of moving the variable means left and right, so there is an effect that the variable operation of the variable means can be realized with a simple configuration.

In the gaming machine J11, the variable means forms a slope in which the left side slopes downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, and the right lateral slope slopes downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the front view. The first ball entering means allows a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball entering means side to enter, and makes it difficult for a game ball arriving from other directions to enter. The second ball entering means can enter a game ball arriving from the direction of the first ball entering means side, and a game ball arriving from another direction At the first position, the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the left side surface of the variable means is positioned on the side of the second ball entering means. The second position is such that the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the right side surface of the variable means can flow down from the direction to reach the first ball entering means. A gaming machine J12 characterized in that it can flow down from the direction of the ball-entering means so as to reach the second ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine J12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the left side surface of the variable means forms an inclination downward from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when viewed from the front, and the → side surface of the variable means forms an inclination downward from the upper left direction to the lower right direction when viewed from the front. . The first ball-entering means is configured so that a game ball arriving from the direction of the second ball-entering means can be entered, and a game ball arriving from other directions will be difficult to enter. The second ball-entering means is configured so that game balls arriving from the direction of the first ball-entering means can be entered, and game balls arriving from other directions are difficult to enter. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the left side surface of the variable means flows down so as to reach the first ball entering means from the direction of the second ball entering means side. It becomes possible. When the variable means is placed at the second position, the game ball that has reached the specific area due to the inclination formed by the right side surface of the variable means flows down from the direction of the first ball entering means to reach the second ball entering means. It becomes possible.

As a result, the game ball can enter both the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means simply by causing the game ball to flow down along the slope of the side surface of the variable means. can be simplified.

In the gaming machine J12, the third position is such that a distance equal to or larger than the width of one game ball is provided between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entering means, and the right end of the variable means is A game machine J13 characterized in that a distance equal to or larger than the width of one game ball is provided between the game machine J13 and the second ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine J13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J12, when the variable means is arranged at the third position, a width of one game ball is provided between the left end of the variable means and the first ball entering means. In addition, since there is a distance equal to or greater than the width of one game ball between the right end of the variable means and the second ball entering means, the variable means is placed at the third position. , the game ball can be more reliably prevented from entering the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means.

<Characteristics K group> (The period until the game ball that reaches the specific area enters the attacker's ball is varied by the direction of launch)
A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and a game ball shot in the first direction by the shooting means and in the second direction. A specific area provided at a position where the game ball that has reached the specific area can enter, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball that has reached the specific area can enter, and a game to the ball entry means A privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a ball, a first position at which the ball can be entered into the ball entering means, a position different from the first position, and the ball entering means. A variable means that can change at least a second position that allows a ball to be entered into the ball and a third position that makes it difficult to enter the ball into the ball-entering means, and based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, A first variable operation in which the variable means is varied from the third position to the first position for a predetermined period, and a second variable operation in which the variable means is varied from the third position to the second position for the predetermined period. and variable control means for controlling the variable means to be varied by any one of a plurality of variable operations including at least one, wherein when the variable means is variable to the first position, the first A game ball that is shot in one direction and reaches the variable means has a shorter period until it enters the ball entry means than a game ball that is shot in the second direction and reaches the variable means. The game machine K1 is characterized by being easy to become.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to win the game ball into the big winning hole, it is necessary to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the winning state ( Since the amount of a predetermined privilege that can be acquired is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will be like a task of simply continuing to shoot game balls in a fixed direction. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the winning state when the winning is won, but the game value that can be obtained during winning is almost constant for each winning type. Since this is the same as other conventional gaming machines, it has been difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game during the winning state.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the shooting means is configured to be capable of shooting game balls in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A specific area is provided at a position where a game ball shot in a first direction and a game ball shot in a second direction by the shooting means can reach. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball that reaches the specific area can be entered, and a prescribed privilege is imparted by the privilege imparting means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means. . A first position at which a ball can be entered into the ball entering means, a second position which is different from the first position and at which the ball can be entered into the ball entering means, and a ball is difficult to enter into the ball entering means. At least the variable means is configured to be variable with the third position. A first variable operation in which the variable means is varied from the third position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and a first variable operation in which the variable means is varied from the third position to the second position for a predetermined period of time. The variable control means controls the variable means such that the variable means is varied by any one of a plurality of variable operations including at least a second variable operation. In a state where the variable means is variable to the first position, a game ball that is shot in the first direction and reaches the variable means enters more than a game ball that is shot in the second direction and reaches the variable means. It is configured so that the period until the ball enters the means is likely to be shortened.

As a result, when the variable means is changed to the first position, a game ball is shot in the first direction to the player who wants to enter the game ball into the ball entering means in a short period of time. On the other hand, a player who does not want the game ball to immediately enter the ball-entering means can be made to select the game method of shooting the game ball in the second direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine K1, during the predetermined period, it is difficult for the game ball shot in the second direction to reach the variable means that is variable to the first position and enter the ball entering means. A game machine K2 characterized by a period of a length of

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, a game ball shot in the second direction reaches the variable means that is variable to the first position and enters the ball entry means for a predetermined period of time. Since it is composed of a period of a length that makes it difficult to hit the ball, when the variable means is changed to the first position, if the game ball is not shot in the first direction, the game ball is sent to the ball entering means. Since it becomes difficult to enter the ball, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting the timing of changing to the first position and shooting the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K2, when the variable means is variable to the second position, the game ball that is shot in the second direction and reaches the variable means is shot in the first direction and The period until the ball enters the ball entering means tends to be shorter than the game ball that reaches the variable means, and the game ball launched in the second direction is at the first position during the predetermined period. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the period is of a length that makes it difficult to reach the varying variable means and enter the ball into the ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in a state in which the variable means is variable to the second position, the game ball that is shot in the second direction and reaches the variable means is more likely than the game ball that is shot in the first direction and reaches the variable means. The period until the ball enters the ball entering means is likely to be shortened. The predetermined period consists of a length of time during which it becomes difficult for the game ball shot in the second direction to reach the variable means that is variable to the first position and enter the ball entering means. .

As a result, it is possible to realize a playability that allows the player to quickly determine the shooting direction in which the ball is likely to enter the ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines K1 to K3, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and the variable control means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. and variable game executing means for executing a variable game including at least the variable operation of the means.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines K1 to K3, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result. Since the variable game execution means executes a variable game including at least the variable operation of the variable means by the variable control means based on the above, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the result of determination by the determination means. .

In the gaming machine K4, when a game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of the variable game of 1, a first game advantageous to the player as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. A state is set, and when a game ball does not enter the ball entering means during execution of the variable game in 1, the game state after execution of the variable game is changed from the first game state. The game machine K5 is characterized by comprising game state setting means for setting a second game state disadvantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K4, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of one variable game, the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. While the first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means, when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of one variable game, the variable game is executed. Since the second game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state, is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end, attention is paid to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means. It is possible to play a game while the variable game is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the variable game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine K4 or K5, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable game in which the variable means is controlled by the first variable operation during execution of the variable game is selected as the first variable game. and the variable means determines a second variable game controlled by the second variable action at a second rate higher than the first rate. A game machine K6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K4 or K5, as the type of variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the variable means is controlled by the first variable operation during execution of the variable game. While the 1 variable game is determined by the variable game type determination means at the first rate, the second variable game in which the variable means is controlled by the second variable operation is the second rate higher than the first rate by the variable game type determination means Since it is determined at a ratio of 2, it is possible to make the player think that shooting the game ball in the second direction makes it easier to enter the ball into the ball entering means when the variable game is executed. . In other words, it is possible to provide the game property of predicting the shooting direction in which the ball is likely to enter by the ball-entering means based on the rate at which the game type is determined by the variable game-type determining means. has the effect of being able to

In a game machine K6, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and the variable ball entry means. a second privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered into the game ball, wherein the variable game execution means activates the variable ball entry means during execution of the variable game; The second state is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times according to the type of variable game, and the variable ball entering means is in the second state during the predetermined period. The game machine K7 is characterized in that the variable control means controls the variable means to perform the variable operation in the first variable operation or the second variable operation.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball entry means is configured to be variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. A specific privilege is given by the second privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. During the execution of the variable game, the variable game executing means controls the variable control means so that the variable ball entry means is varied from the second state to the first state by the number of times predetermined according to the type of the variable game. At the same time, the variable game executing means causes the variable control means to control the variable means so that the variable means performs a variable operation with the first variable operation or the second variable operation in a predetermined period of the period in which the variable ball entering means is in the second state. Therefore, even when the game ball cannot be entered into the ball entering means during execution of the variable game, an opportunity to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means is given. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player who was not able to enter the ball into the ball-entering means.

In the gaming machine K7, the first variable game has a larger number of times that the variable ball entering means is varied from the second state to the first state during one variable game than the second variable game. A gaming machine K8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, when the first variable game is played, the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state during one variable game rather than the second variable game. Since the number of times the game is played increases, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that the game will be the first variable game.

<Characteristic group L> (During the V-round, the direction in which the V-win is likely to be predicted and the game ball is shot)
A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and a game ball shot in the first direction by the shooting means and in the second direction. A specific area provided at a position where the game ball that has reached the specific area can enter, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball that has reached the specific area can enter, and a variable operation with a predetermined variable pattern. and a variable pattern set for the variable means, based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, a game ball that is launched in the second direction and reaches the specific area. A first variable pattern is determined in which a game ball launched in the first direction and reaching the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entering means, and a second condition different from the first condition is determined. Based on the establishment, the game ball launched in the second direction and reaching the specific area is more likely to enter the ball entering means than the game ball launched in the first direction and reaching the specific area. A variable pattern determining means for determining a second variable pattern that makes it easier to hit the ball; and based on whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied. A gaming machine L1 characterized by comprising a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect in a performance mode in which it is difficult to identify whether the game machine L1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to win the game ball into the big winning hole, it is necessary to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the winning state ( Since the amount of a predetermined privilege that can be acquired is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will be like a task of simply continuing to shoot game balls in a fixed direction. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the winning state when the winning is won, but the game value that can be obtained during winning is almost constant for each winning type. Since this is the same as other conventional gaming machines, it has been difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game during the winning state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the shooting means is configured to be capable of shooting game balls in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A specific area is provided at a position where a game ball shot in a first direction and a game ball shot in a second direction by the shooting means can reach. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that reaches the specific area can enter. A variable means is configured to be variably operable in a predetermined variable pattern. As a variable pattern to be set for the variable means, the variable pattern determination means determines that the game ball that has been shot in the second direction and reached the specific area based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition A first variable pattern is determined in which a game ball that is shot in a direction and reaches a specific area is more likely to enter the ball entering means, while a second condition different from the first condition is established. A second variable pattern is variable in which a game ball that is shot in the second direction and reaches the specific area is more likely to enter the ball-entering means than a game ball that is shot in the first direction and reaches the specific area. Determined by the pattern determining means. Based on the establishment of the first condition or the second condition, a specific performance execution means executes a specific performance in a performance mode in which it is difficult to recognize which of the first condition and the second condition has been established.

As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the variable means is varied according to the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern from the presentation mode. It is possible to realize the playability of shooting a game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the first variable pattern enables a game ball launched in the first direction to enter the ball entering means during a specific period after the first condition is established, and The game ball launched in the second direction during the specific period is difficult to enter the ball entering means, and the second variable pattern is the specific period after the second condition is established. A game ball launched in the first direction during the period becomes difficult to enter the ball entering means, and a game ball launched in the second direction during the specific period can enter the ball entering means. The game machine L2 is characterized in that the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect at least during the specific period.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first variable pattern is set, the game ball launched in the first direction during the specific period after the first condition is satisfied becomes the ball entering means, and the game ball enters the ball entering means during the specific period. It becomes difficult for the game ball shot in the second direction to enter the ball entering means. When the second variable pattern is set, the game ball launched in the first direction during the specific period after the second condition is satisfied becomes difficult to enter the ball entering means, and during the specific period A game ball shot in two directions can enter a ball entering means. A specific effect execution means executes a specific effect over at least a specific period.

As a result, it is possible to predict the direction in which it is easy to enter the ball, and to realize the game property of shooting the game ball in the predicted direction during a specific period, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the variable determined by the variable pattern determination means based on a specific determination result obtained by determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination by the determination means and variable game executing means for executing a variable game including at least the variable operation of the variable means in a pattern.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or 2, the variable pattern determination means determines a specific determination result based on determination by the determination means executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. Since the variable game including at least the variable operation of the variable means in the determined variable pattern is executed by the variable game execution means, the game is played in anticipation of a specific determination result each time determination is performed by the determination means. There is an effect that it is possible to perform

In the gaming machine L3, when a game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of the variable game of 1, a first game advantageous to the player as a game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. A state is set, and when a game ball does not enter the ball entering means during execution of the variable game in 1, the game state after execution of the variable game is changed from the first game state. A game machine L4 characterized by comprising game state setting means for setting a second game state disadvantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed. While a first game state advantageous to the player is set by the game state setting means, the variable game is not executed when the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during execution of the first variable game. Since the second game state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end, the game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of the variable game. It is possible to play a game by paying attention to whether or not to play. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved during execution of the variable game.

In the gaming machine L3 or L4, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is set to the variable means during execution of the variable game is selected as the first variable game. and determining a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means at a second rate higher than the first rate. A game machine L5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3 or L4, as the type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, the first variable pattern is set to the variable means during execution of the variable game. While the 1 variable game is determined by the variable game type determination means at the first rate, the second variable game in which the second variable pattern is set in the variable means is higher than the first rate by the variable game type determination means Since it is determined by the second ratio, it is possible to make the player think that it is easier to enter the ball into the ball entering means if the game ball is shot in the second direction when the variable game is executed. can. In other words, it is possible to provide the game property of predicting the shooting direction in which the ball is likely to enter by the ball-entering means based on the rate at which the game type is determined by the variable game-type determining means. has the effect of being able to

In a game machine L5, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and the variable ball entry means. a second privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered into the game ball, wherein the variable game execution means activates the variable ball entry means during execution of the variable game; The number of times predetermined according to the type of variable game, the variable operation to vary from the second state to the first state, and the variable means is varied according to the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means. A game machine L6 characterized in that it executes actions.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects of the game machine L5, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable ball entry means is configured to be variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. A specific privilege is given by the second privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means. During the execution of the variable game, a variable operation for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times according to the type of the variable game, and a variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means. A variable action in which the variable means is varied is executed by the variable game execution means.

As a result, even when the game ball cannot enter the ball entering means during execution of the variable game, the opportunity to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means is provided. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player who could not make the ball enter the ball.

In any of the game machines L1 to L6, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect. and information indicating whether the first condition or the second condition has been established based on the fact that the execution of the specific performance is avoided by the avoiding means. A game machine L7 characterized by comprising a notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the avoidance means prevents the specific effect executing means from executing the specific effect. Based on the avoidance of execution of the specific performance by the avoiding means, the information performance executing means executes the information performance for notifying the information indicating which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to specify the shooting direction in which the ball is likely to be entered by the ball-entering means by executing the notification effect, so that the game can be played in anticipation of the execution of the notification effect. effective.

<Feature M group> (Attackers who are likely to win a prize change depending on the movable position from the start to the end of the attacker's movement)
A game is played in a first ball entering means in which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means, a first position in which a game ball can enter the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the ball is difficult to enter, and the variable means is predetermined to change from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. and variable control means for controlling the period to vary, wherein the second ball-entering means controls the variable position according to the variable position until the variable means changes from the second position to the first position. The game machine M1 is characterized in that the ease with which a game ball reaches a variable means is variable.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to win the game ball into the big winning hole, it is necessary to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the winning state ( Since the amount of a predetermined privilege that can be acquired is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will be like a task of simply continuing to shoot game balls in a fixed direction. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the winning state when the winning is won, but the game value that can be obtained during winning is almost constant for each winning type. Since this is the same as other conventional gaming machines, it has been difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game during the winning state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, there are a first position where a game ball can enter the first ball entering means and a second position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means. The variable means is configured to be variable. The variable control means controls the variable means to vary from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. The ease with which a game ball reaching the variable means enters the second ball entering means varies according to the variable position during which the variable means changes from the second position to the first position.

As a result, depending on the variable position of the variable means, it is possible to change whether the ball is likely to enter the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Therefore, attention should be paid to the variable position of the variable means. You can play games by Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine M1, the second ball-entering means reaches the variable means while the variable means is variable within a specific range from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine M2 characterized in that a ball can be entered.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, the game ball that reaches the variable means while the variable means is variable in the specific range from the second position to the first position. can be entered into the second ball entering means, a game can be played by devising a game ball to reach the variable means while the variable means is varying the specific range. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine M2, the specific range is formed of a range that does not include at least the first position, and the second ball-entering means is configured to operate the variable means when the variable position of the variable means is outside the specific range. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is difficult for a game ball that has reached a point to enter.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M2, the specific range is configured to include at least the first position, and when the variable position of the variable means is outside the specific range, the variable means Since it becomes difficult for the game ball that has reached the second ball entry means to enter the second ball entry means, there is an effect that the timing of launching the game ball can be devised.

In any one of the game machines M1 to M3, the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means are arranged with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and the variable means is the second ball entering means. a first tilting member provided between the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means and forming an inclination capable of causing the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the first ball entering means is provided; , and a second inclined member forming an inclination that allows the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the second ball entering means is provided, and the first position is the A game ball that has reached the variable means is at a position where it becomes easier for the game ball to flow down the first inclined member and less likely to flow down the second inclined member. The gaming machine M4 is characterized in that it is located at a position where it is difficult for the first inclined member and the second inclined member to flow down.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M1 to M3, the following effects are produced. That is, the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means are arranged with a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. a first inclined member that forms an inclination that is provided between the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means and that allows the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the first ball entering means is provided; At least the variable means is constituted by a second tilting member forming a tilt capable of causing the game ball to flow down in the direction in which the second ball-entering means is provided. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, the game ball that reaches the variable means is likely to flow down the first inclined member and difficult to flow down the second inclined member, while the variable means is positioned at the second position. When arranged at the position, it becomes difficult for the game ball that has reached the variable means to flow down the first tilting member and the second tilting member.

Thereby, since the game ball can be caused to flow down to each ball entering means by the inclination formed by each inclined member, complicated control or the like for guiding the game ball to each ball entering means is not required. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified.

In the gaming machine M4, the variable means is configured to be capable of appearing and disappearing on the board surface, and the first position is the front side of the first inclined member and the first inclined member in a front view. and the second slanted member provided in the board are arranged to protrude forward in a front view with respect to the board surface, and the second position is the first slanted member and the second slanted member and are buried in the board surface.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine M4, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means is configured to be able to appear and disappear on the board surface. When the variable means is arranged at the first position, both the first inclined member and the second inclined member provided on the front side of the first inclined member in the front view are positioned on the front side in the front view of the board surface. It becomes the arrangement that protruded to

As a result, there is an effect that the ball entering means that can enter the ball can be varied by a simple control of causing the variable means to appear and retract.

In any one of the game machines M1 to M5, the variable pattern set for the variable means by the variable control means is a first variable pattern that tends to increase the number of times the second position is changed to the first position. and a second variable pattern in which the number of times of changing from the second position to the first position tends to be smaller than that of the first variable pattern. A gaming machine M6 characterized by:

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M1 to M5, the variable pattern set for the variable means by the variable control means has a large number of times of changing from the second position to the first position. A variable pattern determining means selects one variable from among a plurality of patterns including at least a first variable pattern that tends to change from a second position to a first position and a second variable pattern that tends to change from a second position to a first position less frequently than the first variable pattern. Since the pattern is determined, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means.

In the game machine M6, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a predetermined determination result of the determination by the determining means during one execution period. and variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is established a number of times.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M6, based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition results in a specific discrimination result, during one execution period Since a variable game in which a specific condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game executing means, a game can be played in anticipation of a specific decision result each time the decision is made by the decision means. , there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine M7, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a first variable game in which the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means when the specific condition is satisfied; a second variable game in which the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means when the specific condition is established; A gaming machine M8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M7, the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means as the type of variable game executed by the variable game executing means when a specific condition is established. The variable game type determination means selects one type from among a plurality of types including at least a first variable game and a second variable game in which a second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means when a specific condition is established. is determined, the number of times the ball is likely to enter the second ball-entering means varies according to the type of the variable game.

In the game machine M8, the game machine M9 is characterized in that the number of times the specific condition is established in the one variable game tends to be smaller in the first variable game than in the second variable game.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M8, in the first variable game, the number of times the specific condition is established in one variable game tends to be smaller than in the second variable game. In this case, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by the fact that the number of times the specific condition is satisfied is small.

<Features N Group> (During the electric sapo, it is easier to win more prize balls with an open pattern that makes it difficult to win an electric chew than an open pattern that makes it easy to win an electric chew.)
A ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, a privilege giving means for awarding a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and a game ball can enter the ball entry means. and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than the first position, and a predetermined first condition is established. , variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary according to a predetermined variable pattern; and a first variable pattern as the variable pattern controlled by the variable control means; a variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from among a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means; A game characterized in that while the variable means is controlled in a pattern, a second condition advantageous to the player is more likely to be established than while the variable means is controlled in the second variable pattern. Machine N1.

According to the gaming machine N1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means into which the game ball can enter. The variable means is varied between a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where a game ball enters the ball entering means more difficult than the first position. Based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, the variable control means controls the variable means to vary according to a predetermined variable pattern. A plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first variable pattern as the variable patterns controlled by the variable control means. One variable pattern is determined from the variable patterns by the variable pattern determining means. While the variable means is controlled by the first variable pattern, the second condition advantageous to the player is more likely to be satisfied than while the variable means is controlled by the second variable pattern.

As a result, the variable pattern expected by the player can be varied depending on whether priority is given to the ease with which the second condition is established or the ease with which the ball enters the ball-entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine N1, the first variable pattern is such that the number of times the variable means is varied to the first position is greater than the second variable pattern from the start to the end of one variable pattern. wherein the second variable pattern is the total period during which the variable means is varied to the first position from the start to the end of one variable pattern rather than the first variable pattern. The game machine N2 is characterized in that it is configured so that the length of the game machine N2 is long.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first variable pattern is configured such that the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position is greater than that of the second variable pattern from the start to the end of one variable pattern. The second variable pattern is configured such that the total period during which the variable means is varied to the first position from the start to the end of one variable pattern is longer than that of the first variable pattern.

Accordingly, it is possible to easily distinguish between the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern according to the number of times the pattern is changed to the first position.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, a game ball can be entered and the variable means reaches the variable means while the variable means is performing a variable operation within a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entering means provided at a position where the played game ball is easily guided by the variable means, and the second ball entering means is more than the predetermined benefit based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entering means. and a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball can enter a position where the game ball reaching the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is variably operated within a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entering means is provided. A second privilege, which is larger than a predetermined privilege, is given by a second privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means.

Thus, by setting the first variable pattern, it is possible to obtain more chances to obtain the second privilege, so that the game is played with a strong expectation that the first variable pattern will be set. can be done.

In the game machine N3, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area on the board can be entered, and the variable means variably operates within the predetermined range. When there is, the game ball that has flowed down is likely to be reflected to the specific area, and the specific area is the state in which at least the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position. The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that the area is difficult for a game ball that has flowed down to the variable means to reach.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area on the board surface can be entered. When the variable means is variably operating within a predetermined range, it becomes easier to reflect the game ball that has flowed down to the specific area. The specific area is configured so that it is difficult for a game ball that has flowed down to the variable means to reach the variable means in a state where the variable means is arranged at least at the first position or the second position.

As a result, the game can be played by contriving to make the game ball reach the variable means while the predetermined range is being variably operated, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is

In any one of the game machines N1 to N4, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means; a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of (2); and a second determination means capable of executing determination, wherein the variable control means determines the variable pattern when the first condition is satisfied that the determination by the second determination means results in a second determination result. A gaming machine N5 characterized in that the variable means is controlled to vary according to the variable pattern determined by the means.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines N1 to N4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first discrimination is executed by the first discriminating means based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and the game is played based on the first discriminating result in the discrimination by the first discriminating means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The second determination is performed by the second determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition that is at least different from the ball entering the ball entering means. The variable control means controls the variable means to vary according to the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means, when the first condition is established when the second determination means determines the second determination result.

As a result, since the first determination is executed by entering the ball into the ball entering means, the game ball enters the ball entering means while the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern. There is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the ball is entered.

In the gaming machine N5, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, a first privilege game in which a game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to a first game state, and the privilege The type of one privilege game is determined from among a plurality of at least a second privilege game in which the game state after execution of the game is completed is set to a second game state different from the first game state. and a privilege game type determining means, wherein the first game state is less likely to result in the second determination result in the second determination than the second game state. .

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game in which the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed is set to the first game state, and the second privilege game after the execution of the privilege game is completed. and a second privilege game set in a second game state different from the first game state. The first game state is configured such that the second determination result is less likely to result in the second determination than in the second game state.

As a result, there is an effect that a game can be played while paying attention to the type of privilege game determined by the privilege game type determining means.

In the gaming machine N6, the first variable pattern is set such that the number of times the variable means is varied to the first position is greater than the second variable pattern from the start to the end of one variable pattern. wherein the second variable pattern is the total period during which the variable means is varied to the first position from the start to the end of one variable pattern rather than the first variable pattern. is longer, and the first game state is the second variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determination means when the determination by the second determination means results in the second determination result. is higher than that in the second game state.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first variable pattern is configured such that the number of times the variable means is changed to the first position is greater than that of the second variable pattern from the start to the end of one variable pattern. In the first game state, the ratio of determination of the second variable pattern by the variable pattern determination means when the determination by the second determination means results in the second determination result is higher than in the second game state.

Thus, in the first game state, the game ball enters the ball entering means relatively frequently, so that the first discrimination can be executed efficiently. Also, when the first variable pattern is determined in the first game state, the second condition is likely to be established. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying more attention to the type of the variable pattern.

In the gaming machine N7, a game in which a game ball can be entered and the variable means reaches the variable means while the variable means is performing a variable operation within a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entry means provided at a position where the ball is easily guided by the variable means, and a second bonus which is larger than the predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. a second privilege granting means for granting a privilege of and provided at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter, and the first discrimination by the first discrimination means when the game ball enters and the first direction based on the fact that the second determination result is obtained in the second game state and the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means. a suggesting effect executing means for executing a second direction suggesting effect suggesting that the game ball be shot in a second direction different from the A gaming machine N8 characterized in that it is provided at a position where a ball can be entered.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball can enter a position where the game ball reaching the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is variably operated within a predetermined range between the first position and the second position. A second ball entering means is provided. A second privilege granting means grants a second privilege larger than a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A specific ball entry means is provided for executing the first determination by the first determination means when the game ball hits a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. Suggesting to shoot a game ball in a second direction different from the first direction based on the fact that the second determination result is obtained in the second game state and the first variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means. A second direction suggesting effect is executed by the suggesting effect executing means. A ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably give the player an opportunity to acquire the second privilege when the first variable pattern is determined.

<Feature O group> (Generates navigation in the direction of the electric sapo when the electric sapo is opened in an unfavorable pattern)
A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball, a ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball shot in a specific direction by the shooting means can enter, and the game ball enters the ball entering means. a first position at which a game ball can be entered into the ball entering means; and a game ball is more difficult to enter into the ball entering means than at the first position. variable means that can be varied to a second position, variable control means that controls the variable means to vary in a predetermined variable pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and its variable control means A plurality of variable patterns including at least a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable pattern as the variable patterns in which the variable means is controlled by A variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from among the variable patterns; A game machine O1 characterized by comprising an effect execution means capable of executing a suggested effect to suggest.

According to the gaming machine O1, the ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a specific direction by the game ball launch means can enter. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering means. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where the game ball enters the ball entering means more difficult than the first position. there is Based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, the variable control means controls the variable means to vary according to a predetermined variable pattern. A plurality of variable patterns in which the variable means is controlled by the variable control means include at least a first variable pattern and a second variable matching pattern that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable pattern. One variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means from among the variable patterns. At least while the variable control means is controlling the variable means in the first variable pattern, the effect execution means executes a suggestive effect suggesting the shooting of the game ball in a specific direction.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can be given the maximum opportunity to enter the game ball into the ball entering means.

In the gaming machine O1, a second ball entering means provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the specific direction can enter, and a game ball enters the second ball entering means. A second privilege giving means for giving a second privilege based on the fact that the ball is hit, a first game state in which the specific condition is likely to be satisfied based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, and a game state that is more likely than the first game state. game state setting means for setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the specific condition is difficult to be established; The game machine O2 is characterized in that the suggestive effect is executed based on the first variable pattern being determined by the variable pattern determination means in the set state.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the specific direction can enter. A second privilege is given by a second privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. From among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which a specific condition is likely to be established and a second game state in which a specific condition is more difficult to be established than the first game state, based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition. One game state is set by the game state setting means. Based on the determination of the first variable pattern by the variable pattern determining means in the state where the second game state is set, the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means.

As a result, it is possible to vary the shooting direction of the game ball according to the game state, so that there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of hitting different shooting directions of the game ball.

In the gaming machine O2, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result. a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the game machine O3.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, a specific determination result is obtained by determination by the determination means executed based on the game ball entering the ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Since the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the result, there is an effect that a specific determination result can be expected every time the determination is performed by the determination means.

In the gaming machine O3, the game state setting means sets a game state of 1 when the predetermined set condition is established when the end condition for execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is established. A game machine O4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O3, the satisfaction of the predetermined set condition that the privilege game execution termination condition by the privilege game execution means is met is established, and the game status setting means sets one game state. is set, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the game state set after the end of the privilege game.

In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the variable means, when varying a predetermined variable range from the second position to the first position, provides a number of bonuses greater than the predetermined privilege. 3. A gaming machine O5 characterized in that it forms a state in which a privilege is easily granted.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the variable means varies the predetermined variable range from the second position to the first position, a predetermined Since a state is formed in which the third score, which is more than the privilege of , is likely to be given, it is possible to play the game by devising to make the game ball reach the variable means while varying the predetermined variable range. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine O5, a position where a game ball can be entered and a game ball that reaches the variable means while the variable means is varying the predetermined movable range is easily guided by the variable means. a third ball entry means provided in the third ball entry means; game machine O6.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third variable means is provided at a position where the game ball reaching the variable means is easily guided by the variable means while the variable means is varying the predetermined movable range. . A third privilege is imparted by a third privilege imparting means based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the third ball entering means.

In the gaming machine O6, the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area on the board can be entered, and the variable means operates to vary the predetermined movable range. In this case, the falling game ball is likely to be reflected to the specific area, and the specific area is a state in which at least the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position. The game machine O7 is characterized in that it is a region in which the game ball that has flowed down to the variable means is difficult to reach.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has reached a specific area on the board surface can be entered. When the predetermined movable range is variably operated, the falling game ball is easily reflected to the specific area by the variable means. In the specific area, at least the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position, and the game ball that has flowed down to the variable means is arranged at the first position or the second position. It becomes difficult for the game ball that has flowed down to reach.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the path of the game ball, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic P group> (Two members can be moved independently with one drive source)
A first variable means variable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a second variable means variable between a third position and a fourth position different from the third position. and driving in a first direction with a specific reference position as a starting point, thereby varying the first variable means from the first position to the second position, and moving in the first direction with the specific reference position as a starting point. driving means for varying the second variable means from the third position to the fourth position by driving in a different second direction.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines include variable members such as opening/closing plates for opening and closing specific winning slots, which are operated by motors or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is one that can perform a wide variety of effects by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

As such a conventional gaming machine, for example, a plurality of large openings are provided that are opened when a prize is won in a lottery based on starting prizes, and a large opening that opens according to the type of winning and the number of rounds is provided. By switching, there are things that are trying to improve the interest in winning.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, as the number of variable members increases, the operation control of each variable member becomes more complicated. There was a fear that

On the other hand, according to the game machine P1, the first variable means is configured to be variable between a first position and a second position different from the first position. A second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position and a fourth position different from the third position. Starting from a specific reference position, the first variable means is varied from the first position to the second position by driving the driving means in the first direction. On the other hand, the second variable means is varied from the third position to the fourth position by driving the driving means in a second direction different from the first direction with a specific reference position as a starting point.

As a result, both the first variable means and the second variable means can be varied by the drive means, so there is an effect that the plurality of variable means can be varied more appropriately.

In the gaming machine P1, the drive means drives the first variable means in the second direction while the first variable means is variable to the second position, thereby moving the first variable means from the second position to the first position. position, and driving in the first direction while the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, thereby varying the second variable means from the fourth position to the third position. A game machine P2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the drive means is driven in the second direction while the first variable means is variable to the second position, the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position. Further, when the drive means is driven in the first direction while the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position.

As a result, the variable direction of each variable means can be switched simply by switching the driving direction of the driving means, so there is an effect that the structure of the driving means can be further simplified.

The gaming machine P2 includes a variable restraining means for restraining the second variable means from changing from the third position while the first variable means is changing from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine P3 characterized by:

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P2, while the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position, the second variable means can be varied from the third position. Since it is suppressed by the suppressing means, there is an effect that the plurality of variable means can be varied more appropriately.

In the gaming machine P3, second variable suppression means for suppressing variation of the first variable means from the first position while the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position. A gaming machine P4 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effects of the game machine P3, the first variable means is variable from the first position while the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position. Since it is suppressed by the two variable suppressing means, there is an effect that a plurality of variable means can be varied more appropriately.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P4, a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means are provided, and the first position is the It is a position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means than at the second position, and at the second position it is easier for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means than at the first position. The third position is a position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the fourth position, and the fourth position is the third position rather than the third position. 2. The gaming machine P5 is characterized in that the ball-entering means is at a position where a game ball can easily enter.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P1 to P4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first variable means is at the first position, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entering means than at the second position, while at the second position, the first ball entering is more difficult than the first position. A game ball can easily enter the means. When the second variable means is at the third position, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means than at the fourth position. 2. It becomes easy to enter a game ball into the ball entering means.

As a result, the ball-entering means that allows ball-entering is varied according to the variable positions of the first variable means and the second variable means, so that the game can be played while paying attention to the variable positions of the variable means. effective.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the driving means is composed of a motor capable of rotating in a first rotating direction and in a second rotating direction opposite to the first rotating direction. , wherein the first direction is the first rotation direction, and the second direction is the second rotation direction.

According to the game machine P6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P1 to P5, the following effects are produced. That is, the driving means is composed of a motor capable of rotating in a first rotating direction and in a second rotating direction opposite to the first rotating direction. The first direction is the first rotational direction and the second direction is the second rotational direction.

As a result, the movement of each variable means can be controlled simply by switching the rotation direction of one motor, so there is an effect that the configuration for varying each variable means can be simplified.

In the gaming machine P6, a first gear for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first variable means; a second gear for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second variable means; a first gear; and a third gear configured to mesh with the second gear and attached to the rotating shaft of the motor, wherein the first gear is configured so that the drive means is positioned at the specific reference position. while rotating in the first rotation direction with the third gear meshing with the third gear while rotating in the first rotation direction, and moving outside the first rotation range The second gear is configured so as not to mesh with the third gear while rotating, and the second gear rotates in the second rotation direction with the drive means starting from the specific reference position. meshing with the third gear while rotating through a second rotation range, and engaging with the third gear while rotating outside the second rotation range; The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that it is constructed so as not to mesh with each other.

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effects of the game machine P6, the following effects are produced. That is, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first variable means by the first gear. A driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second variable means by the second gear. A third gear attached to the rotating shaft of the motor is configured to mesh with the first gear and the second gear. While the drive means rotates in a first rotation direction starting from a specific reference position, the first gear and the third gear mesh while rotating through a first rotation range. The first gear is configured so that the first gear and the third gear do not mesh while rotating outside the first rotation range. While the drive means is rotating in a second rotation direction starting from a specific reference position, the second gear and the third gear are engaged while rotating through a second rotation range. The second gear is configured so that the second gear and the third gear do not mesh while rotating outside the second rotation range.

As a result, the first gear and the second gear can be driven only by one third gear attached to the rotating shaft of the motor, so that the configuration for varying each variable means can be simplified. has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines P1 to P7, the driving means drives the first variable means to the second position by driving the first variable means in the second direction while the first variable means is variable to the second position. position to the first position, and driving in the first direction while the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, thereby moving the second variable means from the fourth position to the fourth position. It is variable to three positions, and is a variable that suppresses the second variable means from varying from the third position while the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position. suppressing means; and second variable suppressing means for suppressing variation of the first variable means from the first position while the second variable means is varying from the fourth position to the third position. a second drive means capable of varying the first variable means between the first position and the second position regardless of the variable position of the second variable means; The variable means is variable by the second drive means while a predetermined specific condition is established, and is variable by the drive means while the specific condition is not established. Gaming machine P8.

According to the game machine P8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P1 to P7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the driving means is driven in the second direction while the first variable means is variable to the second position, the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position. Further, when the driving means is driven in the first direction while the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, the second variable means is variable from the fourth position to the third position. The variable suppressing means suppresses the second variable means from varying from the third position while the first variable means is varying from the second position to the first position. The second variable suppressing means suppresses the first variable means from being varied from the first position while the second variable means is being varied from the fourth position to the third position. The first variable means is varied between the first position and the second position by the second driving means regardless of the variable position of the second variable means. While the first variable means is varied by the second driving means while a predetermined specific condition is established, the first variable means is varied by the driving means while the specific condition is not established. be.

As a result, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in moving the first variable means can be further increased.

In the gaming machine P8, discrimination is performed based on establishment of a predetermined first discrimination condition between a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means. and the first variable means is variable from the first position to the second position for a predetermined period of time based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination means. variable control means for controlling such that a second determination condition is satisfied; a second determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition; variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the second variable means is varied from the third position to the fourth position a predetermined number of times based on the determination result of the first The position is a position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means than at the second position, and at the second position, a game ball enters the first ball entering means more than at the first position. It is a position where it is easy to enter a ball, the third position is a position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the fourth position, and the fourth position is the third position It is a position where the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entering means than the above, and the variable control means, when the first determination result is obtained during the execution of the variable game, the second drive When the first determination result is obtained while the variable game is not being executed, the first variable means is varied by the driving means. A game machine P9 characterized in that it is controlled so as to

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effects of the game machine P8, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination is performed by the first determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition. The variable control means controls the first variable means to be varied from the first position to the second position for a predetermined period based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the first determination means. Determination by the second determination means is executed based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, and a second determination result is obtained based on the determination by the second determination means. 2 A variable game in which the variable means is varied from the third position to the fourth position a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game executing means. When the first variable means is varied to the first position, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entering means than the second position, while when it is varied to the second position, it is more difficult than the first position. It becomes easier to enter the ball into the first ball entering means. When the second variable means is varied to the third position, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means than at the fourth position, while when the second variable means is varied to the fourth position, It becomes easier to enter the ball in the second ball entering means than in the third position. When the first determination result is obtained during execution of the variable game, while the variable control means controls the first variable means to be varied by the second drive means, while the variable game is not executed When the first determination result is obtained, the variable control means controls the first variable means to be variable by the drive means.

Accordingly, the driving means for varying each variable means can be switched depending on whether or not there is a possibility that the first variable means and the second variable means can be moved at the same time. There is an effect that it can be made movable.

<Features Q group> (There are variable patterns that can enter the ball regardless of the launch direction, and variable patterns that have different ball penetration rates depending on the launch direction.)
a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball at least at a first shooting intensity and a second shooting intensity different from the first shooting intensity; a ball means; a first position provided at a position at least reachable by a game ball fired at the first launch intensity and the second launch intensity, and allowing the ball to enter the ball entering means; A first variable means for setting a first variable pattern for the variable means on the basis of establishment of a predetermined first condition based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. variable pattern setting means; and second variable pattern setting for setting a second variable pattern different from the first variable pattern to the variable means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. and said first variable pattern includes a game ball that has reached said variable means from a first direction in which a game ball fired at said first firing intensity is likely to advance, and said second firing intensity. A game ball that has reached the variable means from a second direction in which the game ball launched in the step can easily enter the ball entering means, and the second variable pattern is the first variable pattern. A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that a game ball that has reached the variable means from at least the second direction is less likely to enter the ball entering means as compared with the variable pattern.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to win the game ball into the big winning hole, it is necessary to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the winning state ( Since the amount of a predetermined privilege that can be acquired is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will be like a task of simply continuing to shoot game balls in a fixed direction. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the winning state when the winning is won, but the game value that can be obtained during winning is almost constant for each winning type. Since this is the same as other conventional gaming machines, it has been difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game during the winning state.

On the other hand, the game machine Q1 has the following effects. That is, the shooting means is configured to shoot the game ball at least with a first shooting intensity and a second shooting intensity different from the first shooting intensity. The variable means has a first position where the game ball fired at the first firing intensity and the second firing intensity can reach at least a position that can be reached by the ball entering means, and a ball entering means is difficult to enter. It is configured to be variable between the second position and the second position. A first variable pattern is set for the variable means by the first variable pattern setting means based on establishment of a predetermined first condition. A second variable pattern different from the first variable pattern is set for the variable means by the second variable pattern setting means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. When the first variable pattern is set, the game ball that has reached the variable means from the first direction in which the game ball that has been shot with the first firing intensity is likely to travel, and the game ball that has been shot with the second firing intensity are separated. A game ball that has reached the variable means from the second direction in which it is easy to advance can enter the ball entering means. When the second variable pattern is set, a game ball reaching the variable means from the first direction is more likely to enter the ball-entering means than a game ball reaching the variable means from the second direction.

As a result, the launch intensity of the game ball can be varied depending on whether the first variable pattern is set or the second variable pattern is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of

In the gaming machine Q1, the ball-entering means comprises at least a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means. , the variable means has, as the first position, a first ball-entering position at which a game ball can enter the first ball-entering means, and a first ball-entering position at which a game ball can enter the second ball-entering means. The first variable pattern is a variable pattern in which the variable means is varied to the first ball-entering position for a first period, and the first ball-entering position is variable. The second variable pattern is a variable pattern in which the variable means is variable to the second ball-entering position for a second period different from the first period.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first position is variable between the first ball entering position where the game ball can enter the first ball entering means and the second ball entering position where the game ball can enter the second ball entering means. The means is variably configured. When the first variable pattern is set, the variable means is varied to the first pitch position for the first period, while when the second variable pattern is set, the variable means is different from the first period. During the second period, it is changed to the second ball entry position.

As a result, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation that the game ball will enter either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means.

In the gaming machine Q2, the second ball entry position is such that the game ball shot at the first firing intensity is more likely to be shot than the game ball shot at the second shooting intensity. The gaming machine Q3 is characterized in that the period from when the ball is entered to the first ball entering means tends to be shortened.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2, when the variable means is varied to the second ball entry position, the game ball is shot with the first shooting intensity rather than the game ball shot with the second shooting intensity. Since the game ball that is shot tends to shorten the period from when the game ball is shot until it enters the first ball entering means, when the variable means is changed to the second ball entering position. Secondly, there is an effect that the game ball can be shot at the first shot intensity to the player.

In the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, in a state where the variable means is arranged at the second ball entering position, the game ball that is shot with the first firing intensity and reaches the variable means is the second ball entering means. The period required for the ball to enter the ball tends to be shorter than the second period. The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that a period required for the game ball that has reached the variable means to enter the second ball entering means tends to be longer than the second period.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the state where the variable means is arranged at the second ball-entering position, the period required for the game ball that has been shot with the first firing intensity and has reached the variable means to enter the second ball-entering means is , while the period tends to be shorter than the second period, the period required for the game ball that has been launched with the second launch intensity and has reached the variable means to enter the second ball entering means is shorter than the second period. becomes longer.

Thereby, when the game ball is shot with the second shooting intensity in a state where the variable means is arranged at the second ball-entering position, the variable means is changed to the second position before the ball enters the second ball-entering means. Therefore, the game ball can be shot with the first shooting intensity. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q4, passing means provided at a position through which at least a game ball fired at the first firing intensity can pass; wherein the second variable pattern setting means sets the second variable pattern based on a specific determination result in the determination by the passage determining means. A gaming machine Q5 characterized by:

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q5, the passage means is provided at a position through which at least the game ball shot with the first shot intensity can pass. Predetermined discrimination is executed by the passage discriminating means based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means. A second variable pattern is set by the second variable pattern setting means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the passage determining means.

As a result, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation of a specific determination result in determination by the passage determination means.

In the game machine Q5, based on the establishment of the first set condition, a first game state is set in which the passage determination means determines with a first probability the specific determination result, and the first setting is performed. a game state setting means for setting a second game state that results in the specific determination result with a second probability higher than the first probability based on the establishment of a second set condition different from the condition; a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect to prompt the game ball to be shot with the first shooting intensity based on the setting of the second game state by the game state setting means. Gaming machine Q6.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the first set condition, the game state setting means sets a first game state in which a specific determination result is obtained with a first probability in determination by the passage determination means, while a first game state is set. Based on the establishment of a second set condition different from the first set condition, the game state setting means sets a second game state in which a specific determination result is obtained with a second probability higher than the first probability. be done. Based on the setting of the second game state by the game state setting means, the specific effect execution means executes a specific effect for prompting the game ball to be shot with the first shooting intensity.

As a result, when the second game state is set, a game method in which the ball is easily entered into the second ball-entering means can be played, so that the player can play the game efficiently. effective.

In any of the game machines Q2 to Q4, a determination means for performing determination based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means, and the determination by the determination means yields a first determination result. and variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied according to the first variable pattern for a predetermined number of times.

According to the game machine Q7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines Q2 to Q4, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. Based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means, the variable game execution means executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied in the first variable pattern a predetermined number of times.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation that the determination by the determination means will result in the first determination result.

In any one of game machines Q2 to Q4 and Q7, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of appearing and disappearing on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member. and the first ball-entering position is such that the first variable member protrudes forward from the board surface in a front view, and the second variable member is buried in the board surface; The ball-entering position is such that the first variable member is buried in the board surface and the second variable member protrudes toward the front side of the board surface in front view, and the second position is the second variable member. The first variable member and the second variable member are arranged to be buried in the board surface, and the first variable member protrudes with respect to the board surface to move the game ball that has reached the variable means to the first input. The second variable member constitutes a flow path that can be guided to the ball means, and the second variable member can guide the game ball that has reached the variable means to the second ball entering means by projecting from the board surface. A game machine Q8 characterized in that it constitutes a flow path.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q2 to Q4 and Q7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is composed of a first variable member capable of appearing and retracting on the board surface and a second variable member different from the first variable member. When the variable means is changed to the first ball-entering position, the first variable member protrudes forward with respect to the board surface and the second variable member is buried in the board surface. When the variable means is changed to the second ball-entering position, the first variable member is buried in the board surface, and the second variable member protrudes toward the front side of the board surface when viewed from the front. When the variable means is varied to the second position, the first variable member and the second variable member are buried in the board surface. The first variable member protrudes with respect to the board surface, thereby forming a channel capable of guiding the game ball that has reached the variable means to the first ball entering means. When the second variable member protrudes from the board surface, a flow path is formed that can guide the game ball that has reached the variable means to the second ball entering means.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can easily identify the ball-entering means that can enter the ball according to the type of the protruding variable member.

<Characteristic group R> (The degree of advantage varies depending on the release timing of the attacker and the electric chew)
a first ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter; a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means; a first position for allowing a game ball to enter the first ball entering means; A first variable means for changing to a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, a third position for allowing a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and the third position. A second variable means for varying between a fourth position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the position, and the first variable means are changed from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. a first variable control means for varying the first position for a first period; and a second variable means for varying the second period from the fourth position to the third position based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition. a state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position; and a state in which the first variable means is variable to the A state in which the second variable means is variable to the second position and the second variable means is variable to the third position; and a state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that the variable position state is one in which the degree of advantage for the player is different from each other.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to win the game ball into the big winning hole, it is necessary to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the winning state ( Since the amount of a predetermined privilege that can be acquired is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will be like a task of simply continuing to shoot game balls in a fixed direction. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the winning state when the winning is won, but the game value that can be obtained during winning is almost constant for each winning type. Since this is the same as other conventional gaming machines, it has been difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game during the winning state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, there are a first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entering means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The first variable means is configured to be variable. The second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position where the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. . Based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, the first variable means is varied from the second position to the first position by the first variable control means for a first period of time. The second variable means is varied from the fourth position to the third position for a second period of time by the second variable control means based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition. A state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and a state in which the first variable means is variable to the second position and the second variable means is variable to the third position , and the state in which the first variable means is varied to the first position and the second variable means is varied to the fourth position, the degree of advantage for the player is different.

As a result, the degree of advantage is varied by the combination of the variable positions of the first variable means and the second variable means, so there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the variable positions of the respective variable means.

In the game machine R1, the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is variable to the second position. and a state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, rather than a state in which the second variable means is variable to the third position. The game machine R2 is characterized in that the degree of advantage for the player is higher in the game machine R2.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1, the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position, and the first variable means is changed to the third position. The state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position is better than the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. Since the method increases the degree of advantage for the player, it has a novel game property that makes the player wish to avoid allowing both the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means to enter the ball. There is an effect of being able to provide

In the game machine R1 or R2, the state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position is the state in which the first variable means is changed to the second position. A game machine R3 characterized in that it is more difficult for a game ball to enter said second ball entering means than in a state in which said second variable means is changed to said third position.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1 or R2, the state in which the first variable means is varied to the first position and the second variable means is varied to the third position is the first variable means is changed to the second position, and the game ball is more difficult to enter the second ball entering means than in the state where the second variable means is changed to the third position, so that a novel operation can be realized. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the state in which the first variable means has been varied to the first position and the second variable means has been varied to the third position is 1 position, and the game ball is more difficult to enter the first ball entering means than in the state where the second variable means is changed to the fourth position. Machine R3.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines R1 to R3, the state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position is Since it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball-entering means than in the state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the fourth position, a novel operation is realized. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, first privilege granting means for granting a first privilege based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means. A gaming machine R4 characterized by comprising a second privilege awarding means for awarding a second privilege larger than the first privilege based on the entry of a game ball.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the first privilege is given by the first privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. A second privilege is given by a second privilege giving means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A second privilege granting means grants a second privilege larger than the first privilege based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the ball will be entered into the second ball entering means.

In the gaming machine R4, after the second variable control means has changed the second variable means to the third position, the number of game balls entering the second ball entering means is equal to or greater than a specific number. A gaming machine R5 comprising third variable control means for varying said second variable means to said fourth position based on said second period regardless of whether said second period has elapsed. .

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R4, the number of game balls entered into the second ball entering means after the second variable control means is varied to the third position by the second variable control means Since the second variable means is varied to the fourth position by the third variable control means based on the fact that the number becomes equal to or greater than the specific number, regardless of whether or not the second period has elapsed, the game ball can be prevented from excessively entering the second ball-entering means and giving the second privilege too much. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hole.

In the gaming machine R5, the gaming machine R6 is characterized in that the first period consists of a period of a length that allows a plurality of game balls to reach the first variable means.

According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R5, the length of the first period is set to a length that allows a plurality of game balls to reach the first variable means. When the first period elapses while a plurality of game balls reach the first variable means, a plurality of game balls can enter the second ball entering means at once. Therefore, since the second privilege can be continuously obtained in a short period of time, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine R5 or R6 comprising passing means through which a game ball can pass, and first determining means for performing a first determination based on the passing of a game ball through the passing means, wherein the first variable The control means is characterized in that the first variable means is varied to the first position when the first condition is satisfied that the determination by the first determination means has resulted in a first determination result. Gaming machine R7.

According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R5 or R6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first determination is performed by the first determining means based on the game ball passing through the passing means through which the game ball can pass. The first variable control means causes the first variable control means to change the first variable means to the first position when the first condition is met when the first determination means determines the first determination result.

As a result, the player can play the game while paying attention to the determination result by the first determination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R7, a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means, and a second determination result obtained by the determination by the second determination means. a variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the second variable means is changed to the third position by the second variable control means based on the fact that the second variable means is changed to the third position a predetermined number of times. Machine R8.

According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R8, the second discrimination is performed by the second discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entering means. Based on the result, the variable game execution means executes a variable game in which the second variable means is changed to the third position by the second variable control means for a predetermined number of times, so that the determination by the second determination means is performed. A game can be played while paying attention to the result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature S Group> (A sorting member provided between two winning openings sets the possible winning state of each winning opening regardless of the state of the other winning opening.)
a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball; a second ball-entering means provided at a predetermined distance from the first ball-entering means and capable of entering a game ball; A first position provided between a first ball entering means and the second ball entering means and at which a game ball can enter the first ball entering means, and a game ball more than the first position A game ball provided between a first variable means for changing to a second position where ball entry is difficult, the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means, and a game ball in the second ball entering means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the third position. A first variable control means for varying the position from the second position to the first position for a first period of time based on the establishment of one condition; a second variable control means for varying the position from the fourth position to the third position for a second period of time, wherein the first condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the second variable means. Gaming machine S1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a win state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to win the game ball into the big winning hole, it is necessary to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the winning state ( Since the amount of a predetermined privilege that can be acquired is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state will be like a task of simply continuing to shoot game balls in a fixed direction. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the winning state when the winning is won, but the game value that can be obtained during winning is almost constant for each winning type. Since this is the same as other conventional gaming machines, it has been difficult to increase the interest of the player in the game during the winning state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, the second ball entering means for allowing the game ball to enter is provided at a predetermined distance from the first ball entering means for allowing the game ball to enter. . Between the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, there is a first position where a game ball can be entered into the first ball entering means, and a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A first variable means is provided which is configured to be variable between the second position and the second position. In addition, between the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entering means, and a game ball entering from the third position A second variable means is provided which is configured to be variable to a difficult fourth position. The first variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a first period of time by the first variable control means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. The second variable means is varied from the fourth position to the third position for the second period by the second variable control means based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition. The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the second variable means.

As a result, the player can play the game while paying attention to the states of the two variable means provided between the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. It has the effect of being able to

A gaming machine S2 characterized in that in the gaming machine S1, the second condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, the second condition is a condition that can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means. can be varied regardless of the arrangement of , there is an effect that the control can be simplified.

In the game machine S1 or S2, a state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and a state in which the first variable means is variable to the second position and a state in which the second variable means is variable to the third position, and a state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. The gaming machine S3 is characterized in that the states are different degrees of advantage for the players.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the state in which the first variable means is varied to the first position and the second variable means is varied to the third position, and the first variable means is variable to the second position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. are configured so that the degrees of advantage for the player are different from each other, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the combination of the arrangement of the first variable means and the second variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine S3, the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position is the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position. And, the gaming machine S4 is characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player than the state in which the second variable means is varied to the third position.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S3, the state in which the first variable means is varied to the first position and the second variable means is varied to the fourth position is the first variable means. Both the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means are configured to be more advantageous to the player than the state in which the second variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player expects that the ball will not enter a state in which it is possible to enter the ball.

In the gaming machine S4, the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position is the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position. And, the gaming machine S5 is characterized in that it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entering means than in a state where the second variable means is changed to the fourth position.

According to the game machine S5, in addition to the effects of the game machine S4, the state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position is the same as the first variable means. Since it is configured to make it more difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entering means than in the state where the second variable means is variable to the fourth position, the second variable means is the second variable means. A game can be played in anticipation that the first condition will be satisfied while being varied to the four positions. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine S5, in a state in which the first variable means is varied to the first position and the second variable means is varied to the third position, the first variable means and the second variable means is a gaming machine S6, characterized in that it forms a holding area capable of holding a game ball that has reached it without flowing down.

According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S5, in a state in which the first variable means is varied to the first position, the reached game ball is caused to flow down by the first variable means and the second variable means. Since a holding area is formed in which the game ball can be held without being caught, the game ball can be entered depending on whether the first ball entering means becomes difficult to enter or the second ball entering means becomes difficult to enter. It is possible to vary the entering ball means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the operation of each variable means.

In the gaming machine S6, a first privilege granting means for granting a first privilege based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege less than the first privilege based on the fact that the game machine S7 has played the game.

According to the game machine S7, in addition to the effects of the game machine S6, the following effects are produced. Namely, while the first privilege granting means grants the first privilege based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, the game ball enters the second ball entering means. A second privilege less than the first privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means based on.

As a result, when the game ball is held in the holding area, there is an effect that the second variable means can be expected to change to the fourth position first.

In any one of gaming machines S1 to S7, passing means through which a game ball can pass, passage determining means for performing determination based on the passing of a game ball through the passing means, and the first ball entering means. Entering ball determining means for performing determination based on the entry of a game ball, and the second variable means performing the second variable based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the entering ball determining means. variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied to the third position a predetermined number of times by the control means, wherein the first variable control means determines a second determination result by determination by the passage determination means; A gaming machine S8, characterized in that the first variable means is varied to the first position based on the fact that the game machine S8 is set.

According to the game machine S8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines S1 to S7, the following effects are produced. That is, determination by the passage determining means is executed based on the game ball passing through the passing means through which the game ball can pass. Determination by the entering ball determination means is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means. The variable game execution means executes a variable game in which the second variable means is varied to the third position a predetermined number of times by the second variable means based on the first determination result in the determination by the entering ball determination means. be. The first variable control means causes the first variable control means to change the first variable means to the first position based on the second determination result in the determination by the passage determination means.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to the determination result by the passing determination means and the determination result by the entering ball determination means, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristics T group> (The sorting member provided between the two winning openings is moved so that the possible winning states do not overlap)
a first ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball; a second ball-entering means provided at a predetermined distance from the first ball-entering means and capable of entering a game ball; A first ball-entering means and a second ball-entering means are provided between the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means. Any one of a plurality of directions including at least a second traveling direction in which the ball is likely to enter the ball means and a third traveling direction in which the ball is difficult to enter either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Distributing means for distributing to the traveling direction, and the state of the distributing means is a first state in which the arriving game balls are more likely to be distributed in the first traveling direction than in the third traveling direction during the first period. and the state of the distributing means is set to the second state in which the arriving game ball is more likely to be distributed in the second traveling direction than in the third traveling direction during the second period. and a second state setting means for setting, wherein the sorting means is prevented from being set to the first state by the first state setting means at least while being set to the second state. A game machine T1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines include variable members such as opening/closing plates for opening and closing specific winning slots, which are operated by motors or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is one that can perform a wide variety of effects by operating a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

As such a conventional gaming machine, for example, a plurality of large openings are provided that are opened when a prize is won in a lottery based on starting prizes, and a large opening that opens according to the type of winning and the number of rounds is provided. By switching, there are things that are trying to improve the interest in winning.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, as the number of variable members increases, the operation control of each variable member becomes more complicated. There was a fear that

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, the second ball entering means for allowing the game ball to enter is provided at a predetermined distance from the first ball entering means for allowing the game ball to enter. there is Between the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, the traveling direction of the game ball that has reached the first ball entering means is easily entered into the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means A ball is distributed to any one of a plurality of directions including at least a second direction of movement in which it is easy to enter the ball and a third direction of movement in which it is difficult for the ball to enter either the first ball-entering means or the second ball-entering means. A dividing means is provided. While the state of the sorting means is set by the first state setting means to the second state in which the arriving game ball is more likely to be sorted in the second traveling direction than in the third traveling direction during the first period, During the second period, the second state setting means sets the second state in which the reaching game ball is easily distributed to the second traveling direction as well as the third traveling direction. At least while the sorting means is set to the second state, the first state setting means prevents the sorting means from being set to the first state.

Thereby, there is an effect that the state of the sorting means can be preferably set.

In the gaming machine T1, the allocating means is configured to suppress setting to the second state by the second state setting means at least while the first state is set. Game machine T2 to play.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effects of the game machine T1, the second state setting means can set the sorting means to the second state at least while the sorting means is set to the first state. Since it is suppressed, there is an effect that the state of the sorting means can be set more appropriately.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the sorting means includes a first position where a game ball can enter the first ball entering means and is difficult to enter the second ball entering means; A first variable member that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter the first ball entering means than the position, and a game ball can enter the second ball entering means, and the first entering means. At least a third position where ball entry into the ball means is difficult, and a second variable member that can be changed to a fourth position where ball entry is more difficult than the third position. The first state setting means changes the first variable member from the second position to the first position during the first period, and the second state setting means , the gaming machine T3, wherein the second variable member is varied from the fourth position to the third position during the second period.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sorting means is composed of at least the first variable member and the second variable member. The first variable member has a first position where a game ball can enter the first ball entering means and is difficult to enter the second ball entering means, and a position where the game ball enters the first ball entering means rather than the first position. It is configured to be variable between the second position where it is difficult to enter the ball. The second variable member has a third position where a game ball can enter the second ball entering means and is difficult to enter the first ball entering means, and a second position where the game ball enters the second ball entering means rather than the third position. It is configured to be variable between a fourth position where it is difficult to enter the ball. The first state setting means causes the first variable member to be varied from the second position to the first position during the first time period, while the second state setting means causes the second variable member to change during the second time period. is varied from the fourth position to the third position.

As a result, each state can be set by relatively simple control of varying the variable member corresponding to the state, so there is an effect that the processing load when switching the state can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines T1 to T3, the first ball entering means reaches the sorting means from the first direction at least when the sorting means is set to the first state. A game ball arriving from a second direction different from the first direction is easier to enter than a game ball. When two states are set, game balls arriving from the first direction are easier to enter than game balls reaching the sorting means from the second direction. A gaming machine T4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least when the sorting means is set to the first state, the game ball that has reached the sorting means from the first direction has reached from the second direction different from the first direction. The first ball entering means is configured so that the game ball is easier to enter. Further, at least when the sorting means is set to the second state, the second state is set so that the game ball arriving from the first direction is easier to enter than the game ball arriving from the second direction. A ball entry means is configured.

Thus, according to the state of the distribution means, the player can adjust the direction of the game ball when it reaches the distribution means so that the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means according to the state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine T4, the sorting means has a length of time from the first period until the game ball arriving from the second direction is sorted in the first advancing direction and reaches the first ball entering means. Also, the length until the game ball arriving from the first direction is distributed in the second traveling direction and reaches the second ball entering means becomes longer than the second period The game machine T5 is characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the game machine T5, in addition to the effects of the game machine T4, the length of time until the game ball arriving from the second direction is distributed in the first traveling direction and reaches the first ball entering means is the first period. and the length until the game ball arriving from the first direction is distributed in the second traveling direction and reaches the second ball entering means is likely to be longer than the second period. Since the distribution means is configured in the first state, when the game ball reaches the distribution means from the second direction in the first state, and when the game ball reaches the distribution means from the first direction in the second state Then, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter each ball entering means. Therefore, since the direction in which the game ball reaches the sorting means can be seriously adjusted for the player according to the state of the sorting means, the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is

In a game machine T5, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege game execution for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. means, and as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. and a type determining means for determining a type, wherein the first state setting means sets the sorting means to the first state based on the fact that the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means. wherein the second state setting means sets the sorting means to the second state based on the second privilege game being determined by the type determining means. Game machine T6.

According to the game machine T6, in addition to the effects of the game machine T5, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. As the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game executing means, one category is selected by the category determining means from among a plurality of categories including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. is determined. Based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determining means, the sorting means is set to the first state by the first state setting means. Based on the fact that the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the distribution means is set to the second state by the second state setting means.

As a result, it is possible to change the arrival direction of the game ball to the distribution means for allowing the game ball to enter one of the ball entry means according to the type of the privilege game. It is possible to realize a game property in which a game is played by selecting an appropriate arrival direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T6, a game ball enters either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means during the execution of the privilege game as a game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. Based on this, a first game state advantageous to the player is set, and no game ball enters either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means during execution of the privilege game. A game machine T7 characterized by comprising a game state setting means for setting a second game state more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state based on the fact that the game machine T7.

According to the game machine T7, in addition to the effects of the game machine T6, the first game state advantageous to the player is set by making the game ball enter the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Therefore, when a privilege game is executed, the state set for the sorting means can be more seriously predicted, and the game can be played so as to achieve the corresponding arrival direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine T6 or T7, comprising an operating means operable by a player, and a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area with a shooting intensity corresponding to the content of operation of the operating means, wherein the shooting means The period during which the shot game ball reaches the sorting means from the first direction and enters the first ball-entering means tends to be shorter than the first period. The period during which the game ball shot by the shooting means reaches the sorting means from the second direction and enters the second ball-entering means is longer than the second period. The game machine T8 is characterized in that the length of the game machine T8 tends to be shortened.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine T6 or T7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is shot into the game area by the shooting means with a shooting intensity corresponding to the operation contents of the operating means that the player can operate. The period during which the game ball shot by the shooting means reaches the sorting means from the first direction and enters the first ball-entering means tends to be shorter than the first period. The period during which the game ball shot by the shooting means reaches the sorting means from the second direction and enters the second ball-entering means tends to be shorter than the second period.

Thereby, when the game ball is launched after the distribution means is set to the first state or the second state, the game ball enters the corresponding ball entering means regardless of the direction in which the game ball reaches the distribution means. Since the ball becomes impossible, it is possible to realize the playability of selecting the direction in which the game ball reaches the sorting means before setting to the first state or the second state and shooting the game ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, In any one of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q8, R1 to R8, S1 to S8, and T1 to T8, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Game machine Z1. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, In any one of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q8, R1 to R8, S1 to S8, and T1 to T8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Machine Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I8, J1 to J13, K1 to K8, L1 to L7, In any of M1 to M9, N1 to N8, O1 to O7, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q8, R1 to R8, S1 to S8, and T1 to T8, the gaming machine combines a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being a game machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, during the winning state, there are cases where the game ball is just continuously shot in a fixed direction aiming at the big winning hole. There is a problem that it is difficult to increase interest in games.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Thought 1 is provided with a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, separated from the first ball entering means by a predetermined distance, and A game ball is provided between a second ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means, and a game ball can enter the first ball entering means. and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position, the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means. A second position provided between and variable between a third position where a game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means and a fourth position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. variable means; first variable control means for varying the first variable means from the second position to the first position for a first period of time based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition; second variable control means for varying the means from the fourth position to the third position for a second period of time based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition, wherein the first condition corresponds to the second This can be established regardless of the arrangement of the variable means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the second condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position. a state in which the first variable means is variable to the second position and the second variable means is variable to the third position; and a state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position; Moreover, the state in which the second variable means is variable to the fourth position is different in the degree of advantage for the player.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, wherein the state in which the first variable means is varied to the first position and the second variable means is varied to the fourth position is , the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, which is more advantageous for the player.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, wherein the state in which the first variable means is changed to the first position and the second variable means is changed to the third position is A game ball is more difficult to enter into the first ball entering means than in a state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. be.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the first ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, and the first ball entering means are provided at a predetermined distance from the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters. A first ball-entering means provided between the second ball-entering means, the first ball-entering means, and the second ball-entering means, and allowing a game ball to enter the first ball-entering means. and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means. and second variable means for changing between a third position where a game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means and a fourth position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position; first variable control means for varying the first variable means from the second position to the first position for a first period of time based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition; second variable control means for varying the position from the fourth position to the third position for a second period of time based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition, wherein the first condition is the arrangement of the second variable means. It can be established regardless of
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the second condition can be satisfied regardless of the arrangement of the first variable means. It suffices to vary the means and the second variable means irrespective of their mutual arrangement, which has the effect of simplifying the control.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, the first variable means can be varied to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, the first variable means is variable to the second position and the second variable means is variable to the third position, and the first variable means is variable to the third position. Since the degree of advantage for the player is different from the state in which the first position is changed and the second variable means is changed to the fourth position, the arrangement of the first variable means and the second variable means A game can be played by paying attention to the combination of . Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, the first variable means can be changed to the first position, and the second variable means can be changed to the second position. The state in which the four positions are varied is more advantageous for the player than the state in which the first variable means is varied to the first position and the second variable means is varied to the third position. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player expects that both the ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means will not be in a state where the ball can be entered.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, the first variable means is variable to the first position, and the second variable means is variable to the second position. In the state in which the three positions are varied, the game ball enters the first ball entering means more than the state in which the first variable means is variable to the first position and the second variable means is variable to the fourth position. Since it becomes difficult to enter the ball, the game can be played in anticipation that the first condition will be satisfied while the second variable means is being varied to the fourth position. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
111 payout control device (first privilege granting means, second privilege granting means)
650La left specific winning port (first ball entry means, second ball entry means)
650Ra right specific winning port (first ball entry means, second ball entry means)
650Lb, 650Rb movable members (variable means, first variable member, second variable member)
658 rotating member (variable means)
S1021 variable control means

Claims (1)

a launching means capable of launching a game ball;
a specific area reachable by the game ball fired by the firing means;
A first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball that has reached the specific area can be entered, and a second ball entry means;
a first privilege granting means for granting a first privilege based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means;
a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means;
a first position where the game ball that has reached the specific area can enter the first ball entering means and is difficult to enter the second ball entering means; and a variable means that can be changed at least to a second position where the ball can be entered by the second ball entering means;
variable control means for varying the variable means to the first position based on the establishment of a first condition and to the second position based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition; with
The variable means is composed of one variable member,
A game ball that reaches the specific area in a predetermined game state is configured to be controllable so that it is difficult to enter either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means ,
The first position is a position where the game ball can be guided in the direction of the first ball entering means by flowing down the reached game ball in the first direction,
The second position is a position where the game ball can be guided in the direction of the second ball entering means by causing the game ball that has reached it to flow down in a second direction different from the first direction,
The variable member is configured to have at least a first surface and a second surface different from the first surface,
The first position is a position where the first surface constitutes at least a part of a path capable of guiding a game ball in the direction of the first ball entering means, and the game ball travels to the second surface. It is a position where contact is difficult,
The second position is a position where the second surface constitutes at least a part of a path capable of guiding a game ball in the direction of the second ball entering means, and the game ball travels to the first surface. A game machine characterized by being in a position where contact is difficult .

Images